290920150QGEI0QAAnnexure documentofEIA PDF

FINAL REPORT AFTER PUBLIC HEARING
ENVIRONMENTAL IMAPCT ASSESSMENT

(EIA) REPORT
For
Proposed Expansion of Butibori Industrial Area
(BIA- Phase II),
Tehsil -Hingna, District- Nagpur,
State- Maharashtra.
Project Proponent
Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation (MIDC),
Nagpur
Environmental Consultants
Building Environment (India) Pvt. Ltd

Sai Sangam, Office No. 603, Plot No.85,
Sector-15, CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai-400 614
&
Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd.

Head office: 60, Bajiprabhu Nagar,
Nagpur-440033
September 2015
EIA for Proposed Expansion of Butibori Industrial Area (BIA – Phase II), Tehsil Hingna,
District Nagpur, State Maharashtra.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation (MIDC), Nagpur, established in 1992 under MID act 1961
as a premier industrial infrastructure development agency of Government of Maharashtra. The main
objective of MIDC is to setup industrial area for planned and systematic industrial development.
Accordingly, MIDC is developed at Nagpur (Butibori area) which is 25 km from Nagpur in the year 1992.
The total area of existing Butibori MIDC is 2428.14 hectares which covers 16 villages having 2500 +
industrial plots have been carved out, out of which 2000+ industrial plots have been allotted. To encourage
the entrepreneurs, MIDC has constructed 46 work sheds. This industrial estate comprising IT Park,
Apparel Park, and Food Park are developed in the area, remaining area is allotted for other categories of
Industries. MIDC has developed TSDF site for collection and disposal of hazardous waste in an area of
29.7 ha with design capacity to accept 60,000 tons per annum for 20 years. At present only 10,000 tons
per annum waste is received.
Need and Justification of the Project
Need of project
Existing Butibori industrial estate was occupied to the extent of 75%, hence in 2006, MIDC planned for the
expansion of existing Butibori MIDC. The expansion of Butibori industrial estate will offer plots to large,
medium and small industrial units including commercial plots. To meet demand of industrial estates and
more industry to come, MIDC, Nagpur has proposed to enhance the existing Butibori industrial area in an
area of 275.58 Ha.
Justification of project
MIDC, Nagpur has proposed to expand its existing Butibori industrial area, Tehsil Hingna, District
Nagpur, Maharashtra.
Development of industrial area will be according to MID Act. The existing Butibori MIDC area is fully
developed and occupied by various industries and for further development there is no space left for the
industries likely to come. Hence, there is a need for expansion industrial area to be developed for
upcoming prospective industries for overall economic growth of the state as a whole. The selection of site
is carried out considering the environmental features. Three sites were selected and the comparative
statement with respect to environmental features are considered and the one site (site one) is selected
considering the advantages of all environmental features. The details regarding site selection are given in
EIA report Chapter-5.
1.1 PROJECT LOCATION
MIDC, has proposed expansion of existing Butibori industrial area incorporating area from the villages
Mandva and Bhansuli, Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, State Maharashtra. The site is situated at
Latitude 20056'18.60"N and Longitude 78055'1.24"E.
1.2 SALIENT FEATURES OF THE PROJECT
1.2.1 Regulatory Framework
According to the EIA Notification 2006 and its subsequent amendments, the proposed project comes
under the project activity of 7 (c) & 8 (a), Industrial estate/parks/complexes/area, export processing
zone (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech Park, Leather Complexes & Building and
Construction projects under Category ‘A’ (special condition apply) and is located at Butibori Industrial
Area, Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, State Maharashtra. MIDC, Nagpur, has therefore initiated the
process of environmental clearance. Accordingly MIDC retained M/s Building Environmental (India)
Pvt. Ltd., Belapur, Navi Mumbai being a QCI/NABET accredited consulting organization and
Executive Summary ES-1

Anacon Laboratories Private Limited, Nagpur to carry out EIA studies for getting Environmental
clearance for this particular project.
1.2.2 Size of the Project
The details regarding proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori industrial area (BIA phase-II) are shown
below:
Total Land Area 275.58 Ha
Total area under plots 180.11Ha
Area under roads, open spaces of Hillock,
85.53 Ha
nallhah
No. of buildings/sheds proposed 300-350 approx
Maximum permissible height 50 m, however it will be
Maximum height of building
allowed as per DCR
Area of amenity space 11.94 Ha
Nos. of phases for project execution Single Phase
2230 KLD wastewater expected to be generated from
Wastewater treatment / Proposed CETP
proposed expansion Large and Medium Industries will
capacity
comply MoEF/SEAA EC conditions
Residential population, Industrial + visitors population:
Expected nos. of Industrial/ residents / users
15000
1.2.3 Cost of the Project

Total project cost for expansion of existing Butibori industrial area is estimated to be 7000 lakh including
land & iinfrastructure.
2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1 PROPOSED DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES
Details of CETP
CETP is proposed (2.0 MLD) for the treatment of effluent generation from the industries that will be
established in the proposed developed areas. However, zero liquid discharge (ZLD) norms shall be
enforced on the industries to avoid any discharges from the industries.
Treatment Scheme
The CETP will be designed as a battery of four streams and each stream shall be capable to handle
additional 33% load in case of exigencies. The piping shall be designed to handle such additional
hydraulic load while the aeration grid shall be designed to provide additional 33% oxygenation as and
when required. Further, the collection system has a network of control valves with flow meter on
discharge line of each industry and if required, the flow from each unit can be reduced or staggered
to limit the influent to the CETP. The flow control system shall be based on SCADA and can be
implemented in a very short time from the CETP control room. Moreover on noticing the upset in the
quality of final treated effluent it will be diverted to equalization tank instead of the final discharge
during the short duration of the upset. Due to such a provision, providing large capacity guard pond
can be avoided.

(A) Preliminary Treatment

The untreated influent will reach the CETP through gravity main. The gravity main will discharge the
untreated influent to mechanical fine screen (MFS) at about 8 m below ground level. The MFS will be
used to remove floating and suspended matters larger than 8 – 10 mm in size in order to protect
subsequent equipment. The screen shall be either bar rack or perforated plate with a scrapper
mechanism or screw type as determine best during detail engineering. The post-screened
wastewater will flow under gravity to wet sump of the pumping station, and then pumped out to CETP
treatment units.
(B) Primary Treatment
The equalized effluent shall be pumped to primary physico-chemical treatment system, again
designed as battery of four systems. This treatment would include coagulation, flocculation and
gravity settling to remove suspended and colloidal solids.
(C) Biological Treatment
The clarified supernatant will overflow by gravity to the advanced biological treatment system. The
proposed bio treatment configuration shall be latest international technology based on Completely
Mixed Extended Aeration Suspended Growth Activated Sludge System, which is most rugged and
efficient system compared to other systems such as lagoons, bio-towers fluidized bed or moving bed
reactors, etc. While conventional system with a well-designed aeration tank, large secondary clarifier
and activated sludge recycle pumps can be employed to provide the desired performance.
Conventional plants are prone to maintenance due to moving parts such as sludge scrapper and
recycle pumps being in contact with corrosive effluent.
2.3 INFRASTRUCTURE AVAILABILITY
Amenities areas
5% of the total area of land so sub-divided, shall be reserved for “Amenity Area”. Following uses shall
be permissible in the land reserved for amenity area: MIDC officers, Local area officers, Post Officers,
Telephone Exchange, Fire Stations, Police Stations/Chowkies, Electric sub-station, water supply
works, drainage works, common facility centre/recreation centre, Industries”. Association officers,
schools/colleges, Educational institutions, Training centre, Pollution Control Laboratories, Sulabh
Shauchalaya, informal shopping, stall sites, plots for PAP’s, communication centers, milk booths, and
such other users as may be permitted by MIDC.
Roads
Peripheral roads: Peripheral network of the roads for the scheme area shall be retained as per
development plan/nodal plan/ zonal plan as per MRTP act 1966 for industrial commercial and residential
zones as shown below:
Provision of road in industrial and commercial zones.
Length of road Minimum width in metropolitan region as Minimum width, in other areas
notified of state Govt. under MRTP act 1966
Up to 150 m 15 m 12 m
Above 150 m 20 m or more as may be required by the projected 15 m
traffic
Provision of road in Residential Zone

Length of road Minimum width in metropolitan region as Minimum width, in order

modified by state Govt. Under MRTP act 1966 areas

Up to 75 m 6m 6m
75 m to 150 m 10 m 10 m
151 m to 300 m 12 m 10 m
Above 300 m 15 m as may be required by the proposed traffic 12 m
Parking area
 Car parking and loading & unloading
Parking area for different vehicular modes and number of car spaces to be provided for various land uses
shall be governed as per the Table 1 given below:
TABLE 1
SIZE OF PARKING FOR DIFFERENT VEHICULAR MODES
Sr. No. Type of mode Size of parking bay
1. Car 2.50 m x 5.00 m
2. Scooter 2.50 m x 1.20 m
3. Bicycle 2.00 m x 0.70 m
4. Truck 3.75 m x 10.00 m
5. Trailer Truck 5.00 m x 20.00 m
Fire fighting
 Fire protection and life safety regulations
i. For plots up to 1000 m2 having non hazardous activities & buildings below 15 m height from any
fire officer, duly authorized by the CEO, who shall examine the building proposed as per the
guidelines and checklist given by fire department of MIDC.
ii. For all other buildings from Chief Fire Officer of MIDC.
 Fixed firefighting installation
All buildings depending upon the occupancy use shall be protected by wet riser, wet riser cum down
comer automatic sprinkler installation, high pressure water spray or foam generating system etc.
2.4 DETAILS ABOUT RESOURCES
Land requirement
Total land requirement for the proposed expansion of Butibori industrial area (BIA - II) is 275.58 ha. As on
today, whole land is under the possession of MIDC. There will not be any dispute for land possession.
Land break-up is presented in Table 2.
TABLE 2
LAND BREAK-UP
Sr. No. Description Area (ha)
1 Area Under Plots 180.11
2 Area Under Road, open spaces and Hill parts & nalhah 83.53
3 Area of Amenity space 11.94
Total Area 275.58

Power requirement
Power requirement during construction phase will be 50 MW. Power supply will be from Maharashtra
State Electricity Distribution Co. Ltd MSEDCL and MSETCL.
Emergency power (Backup source)
Backup source of DG sets are proposed in case of power failure. CPCB approved 4 DG sets ranging
from 50-500 KVA will be provided.
Raw material availability

Raw materials required like sand, bricks, and stone during construction of road, it will be procured from
local market near MIDC at Butibori and Nagpur.
Water availability and requirement
Total water requirement for the proposed expansion of Butibori MIDC industrial area is estimated to
be 7 MLD (6890 KLD) during operation phase which will be sourced from Wadgaon Rama dam. The
water works is existing on Rama dam. Total capacity of Rama dam is 1300 MLD. The existing water
works capacity is 61 MLD (intake well). The existing requirement is 45 MLD and remaining 16 MLD
will be used for phase II. No ground water will be used for proposed expansion. Fresh water
requirement details are presented in Table 3.
Storage: 24 hours storage will be made available and it will be obligatory by MIDC. The storage will
be in a storage tank. One third of the total water requirement will be collected in the storage tank
constructed in 100 X 100 meter capacity area. Apart from this, overhead tank of capacity 500 m 3 is
being constructed for proposed expansion. The distribution network will be as follows:
Rama dam – WTP – Sump – Pipeline – ESR – Distribution
TABLE 3
WATER REQUIREMENT
Sr. Particulars Water requirement Wastewater Generation
3
No. (m /day) (m3/day)
1 Process 2272 1333
2 Cooling water 3445 345
3 Green belt & Plantation 345 -
4 Fire fighting 138 -
5 Domestic 690 552
Total 6890 2230
Wastewater generation
The wastewater generation from proposed expansion industrial area is estimated to be 2230 m3/d
(Table 3) and the domestic generation will be 552 m3/day from proposed development. The treated
effluent from the common effluent treatment plant will be used on site for landscaping and flushing
purposes. However, it is planned to use treated effluent for HRTS. The HRTS that will be developed
in 35 ha of land available with MIDC at in a lower contour in phase wise. Apart from this, rainwater
harvesting will be carried out within the site for artificial recharge of groundwater. The wastewater
collection system will be close conduit system (pipeline system) which will be corrosion and chemical
resistant pipeline. There will be intermittent inspection, collection chambers and pumping system if
required. The pipeline network for the collection of wastewater from individual industries to CETP will
be designed by competent consultants. This will be developed by MIDC.

The domestic water requirement is estimated to be 690 m3/d. The domestic waste generation will be 552
m3/d. For disposal of domestic waste, individual industries will make provision for sending it to septic tank/
soak pit. There will not be any disposal of domestic waste into nearby water body. However provision will
be made by individual industries to use treated domestic waste for plantation. MIDC will check this and
inform to MPCB regarding any ambiguity in the disposal of domestic waste. MIDC will insist on the zero
discharge policy. So there will not be any discharge in any aquatic system.
Manpower requirement
The development will generate direct and indirect employment 15000 together.
3.0 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT
3.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT
Meteorology
Meteorological data was collected at the site during the winter season of 2014-2015 and is
summarized in Table 4.
TABLE 4
SUMMARY OF MICRO-METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS AT SITE
Month Temperature (0C) Relative Humidity (%) Rainfall (mm)
Min Max Min Max
December 2014 7 32 19 91 4.91
January 2015 7 30 16 97 4.06
February 2015 9 36 11 87 6.10
Range 7-36 11 – 97 4.06-6.10
Wind Speed/ Directions

The wind speed and direction was collected and presented in the Table 5.
TABLE 5
SUMMARY OF SITE SPECIFIC WIND PATTERN
Details Wind Direction
First Predominant Wind Direction East (14.06 %)
Second Predominant Wind Direction NE (8.82 %)
Calm conditions (%) 23.32
Source: Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd., Nagpur
Baseline data
Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at 12 locations.
PM10: PM10 concentrations ranged from 30.0-64.8 g/m3 in the study area. The maximum concentration
of 64.3 g/m3 was recorded at Khaprii village (AAQ5) and minimum concentration 30.0 g/m3 was
observed at Dongargaon (AAQ3). High concentration was due to dust emission due to vehicular traffic.
PM2.5: In the study area, PM2.5 concentrations ranged from 8.0-24.3 g/m3. The maximum
concentration of 24.3 g/m3 was recorded at Khadki village (AAQ2) and the minimum concentration of
8.0 g/m3 was observed at Pipaldhara (AAQ10).
SO2: Levels of SO2 concentration ranged from 4.8-14.93 g/m3 in the study area. The maximum and
minimum concentration of 14.93 g/m3 at Khapri (AAQ5) and 4.8 g/m3 was observed at Sukli (AAQ6)
village, respectively.

NOx: In the study area, NOx concentrations ranged from 5.3 to 26.4 g/m3. The maximum
concentration of 26.4 g/m3 was recorded at Khadki village (AAQ2) and minimum concentration was
observed at Pipaldhara (AAQ10). The high concentration at Khadki was due to dust on roads and also
vehicular traffic in the area.
CO: CO monitored at the 10 locations in the study area, CO concentration ranged between 0.041 to
0.98 mg/m3. The maximum concentration of 0.98 mg/m3 was recorded at Gangapur (AAQ11) and
minimum concentration was observed at village Sukli (AAQ6). High concentration was due to vehicular
traffic.
NH3: NH3 concentration levels at study area was found to be in the range of 8.2 to 42.1 g/m3.
O3: Concentration levels of ozone in the study area was found to be in the range of 5.7 to 43.0 g/m3.
VOCs: VOCs monitoring was carried out at 12 locations and concentrations of Benzene, BaP and
total hydrocarbons were observed to be in the range of BDL to 1.1 g/m3, BDL to 0.3 g/m3 and BDL
to 2.1 ppm respectively.
Heavy Metals:
Levels of Heavy metals (As, Cd, Cr, Cu, Pb, Fe, Mn, Hg, Zn and Ni) in PM10 were found to be very
less. Most of the heavy metals in PM10 were found below detectable limits.
The overall ambient air quality with respect to parameters of significance was found to be within
prescribed AAQMS by CPCB.
3.2 NOISE ENVIRONMENT
The statistical analysis was done for measured noise levels at 12 locations and near national (NH -
7)& state highways (SH-3, SH -264) during winter season 2014-2015.
Day Time Noise Levels (Leq day)
Background noise levels were monitored in the villages within the study area. The noise levels at all
locations ranged between 44.0 dB (A) to 61.7 dB (A). At village Khadki and Kanholi, day time noise
level was 53.8 dB(A) and 51.9 dB(A) respectively which was well within the prescribed limit of 65 dB
(A) for commercial area. At Pipaldhara village and Katandhara village, day time noise level was 53.8
dB(A) and 51.3 dB(A) respectively which was higher the prescribed limit of 50 dB (A) for silence zone
due to unusual noise of animals during monitoring at Pipaldhara village and unexpected kids shouting
at Katandhra village near Rotatry Green Club Primary School, Katandhra.
Noise levels in industrial area near highways was 60.0-63.0 dB (A) during day time which was well
within the prescribed limit of 75 dB (A) for industrial area.
Night Time Noise Levels (Leq night)
The night time noise levels ranged between 37.1 dB (A) to 52.9 dB (A). At residential locations, noise
levels ranged between 37.1-41.6 dB (A). At commercial area, noise levels were observed to be 42.9-
47 dB (A) and in sensitive areas noise level ranged between 38.0-42.7 dB(A) which was well within
the prescribed limit of 40 dB (A) for silence zone, at Pipaldhra village is shows high due to
unexpected activity.
Background noise levels near industrial area ranged between 57.0 dB (A) during night time which
was well within the prescribed limit of 70 dB (A) for industrial area.

3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Total 14 surface and groundwater samples were collected from the study area (7 surface water and 7
groundwater samples). These samples were collected as grab samples and brought to the laboratory
and were analyzed for various parameters and compared with the standards. The selection of the
surface and groundwater sampling locations was made based on the surrounding activities, water
intake, drinking sources and discharge point of view.
Analysis results of the samples were compared with the drinking water standards as per IS:
10500/2012.
Overall surface water quality was found to be physico-chemically suitable however bacteriologically
contaminated and need chlorination before consumption. The ground water quality in the study area
was found to be mineralized with respect to total dissolved solids, hardness, alkalinity.
Bacteriologically, all surface water samples were faecally contaminated and chlorination is needed
before use for drinking purpose whereas some of the groundwater samples were also found faecally
contaminated and need chlorination before use for drinking purpose.
Total water requirement for the proposed expansion of MIDC Butuibori industrial area is estimated to
be 7 MLD during operation phase which will be sourced from Wadgaon Rama Dam. The water works
is existing on Rama Dam. Total capacity of Rama dam is 1300 MLD. The existing water works
capacity is 61 MLD (intake well). The existing requirement is 45 MLD and remaining 16 MLD will be
used for phase II. No ground water will be used for proposed expansion.
and the domestic generation will be 552 m3/day from proposed development. The treated effluent
from the common effluent treatment plant will be used in HRTS system developed by MIDC in 25
hectares of land. Moreover provision of other HRTS is 35 Ha. of land is also there for discharge of
additional treated water generated that will be generated from the coming up industries in future. For
disposal of domestic waste, individual industries will make provision for sending it to septic tank/ soak
pit. There will not be any disposal of domestic waste into nearby water body.
3.4 LAND ENVIRONMENT
3.4.1 Soil Characteristics
Twelve soil samples were collected from different locations of the study area during winter season
2014-2015 and analyzed for significant parameters. The results indicated the following:
 Porosity was in the range of 14.61-25.10 %
 Water holding capacity was found between 22.39-54.82%.
 Bulk density was in range of 1.04-1.24 g/cc
 Electrical Conductivity of soil samples were in range of 67.21-540.20 μS/cm
 The soils have low to moderate productivity and fertility status.
 The concentration levels of heavy metals in soils were found to be normal.
3.4.2 Landuse of the Study Area
The land-use & land cover map of the 10 km radial study area from the periphery of project site has
been prepared using Resource SAT-2 , sensor-LISS-3 having 23.5m spatial resolution and date of
pass 29 May 2014 satellite image with reference to Google Earth data. In order to strengthen the
baseline information on existing land use pattern, the following data covering approx. 20°50’53.82” N-
21°01’41.50” N latitude and 78°49’16.57” E-79°00’47.03” E longitude and elevation 272-292 meter
are used.

Landuse pattern of the study area as well as the catchment area was classified by standard methods
of analysis of remotely sensed data and followed by ground truth collection and interpretation of
satellite data. The outcome of landuse study is presented in details in of EIA report.
3.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT
Flora of the study area
a. Trees: Total 62 species were found in the study area
b. Shrubs/Under Trees: Total 26 species were enumerated from the study area. The shrubs
species enlisted from the core zone are 15
c. Herbs: In the study area 19 species were observed.
d. Bamboo & Grasses: 15 species were enlisted from the study area
e. Climbers and Twiners: Total 13 species of climbers/ twiners were recorded in the study
area.
Faunal diversity of the study area
a. Mammals: The wild mammals of 16 species were observed other than domesticated ones
from the study area.
b. Birds: The list of the birds observed in the study area with the status of occurrence 35
species.
c. Butterflies: Butterflies observed during the present study are documented 6 species.
d. Fishes: Catala, Rohu, Mrigala, Common carp/Cyprinus Carp, Shrimp, Crab species of fishes
mainly observed in Wenna river were confirmed through the consultative approach with
villagers.
3.6 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
Salient observations of the survey/ study area
 House pattern: Types of housing varied from thatched to pucca houses. 40% houses were in
pakka form, 30% in semi pakka and 30% houses were observed in kaccha form.
 Employment: Main occupation in the study area was agriculture and its allied activities e.g.
Cattle rearing, dairy farming and labour work. Agricultural activity was mainly depending on
monsoon season. Other income generation sources of the area were labour work, small
business; private jobs etc. The labours were getting daily wages in the range of Rs 100-250,
depending on type of work they set. During discussion, it was found that due to lack of irrigation
facilities in summer season farmers hadn’t any work for 2-3 months, its indicates unemployment
 Fuel: The primary sources of cooking fuel were firewood, wood chips, cow dung cake, coal etc.
Very few villagers were using LPG facility. It was observed that, most of the households had LPG
connection but they prefer cooking on wood/coal because it costs less money/easily available in
villages
 Main crops: The principle crops grown in agricultural farm were wheat, soyabean, pulse, gram,
cotton etc.
 Language: Official language as well as mother tongue of the study area was Marathi. In addition
Hindi language was also spoken by large population
 Migration from other states: A person is considered as migrant when he/she is enumerated at a
different place than his/her previous place of residence. During survey it was found that local
people not migrate for employment. However people from nearer states e.g. Chhattisgarh,
Madhya Pradesh come for employment in Butibori industrial area

 Sanitation: Toilet facility is one of the most basic facilities required in a house. It was observed
that more than 70% of the households were not having toilet facilities in their houses. There was
no proper drainage line in the villages. Open defection was in practice in most of the villages
 Drinking water Facilities: During the survey, it was observed diverse sources of drinking water
supply in villages. Major source of drinking water in the study area was ground water (hand
pumps, tap water and dug wells). Near about (30%) villages availing treated water through Gram
panchayat water supply through tap water. During discussion, it was revealed that in summer
season water shortage faced by most of the villages
 Education facilities: Most of the villages were available education facilities in the form of
Aanganwadi and primary schools. Higher education facilities were available in the range of 5-10
km. Colleges and other diploma courses were available at Butibori and Nagpur city. Primary
school buildings were found in good condition with toilet facility. It was observed that ZP schools
are providing better facilities and environment to rural students
 Transportation facility: For transportation purpose auto, jeep, private bus and S.T. bus services
were available in the study area; however villagers reported that transportation facilities were not
frequently available. Private vehicles like bicycles & motor cycles were also used by villagers for
transportation purpose
 Road connectivity: Most of the roads were pucca and connected fair enough to villages. More
than half the respondents reported that roads they frequently used were semi pucca
 Communication facilities: For communication purpose mainly mobile phones, news papers &
post offices were present in the villages
 Medical facilities: There were few health care facilities available in the study area. In some of the
villages primary health sub centers were available. Hospitals and other better health centers were
available in the range of 5-10 km at town/city place
 Electricity: All villages were availing electricity facility for domestic use, 30% villages availing
electricity for agricultural purpose.
 Market facility: Study area was predominantly rural. In villages, small shops were available for
daily need things. Weekly market facility was available in some villages. Wholesale markets were
available at Butibori town, Taklaghat, Kanholibara etc.
 Recreation facilities: Television and radio were the main recreation facilities in the study area.
News paper/magazine facilities were found in small towns
4.0 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES
4.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT
Prediction of impacts on air environment was carried out by employing a mathematical model. In the
present case, Industrial Source Complex 3 (ISC3) dispersion model based on a steady state
Gaussian plume dispersion, designed for multiple point sources for short term has been used for
predicting the ground level concentrations and developed by United States Environmental Protection
Agency [USEPA].
The maximum incremental ground level concentrations (GLCs) for PM10, SO2 and NOx due to
proposed developmental activities were carried out. The predicted 24 hourly maximum concentrations
for PM10, SO2 and NOx were found to be 0.27µg/m3, 0.29 µg/m3 and 4.2 µg/m3 respectively in
proposed scenario. The cumulative concentration levels (Ambient + predicted incremental rise)
revealed that the concentration levels for PM10, NOx and SO2 likely to be encountered in the
operation of the project are respectively occurring at a distance of about 1.0 km, 1.0 km, 1.0 km in the
SW, W direction with a concentration levels (cumulative) of 65.09 µg/m 3, 15.2 µg/m3 and 30.6 µg/m3
respectively which is well within the NAAQM levels prescribed by CPCB. Hence it is inferred that

considering cumulative concentration levels, the pollution load exerted due to proposed project will be
insignificant.

During operation phase, noise levels from four DG sets are considered. Two DG sets each of 500
KVA capacity and two DG sets each of 150 KVA capacity will be the major contributors for increase in
the noise levels in proposed expansion of MIDC, Butibori phase II area and are considered as the
worst case scenario.The equivalent noise levels measured in the commercial area varied from 61
dB(A) to 63 dB(A).In the silent zone, equivalent noise levels measured were 51-53 dB(A) and in
residential area was 46.2-52.7dB(A).
The noise generating from the DG sets will be of the order of 70-75 dB(A).The maximum noise levels
of 75 dB(A) from the four DG-sets is considered for predicting ambient noise levels as the worst case
scenario.The maximum noise level generated will be 54 dB(A) when four DG sets will be in operation.
In order to reduce noise levels, the industry will take necessary steps to reduce/mitigate noise levels
at source by isolating these processes at the work environment to meet necessary standards.
However since the industrial operation are far away from the habitation, adverse impacts are not
anticipated by the increase in the noise levels due to the proposed activities.
4.3.1 Impact on Water Quality (surface and ground water)
The overall water quality of Rama dam was found to be safe for drinking purpose physico- chemically.
However bacteriologically contaminated and needs chlorination treatment before consumption.There
will not be wastewater discharges in any of the surface water bodies, hence no impacts are
envisaged on surface water quality.
Groundwater will not be utilized / abstracted for plant activity as sufficient surface water from Rama
dam is available for the proposed project and necessary permission has been sought. There will not
be wastewater discharges on land so no groundwater pollution is envisaged.
The proposed project site is presently not used for cultivation. The topsoil removed from the site will
be stored in dumps during construction period and in the post construction phase, the topsoil will be
spread on the un-built area of the plot and tree plantations and green belt development will be taken
up. As the topsoil removed from the site will be re-used for growth of plants, no adverse impact is
envisaged due to removal of topsoil from the site.
The dripping of oil from construction vehicles might cause soil contamination. In order to prevent soil
contamination likely to result from the oil spill and dripping from vehicles, drip pans will be placed at
the parking places of vehicles and the dripped oil will be collected. The collected dripped oil will be
stored and subsequently sent to the authorized recycling agencies.
Plantation/Greenbelt Development
Proposed project area is 275.58 Ha. Thus, plantation will be carried out on 90.94 Ha. @ of 1500
trees/ha, which will be about 33% of the proposed project area. It is proposed to plan 1000 tree
saplings every year. Some trees shall be planted along road side in proposed industrial project area.
Development of 3 - tier green belt by plantation within the industrial area and there is a plan for more
plantations of different species for the purpose of minimizing air pollution as well as land scaping.


Loss of Vegetation during site preparation:
The majority of local vegetation at project site is of seasonal shrubs, herbs and grasses and naturally
grown predominant plant species like Acacia nilotica (Babul), Annonasquamosa (Sitaphal), Acacia
catechu (Khair), Acacia leucociphala (Hiwar), Ziziphusmauritiana (Bor), Butiamonosperma (Palash) &
Prosopisjuliflora (vedibabool), Azadirachtaindica (Neem) etc. will be removed during site preparation.
Efforts will be made in order to minimize the tree cutting during development stage of the project.
Tree cutting will be compensated by the development of green belt around the periphery of the
project site, approach road and also along the periphery of proposed individual industries within the
proposed expansion of Industrial Area. The total area 90.94 ha (33%) will be covered by plantation.
Impact during Operational Phase

Impact related to Migratory route of Birds, Animals due to project activities
The existing ecological conditions in the project area have been established based on review of
secondary information and by conducting detailed primary ecological field surveys during winter
season of 2014-15. The study revealed that, there are no wildlife sanctuaries or wildlife protected
areas within 10 km study area from the project site. There is no identified migratory route/path of birds
or major wild fauna. Birds observed during the study period are locally common in observation. The
major wildlife confined to the RF of the study area. During consultative approach with the
locals/villagers, it has come to know that, Nilgai, Wildboar, Sabhar, deer are often raid to the adjacent
agriculture area of RF and destroyed the crops during harvesting period. The proposed project does
not envisage any significant impact on wildlife in the study area.
4.6 SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACTS

The project would create certain impacts which would be beneficial as well as adverse. It is
necessary to identify the extent of these impacts for further planning of control measures leading to
mitigation of the adverse impacts. The impacts due to proposed project on parameters of human
interest are assessed and given below:
Impact on employment
Proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori industrial area will attract various types of industries; this will
generate direct and indirect employment opportunities in the form of skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled
etc. Increased job opportunities will strengthen economic development in the region
Impact on infrastructure facilities
Proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori industrial area will increase in infrastructure resources for
power, water, road etc. These facilities will have positive impact on the study area.
5.0 ALANYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES
Selection Site
The site and adjoining areas are being considered by the state government for including in the MIDC
industrial area, which will make the site most appropriate for industries to come for increasing their
production activities. Further to this, the development of industrial area is done according to MIDC
act. The existing Butibori MIDC area is fully developed and occupied by various industries and for
further development, there is no space left for the industries likely to come. Hence there was a need
for additional industrial area to be developed for upcoming prospective industries for overall economic

growth of the state as a whole. The selection of site is carried out considering the environmental
features.
Three sites were selected and comparative environmental features are considered and based on the
suitability of the features for project, suitable site is selected. Criteria for selection of site are
presented in chapter 5 of EIA report.
Selection Technology
Application of technology will be based on types of industries likely to come in MIDC area. The industries
will procure the technology based on the types of industry they want to be set up which will be eco-friendly
and will not produce or emit wastewater generation and gases respectively. This will be taken care to
maintain the atmospheric pollution within the specified norms that will specified by SPCB.
The dependency, procurement and application of technology will be based on nature of industry to be
developed in the area.
6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME
Environmental monitoring will be carried out for monitoring of important and crucial environmental
parameters to assess regularly the status of environment during operations. The monitoring program
for implementation is given below:
Environmental Parameters No. of Frequency Period
components locations
Air Environment
 Ambient air PM10, PM2.5,SO2, NOX, CO 3 Locations in 24 hourly Monthly
quality and around site samples
 DG set PM, NOx, SO2 etc. Based on As per CPCB Monthly
meteorological norms
conditions
Each stack
Noise Environment
 Noise Noise levels in dB(A) Leq 6 Locations Once in day and Monthly
Environment (within premises) once in night
Water Environment
 Groundwater Physical, chemical and 2 Locations Once Quarterly
quality bacteriological parameters
 Waste water Physical & chemical Inlet and outlet of Once Daily basis
(treated and parameters treatment plant Composite
untreated)
Land Environment
 Soil Physical, chemical and 4 Locations Once Six
Characteristics biological parameters to monthly
assess agricultural and
aforestation potential
 Health Major fires, major accident, Work zone of Regular Half yearly
injuries, etc. factory checkups
 Hazardous All relevant Each type of Once Half yearly
waste parameters(Permeability & waste
porosity, Moisture pH , EC,
Loss on ignition,

Environmental Parameters No. of Frequency Period

components locations
Phosphorus, Total
Nitrogen, Particle size
distribution, Heavy metal,
TCLP)
Biological Environment
 Terrestrial Flora & fauna Within and Once Quarterly
outside
 Aquatic Flora & fauna Within and Once Quarterly
outside the
 Green belt Species diversity, survival premises. Once Quarterly
rate, growth rate Within and
outside the
premises.
Socio-Economic Environment
Socio economic Demography, Within 10 km once yearly
environment infrastructure, facilities radius
creation, quality of life,
Health Status
BUDGETRY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING

Adequate budgetary provisions will be made available by MIDC for construction, operation and
maintenance of different pollution control systems. A definite budget allocation will be made available
for environmental monitoring related to the activities under the provision of MIDC act in association
with the State Pollution Control Board and shown in Table 6.
TABLE 6
BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Sr. No. Activities Capital Cost Recurring Cost

(Rs. lakhs) (Rs. lakhs)
1. Air Environment 10.0 1.00
2. Noise Environment 1.00 0.10
3. Water Environment 20.00 2.0
4. Land Environment (Solid waste & TSDF) 10.00 1.0
5. Biological Environment 5.0 0.50
6. Social Environment 4.00 0.4
Total 50.00 5.00
7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES
Risk assessment and disaster management plan
Accidental risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accident consisting of an
event or sequence of events resulting into fire, explosion or toxic hazards to human health and
environment. Risk Assessment (RA) provides a numerical measure of the risk that a particular facility
poses to the public. It begins with the identification of probable potential hazardous events at an
industry and categorization as per the predetermined criteria.

MCA analysis
MCA analysis encompasses defined techniques to identify the hazards and compute the consequent
effects in terms of damage distances due to heat radiation, toxic releases, vapour cloud explosion
etc.
Approach to Disaster Management Plan
Onsite Emergency or disaster is an unpleasant sudden event of such a magnitude which may cause
extensive damage to life and property, due to in-plant emergencies resulting from deficiencies in
operation, maintenance, design and human error; natural calamities like flood, cyclone and
earthquake; and deliberate and other acts of man like sabotage, riot, war etc.
It is important for every industry to have a well-documented Emergency Plan to meet any major
untoward incident or disaster. In view of this, an approach to Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to
tackle the emergencies in the industries of MIDC. The details regarding risk assessment and disaster
management plan are given in Chapter Seven of EIA report.
Public Consultation
According to EIA Notification 2006 and its subsequent amendments, the proposed project comes
under the project activity of 7 (c) & (a), Industrial estates /parks, complexes/area export processing
zone (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech park, Leather Complexes and building &
Construction projects under category A (Special condition apply) and is located at Butibori Industrial
Area, Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, State Mahahrashtra. MIDC Nagpur has therefore initiated the
process of Environmental Clearance. Accordingly as per MoEF notification, 2006, Public Hearing has
to be conducted to seek the opinion of the people in and around the project area. The Public Hearing
was conducted under the chairmanship of Shri Ravindra Kumbhare Addl. District Magistrate on dated
13/7/2015 at Plot No. D-25, Vidarbha Industries Power Limited near Butibori Industrial Area, Butibori,
Nagpur.
A considerable gathering of the people were present during the public hearing. The list of the panel
members including others present during the public hearing were as follows:
Panel constituted for Public Hearing
1. Shri Ravindra Kumbhare Chairman

Additional District Magistrate
2. Mr. Atul Satfale Member
Regional Officer, MPCB, Nagpur
3. Shri Kiran Hasabnis Conveyer
Sub-Regional Officer MPCB, Nagpur
8.0 PROJECT BENEFIT

Proposed Project Benefits
The development of proposed industrial area will benefit accruing to the locality, neighborhood,
region and nation as a whole and will improve living standards of the nearby locality. Some of the
benefits are described below:
 Improvement in the physical infrastructure of project, ancillary industries that may come up on
account of the project.
 Improvement in the social infrastructure like roads, railways, townships, housing, water supply,
electrical power, drainage, educational institutions and hospitals etc.

 Employment potential skilled; semi-skilled and unskilled labours both during construction and
operational phases of the industrial area with specific attention to employment potential of local
population as well as necessity for imparting any specialized skills to them to be eligible for such
employment in the project on a long term basis.
9.0 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS
The area located at tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, state Maharashtra, for proposed expansion of
MIDC Butibori Industrial Area (BIA - II), will be developed for industrial plots with all the basic
amenities and make them available to needy entrepreneurs. It will definitely boost the economic
growth of the country; develop region and quality of life of the people in a sustainable manner without
creating any environmental damage.
MIDC Butibori, is well connected to railways, roadways and airways. The proposed expansion of
MIDC Butibori industrial area is planned near to notified Butibori Industrial Area. Therefore, it will not
involves loss of vegetation and biodiversity. The vegetation is similar in the whole area with no
sensitive ecosystem or rare and endangered flora or fauna, hence no environmental loss will be there
in terms of net productivity value.
10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Environmental management is an integrated effort to conserve the environmental functions through
arrangement, usage, development, maintenance, recovery, supervision and control policies on the
environment.
The Environment Management Plan for the proposed project aims to mitigate the potential
detrimental impacts on the environment, both during construction phase and operation phases of the
project. It also necessary that continued compliance with existing environmental regulations is
ensured. The construction and associated activities have been planned so as to minimize the impacts
on the physical, biological and socio-economic culture environments. Even thought it would be native
to expect that all detrimental impacts can be avoided, it is apparent that most of the impacts will be
localized and temporary in nature.
Environmental Objectives
The key environmental management objectives for this project are to avoid significant adverse
environmental impacts and to ensure that where impacts do occur they are mitigated.

EIA for Proposed Expansion of Butibori Industrial Area (BIA – Phase II), Tehsil Hingna
ToR COMPLIANCE
Sr. No. Scope of ToR Compliance/Report Reference
1. The Expert Appraisal Committee of MoEF, considered the project at its 140th meeting held on during
27th – 29th October, 2014. Based on the consideration of the documents submitted and the
presentation made by the project proponent, the committee prescribed the Terms of Reference, vide
letter no. F.No.21-22/2014-I.A. III, dated December 24, 2014, Govt. of India Ministry of
Environment and Forest, New Delhi for the preparation of EIA report. The approved TOR is as
follows:
I. The stone circle at Takalghat is at 8 km on SE, At present is not available at Takalghat.
likely impact on the archaeological site.
II. Submit the details of compliance of conditions Being new project consent will be
of consent order submitted after setting Env. Clearance
III. A green buffer of 15 m shall be provided all Incorporated in Chapter 4,
along the boundary and roads as committed plantation/greenbelt development -Page
during the meeting No.4-21, Chapter 10, Subhead 10.7.5,
Page No.10-14
IV. Submit the details of the present land use Furnished in Chapter-3, Subhead 3.5.3,
according to the revenue records and present Page No.3-26 to 3-34
status. Submit the impacts due to land use
change
V. Submit water requirement, identified sources Details are given in Chapter-2,
and impact on the existing users Subhead 2.10.2, Page No.2-12,
Chapter-4, Subhead 4.1.5 & 4.2.3,
Page No.4-4 & 4-17 res.
VI. Submit whether the site falls in semi-critical, No groundwater will be abstracted for
critical over exploited zones according to the the industries likely to come. Water
CGWA classification? NOC for proposed requirement provision will be made by
Ground Water withdrawal shall be obtained MIDC through surface water.
from the Central Ground Water Authority
VII. Submit the respective roles and legal Presented in Chapter 6, Page No.6-1 to
responsibilities of Industrial Estate and 6-5, monitoring program and EMP in
individual member units for EMP Chapter 10, Page No.10-1 to 10-19
implementation and monitoring as well as
effluent discharge
VIII. Submit the details of the approach road and its Furnished in Chapter-2, Subhead 2.9.2,
adequacy Page No.2-10
IX. Submit the impacts due to liquid waste Details are given in Chapter-4,
discharge, air emissions, solvent emissions, Subhead 4.1.3, 4.1.5, 4.2.1, Page No.4-
handling of hazardous waste & chemicals, 2, 4-4 & 4-7 and refer Chapter 7
odour
X. Submit the storm water management and Furnished in Chapter-10, Subhead
impacts due to contamination of storm water 10.7.3.6, Page No.10-11 to 10-12
with effluent/chemicals and mitigation
measures at industrial Estate developer level
and Unit level
XI. Submit the parking arrangements at Industrial Furnished in Chapter-2, Subhead 2.9.3,
Estate level Page No.2-10 to 2-11
XII. Submit the firefighting arrangements at Given in Chapter-2, Subhead 2.9.4,
Industrial Estate level Page No.2-11 to 2-12
XIII. Submit the details of effluent collection system Presented in Chapter-2, Subhead 2.7,
at member units level to meet the inlet norms Page No.2-7 to 2-9
for the CETP
ToR Compliance 1
XIV. Submit the effluent conveyance system from Furnished in Chapter-2, Subhead 2.7,
the member units to CETP Page No.2-7 to 2-9, and Chapter 10
Page No. 10-10
XV. Submit on-site and off-site emergency plan and Presented in Chapter-7, Subhead
infrastructure requirements at Industrial Estate 7.6.5.3, 7.6.5.4, Page No.7-24 to 7-42
level to comply MSIHC Rules 1989
XVI. Project Proponent shall study the feasibility of Furnished in Chapter 5, subhead 5.5,
constituting SPV to implement EMP and shall Page No.5-4 to 5-5, Chapter-2,
monitor CETP and emissions Subhead 2.7, Page No.2-7 to 2-9, and
Chapter 10 Page No. 10-10, Chapter-4,
Subhead 4.1.3, 4.2.1, Page No.4-2, 4-4
General Guidelines
XVII. The EIA document shall be printed on both Compiled
sides, as far as possible
XVIII. All documents should be properly indexed, Furnished in EIA report.
page numbered
XIX. Period / date of data collection should be Furnished in EIA report
clearly indicated
XX. Authenticated English translation of all material Furnished in EIA report
provided in Regional languages
XXI. The letter/application for EC should quote the Given in Chapter 1, subhead 1-1, and
MoEF& CC File No. and also attach a copy of attached as Annexure I
the letter prescribing the ToR
XXII. The copy of the letter received from the Attached as Annexure I
Ministry on the ToR prescribed for the project
should be attached as an annexure to the final
EIA-EMP Report
XXIII. The final EIA-EMP report submitted to the Furnished in EIA report, in Chapter 7,
ministry must incorporate the issues in TOR subhead 7.7, Page No.7-45 to 7-53 and
and that raised in Public Hearing. The index of final EIA document will be submitted to
the final EIA-EMP report, must indicate the MoEF for environmental clearance
specific chapter and page no. of the EIA-EMP
report, must indicate the specific chapter and
page no. of the EIA-EMP Report where the
specific a TOR prescribed by Ministry and the
issue raised in the P. H. have been
incorporated. Questionnaire related to the
project (posted on MOEF & CC website) with
all sections duly filled in shall also be submitted
at the time of applying for EC
XXIV. Grant of ToR does not necessarily mean grant We understand this.
of EC
XXV. Grant of ToR/EC to the present project does This is known to us and will approach if
not necessarily mean grant of approvals in necessary for other approvals.
other regulations such as the forest
(Conservation) Act 1980 or the Wildlife
(Protection) Act, 1972
XXVI. Grant of EC is also subject to Circulars issued This is also known to us
under the EIA Notification 2006, which are
available on the MoEF and CC website:
www.envfor.nic.in
XXVII. The status of accreditation of the EIA Furnished in EIA report

consultant with NABET/QCI shall be
ToR Compliance 2
specifically mentioned. The consultant shall

certify that his accreditation is for the sector for
which this EIA is prepared
XXVIII. On the front page of EIA/EMP reports, the Furnished in EIA report
name of the consultant/consultancy firm along
with their complete details including their
accreditation, if any shall be indicated. The
consultant while submitting the EIA/EMP report
shall give an undertaking to the effect that the
prescribed TORs (ToR proposed by the project
proponent and additional TOR given by MoEF)
have been complied with and the data
submitted is factually correct (Refer MoEF &
CC Office Memorandum dated 4th August,
2009)
XXIX. While submitting the EIA/EMP reports, the Furnished in EIA report
name of the experts associated with/involved in
the preparation of these reports and the
laboratories through which the samples have
been got analysed should be stated in the
report. It shall clearly be indicated whether
these laboratories are approved under the
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the
rules made there under (Please refer MoEF
Office Memorandum dated 4th August, 2009).
The project leader of the EIA study shall also
be mentioned
XXX. All the ToR points as presented before the Furnished in EIA report
Expert Appraisal committee (EAC) shall be
covered
2. A detailed draft EA/EMP report should be Furnished in EIA report, in Chapter 7,
prepared in terms of the above additional ToRs subhead 7.7, Page No.7-45 to 7-53 and
and should be submitted to the State Pollution final EIA document will be submitted to
Control Board for conduct of Public Hearing. MoEF for environmental clearance
Public Hearing to be conducted for the project
in accordance with the provisions of
Environmental Impact Assessment Notification,
2006 and the issues raised by the public should
be addressed in the Environmental
Management Plan. The Public should be
addressed in the Environmental Management
Plan. The Public Hearing should be conducted
based on the ToR letter issued by the Ministry
and not on the basis of Minutes of the Meeting
available on the web-site.
3. You are required to submit the detailed final Furnished in EIA report, in Chapter 7,
EIA/EMP prepared as per ToRs including subhead 7.7, Page No.7-45 to 7-53 and
issues raised during Public Hearing to the final EIA document will be submitted to
Ministry for considering the proposal for MoEF for environmental clearance
environmental clearance within 3 years as per
the MoEF& CC O.M. No. J-11013/41/2006-IA-
II(I) (P) dated 08.10.2014.
4. The consultants involved in the preparation of Furnished in EIA report
EIA/EMP report after accreditation with Quality
Council of India/National Accreditation Board of
ToR Compliance 3
Education and Training (QCI/NABET) would

need to include a certificate in this regard in the
EIA/EMP reports prepared by them and data
provided by other Organization(s) /
Laboratories including their status of approvals
etc. vide notification of the MoEF dated
19.07.2013
5. The prescribed ToRs would be valid for a The report is submitting within the
period of three years for submission of the prescribed period from the date of ToR
EIA/EMP Reports approval.
ToR Compliance 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER/ TITLE PAGE

SECTION NO.
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1-1
1.1 Purpose of the report 1-1
1.2 Identification of project & project proponent 1-1
1.3 Details about consultant organization 1-2
1.4 Brief description of project 1-2
1.5 Environmental impact assessment studies (scope & methodology) 1-8
1.6 Methodology adopted in EIA study 1-9
1.7 Scope of the study 1-12
1.8 Detailed plan of work 1-12
1.9 Rapid risk assessment 1-13
1.10 Approved ToR 1-14
2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2-1
2.1 Type of the project 2-1
2.2 Nature of the project 2-1
2.3 Need of the project 2-1
2.4 Site Details 2-1
2.5 Magnitude of operation 2-6
2.6 Project at a glance 2-7
2.7 Proposed schedule for approval and implementation 2-8
2.8 Proposed developmental activities 2-8
2.9 Infrastructure Availability 2-10
2.10 Resources availability 2-12
2.11 Environmental aspect (Environmental control units) 2-13
3.0 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT 3-1
3.1 Introduction 3-1
3.2 Air Environment 3-1
3.3 Noise Environment 3-9
3.4 Water Environment 3-13
3.5 Land Environment 3-24
3.6 Biological Environment 3-42
3.7 Socio-Economic Environment 3-64
4.0 ANTICIPATED IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4-1
4.1 Impact during construction phase 4-1
4.2 Impact during operation phase 4-7
5.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (SITE AND TECHNOLOGY) 5-1
GENERAL
5.1 Selection site 5-1
5.2 Land, site details & availability of facilities 5-3
5.3 Building materials 5-3
5.4 Green buildings 5-4
5.5 Energy conservation 5-4
5.6 Transportation 5-5
5.7 Technology 5-6
6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 6-1
6.1 Environmental monitoring system 6-1
6.2 Environmental monitoring programme 6-2
6.3 Monitoring methodologies 6-4
6.4 Reporting & Documentation 6-4
6.5 Environmental Management cell 6-5
6.6 Budgetary provision for environmental monitoring program 6-5
7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES 7-1
7.1 Risk assessment and disaster management plan 7-1
7.2 Past accident data analysis 7-2
CHAPTER/ TITLE PAGE
SECTION NO.
7.3 Hazard Identification 7-3
7.4 MCA analysis 7-5
7.5 Risk mitigation measures 7-10
7.6 Approach to disaster management plan 7-20
7.7 Public Consultation 7-45
8.0 PROJECT BENEFIT 8-1
9.0 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS 9-1
10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 10-1
10.2 Health, safety and environment (HSE) 10-1
10.3 Environment management plan 10-2
10.4 Environmental objectives 10-2
10.5 Implementation 10-3
10.6 EMP for construction phase 10-3
10.7 EMP for operational phase 10-7
10.8 Additional mitigation measures 10-15
10.9 Corporate social responsibility (CSR) 10-17
10.10 Industrial ecological concept 10-18
10.11 Budgetary provision for environmental management plan 10.19
11.0 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION 11-1
12.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS 12-1
12.2 Credentials of Testing Lab 12-1
12.3 Services offered 12-3
12.4 Facilities 12-5
12.5 Quality System 12-5
12.6 Achievements 12-5
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.
1.1 Index map of the project site 1-4
1.2 Proposed expansion of Butibori industrial area boundary 1-5
1.3 Google Map 1-6
1.4 Study area map (10 km radial distance) 1-7
1.5 Flow chart of methodology of EIA 1-11
2.1 Index Map 2-3
2.2 Location of proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori (phase –II) alongwith 2-4
existing and proposed additional MIDC area
2.3 Google map 2-5
2.4 Proposed plant layout 2-5
2.5 Khasara Map 2-6
3.1 Site specific windrose (Dec 2014-Feb 2015) 3-2
3.2 Ambient air quality locations 3-5
3.3 Noise monitoring locations 3-10
3.4 Surface and ground water sampling locations 3-14
3.5 Represents the river/streams/nala (drainage) of the study area within 3-25
10 km radius from the project site
3.6 FCC of 00-10 km radius with project location 3-28
3.7 LU/LC details of 00-10 km radius with project location 3-30
3.8 Pie chart represent the LU/LC details of 00-10 km radius 3-31
3.9 Contour details of 00-10 km radius 3-33
3.10 DEM details of 00-10 km radius with MIDC-Phase-II location 3-34
3.11 Geological map of study area 3-35
FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.
3.12 Soil Sampling locations 3-38
3.13 BOR wildlife sanctuary (Bor wildlife sanctuary map superimposed on 3-45
google imagery)
3.14 Sex ratio in the study area 3-67
3.15 Literacy rate in the study area 3-68
3.16 Employment pattern and main worker employment pattern 3-69
3.17 Infrastructure facilities in the study area in percentage 3-70
3.18 Land use pattern in the study area 3-71
4.1 Impact network on soil environment 4-2
4.2 Impact network for air environment 4-3
4.3 Impact network for noise environment 4-4
4.4 Impact network for water environment 4-5
4.5 Impact network for biological environment 4-6
4.6 Windrose diagram winter ( Dec 2014-Feb 2015) 4-8
4.7 Incremental rise of particular matter 4-10
4.8 Incremental rise of SO2 4-10
4.9 Incremental rise of oxide of nitrogen 4-11
4.10 Cumulative noise levels due to DG sets 4-16
4.11 Water balance 4-18
4.12 Rainwater harvesting system 4-20
6.1 Organogram of environment management cell 6-5
7.1 Accidental release of chemicals : A scenario 7-6
7.2 Focus on loss of containment from the process 7-22
7.3 Onsite DMP – Disaster control/management system 7-25
7.4 Various organizations involved during emergency 7-42
10.1 CETP process flow diagram 10-10
10.2 Storm drain section 10-12
10.3 Schematic sketch for recharging well 10-13
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE TITLE PAGE NO.

NO.
1.1 Proposed project proposal – expansion of existing Butibori MIDC area 1-3
1.2 Environmental attributes and frequency of monitoring 1-9
2.1 Environmental setting of the site 2-2
2.2 Project at a glance 2-7
2.3 Size of parking for different vehicular modes 2-10
2.4 Parking requirement for various land-uses/buildings 2-11
2.5 Land Break-up 2-12
2.6 Water requirement 2-12
2.7 Wastewater generation 2-13
3.1 Summary of micro-meteorological observations at site 3-2
3.2 Summary of site specific wind pattern 3-2
3.3 Climatological data for IMD, Nagpur (1971-2000) 3-3
3.4 Details of air sampling location 3-4
3.5 Summary of ambient air quality 3-6
3.6 Levels of volatile organic pollutants 3-7
3.7 Levels of heavy metals in ambient air 3-8
3.8 Noise monitoring locations 3-9
3.9 Noise levels in the study area 3-11
3.10 Background noise levels in industrial area near highways 3-11
3.11 Vehicular traffic and corresponding noise levels during peak hours in the 3-12
study area
3.12 Surface and ground water sampling locations 3-13
NO.
3.13 Surface water quality 3-16
3.14 Ground water quality 3-19
3.15 Physico-chemical and bacteriological characteristics of Rama Dam 3-22
3.16 Distance and direction of river / stream / nala present in project site within 3-24
10 km radius
3.17 LU/LC classed and their coverage in sq. km. 3-30
3.18 Details of soil sampling locations 3-37
3.19 Physical characteristics of soil 3-39
3.20 Chemical characteristic of soil in study area ( soil-water extract -1:2) 3-40
3.21 Fertility Status 3-40
3.22 Relationship of CEC with productivity 3-41
3.23 Relationship of CEC with absorptivity 3-41
3.24 Heavy metals content in the soil 3-41
3.25 Core zone (project site) 3-49
3.26 Sukli RF 3-49
3.27 Junapani RF 3-49
3.28 DEGMA reserve forest 3-50
3.29 List of flora in the study area 3-51
3.30 List of species in the study area 3-53
3.31 List of shrubs species in core zone 3-54
3.32 Herbs & grasses in the study area 3-54
3.33 Bamboo & Grasses in the study area 3-55
3.34 Climbers and Twiners in the study area 3-56
3.35 Agriculture crops grown in the study area 3-57
3.36 Prominent horticultural trees in the study area 3-58
3.37 Mammals from the study area 3-59
3.37 (A) Mammals from the core zone 3-59
3.38 Reptiles in the study area 3-60
3.38 (A) Reptiles in the core area 3-60
3.39 Lists of birds in the study area with its distribution & migratory status 3-60
3.40 Lists of birds in the core area with its distribution & migratory status 3-62
3.41 Butterflies in the study area 3-62
3.41 (A) Butterflies in the core area 3-62
3.42 Fishes in the study area 3-63
3.43 Dwelling units in the study area 3-65
3.44 Population size village wise 3-65
3.45 Population details in the study area 3-66
3.46 Literate & illiterate population in the study area 3-67
3.47 Employment pattern in the study area 3-68
3.48 Main worker employment pattern in the study area 3-69
3.49 Landuse pattern (In ha) 3-70
3.50 Surveyed Village list 3-72
4.1 Stack details 4-8
4.2 Short term modelling results 4-9
4.3 Resultant concentrations due to proposed project 4-9
4.4 Vehicular traffic during peak hours in the study area 4-11
4.5 Emission factors used (ARAI 2006 standards) 4-12
4.6 Resultant predicted incremental concentration of pollutants 4-12
4.7 Incremental noise levels 4-15
4.10 Water balance 4-19
4.11 Recommended species for plantation (outer periphery) 4-22
4.12 Predication of likely impacts on socio-economic environment 4-24
NO.
4.13 Quality of life existing (QoL) in the villages surveyed 4-25
6.1 Environmental monitoring Plans during construction phase 6-2
6.2 Environmental monitoring plan during operation phase 6-3
6.3 Budgetary provision for environmental monitoring 6-5
7.1 Degree of hazards based on FEI 7-4
7.2 Toxicity index 7-4
7.3 PASQUILL – GIFFARD atmospheric stability 7-5
7.4 List of damages envisaged at various heat loads 7-8
7.5 Damage criteria for pressure waves 7-9
7.6 Range of thermal flux levels and their potential effects 7-10
7.7 Summary of recommended personal protective equipment according to 7-19
hazard
7.8 Issues and clarifications of public hearing 7-46
8.1 Offsite Action plan 8-14
9.1 Recommended species for plantation 9-10
10.3 Criteria for accepting incoming effluent at CETP 10-9
10.4 Expected change in quality of life 10-15
10.5 Budgetary provision for environmental management plan 10.19
LIST OF PLATES
PLATE TITLE PAGE NO.

NO.
1.1 Project site view 1-8
3.1 Vegetation cover, crops, agriculture field avifauna and animals within the 3-48
study area
3.2 Household survey with Tailor master in village Nagajhari in the study 3-72
area
3.3 Group discussion in Mandwa Mahar village in the study area 3-72
3.4 Discussion with Women sarpanch in Katandhara village 3-72
3.5 Kaccha house pattern in Mandwa Mahar village 3-73
3.6 Gram panchayat water supply in Mandwa Mahar village in the study area 3-74
3.7 Primary school building in Mandwa Mahar village 3-74
3.8 Solar street light in Katandhara village 3-75
5.1 Selected sites for proposed development of existing MIDC (phase - II) 5-3
7.1 Photographs showing public hearing 7-52
LIST OF ANNEXURES
ANNEXURE NO. ANNEXURE NAME

Annexure I : ToR letter
Annexure II : Environmental standards
Annexure III : AAQ results
Annexure IV : Demographic details
Annexure V : Infrastructure details
Annexure VI : Land use details
Annexure VII : Public Hearing advertisement
Annexure VIII : PH Panel
Annexure IX : PH attendance sheet
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation (MIDC), Nagpur, established in 1992 proposed
expansion of Butibori industrial area (BIA – phase II) which is 28 Km from Nagpur. The total area of
existing Butibori MIDC is 2428.14 hectares which covers 16 villages having 2500 + industrial plots have
been carved out, out of which 2000+ industrial plots have been allotted. To encourage the entrepreneurs,
MIDC has constructed 46 work sheds. This industrial estate comprising IT Park, Apparel Park, and Food
Park are developed in the area, remaining area is allotted for other categories of Industries. MIDC has
developed TSDF site for collection and disposal of hazardous waste in an area of 29.7 ha with design
capacity to accept 60,000 tons per annum for 20 years. At present only 10,000 tons per annum waste is
received.
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT
In order to obtain environmental clearance for the proposed expansion of Butibori industrial area
(275.58 Ha). Form-I, proposed draft TOR alongwith Pre-feasibility report were submitted to MoEF. A
presentation was made before the Expert Appraisal Committee of MoEF 140th meeting on 27th – 29th
October, 2014 for the approval of TOR for EIA study. The committee approved the Terms of
Reference, vide letter no. F.No.21-22/2014-IA.III, dated 24th December 2014, Govt. of India Ministry
of Environment and Forest, New Delhi (Annexure-I).
Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation, Nagpur retained M/s. Anacon Laboratories Private
Limited, Nagpur to undertake Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) studies as per the Terms of
Reference (ToR) approved by MoEF, New Delhi incorporating baseline environmental status w.r.t. air,
noise, water, land, biological and socio-economic environment, identification and prediction of impacts
and mitigation measures during construction and operation phase of the project, evaluation of impacts
and suggestion of environmental management plan with environmental monitoring and risk assessment
studies with disaster management plan are also incorporated in the EIA report.
1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT
MIDC, Nagpur, proposed expansion of Butibori industrial area. MIDC acquires and develops industrial
plots with all the basic amenities and make them available to needy entrepreneurs. There are three major,
four mini industrial estates and three growth centres in the district.
Butibori Industrial area: Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation has established its area
in 1992 which is 28 Km from Nagpur on highway No.7. The total area planned for development is
estimated to be 2428.14 hectares which covers 16 villages having private land of 865 cultivators.
2502 industrial plots have been curved out, out of which 2086 industrial plots have been allotted. To
encourage the entrepreneurs, MIDC has constructed 46 work sheds. This industrial estate has been
given five star status. IT Park, Apparel Park and Food Park are proposed in the area. For phase II of
the MIDC industrial estate, the process for acquisition of 275.58 hectares of land has been
completed.
Hingna Industrial Area: Established in 1962, it is located 7 Km. from Nagpur city. In this Industrial
area, several engineering Industries, Electrical based Industries, food based industries, etc. are
located. Maharashtra state Electricity Board has established its two sub-stations to supply electricity
to this MIDC, established telephone facilities by way of electronic exchange. To facilitate the
industrialists and workers, amenities like post office, banks, police station, petrol pumps, canteen,
Bus services etc. are available in this area. At present no land is available for further planning in this
MIDC area.
Chapter 1- Introduction 1-1

Software Technology Park at Nagpur: MIDC is now concentrating its efforts on developing
environment friendly Software Technology Parks to cater the needs of the IT industry. It has
developed more than 18 IT parks in the state, out of which one IT Park is developed at Parsodi
Nagpur City and other at Sadar, Nagpur City. The main objective for developing Software Technology
Park at Nagpur is data communication facility of computer, single window clearance for Government
licence i.e. code nos, custom, Green Cards, etc. and assistance for liaison with Govt. agencies and
other departments. In the above Software Technology Park, different types of premises are readily
available. In addition to this, space has been provided for Nodal Officer and the staff for software
technology Park.
Government of Maharashtra has established MIDC under mid act’ 1961 as the premier industrial
infrastructure development agency in the state of Maharashtra for rapid and orderly establishment of
industrial areas and industrial estates. The organization is established on 1st August 1962.
Maharashtra industrial development corporation has established ‘Butibori industrial area’ in 1992
which is 28 km from Nagpur. Although MIDC is functioning as a development and management
agency, for the industrial areas developed by them, they were empowered to function on 14th October
1993 in view of the amendment in section 40 of the Maharashtra Regional Town Planning.
1.3 DETAILS ABOUT CONSULTANT ORGANISATION
Anacon is an established Environmental Consultancy firm with basic infrastructural facilities and
manpower. Anacon has rendering services in this field to various industrial sectors since last 17
years. The laboratory is recognised by Maharashtra Pollution Control Board and MoEF, New Delhi for
carrying out environmental Studies. Anacon laboratories has carried out EIA studies for various
projects in different industrial sectors i.e. steel, power, distilleries, textile and pharmaceutical and
prepared EIA reports. The consultant organization has successfully carried out the monitoring work
for different environmental components vis. air, noise, water and wastewater, land, hazardous
wastes; land use and land cover studies based on the satellite imageries for the EIA of various
industries. Network of Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd. spread over in six different states in Central
India region with branches at Raipur, Korba, Ranchi, Bhopal and Delhi.
1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT
1.4.1 Regulatory Framework
According to the EIA Notification 2006 and its subsequent amendments, the proposed project comes
under the project activity of 7 (c) & 8 (a), Industrial estate/parks/complexes/area, export processing
zone (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech Park, Leather Complexes & Building and
Construction projects under Category ‘A’ (special condition apply) and is located at Butibori
Industrial Area, Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, State Maharashtra. MIDC, Nagpur, has therefore
initiated the process of environmental clearance. Project status is as follows:
Sr. No. Description of Process Date
1. Submission of Application Form I, Form IA, PFR to MoEF for TOR 28th May, 2014
2. EAC Meeting for TOR 27th October, 2014
3. TOR issued 24th December, 2014
4. Public Hearing 13th July, 2015
The Terms of Reference (ToR) recommended are included in this EIA report. The Expert Appraisal
Committee approved the ToRs for undertaking detailed EIA study which is enclosed as Annexure I.

1.4.2 Size of the Project

The proposed expansion of Butibori industrial area (BIA phase-II) proposal details are shown in Table 1.1.
TABLE 1.1
PROPOSED PROJECT PROPOSAL – EXPANSION OF EXISTING BUTIBORI MIDC AREA
Total Land Area 275.58 Ha
Total area under plots 180.11 Ha
Area under roads, open spaces & Hilllock &
85.53 Ha
nallah etc.
No. of buildings/sheds 300-350 approx
Maximum permissible height 50 m, however it will be
Maximum height of building
allowed as per DCR
Area of amenity space 11.94 Ha
7 MLD for expansion of MIDC Butibori area – SSI units–
Waste water treatment / Proposed CETP Indicative to be promoted by Industrial Association
capacity Large and Medium Industries will comply MoEF/SEAA
EC conditions
Residential population, Industrial + visitors population:
Expected nos. of Industrial/ residents / users
15000
1.4.3 Cost of the Project

Total project cost for expansion of existing Butibori industrial area is estimated to be 7000 lakh including
land & infrastructure.
1.4.4 Location of the Project
MIDC, has proposed expansion of existing Butibori industrial area incorporating area from the villages
Mandva and Bhansuli, Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, State Maharashtra (Figures 1.1-1.4). The site
photographs are shown in Plate-1.1. The location of the land confers several advantages, which are
summarized as below:
 Availability of railway station at a distance 13 km, East, Butibori.
 Availability of airport at Nagpur Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar International Airport (32 km) from N-
NE.
 Availability of adequate water resources. (Water supply from Wadgaon dam will be the main
source of water during operation phase). Total water requirement for the proposed project is
estimated to be 7 MLD. Power requirement during construction phase would be 20 KVA and
during operation phae would be 36.5 KVA.
 Power requirement for the project will be obtained from MSEDCL and MSETCL
 Infrastructure facilities exist at this location.
 The project site is at a distance of 8.0 km from the State Highway and 10 km from the National
Highway
1.4.5 Need of Project
Existing Butibori industrial estate was occupied to the extent of 75 %, hence in 2006, MIDC planned for the
expansion of existing Butibori MIDC. The expansion of Butibori industrial estate will offer plots to large,

medium and small industrial units including commercial plots. To meet demand of industrial estates and
more industry to come, MIDC, Nagpur has proposed to enhance the existing Butibori industrial area in an
area of 275.58 Ha.
Justification of project
MIDC, Nagpur has proposed to expand its existing Butibori industrial area, Tehsil Hingna, District
Nagpur, Maharashtra.
FIGURE 1.1: INDEX MAP OF THE PROJECT SITE

FIGURE 1.2: PROPOSED EXPANSION OF BUTIBORI INDUSTRIAL AREA BOUNDARY

FIGURE 1.3: GOOGLE MAP

FIGURE 1.4: STUDY AREA (10 KM RADIAL DISTANCE)

PLATE 1.1: PROJECT SITE VIEW
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDIES (SCOPE AND METHODOLOGY)

In order to assess the environmental impacts due to the proposed project, reconnaissance of the
area was carried and various sampling locations to monitor environmental components were
identified. Accordingly, primary monitoring was carried out for meteorology, ambient air quality, noise
levels, surface and groundwater quality, soil characteristics and flora & fauna along with socio-
economic aspects.
Certain aspects related with establishment of socio-economic profiles of people, landuse pattern in the
study area etc. were carried out based on the review of secondary data collected from various government
and semi-government organizations.
The ambient air quality monitoring network was set up following the guidelines specified by the CPCB and
the air monitoring locations were selected based on the predominant wind direction recorded in the region
by Indian Meteorological Department (IMD), Nagpur
The primary environmental data collected, analysed and the results of the same were compared with the

environmental standards prescribed by CPCB. The applicable environmental standards are presented in
Annexure-II.
This environmental impact assessment report is based on collection of baseline data through field
monitoring of relevant environmental attributes during December to February 2014 representing winter
season with secondary data collection as per requirement of the project.
1.6 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED IN EIA STUDY
Environmental Impact Assessment study includes identification, assessment, quantitative evaluation and
prediction of possible impacts. To minimize impacts of the proposed expansion project on various
environmental attributes, mitigation measures are suggested for implementation in the project report. The
EIA process includes the following:
 Predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded by India Meteorological
Department (IMD) at Nagpur;
 Topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and rivers;
 Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;
 Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution pockets in the
area; and areas which represent baseline conditions;
 Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental attributes;
 Identification and quantification of impacts based on mathematical and scientific tools;
 Suggestion of mitigation and management measures based on the best industry practices and
in-line with regulatory norms.
 Flow chart for methodology adopted for EIA is presented in Figure 1.5.
Field studies were conducted to determine existing status of various environmental attributes as outlined in
Table 1.2.
TABLE 1.2
ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING
Sr. No. Attributes Parameters Frequency
24 hourly samples twice a week for three
PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO,
Ambient Air months identified at 12 locations. CO,
1 VOCs, NH3, Heavy metals
Quality monitored as three 8 hourly samples in 24
hours.
Continuous with hourly recording through
Wind speed and wind direction,
setting up of automatic meteorological
2 Meteorology Temperature, Relative humidity
station at site and data from secondary
and Rainfall.
sources: i.e. IMD station at Nagpur.
Grab samples were collected from surface
Physical and Chemical and ground water resources once during
3 Water quality
parameters. study period preserved and brought to the
laboratory for analysis.
Soil profile, soil type and texture, Once during study period at 12 locations
physical & chemical charateristics within 10 km radius of study area.
Soil
4 heavy metals, NKP value, organic
characteristics
matter, CEC and exchangeable
cations.
Existing terrestrial and aquatic Through field visits and from the district
5 Bio- Ecology
flora and fauna forest authority.
At every location, noise levels monitored
6 Noise levels Noise levels in dB(A) hourly for 24 hours, once during study
period.

Sr. No. Attributes Parameters Frequency

Based on data collected from secondary
7 Landuse Land use for different categories.
sources like village directory 2001.
Based on data collected from secondary
8 Geology Geological history
sources.
Drainage pattern, nature of
Hydro-geological data based on data
9 Hydrogeology streams, aquifer characteristics,
collected from secondary sources
recharge and discharge areas
Socio-economic including
Socio- Based on data collected from secondary
demographic pattern
10 economic sources like abstracts of census of India
infrastructure resources, health
aspects 2011 and village directory 2001
status, economic resources.
Risk
assessment Identify the areas where disaster
11 and Disaster can occur by fires and explosions Risk assessment and modeling.
Management and release of toxic substances.
Plan

Study of Project details

Screening & Reconsider Survey
Scoping & Acceptances of

ToR
Correction of detailed project Monitoring

Control of Scoping & Acceptances of ToR
plan from project Proponent of collection
Document
data
Control of Identification of Identification of Secondary Data

quality Monitoring Location Internal Audit
Record
Monitoring and
Correction, Verification &
Human measurement of
Validation of Collected Data
resources process
Equipment Identification Correspondence Management

& Analysis Review
instrument
support for
Lab Daily
Suggestions of Additional objecting
Mitigation Measures
Communication
Preparation of Draft EIA Correctives
report actions &
Preservation
Actions
Work Final Draft EIA report
Public Consultation if allocate
Issue of final draft after PH
Appraisal
Identification of issues and incorporation
Goal of clearance
FIGURE 1.5: FLOW CHART OF METHODOLOGY OF EIA

1.7 SCOPE OF THE STUDY

The scope of work includes a detailed characterization of the environment in an area of 10 km radius
of the project for various environmental parameters like air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-
economic aspects and preparation of draft EIA report incorporating all ToR issued by MoEF.
Environmental impact and risk assessment report incorporating baseline status w.r.t. various
environmental components e.g. air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-economic, prediction of
impacts, and evaluation of impacts for one season has been prepared. It includes suggestion for
environmental management plan and post-project monitoring studies as per the Terms of Reference
approved by the EAC. The ToR is attached as Annexure I.
1.8 DETAILED PLAN OF WORK
1.8.1 Air Environment
 Monitoring the existing levels of PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx, CO, O3 and hydrocarbons in ambient
air. Heavy metals in PM10 (Fe, Mn, Pb, As, Hg, Ni, Zn, Cu, Co, Cd and Cr) as per
CPCB/MoEF guidelines in winter season.
 Collection of surface meteorological data, viz. wind speed, wind direction, relative humidity,
temperature and cloud cover, concurrently with ambient air quality monitoring.
 Estimation of gaseous emission from the proposed industrial area and prediction of ground
level concentrations of gaseous pollutants through appropriate air quality model.
 Strengthening of greenbelt and identification of suitable plant species in the green belt.
1.8.2 Noise Environment
 Measurement of noise levels in the existing residential/commercial/sensitive zones of the
study area.
 Prediction and evaluation of impacts due to noise levels rising out of the proposed units on the
surrounding environment.
 Recommendations of mitigation measures for control of noise pollution.
1.8.3 Water Environment
 Assessment of ground and surface water quantity and quality (primary data base) for physical,
chemical and biological parameters
 Impact on water demand vis-a-vis regional water balance.
 Evaluation and recommendations for wastewater treatment system and suggestions on its
augmentation.
 Assessment of quantity and quality of effluent to be discharged from the proposed industry.
 Delineation of water conservation schemes
 Assessment of feasibility of treated wastewater for it’s recycled and reuse in proposed
industrial project and use in greenbelt development.
1.8.4 Land Environment
 Study of existing landuse and cropping patterns, vegetation, forestry wastelands using ground
truth

 Studies on soil characteristics in the study area

 Assessment of impacts on landuse pattern.
 Delineation of measures for utilisation of treated wastewater.
1.8.5 Biological Environment
 Assessment of flora and fauna in the study area based on secondary data
 Assessment of impacts on aquatic flora and fauna.
 Assessment of impacts on terrestrial flora and fauna due to gaseous emissions and landuse
changes.
 Prediction of biological stress in the study area.
 Delineation of measures for abatement/reduction of biological stress.
1.8.6 Socio-Economic Environment
 Collection of baseline data related to socio-economic profile of the study area with reference
to:
- Human settlements, health status, occupational, employment and income pattern.
- Infrastructure resource base, viz. medical, education, water resources, power supply,
communication and transportation.
- Economic resource base, viz. agriculture, industries, forest, trade and commerce.
 Projection of economic benefits due to the proposed expansion and delineation of measures
to minimise the adverse impacts
 Assessment of impacts on places of historical/archaeological importance and aesthetic
impairment, if any
1.8.7 Environmental Management Plan
Environmental management plan (EMP) was drawn after identifying, predicting and evaluating the
significant impacts on each components of the environment with a view to minimizing potential
adverse impacts and maximising the benefits due to the project.
1.9 RAPID RISK ASSESSMENT
1.9.1 Scope of Work
Rapid risk assessment study comprises hazard identification based on maximum credible accident
(MCA) analysis, hazard assessment and evaluation employing techniques of consequence and
vulnerability analysis and delineation of onsite disaster management plan (DMP) of offsite emergency
preparedness plan (EPP) due to worst case scenarios of proposed developments.
1.9.2 Objectives of Study
 Hazard identification taking recourse to hazard indices and inventory analysis.
 Generation of release scenarios for escape of hazardous materials.
 Computation of damage distances through consequence analysis of failure cases identified
with respect to heat radiation and pressure wave to the affected area by the fire, explosion
and hazardous releases.

 Maximum credible accident analysis to identify worst case scenarios for release of flammable
substances from the proposed facilities.
 Assessment of risk based on above evaluation vis-a-vis risk acceptability criteria.
 Formulation of guidelines for disaster management and emergency preparedness plans.
 Suggestions on risk mitigation measures based on MCA analysis.
1.9.3 Details of Work Plan
1.9.3.1 Hazard identification
 Collection of information on hazardous materials stored and handled.
 Study of vulnerable operations and storages using the maximum credible accident (MCA)
analysis.
The study will lead to identification of hazardous prone operations and computation of damage
distances based on probable accident scenarios.
1.9.3.2 Hazard assessment and Evaluation
Hazard prone operation would be critically examined with an accent on quantification of hazard and
its evaluation. The following techniques shall be used for quantification:
 Consequence analysis and vulnerability analysis
 Individual risks.
The study will lead to estimation of extent of damage and computation of individual risk curves.
1.9.3.3 Disaster management plan (DMP)
Disaster management plan will be formulated for onsite emergency. Risk mitigation measures for
improving the existing infrastructure, communication systems, and identification of assembly point,
first aid station, emergency control centre, etc. will form an integral part of the report.
1.10 APPROVED ToR

1. The Expert Appraisal Committee of MoEF, considered the project at its 140th meeting held on during
27th – 29th October, 2014. Based on the consideration of the documents submitted and the
presentation made by the project proponent, the committee prescribed the Terms of Reference, vide
letter no. F.No.21-22/2014-I.A. III, dated December 24, 2014, Govt. of India Ministry of
Environment and Forest, New Delhi for the preparation of EIA report. The approved ToR is as
follows:
(i) The stone circle at Takalghat is at 8 km on SE, likely impact on the archaeological site.
(ii) Submit the details of compliance of conditions of consent order.
(iii) A green buffer of 15 m shall be provided all along the boundary and roads as committed
during the meeting.
(iv) Submit the details of the present land use according to the revenue records and present
status. Submit the impacts due to land use change.
(v) Submit water requirement, identified sources and impact on the existing users.

(vi) Submit whether the site falls in semi-critical, critical over exploited zones according to the
CGWA classification? NOC for proposed Ground Water withdrawal shall be obtained from the
Central Ground Water Authority.
(vii) Submit the respective roles and legal responsibilities of Industrial Estate and individual
member units for EMP implementation and monitoring as well as effluent discharge.
(viii) Submit the details of the approach road and its adequacy.
(ix) Submit the impacts due to liquid waste discharge, air emissions, solvent emissions, handling
of hazardous waste & chemicals, odour.
(x) Submit the storm water management and impacts due to contamination of storm water with
effluent/chemicals and mitigation measures at industrial Estate developer level and Unit level.
(xi) Submit the parking arrangements at Industrial Estate level.
(xii) Submit the firefighting arrangements at Industrial Estate level.
(xiii) Submit the details of effluent collection system at member units level to meet the inlet norms
for the CETP.
(xiv) Submit the effluent conveyance system from the member units to CETP.
(xv) Submit on-site and off-site emergency plan and infrastructure requirements at Industrial
Estate level to comply MSIHC Rules 1989.
(xvi) Project Proponent shall study the feasibility of constituting SPV to implement EMP and shall
monitor CETP and emissions.
General Guidelines
(i) The EIA document shall be printed on both sides, as far as possible.
(ii) All documents should be properly indexed, page numbered.
(iii) Period / date of data collection should be clearly indicated.
(iv) Authenticated English translation of all material provided in Regional languages.
(v) The letter/application for EC should quote the MoEF & CC File No. and also attach a copy of
the letter prescribing the ToR.
(vi) The copy of the letter received from the Ministry on the ToR prescribed for the project should
be attached as an annexure to the final EIA-EMP Report.
(vii) The final EIA-EMP report submitted to the ministry must incorporate the issues in ToR and
that raised in Public Hearing. The index of the final EIA-EMP report, must indicate the specific
chapter and page no. of the EIA-EMP report, must indicate the specific chapter and page no.
of the EIA-EMP Report where the specifica ToR prescribed by Ministry and the issue raised in
the P. H. have been incorporated. Questionnaire related to the project (posted on MOEF &
CC website) with all sections duly filled in shall also be submitted at the time of applying for
EC.
(viii) Grand of ToR does not necessarily mean grant of EC.
(ix) Grand of ToR/EC to the present project does not necessarily mean grant of approvals in other
regulations such as the forest (Conservation) Act 1980 or the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972.
(x) Grand of EC is also subject to Circulars issued under the EIA Notification 2006, which are
available on the MoEF and CC website: www.envfor.nic.in

(xi) The status of accreditation of the EIA consultant with NABET/QCI shall be specifically
mentioned. The consultant shall certify that his accreditation is for the sector for which this EIA
is prepared.
(xii) On the front page of EIA/EMP reports, the name of the consultant/consultancy firm alongwith
their complete details including their accreditation, if any shall be indicated. The consultant
while submitting the EIA/EMP report shall give an undertaking to the effect that the prescribed
ToRs (ToR proposed by the project proponent and additional ToR given by MoEF) have been
complied with and the data submitted is factually correct (Refer MoEF & CC Office
Memorandum dated 4th August, 2009).
(xiii) While submitting the EIA/EMP reports, the name of the experts associated with/involved in the
preparation of these reports and the laboratories through which the samples have been got
analysed should be stated in the report. It shall clearly be indicated whether these laboratories
are approved under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the rules made there under
(Please refer MoEF Office Memorandum dated 4th August, 2009). The project leader of the
EIA study shall also be mentioned.
(xiv) All the ToR points as presented before the Expert Appraisal committee (EAC) shall be
covered.
2. A detailed draft EA/EMP report should be prepared in terms of the above additional ToRs and
should be submitted to the State Pollution Control Board for conduct of Public Hearing. Public
Hearing to be conducted for the project in accordance with the provisions of Environmental
Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 and the issues raised by the public should be
addressed in the Environmental Management Plan. The Public should be addressed in the
Environmental Management Plan. The Public Hearing should be conducted based on the ToR
letter issued by the Ministry and not on the basis of Minutes of the Meeting available on the
web-site.
3. You are required to submit the detailed final EIA/EMP prepared as per ToRs including issues
raised during Public Hearing to the Ministry for considering the proposal for environmental
clearance within 3 years as per the MoEF & CC O.M. No. J-11013/41/2006-IA-II(I) (P) dated
08.10.2014.
4. The consultants involved in the preparation of EIA/EMP report after accreditation with Quality
Council of India/National Accreditation Board of Education and Training (QCI/NABET) would
need to include a certificate in this regard in the EIA/EMP reports prepared by them and data
provided by other Organization(s) / Laboratories including their status of approvals etc. vide
notification of the MoEF dated 19.07.2013
5. The prescribed ToRs would be valid for a period of three years for submission of the EIA/EMP
Reports.

2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT
Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation (MIDC) has proposed expansion of Butibori
Industrial Area (BIA Phase - II) located near village Mandva and Bhansuli, Tehsil Hingna,
District Nagpur, Maharashtra.
2.2 NATURE OF THE PROJECT
According to EIA notification 2006 and subsequent amendment in 2009, all Industrial estates/ parks/
complexes/ areas, export processing Zones (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech Parks,
Leather Complexes are covered under Serial no. 7(c) and placed under Category ‘A’.
2.3 NEED OF THE PROJECT
Existing Butibori industrial estate is occupied with industries of various sectors to the extent of 75 %,
hence, in 2006 MIDC planned for the expansion of existing Butibori industrial area (BIA - Phase II).
There is a need for additional industrial area to be developed for upcoming prospective industries for
overall economic growth of the state as a whole. The idea was conceived for expansion of Existing
Butibori Industrial state as per the Government of Maharashtra notification 2007. The expansion of
existing Butibori Industrial estate will offer plots to large, Medium, Small industrial units alongwith
commercial plots. MIDC has adequate water, land and electricity. The Vidharbha region also offers
plenty of natural resources and under developed area. The project will also generate economic
resources as well as direct and indirect employment.
2.4 SITE DETAILS

The proposed expansion of MIDC area is located in the Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, State
Maharashtra. The site is situated at North latitude of 20058'18.60" and East longitude of 78054'1.24"
and is on an average 292 meters above MSL. The proposed expansion of MIDC area is located 28
km in NE away from the Nagpur. The site details are presented in Table 2.1.
The proposed expansion area is coming under MIDC and Land for the proposed development falls
near Notified Butibori Industrial Zone.The project site details (Figures 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3) and proposed
plant layout with storm water disposal plan is shown in Figures 2.4 & 2.5.
Layout of the proposed project was optimized considering the space requirement for small, medium
and large size plots. All facilities in the plant area were laid so as to minimize the land requirement.
The layout will also facilitate movement of workers and material handling between the various
activities both during construction and operational phases.
The general layout of the proposed industrial area was developed keeping in the view the following
factors:
 Uninterrupted flow of materials in accordance with the technological requirements.
 Contours and gradient of the site
 Optimum lead for transport of materials and for service lines
 Predominant wind direction
 Logistic approach in location of technological units as well as service facilities
 Safety clearances & statutory provisions
 Adequate green belt within industrial area
 Location of various types of plots
Chapter 2- Project Description 2-1

TABLE 2.1
ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE SITE
S. No. Particulars Details
1. Location Near existing Notified Butibori Industrial zone
Tehsil Hingna
District Nagpur
State Maharashtra
2. SOI Top sheet Nos 55 L/13, 55 K/16
3. Latitude 20058'18.60"N
Longitude 78054'1.24"E
4. Altitude 292 m Above MSL
5. Seismicity Zone – III
6. Nearest IMD station IMD, Nagpur (Airport)
7. Nearest City Nagpur
8. Nearest National Highway /State NH-7, 10 km (SE)
Highway SH-3, 8 km, (NE)
9. Nearest Railway Station Butibori Railway Station, (13 km, ESE)
10. Nearest Airport Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar International Airport.
Nagpur (32 km) from NE.
11. Sanctuaries/National Park /Biospheres, Not available within 10 km radius
etc.
12. Defence Installations Defense compound wall 500 m away from
project boundary
13. Religious place Sant Yogiraj Viktu Baba Temple at Takalghat
(6 km, SE)
14. Nearest surface water body Wenna River (9.25 Km/ESE)
15. Nearest Forest RF nr. village Bid Nilzodi (5.36 Km/NW)
RF nr. village Bid Anjangaon (6.8 Km/SW)
RF nr. village Dhokarda (6.0 Km/SW)
RF Bid Sukali 2.4 km NNW
16. State boundary Not available, within 15 km
17. Eco-sensitive area Not available, within 15 km
18. Notified Archaeological sites Not available, within 15 km
19. Mangroves Not available, within 15 km
20. Estuary /Sea Not available, within 15 km

FIGURE 2.1: INDEX MAP

FIGURE 2.2: LOCATION OF PROPOSED EXPANSION OF MIDC BUTIBORI (PHASE - II)

ALONGWITH EXISTING AND PROPOSED ADDITIONAL MIDC AREA

FIGURE 2.3: GOOGLE MAP
FIGURE 2.4: PROPOSED PLANT LAYOUT

FIGURE 2.5: KHASARA MAP
2.5 MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION

 Existing facilities (Infrastructure availability)
Some of the key features are given below:
• Availability of NH-7, which is 10.0 km away from proposed expansion of MIDC industrial site.
Same can be used for transportation
• Availability of railway station at Butibori railway station, 13 km, ESE direction. Broad gauge
railway line is 11.5 km in E direction for the proposed expansion of existing Butibori area.
• Availability of International Airport at 32.0 km in NE direction.
• Availability of adequate water resources.

 Proposed Expansion
MIDC, Nagpur has proposed for expansion of Butibori Industrial Area at Butibori. The zoning is
created based on large, medium and small industries. The consents will be given by MPCB and EC
will be obtained as per EIA notification by each unit independently MIDC will be facilitating CETP
through Industries association for SSI units. 33% area is marked for the green belt development. 10%
would be planned and provided by MIDC and balance 23% will be covered by individual industries in
their plots. For residential part of the project, separate STP and SWM centre will be planned as per
MPCB norms and will be controlled by MIDC.
Rainwater harvesting will be carried out within the site for artificial recharge of groundwater.
 Land breakup
The total land area for the proposed expansion of Butibori MIDC is 275.58 ha, out of which area
under plots are 185.61 ha. Whereas area under roads, open spaces and Hilly part etc. is 89.97 ha.
The break-up regarding land use in proposed expansion Butibori MIDC is as follows:
 Area Statement (Ha)
1. Large size plots : 130.76
2. Medium size plots : 31.54
3. Small size plots : 20.00
4. Commercial plots : 3.31
5. Open space : 11.86
6. Space for Amenities : 11.94
7. Hilly Area covered : 33.40
8. Trunk roads : 32.77
2.6 PROJECT AT A GLANCE

The details regarding the salient features of the project is presented in Table 2.2.
TABLE 2.2
PRJECT AT A GLANCE
PARTICULARS DETAILS
Location: Village : Adjoining villages Mandva & Bhansuli
Tehsil: Hingna
District : Nagpur (Maharashtra)
Geographical Location Latitude: 20°58'14.3782"N
Longitude: 78°54'23.0174"E
Total Land Area 275.58 ha
Total area under plots (Large, Medium, 185.61 ha
Small & Commercial Plots)
Open space 11.86 ha
No. of Building /shed (Proposed) 300 - 350
Maximum height of building Maximum permissible height allowed as per DCR
Area of amenity space 11.94 ha
Water Requirement & Source 6890 KLD (Approx. 7 MLD), Wadgaon (Rama Dam)
(Total Capacity : 1300 MLD)

PARTICULARS DETAILS
Raw Water Treatment Raw water will be treated as per WHO guideline in WTP
Water Storage 24 Hrs. Water storage, obligatory by MIDC
Waste water treatment / Proposed CETP 2230 KLD wastewater expected to be generated from
capacity proposed expansion Large and Medium Industries will
comply MoEF/SEAA EC conditions
Waste Water Disposal Treatment in CETP (2 MLD Capacity) & treated effluent
will be used in existing HRTS developed by MIDC in 25
Ha. of land
Expected nos. of Industrial/ residents / Residential population, Industrial + visitors population:
users 15,000 – 20,000 nos.
Solid & Hazardous Waste Generation Expected 7.5 TPD, Disposal in TSDF, (29.7 Ha), 3 KM
and Disposal away from proposed site
 Project cost
The total cost of the proposed expansion project is estimated to be 7000 lakh including land &
infrastructure development.
2.7 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION
The proposed developmental project from concept stage to commissioning would take about
03 years. Since the project is being set up by the expert personnel, the planning and implementation
of the project is not much difficult. Services of experienced consultants are being utilized for detailed
planning, preparation of techno-economic feasibility report and other associated activities like
discussions with financial institutions, phasing of capital expenditure etc. However, the
implementation primarily will depend upon the statutory environmental clearances.
2.8 PROPOSED DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES
Apart from the development of proposed expansion of Butibori MIDC area, MIDC is planning to install
common effluent treatment plant (CETP) to treat and manage the industrial effluents that will be
generated from individual industries to protect ecology from deterioration. Existing CETP at Butibori
Industrial Estate is located in 5 ha with capacity of 5 MLD. A CETP of capacity 2.0 MLD is also
proposed for expansion project in association with the industrial association. For CETP the role of
MIDC will be as a facilitator and will allot land to industrial association to set up CETP and will
contribute financial share as per policies and guidelines.
Details of CETP
CETP (2.0 MLD) is proposed for the treatment of effluent generation from the industries that will be
established in the proposed developed areas. However, zero liquid discharge (ZLD) norms shall be
enforced on the industries to avoid any discharges from the industries.
Treatment Scheme
The CETP will be designed as a battery of four streams and each stream shall be capable to handle
additional 33% load in case of exigencies. The piping shall be designed to handle such additional
hydraulic load while the aeration grid shall be designed to provide additional 33% oxygenation as and
when required. Further, the collection system has a network of control valves with flow meter on
discharge line of each industry and if required, the flow from each unit can be reduced or staggered
to limit the influent to the CETP. The flow control system shall be based on SCADA and can be
implemented in a very short time from the CETP control room. Moreover on noticing the upset in the
quality of final treated effluent it will be diverted to equalization tank instead of the final discharge

during the shot duration of the upset. Due to such a provision, providing large capacity guard pond
can be avoided.
(A) Preliminary Treatment
The untreated influent will reach the CETP through gravity main. The gravity main will discharge the
untreated influent to mechanical fine screen (MFS) at about 8 m below ground level. The MFS will be
used to remove floating and suspended matters larger than 8 – 10 mm in size in order to protect
subsequent equipment. The screen shall be either bar rack or perforated plate with a scrapper
mechanism or screw type as determine best during detail engineering. The post-screened
wastewater will flow under gravity to wet sump of the pumping station, and then pumped out to CETP
treatment units.
The equalization shall be in two-stage and there shall be four equalization tanks working in parallel in
each stage. The influent flow will be divided equally between the four tanks by a flow distributor. The
first four parallel equalization tanks will have a hydraulic retention time of 4 hours and shall be a
constant volume tank to achieve some uniformity in terms of quality. These tanks will be designed like
clarifiers and shall have bottom scrapper as well as top skimmer, to remove heavier suspended solids
and floating oil or scum. This provision has been made based on experiences at other CETPS where
heavy solids deposition occurs in equalization tank, disturbing the plant operations severely. The
second stage will be in series to the first and shall also have four equalization tanks, but larger ones
with 8-hour retention time. This will further help in achieving homogeneity and also ensure constant
flow to subsequent treatment units, achieved by pumping. The second stage equalization tank will
have floating propeller mixers to achieve homogenization.
(B) Primary Treatment
The equalized effluent shall be pumped to primary physico-chemical treatment system, again
designed as battery of four systems. This treatment would include coagulation, flocculation and
gravity settling to remove suspended and colloidal solids. The related chemical dosing system shall
be versatile in terms of type of coagulant and will be able to handle various chemicals such as lime,
ferrous sulphate, ferric chloride, alum, polyaluminium chloride and high molecular-weight
polyelectrolytes. The coagulant will be dosed in an above ground flash mixer equipped with medium
speed stirrer while the flocculants will be dosed into a flocculation well within the primary
clariflocculator. The effluent with flocculated solids will enter the settling zone of the primary
clariflocculator. The settled solids will be scrapped off by a scrapper mechanism to the central sludge
pit and pumped out periodically to sludge dewatering system, while the overflow will be collected in a
peripheral launder and be led under gravity to secondary biological treatment.
(C) Biological Treatment
The clarified supernatant will overflow by gravity to the advanced biological treatment system. The
proposed bio treatment configuration shall be latest international technology based on Completely
Mixed Extended Aeration Suspended Growth Activated Sludge System, which is most rugged and
efficient system compared to other systems such as lagoons, bio-towers fluidized bed or moving bed
reactors, etc. While conventional system with a well-designed aeration tank, large secondary clarifier
and activated sludge recycle pumps can be employed to provide the desired performance.
Conventional plants have problems with settlement of biomass and maintaining desired biomass level
within the aeration tank is often difficult because of hindered settling phenomenon experienced in
gravity clarification. The floc formation in conventional systems is poor due to vigorous aeration
breaking the flocs and trapping air bubbles within. Carryover of biomass from the clarifier is higher in
conventional systems, resulting into loss of acclimatized biomass. Conventional plants are prone to

maintenance due to moving parts such as sludge scrapper and recycle pumps being in contact with
corrosive effluent.
2.9 INFRASTRUCTURE AVAILABILITY
2.9.1 Amenities Areas
5% of the total area of land so sub-divided, shall be reserved for “Amenity Area”. Following uses shall
be permissible in the land reserved for amenity area-MIDC officers, Local area officers, Post Officers,
Telephone Exchange, Fire Stations, Police Stations/Chowkies, Electric sub-station, water supply
works, drainage works, common facility centre/recreation centre, Industries”. Association officers,
schools/colleges, Educational institutions, Training centre, Pollution Control Laboratories, Sulabh
Shauchalaya, informal shopping, stall sites, plots for PAP’s, communication centers, milk booths, and
such other users as may be permitted by MIDC.
2.9.2 Roads
Peripheral roads: Peripheral network of the roads for the scheme area shall be retained as per
development plan/nodal plan/ zonal plan as per MRTP act 1966 for industrial /commercial and residential
zones as shown below:
Length of road Minimum width in metropolitan region as notified of Minimum width, in other areas
state Govt. under MRTP act 1966
Up to 150 m 15 m 12 m
traffic
Provision of road in residential zone

Length of road Minimum width in metropolitan region as Minimum width, in order areas
modified by state Govt. Under MRTP act
1966
Up to 75 m 6m 6m
75 m to 150 m 10 m 10 m
151 m to 300 m 12 m 10 m
2.9.3 Parking Area

 Car parking and loading & unloading
Parking area for different vehicular modes and number of car spaces to be provided for various land uses
shall be governed as per the Tables 2.3 & 2.4 given below:
TABLES 2.3
SIZE OF PARKING FOR DIFFERENT VEHICULAR MODES
1. Car 2.50 m x 5.00 m
2. Scooter 2.50 m x 1.20 m
3. Bicycle 2.00 m x 0.70 m


4. Truck 3.75 m x 10.00 m
5. Trailer Truck 5.00 m x 20.00 m
In addition to the above, 10% of total parking spaces shall be provided for visitors vehicle parking and 10 %
for two wheelers parking. Loading and unloading spaces with suitable ramp access shall be provided for
mercantile, industrial and storage land uses as one space for every 100 m2 of floor area or part thereof up
to 500 m2 and one for every 500 m2 or part thereof thereafter. The loading space shall be 3.75 m X 10.0 m.
TABLES 2.4
PARKING REQUIREMENT FOR VARIOUS LAND-USES/BUILDINGS
Sr. No. Land-Use Car Spaces
a. 2 car spaces for every one tenement above 100 m2. of built up
area
b. One space for every one tenement of build-up area more than 60
1 Residential m2 and up to 100 m2
c. One space for every two tenements of built-up area more than 45
m2 to 60 m2
d. One space for every four tenements of built-up area up to 45 m2
I. Star Hotels
i. One space for every 60 m2 of total floor area or part thereof.
II. Hotels ii. One space for every 75 m2 of floor area or part thereof
2
III. Lodging
iii. One space for every 100 m2 of floor area or part thereof.
IV. Restaurants iv. One space for every 50 m2 of floor area of part thereof.
3 Educational One space for 100 m2 of floor area or part thereof.

4 Institutional One space for every 250 m2 of floor area or part thereof
Officer (Govt. & One space for every 70 m2 floor area up to 1500 m2 and one space
5
Pvt.) for every 150 m2 or part thereof for areas exceeding 1500 m2
Information
Technology,
6 One space for every 50 m2 of floor area or part thereof.
Biotechnology &
Nanotechnology
7 Assembly One space for every 60 m2 of floor area or part thereof.
8 Business One space for every 100 m2 of floor area or part thereof.
One space for every 80 m2 of floor area up to 800 m2 and one space
9 Mercantile
for every
One space for every 200 m2 of floor area or part thereof subject to
10 Industrial minimum of two spaces. In case of plots of 1.0 Ha. And above,
minimum parking space shall be 100 % of the plot area.
One space for every 200 m2 of floor area or part thereof subject to
11 Storage
minimum of two spaces.
12 Hospitals One space for every 150 m2 of total floor area.
Cinemas, Theatres
13 One space for every 20 seats.
and Multiplexes
14 Shopping/ Malls One space for 80 Sq. m of total floor area or part thereof.
One space for every 150 seats plus additional as per the rules for
15 Stadia
restaurants etc.

2.9.4 Fire Fighting

 Fire protection and life safety regulations
It will be applied to development on any land in the notified areas of MIDC under Maharashtra Industrial
Development Act, 1961. In particular, It will apply to buildings which are more than 15 m in height and to
special buildings like educational, assembly, institutional, industrial, storage and hazardous and mixed
occupancies with any of the aforesaid occupancies having area more than 150 m2 and shall require
clearance as under:
i. For plots up to 1000 m2 having nonhazardous activities & buildings below 15 m height from any fire
officer, duly authorized by the CEO, who shall examine the building proposed as per the guidelines
and checklist given by fire department of MIDC.
ii. For all other buildings from Chief Fire Officer of MIDC.
 Fixed fire fighting installation
All buildings depending upon the occupancy use shall be protected by wet riser, wet riser cum down
comer automatic sprinkler installation, high pressure water spray or foam generating system etc.
2.10 RESOURCES AVAILABILITY
2.10.1 Land Requirement
Total land requirement for the proposed expansion of Butibori industrial area (BIA - II) is 275.58 ha. As on
today, whole land is under the possession of MIDC. There will not be any dispute for land possession.
Land break-up is presented in Table 2.5.
TABLE 2.5
LAND BREAK-UP
Sr. No. Description Area (ha)
1 Area Under Plots 185.61
2 Area Under Road, open spaces and Hill parts. 78.03
3 Area of Amenity space 11.94
Total Area 275.58
2.10.2 Water Availability and Requirement

Total water requirement for the proposed expansion of Butibori MIDC industrial area is estimated to
be 7 MLD (6890 KLD) during operation phase which will be sourced from Wadgaon Rama dam. The
water works is existing on Rama dam. Total capacity of Rama dam is 1300 MLD. The existing water
works capacity is 61 MLD (intake well). The existing requirement is 45 MLD and remaining 16 MLD
will be used for phase II. No ground water will be used for proposed expansion. Fresh water
requirement details are presented in Table 2.6.
Storage: 24 hours storage will be made and it will be obligatory by MIDC. The storage will be in a
storage tank. One third of the total water requirement will be collected in the storage tank constructed
in 100 X 100 meter capacity area. Apart from this, overhead tank of capacity 500 m 3 is being
constructed for proposed expansion. The distribution network will be as follows:
Rama dam – WTP – Sump – Pipeline – ESR – Distribution

TABLE 2.6
WATER REQUIREMENT
Sr. No. Particulars Water requirement (m3/day)
1 Process 2272
2 Cooling water 3445
3 Green belt & Plantation 345
4 Fire fighting 138
5 Domestic 690
Total 6890
2.10.3 Wastewater Generation
(Table 2.7) and the domestic generation will be 552 m3/day from proposed development. The treated
effluent from the common effluent treatment plant will be used on site for landscaping and flushing
purposes. However, it is planned to use treated effluent for HRTS. The HRTS that will be developed
in 35 ha of land available with MIDC at in a lower contour in phase wise. Apart from this, rainwater
harvesting will be carried out within the site for artificial recharge of groundwater. The wastewater
collection system will be close conduit system (pipeline system) which will be corrosion and chemical
resistant pipeline. There will be intermittent inspection, collection chambers and pumping system if
required. The pipeline network for the collection of wastewater from individual industries to CETP will
be designed by competent consultants. This will be developed by MIDC.
TABLE 2.7
WASTEWATER GENERATION
Sr. No. Particulars Wastewater Generation (m3/day)
1 Process 1333
2 Cooling water 345
3 Green belt & plantation -
4 Fire fighting -
5 Domestic 552
Total 2230
The domestic water requirement is estimated to be 690 m3/d. The domestic waste generation will be 552
m3/d. For disposal of domestic waste, individual industries will make provision for sending it to septic tank/
soak pit. There will not be any disposal of domestic waste into nearby water body. However provision will
be made by individual industries to use treated domestic waste for plantation. MIDC will check this and
inform to MPCB regarding any ambiguity in the disposal of domestic waste. MIDC will insist on the zero
discharge policy. So there will not be any discharge in any aquatic system.
2.10.4 Power Requirement
Power requirement during construction and operation phase will be 50 MW. Power supply will be
from Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Co. Ltd MSEDCL and MSETCL.
Emergency power
Backup source of DG sets are proposed in case of power failure. CPCB approved 4 DG sets ranging
50-500 KVA will be provided.
2.10.5 Raw Material Availability
Raw materials required like sand, bricks, stone during construction of road, it will be procured from local

market near MIDC Butibori and Nagpur.

2.10.6 Manpower Requirement
The development will generate direct and indirect employment 15000 together.
2.11 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECT (ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL UNITS)
 Construction phase
Air emissions from construction sites can pose health risks to workers, and sensitive receptors
surrounding the site, if not manage properly. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide
appropriate safety training, information equipment, signage, security and emergency response plans
on the site.
To mitigate the impact of PM (dust), the following measures will be recommended for implementation:
 A dust control plan; and
 Procedural changes to construction activities
Dust control plan
Fugitive dust source category Dust control actions
Disturbed surface areas Applying water to at least 80 percent of all inactive accessible
disturbed surface areas on a daily basis when there is evidence of
wind driven fugitive dust.
Unpaved roads Watering all roads used for any vehicular traffic at least twice per
day of active operations; OR Water all roads used for any vehicular
traffic once daily and restrict vehicle speed to 15 Kmph.
Track-out control Downwash of trucks (especially tyres) prior to departure from site.
The most cost-effective dust suppressant is water, because a source of water tends to be readily
available on the construction site. Water can be applied using water trucks, handheld sprays and
automatic sprinkler systems. Furthermore, incoming loads can be covered to avoid loss of materials
in transport, especially if materials are transported off-site.
 Operational Phase
To mitigate the impact of pollutants from diesel generator sets and vehicular traffic during operational
phase, the following measures are recommended for implementation:
 D.G set air pollution control measures
 Vehicle emission controls and alternatives
D.G. set air pollution control measures
 Use of good quality fuel with low sulphur content and PUC certification
 Periodic maintenance of DG sets as per defined schedule of manufacturer
 Maintaining adequate stack heights
Vehicle emission controls and alternatives
Flow of Vehicle - Sudden acceleration or de-acceleration of vehicles produces more pollution than a
vehicle maintaining at a constant speed. Smoother flow of traffic within the parking area and premises
of residential area would ensure lesser pollution from the vehicles.
Entry and Exit of Vehicles –To ensure least interference from incoming and outgoing vehicles, it is
suggested that entrance and exit points of the vehicles should be different.

Dedicating separate entrance for rehabilitation buildings will reduce interference in relatively more
vehicular movement in the sale plot.
Dedicating at least one entry and exit to pedestrians will reduce interference in vehicular movement in
the Sale plot.
Anti-Idling – The parking in the area will carry signs warning the vehicle driver against idling within the
parking lot.
Traffic Management Team – A team of trained staff will be appointed for monitoring traffic movement
inside the parking space and at entrance and exit points of the sale plot premises.
Water Consumption
A combination of water saving appliances and water management measures will be planned in all the
toilets in the buildings. The message of water conservation will be spread to all users by way of
awareness campaigns and circulars. Specific measures that will be implemented include the
following:
Management Measures
 Promote awareness on water conservation and reducing water wastage.
 Quick fixing of leaking taps, pipes and toilet cisterns;
 Sweep with a broom and pan where possible, rather than hose down external areas;
 Minimize water use in gardens by the following measures:
 Drip irrigation system can be used for the lawns and other green area. Drip irrigation can save
between 15-40% of the water use, compared with other watering techniques
 Plants with similar water requirements shall be grouped on common zones to match precipitation
heads and emitters.
 Use of low-volume, low-angle sprinklers for lawn areas.
 Select controllers with adjustable watering schedules and moisture sensors to account for
seasonal variations, and calibrate them during commissioning.
 Selecting a drought resistant grass, and using lawn chemicals and fertilizer sparingly also
reduces watering needs.
 Reduce toilet cistern volume in single flush models. Following is a list of fixtures Offered by use
of efficient plumbing fixtures which also carry a credit each under Green building innovative
wastewater technology, water use reduction by 20% and water use reduction by 30%.
Rain water harvesting and reduce surface runoff
Rainwater harvesting can serve as a solution to the water problem in the water crises area by
capturing the runoff. Rainwater harvesting helps in utilizing the primary source of water an prevent
the runoff from going into sewer or storm drains, thereby serving dual purpose Making water available
for future use and reducing the load on treatment plants as well as other service lines.
Recharging water in to the aquifers help in improving the quality of existing groundwater through
dilution. Rainwater harvesting comprises of two components:
 Storing rain water in underground reservoirs for beneficial use in future
 Rain water harvesting for artificial recharge of ground water.
Amount of water that can be effectively harvested is called the harvesting potential of the site.
Efficiency of rainwater harvesting and recharging ground water can be increased by following
methods:

 Use vegetated swales and depressions to reduce runoff.

 Reduce and filter surface runoff.
 Catch drainage all along the periphery of plot to prevent surface runoff.
Proponent has to opt rainwater harvesting or make it compulsory to the incoming industries and use
the rainwater mainly for groundwater recharging.
Storm water management (by industries)
Rainwater runoff comprises of storm water, which flows into both surface water and groundwater.
Proper management of this resource ensures that storm water discharge is free of contamination. A
detailed “Storm Water Management Plan” will be developed which considers the sources of storm
water pollution. The plan consists of best management practices, which includes consideration of the
following:
 Good housekeeping in the above areas.
 Conducting routine inspections to ensure cleanliness
 Secondary containment and dykes in fuel/oil storage facilities
 Preparation of spill response plans, particularly for fuel and oil storage areas.
 Provision of slit traps in storm water drains
 Regular inspection and cleaning of storm drains.
Energy Consumption
Effective measures will be taken to minimize the energy consumption in the following manner:
 All buildings are adequately spaced, so that sunlight, natural ventilation is not disturbed or
hindered in any of the building due to another building.
 The building will be designed in such a way that the public areas can be cooled by natural
ventilation.
 Energy efficient appliances, such as PL lightings, will be used for street lighting.
 Alternate switching arrangement for Common Area.
 Use of timer for common and ext lights.
 Solar energy for street lighting and hot water system.
 By using the above, we shall be able to save 20 to 25 % of electrical energy.
Energy saving practices

 Use of solar water heating.
 Purchase of energy efficient appliances.
 Constant monitoring of energy consumption and defining targets for energy conservation.
 Adjusting the settings and illumination levels to ensure minimum energy used for desired comfort
levels.
 Installing programmable on/off timers and sensors for low occupancy areas.
 Use of compact fluorescent lamp and low voltage lighting.

3.0 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

3.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter highlights the details about the environmental baseline status within the study area. An
environmental monitoring was carried out within 10 km radial distance of proposed expansion of
existind Butibori industrial area (BIA, Phase II) MIDC, Tehsil-Hingna, Dist.-Nagpur, State Maharashtra
and included in the report.
3.1.1 Methodology
The methodology adopted for carrying out environmental monitoring was as per the guidelines given
in the EIA Manual of the MoEF. Baseline monitoring was carried out with respect to air, noise, water,
land, biological and socio-economic components of environment in the study area during winter
season (December 2014-February 2015).
3.1.1.1 Primary Data Collection by Environmental Monitoring
Primary data collected include:
 Ambient air quality
 Noise levels
 Groundwater / surface water quality
 Soil quality
 Land use pattern
 Flora and Fauna
3.1.1.2 Secondary Data Collection
This includes review of secondary published information on
 Socio-economic conditions (demography, amenities and infrastructure availability)
 Sensitive areas such as biosphere reserve, forests, sanctuaries, places of historical,
archaeological, tourist importance, etc.
3.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT

The study of baseline status for air environment includes reconnaissance, selection of monitoring
locations based on meterological conditions and specificity of the site selection of project specific air
pollutants, and existing concentration levels prior to the implementation of the project. The data
required to assess the status was collected, analysed and evaluated through a well-designed air
quality monitoring (AQM) network.
3.2.1 Meteorology
The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is very useful for proper on-site
monitoring undertaken for various meteorological variables in order to generate the site-specific data.
Hourly Data was collected at proposed project site continuously from December 2014-February
2015. The generated data was then compared with the meteorological data collected from nearest
India Meteorological Department (IMD) station located at Nagpur.
3.2.2 Meteorological Condition at Site
The automatic meteorological data recording instrument (weather station) was installed at the project
site to record wind speed, direction, relative humidity and temperature. Rainfall was monitored by rain
Chapter 3- Description of Environment 3-1

gauge. The hourly minimum, maximum values monitored during study period are presented in Table
3.1.
TABLE 3.1
SUMMARY OF MICRO-METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS AT SITE
Month Temperature (0C) Relative Humidity (%) Rainfall (mm)
Min Max Min Max
December 2014 7 32 19 91 4.91
January 2015 7 30 16 97 4.06
February 2015 9 36 11 87 6.10
Range 7-36 11 – 97 4.06-6.10
3.2.2.1 Wind Speed/ Directions

The meteorological data with respect to wind speed and direction was collected and presented in the
form of wind roses during study period (Dec 2014 - Feb 2015) and shown in Figure 3.1 and the
summary of site specific wind pattern is presented in Table 3.3.
FIGURE 3.1: SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE (Dec 2014-Feb 2015)
TABLE 3.2
SUMMARY OF SITE SPECIFIC WIND PATTERN
Details Wind Direction
First Predominant Wind Direction East (14.06 %)
Second Predominant Wind Direction NE (8.82 %)
Calm conditions (%) 23.32

Temperature
The winter season starts from December and continues till the end of February. December is the
coldest month with the minimum temperature at 12.50C. The temperature starts increasing rapidly
during the onset of pre-monsoon season from March to May. During pre-monsoon season, the
maximum temperature was observed 42.50C with the minimum temperature 19.40C. The maximum
temperature in the monsoon season was observed to be 37.80C, whereas the minimum temperature
was observed 23.10C. In the post-monsoon, day temperature decreases slightly with the maximum
temperature 32.70C. The monthly variations in temperature are presented in Table 3.3.
Relative Humidity
The relative humidity was observed around 18% to 38% during pre-monsoon period. In monsoon
period the relative humidity ranged between 48% to 84%. During the post-monsoon season, the
humidity was observed between 48% to 70% and in winter season, the humidity was observed to be
31% to 66%. The variations in relative humidity are presented in Table 3.3.
Rainfall
The annual rainfall based on the IMD data was recorded as 1091.3 mm. The monsoon generally sets
in during the second week of June. The rainfall gradually decreased after September. The maximum
number of rainy days was observed in the month of July. Annual and monthly variations in rainfall are
presented in Table 3.3 and windroses for winter are shown in Figure 3.1.
TABLE 3.3
CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA FOR IMD, NAGPUR (1971 - 2000)
Temperature (⁰C) Humidity (%)
Month Monthly Rainfall (mm)
Min Max 0830 hr 1730 hr
January 13.1 28.7 67 41 17.4
February 15.3 31.3 54 31 18.2
March 19.4 36.2 38 21 16.3
April 24.2 40.5 31 18 7.8
May 27.8 42.5 33 20 16.3
June 26.4 37.8 62 48 165.9
July 24.2 31.7 82 70 287.8
August 23.7 30.6 84 75 276.5
September 23.1 32.2 79 68 170.9
October 20.1 32.7 70 55 77.4
November 15.6 30.5 64 48 22.1
December 12.5 28.5 66 45 14.7
RANGE 12.5-42.5 18-84 Total =1091.3
3.2.3 Baseline Status

The ambient air monitoring with respect to parameters of significance was carried out during winter
season (Dec 14 to Feb 15). The site is located at industrial area and the major sources of air pollution
in the region are Industrial operations, domestic activities and rural conditions. The prime objective
was to assess the existing air quality of the area.

Methodology for Air Quality Monitoring

Selection of Sampling Locations
The baseline status of the ambient air quality was assessed through a scientifically designed ambient
air quality monitoring network. The design of monitoring network in the air quality surveillance
program was based on the following considerations:
* Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale;
* Topography of the study area;
* Representatives of regional background;
* Population and sensitive areas;
* Representation of valid cross sectional distribution in downwind direction
Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at 12 locations.The details about sampling locations
are depicted in Figure 3.2 and presented in Table 3.4. The locations were identified keeping in view
predominant wind directions prevailing during study period, sensitive receptors and human
settlements. The levels of PM10, PM2.5, Sulphur Dioxide (SO2,), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX), Ammonia
(NH3) and Carbon monoxide (CO) were monitored for establishing the baseline status. PM2.5 and
PM10 samples were collected with the help of respirable particulate sampler operating 24 hours by
drawing air which passes through the cyclone at the rate of 1.0 -1.5 m3/min which collects the
particles less than 10 µm diameter over glass fiber filter paper and the bigger particulates from 10 to
100 µm are collected in the receiver provided at the bottom of the cyclone. The dust deposited over
the filter paper was measured as PM10 and the dust deposited in the receiver was measured as SPM
which was estimated by gravimetric method. Due to the high suction of the air, the vacuum was
formed into the hopper which was utilized by providing a nozzle in the hopper for sampling SO 2 and
NOX which was analyzed by spectrophotometrically.
TABLE 3.4
DETAILS OF AIR SAMPLING LOCATION
Sr. Station Location Distance Direction Justification Latitude Longitude
No. Code (in Km) (Centre place of
the site)
1. AAQ1 Project site -- -- -- 20°56'18.60"N 78°55'1.24"E
2. AAQ2 Khadki 4.3 W Downwind 20°56'24.06"N 78°54'30.06"E
3. AAQ3 Dongargao 6.6 WSW Downwind 20°54'55.30"N 78°51'29.27"E
4. AAQ4 Ajangaon 7.4 SSW Downwind 20°53'11.39"N 78°52'16.22"E
5. AAQ5 Khapri 4.08 SSE Reference point 20°54'06.02"N 78°55'13.09"E
6. AAQ6 Sukli 5.6 NE Upwind 20°58'48.27"N 78°56'54.82"E
7. AAQ7 Tarsi 8.4 SSE Reference point 20°52'07.88"N 78°56'56.95"E
8. AAQ8 Amgaon Nearest to project
1.42 SE 20°55'48.27"N 78°55'40.21"E
site
9. AAQ9 Katandhara 5.1 NNW Reference point 20°58'59.35"N 78°54'11.68"E
10. AAQ10 Pipaldhara 3.1 NNW Reference point 20°57'44.24"N 78°54'01.61"E
11. AAQ 11 Gangapur 2.53 ESE Reference point 20°55'12.68"N 78°55'53.61"E
12. AAQ 12 Kanholi 7.2 W Downwind 20°56'04.49"N 78°50'50.84"E

FIGURE 3.2: AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LOCATIONS
Methodology of ambient air monitoring

Sr. Sampling Technique Minimum Technique
No. parameter detectable limit protocol/Methodology
1. Suspended High Volume sampler 10 μg/m3 Gravimetric (HVS)-IS: 5182
particulate (Gravimetric method) Part-4
matter
2. Respirable Respirable Dust Sampler with 5 μg/m3 Gravimetric (HVS)-IS: 5182:
Suspended Cyclone & Flow measurement Part-23 -2006
particulate (Gravimetric method)
matter
(PM10)

Sr. Sampling Technique Minimum Technique

No. parameter detectable limit protocol/Methodology
3. PM2.5 Fine Particulate Sampler with 2 μg/m3 Gravimetric (HVS)-IS: 5182:
WINS Impactor (Gravimetric Part-4 with cyclone
method)
4. Sulphur Modified West and Gaeke 6 μg/m3 Clorimetric IS: 5182: (Part-
dioxide 2)2001
(SO2)
5. Notrogen Jacob and Hochheiser 3 μg/m3 Clorimetric IS: 5182: (Part-
dioxide 6)2006
(NOx)
6. NH3 Nesslerization Method 5 μg/m3 IS: 5182:and CPCB
7. Fluoride Ion selective electrode method 0.1 μg/m3 Standard method
8. Ozone UV spectrophotometer 0.001 ppm IS: 5182 (Part 9): 1974
9. CO NDIR 0.01 ppm IS: 5182 (Part 10): 1999
10. Benzene GC 0.001 ppb IS: 5182 (Part 11):2006
11. BaP HPLC 0.01 ppb IS: 5182 (Part 12): 2004
12. As, Ni, Pb Ion Chromatography 0.01 ppb CPCB new NAAQM ,
Regulations, 2009
Presentation of Primary Data

Various statistical parameters like minimum, maximum, average and 98th percentile values were
computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring stations. The results of monitoring
carried out are presented in Annexure-III. The summary of these results representing winter season
data is given in Table-3.5. These are compared with the standards prescribed by Central Pollution
Control Board (CPCB) for Industrial, Residential, Rural and other areas.
TABLE 3.5
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
3 3 3
PM10 (μg/m ) PM2.5 (μg/m ) SO2 (μg/m )
Station th th th
Location 98 % 98 % 98
Code Min Max Avg Min Max Avg Min Max Avg
tile tile %tile
AAQ1 Project site 41.1 57.2 49.91 55.75 11.5 18.4 15.48 17.9 7.3 12.6 9.54 12.05
AAQ2 Khadki 48.2 64.3 57.01 62.85 17.4 24.3 21.38 23.8 8.1 13.4 10.34 12.85
AAQ3 Dongargao 30.0 46.1 38.81 44.65 9.8 16.7 13.78 16.2 7.3 12.6 9.54 12.05
AAQ4 Ajangaon 40.0 56.1 48.81 54.65 12.2 19.1 16.18 18.6 7.4 12.7 9.64 12.15
AAQ5 Khapri 44.9 64.8 55.70 64.80 13.4 17.2 15.34 17.2 12.3 14.9 13.6 14.70
AAQ6 Sukli 39.0 54.0 48.20 54.00 9.5 18.2 14.40 18.1 4.8 8.40 6.5 8.30
AAQ7 Tarsi 53.0 58.0 55.50 57.50 14.9 19.3 18.30 19.2 5.7 10.6 7.9 10.40
AAQ8 Amgaon 30.6 46.7 39.41 45.25 9.4 16.3 13.38 15.8 6.3 11.6 8.54 11.05
AAQ9 Katandhara 38.6 54.7 47.41 53.25 9.3 16.2 13.28 15.7 7.1 12.4 9.34 11.85
AAQ10 Pipaldhara 32.2 48.3 41.01 46.85 8.00 14.9 11.98 14.4 6.8 12.1 9.04 11.55
AAQ11 Gangapur 45.0 57.0 51.60 56.50 11.8 19.2 17.30 19.2 15.9 19.5 18.2 19.50
AAQ12 Kanholi 37.7 53.8 46.51 52.35 10.5 17.4 14.47 16.9 7.4 12.7 9.56 12.15
Range 30.0-64.8 8.0-24.3 4.8-14.93
Ambient Air Quality
100(24 hr) 60 (24 hr) 80 (24 hr)
Standards

TABLE 3.5 (Cntd...)

3 3 3
NOx(μg/m ) CO(mg/m ) NH3 (μg/m )
Station th th th
Location 98 % 98 % 98 %
Code Min Max Avg Min Max Avg Min Max Avg
tile tile tile
AAQ 1 Project site 10.3 24.9 15.59 21.2 0.181 0.225 0.19 0.218 12.7 19.5 15.23 18.4
AAQ 2 Khadki 11.8 26.4 17.09 22.7 0.237 0.281 0.25 0.274 8.2 15.0 10.73 13.9
AAQ 3 Dongargao 6.1 19.2 10.20 15.5 0.153 0.197 0.16 0.19 9.1 15.9 11.63 14.8
AAQ 4 Ajangaon 7.1 21.7 12.39 18.0 0.194 0.238 0.20 0.231 11.3 18.1 13.83 17.0
AAQ 5 Khapri 10.3 12.3 11.40 12.2 0.18 0.22 0.20 0.220 21.6 36.0 29.90 36.0
AAQ 6 Sukli 9.20 16.8 104.3 16.7 0.041 0.087 0.05 0.083 22.4 42.1 32.30 42.1
AAQ 7 Tarsi 18.2 21.6 19.60 21.5 0.087 0.103 0.09 0.021 23.0 40.0 28.30 39.5
AAQ 8 Amgaon 8.1 20.6 11.65 16.9 0.161 0.205 0.17 0.198 10.4 17.2 12.93 16.1
AAQ 9 Katandhara 7.1 21.7 12.39 18.0 0.164 0.208 0.17 0.201 8.7 15.5 11.23 14.4
AAQ 10 Pipaldhara 5.3 19.3 10.16 15.6 0.157 0.201 0.17 0.194 8.2 15.1 10.72 14.0
AAQ 11 Gangapur 8.7 15.9 12.4 15.9 0.106 0.98 0.63 0.98 22.0 36.0 29.80 36.0
AAQ 12 Kanholi 9.2 21.7 12.75 18.0 0.141 0.185 0.15 0.178 11.2 18.0 13.73 16.9
Range 5.3-26.4 0.041-0.98 8.2-42.1
Ambient Air Quality 80 (24 hr) 02 (8 hr) 400 (24hr)
Standards
TABLE 3.5 (Cntd....)

Ozone (μg/m3)
Station Code Location
Min Max Avg 98th %tile
AAQ 1 Project site 11.4 18.1 15.80 17.85
AAQ 2 Khadki 6.8 13.5 11.20 13.25
AAQ 3 Dongargao 5.9 12.6 10.30 12.35
AAQ 4 Ajangaon 8.4 15.1 12.80 14.85
AAQ 5 Khapri 12.9 21.6 17.90 21.60
AAQ 6 Sukli 18.2 22.4 20.30 22.40
AAQ 7 Tarsi 22.0 43.0 30.50 42.00
AAQ 8 Amgaon 6.7 13.4 11.10 13.15
AAQ 9 Katandhara 6.4 13.1 10.80 12.85
AAQ 10 Pipaldhara 5.7 15.8 13.22 15.55
AAQ11 Gangapur 11.0 22.6 18.10 22.30
AAQ 12 Kanholi 7.1 13.8 11.50 13.55
Range 5.7-43.0
Ambient Air Quality Standards 100 (8 hr)
TABLE 3.6
LEVELS OF VOLATILE ORGANIC POLLUTANTS
Station Code Location C6H6(μg/m3) BaP(ng/m3) Total Hydrocarbons (ppm)
AAQ 1 Project site BDL BDL 2.1
AAQ 2 Khadki 1.0 0.03 1.50
AAQ 3 Dongargao 1.1 0.13 1.45
AAQ 4 Ajangaon BDL BDL 0.51
AAQ 5 Khapri 0.6 0.07 0.74
AAQ 6 Sukli 0.8 0.06 0.87
AAQ 7 Tarsi 1.1 0.08 0.90
AAQ 8 Amgaon 0.9 0.07 0.84

Station Code Location C6H6(μg/m3) BaP(ng/m3) Total Hydrocarbons (ppm)

AAQ 9 Katandhara BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 10 Pipaldhara BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 11 Gangapur 0.7 0.05 0.92
AAQ 12 Kanholi 0.6 0.05 0.71
Range BDL-1.1 BDL-0.13 BDL-2.1
Ambient Air Quality Standards 5 (Annual) 1 (Annual) --
BDL: Below Detectable Limit

TABLE 3.7
LEVELS OF HEAVY METALS IN AMBIENT AIR
Station Location Pb As Ni Fe Mn Hg Zn Cu Cd Cr
3 3 3
Code (μg/m ) (ng/m ) (μg/m )
AAQ 1 Project site 0.14 <0.1 <0.1 0.13 0.19 BDL 0.04 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 2 Khadki <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.16 0.11 BDL 0.01 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 3 Dongargao <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.17 0.13 BDL 0.02 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 4 Ajangaon <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.16 0.11 BDL 0.02 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 5 Khapri 0.18 <0.1 3.3 0.16 0.13 BDL 0.03 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 6 Sukli 0.16 <0.1 2.9 0.13 0.11 BDL 0.01 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 7 Tarsi 0.18 <0.1 4.0 0.17 0.14 BDL 0.01 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 8 Amgaon <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.15 0.12 BDL 0.03 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 9 Katandhara <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.13 0.11 BDL 0.01 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 10 Pipaldhara <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.18 0.11 BDL 0.01 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ11 Gangapur 0.18 <0.1 3.0 0.25 0.15 BDL 0.04 BDL BDL BDL
AAQ 12 Kanholi <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.16 0.11 BDL 0.01 BDL BDL BDL
CPCB Standard 1 (24 hr) 6 (Annual) 20 (Annual) -- -- -- -- -- -- --
BDL: Below Detectable Limit
Summary of Observations
PM10: PM10 concentrations ranged from 30.0-64.8 g/m3 in the study area. The maximum concentration
of 64.3 g/m3 was recorded at Khapri village (AAQ5) and minimum concentration 30.0 g/m3 was
observed at Dongargaon (AAQ3). High concentration was due to dust emission due to vehicular traffic.
PM2.5: In the study area, PM2.5 concentrations ranged from 8.0-24.3 g/m3.The maximum concentration
of 24.3 g/m3 was recorded at Khadki village (AAQ2) and the minimum concentration of 8.0 g/m3 was
observed at Pipaldhara (AAQ10).
SO2: Levels of SO2 concentration ranged from 4.8-14.93 g/m3 in the study area. The maximum and
minimum concentration of 14.93 g/m3 at Khapri (AAQ5) and 4.8 g/m3 was observed at Sukli (AAQ6)
village, respectively.
NOx: In the study area, NOx concentrations ranged from 5.3 to 26.4 g/m3. The maximum
concentration of 26.4 g/m3 was recorded at Khadki village (AAQ2) and minimum concentration was
observed at Pipaldhara (AAQ10). The high concentration at Khadki was due to dust on roads and also
vehicular traffic in the area.
CO: CO monitored at the 12 locations in the study area, CO concentration ranged between 0.041 to
0.98 mg/m3. The maximum concentration of 0.98 mg/m3 was recorded at Gangapur (AAQ11) and
minimum concentration was observed at village Sukli (AAQ6). High concentration was due to vehicular
traffic.

NH3: NH3 concentration levels at study area was found to be in the range of 8.2 to 42.1 g/m3.
O3: Concentration levels of ozone in the study area was found to be in the range of 5.7 to 43.0 g/m3.
Concentration levels of heavy metals in PM10 and levels of volatile organic pollutants are presented in
Tables 3.6 & 3.7 respectively.
VOCs: Study of VOCs monitoring was carried out at 12 locations and observed concentrations of
Benzene, BaP and total hydrocarbons in the range of BDL to 1.1 g/m3, BDL to 0.3 g/m3 and BDL to
2.1 ppm respectively.
Heavy Metals:
Heavy metals (As, Cd, Cr, Cu, Pb, Fe, Mn, Hg, Zn and Ni) in PM10 was found to be very less. Most of
the heavy metals in PM10 were found below detectable limits.
The overall ambient air quality with respect to parameters of significance was found to be within
prescribed AAQMS by CPCB.
A preliminary reconnaissance was undertaken to identify the major noise generating sources in the
study area. Twelve (12) locations were identified based on the activities in the village area, traffic and
sensitive areas like hospitals and schools. The noise level monitoring locations are shown in Figure
3.3 and details are given in Table 3.8.
Sound pressure levels (SPL) were measured at all locations. Considering residential, commercial,
Industrial and sensitive location. The noise levels were taken for 24 hours. The day time noise levels
were monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night time levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the locations
within 10 km radius of the study area. The noise levels measured are shown in Table 3.9.
TABLE 3.8
NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS
Sr. Location Location Source Distance Direction Latitude Longitude
No. Code (km)
w.r.t. project site
1. N1 Project site Industrial -- -- 20°56'18.60"N 78°55'1.24"E
2. N2 Khadki Commercial 4.3 W 20°56'24.06"N 78°54'30.06"E
3. N3 Dongargao Residential 6.6 WSW 20°54'55.30"N 78°51'29.27"E
4. N4 Ajangaon Residential 7.4 SSW 20°53'11.39"N 78°52'16.22"E
5. N5 Khapri Commercial 4.08 SSE 20°54'06.02"N 78°55'13.09"E
6. N6 Sukli Commercial 5.6 NE 20°58'48.27"N 78°56'54.82"E
7. N7 Tarsi Residential 8.4 SSE 20°52'07.88"N 78°56'56.95"E
8. N8 Amgaon Residential 1.42 SE 20°55'48.27"N 78°55'40.21"E
9. N9 Katandhara Silence 5.1 NNW 20°58'59.35"N 78°54'11.68"E
10. N10 Pipaldhara Silence 3.1 NNW 20°57'44.24"N 78°54'01.61"E
11. N11 Gangapur Silence 2.53 ESE 20°55'12.68"N 78°55'53.61"E
12. N12 Kanholi Commercial 7.2 W 20°56'04.49"N 78°50'50.84"E

FIGURE 3.3: NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

3.3.1 Noise Monitoring
Monitoring Methodology of Noise
Sampling Collection
Environment Sampling Sampling Sampling
Sampling Detection Methodology
Component Location Parameter Frequency
Equipment Limit
Ambient 12 Decibels- Once during Noise level 0.1 dB (A) SLM 100
Noise levels locations dB (A) the study Meter [IS 15575-2
period. (hourly (2005)]
reading for 24
hrs at each
location)

The statistical analysis was done for measured noise levels at 12 locations and near national & state
highways during winter season 2014-2015. The levels were analyzed for Leqday and Leqnight. The
results are presented in Tables 3.9 & 3.10.
TABLE 3.9
NOISE LEVELS IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No. Monitoring Locations Equivalent Noise Level
Leq Day Leq Night
Residential Area CPCB Standards dB(A) 55 45
1 Dongargao 46.2 37.1
2 Ajangaon 47.3 39.1
3 Tarsi 46.0 41.0
4 Amgaon 48.7 41.6
Range 46.0-48.7 37.1-41.6
Commercial Area CPCB Standards dB(A) 65 55
5 Khadki 53.8 42.9
6 Khapri 57.0 47.0
7 Sukli 51.0 43.0
8 Kanholi 51.9 43.8
Range 51.0-57.0 42.9-47.0
Silence Zone CPCB Standards dB(A) 50 40
9 Katandhara 51.3 38.9
10 Pipaldhara 53.8 42.7
11 Gangapur 44.0 38.0
Range 44.0-53.8 38.0-42.7
Industrial Area CPCB Standards dB(A) 75 70
12 Project site 61.7 52.9
Source: Field monitoring and analysis by Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd., Nagpur
TABLE 3.10
BACKGROUND NOISE LEVELS IN INDUSTRIAL AREA NEAR HIGHWAYS
Sr. No. Location Leq day Leq night
1. Near NH-7 63.0 57.0
2. Near SH-3 60.0 57.0
3. Near SH-264 63.3 57.0
Range
CPCB Standards dB(A)- Industrial Area 75 70
Source: Field monitoring and analysis by Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd., Nagpur
Baseline Status
a. Day Time Noise Levels (Leq day)
Background noise levels were monitored in the villages within the study area. The noise levels at all
locations ranged between 44.0 dB (A) to 61.7 dB (A). At village Khadki and Kanholi, day time noise
level was 53.8 dB(A) and 51.9 dB(A) respectively which was well within the prescribed limit of 65 dB
(A) for commercial area. At Pipaldhara village and Katandhara village, day time noise level was 53.8
dB(A) and 51.3 dB(A) respectively which was higher the prescribed limit of 50 dB (A) for silence zone
due to unusual noise of animals during monitoring at Pipaldhara village and unexpected kids shouting
at Katandhra village near Rotatry Green Club Primary School, Katandhra.

Noise levels in industrial area near highways was 60.0-63.0 dB (A) during day time which was well
within the prescribed limit of 75 dB (A) for industrial area.
b. Night Time Noise Levels (Leq night)
The night time noise levels ranged between 37.1 dB (A) to 52.9 dB (A). At residential locations, noise
levels ranged between 37.1-41.6 dB (A). At commercial area, noise levels were observed to be 42.9-
47 dB (A) and in sensitive areas noise level ranged between 38.0-42.7 dB(A) which was well within
the prescribed limit of 40 dB (A) for silence zone, at Pipaldhra village is shows high due to
unexpected activity.
Background noise levels near industrial area ranged between 57.0 dB (A) during night time which
was well within the prescribed limit of 70 dB (A) for industrial area.
c. Noise Levels Due to Traffic in the Study Area
The National highway (NH-7) is passing through this region and having major traffic activities.
Agglomeration and congestion of traffic was observed on main roads and at the crossing of important
roads near petrol pumps, market and industrial areas. The vehicular traffic was monitored at different
crossings within the study area during peak hours.
During survey period, the traffic density at these junctions were observed to be very high. The noise
levels monitored at some of the major traffic junctions along with their peak traffic density are listed in
Table 3.11.
TABLE 3.11
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC AND CORRESPONDING NOISE LEVELS DURING PEAK HOURS
IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. Traffic Intersection Distance from Direction TrafficDensity per peak hours
No. Project Site w.r.t project H M L
site
1. National Highway-7 8.1 ESE 184 179 248
2. State Highway-3 7.24 ESE 71 54 67
3. State Highway264 8.9 ESE 63 52 81
Observations:
1) Width of the roads was found less than the requirement for accommodating the daily plying traffic,
particularly, during day time. Heavy traffic on the main roads passing through the villages or
townships during day time, contribute significantly the noise levels in the nearby residential areas.
During night time traffic density was found to be less, therefore, noise was mainly due to industrial
activities.
2) The major commercial activities in the region are the local market places. Other than regular
human activities, the traffic, particularly, industrial goods vehicles are the main contributors for noise
in these areas.
3) The noise levels were recorded at some hospitals and colleges/schools. High noise levels were
observed a few places because of parking besides the main road sides.
4) Most of the industries existing in the nearby industrial areas have not developed sufficient green
cover surrounding them. Hence, attenuation was not observed in the study region.


In general, any industrial project is expected to cause impact on water environment in two ways: one
is stress on water resources (continuous withdrawal of large quantities of water) and other is pollution
through discharge of effluents. These impacts may be related to either both surface and groundwater
resources in the project area depending on the specific situation. To address these issues, it is
necessary to ensure the availability of water resources in project area with respect to their existing
quality as well as their supportive capacity to represent the baseline status of water environment.
Surface and Ground Water Sampling Locations
Total 14 surface and groundwater samples were collected from the study area (7 surface water and 7
groundwater samples). These samples were collected as grab samples presented and brought to the
laboratory and were analyzed for various parameters and compared with the standards. The water
sampling locations are listed in Table-3.12 and are depicted in Figure-3.4. The selection of the surface
and groundwater sampling locations was a made based on the surrounding activities, water intake,
drinking sources and discharge point of view.
TABLE 3.12
SURFACE AND GROUND WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code Location Source Direction Distance Latitude Longitude
(km)
w.r.t. Project Site
Surface Water
SW1 Near Borgaon Shashimar Nala NNW 8 21°00'33.08"N 78°54'01.50"E
SW2 Near Vadgaon Shashimar Nala NE 7.7 20°58'39.03"N 78°58'42.38"E
SW3 Near Devlipeth Wenna River ENE 7.8 20°57'27.08"N 78°59'16.28"E
SW4 Near Turkmari Wenna River E 7.9 20°57'20.14"N 78°59'27.07"E
SW5 Near Takalghat Krishna Nala SE 4.01 20°55'00.83"N 78°56'52.65"E
SW6 Pimpri Krishna nala S 2.17 20°55'07.65"N 78°55'02.03"E
SW7 Kanholi Talab Kanholi Talab W 8.09 20°56'22.76"N 78°50'20.87"E
Ground Water
GW1 Nagajhari Tubewell NNW 4.2 20°58'33.77"N 78°54'28.38"E
GW2 Pipaldhra Borewell NW 3.14 20°57'44.10"N 78°54'01.81"E
GW3 Katandhara Dugwell NW 5.13 20°58'59.58"N 78°54'12.34"E
GW4 Dongargaon Borewell SW 6.65 20°54'55.30"N 78°51'29.27"E
GW5 Khadki Tubewell W 4.36 20°56'24.06"N 78°52'30.06"E
GW6 Sukli Dugwell NE 5.6 20°58'48.27"N 78°56'54.82"E
GW7 Kanholi Dugwell W 8.09 20°56'22.76"N 78°50'20.87"E

FIGURE 3.4: SURFACE AND GROUND WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
3.4.1 Physico-Chemical Characteristics

3.4.1.1 Surface Water Quality
The physico-chemical characteristics of the surface water samples collected and analysed are
presented in Table 3.13 and are compared with the IS-10500 standards. The analysis results
indicated that the pH ranged between 6.82 to 8.27 which was well within the specified standard of 6.5
to 8.5. The TDS was observed to be 182 to 340 mg/l which was within the permissible limit of 2000
mg/l. The total hardness recorded was in the range of 114 to 148.64 mg/l as CaCO3 which was also
within the permissible limit of 600 mg/l. The nitrate was found to be in the range of 5.2 to 14.7 mg/l.
The levels of chloride and sulphate were found to be in the range of 5.91 to 61.29 mg/l and 6.3 to
34.81 mg/l respectively. Heavy metals content (i.e. As, Al, Cd, Cr, Cu, Pb, Fe, Mn, Zn and Hg) were

found to be very low and within the specified standards. The overall surface water quality was found
to be safe physico- chemically for drinking and domestic purposes.
3.4.1.2 Groundwater Quality
The physico-chemical characteristics of groundwater are presented in Table 3.14 and compared with
the IS-10500 standards.The analysis results indicated that the pH ranged between 7.19 to 8.16 which
was well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5.
The TDS was ranging from 298 to 442 mg/l. Total hardness was found to be in the range of 114.63 to
278 mg/l. The fluoride concentrations were varied between 0.11-0.32 mg/l which were within the
acceptable limit of 1 mg/l. The nitrate and sulphate were found in the range of 2.57 to 4.11 mg/l and
11.57 to 31.2 mg/l respectively. Calcium varied between 62.29 to 219 mg/l. The heavy metals content
(i.e. As, Al, Cd, Cr, Cu, Pb, Fe, Mn, Zn and Hg) were found to be within permissible limits.
3.4.2 Bacteriological Characteristics
Coliform group of organisms are indicators of faecal contamination in water. Water samples were
analysed for total and faecal coliform deploying membrane filtration technique. Bacteriological quality
of surface and groundwater in winter season is presented in Tables 3.13 and 3.14 respectively.
Bacteriologically, all surface water samples were faecally contaminated and chlorination is needed
before use for drinking purpose whereas some of the groundwater samples were also found faecally
contaminated and need chlorination before use for drinking purpose.
Overall surface water quality was found to be physico-chemically suitable however bacteriologically
contaminated and need chlorination before consumption. The ground water quality in the study area
was mineralized with respect to total dissolved solids, hardness, alkalinity, however safe
bacteriologically.
3.4.3 Demand Parameters
3.4.3.1 Surface Water Quality
The demand parameters of surface water are presented in Table 3.13 and compared with the
(CPCB) standards classified for the surface water bodies. The analysis results indicated that the
dissolved oxygen, chemical oxygen demand (COD) and biochemical oxygen demand ranged
between 6.2 to 6.7, < 5 to 21.7 and < 3 to 6.4 mg/l respectively

EIA for Proposed Expansion of Butibori Industrial Area (BIA – Phase II), Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, State Maharashtra.
TABLE 3.13
SURFACE WATER QUALITY
Sr. Test Parameter Measurement As per IS 10500 : 2012 Borgaon Vadgaon Devlipeth Turakinari
No. Unit (Drinking Water - Specification) (SW1) (SW2) (SW3) (SW4)
Acceptable *Permissible Limit Shashimar Nala Vena River
Limit
1. pH value - 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation 6.93 at 250C 7.16 at 6.87 at 7.32 at 250C
250C 250C
2. Electrical Conductivity at 250C µS/cm - - 419 372 539 464
3. Turbidity NTU 1 5 2.7 7.1 2.1 11
4. Nitrate mg / l 45 No relaxation 6.4 12.3 10.7 8.26
5. Total Nitrogen mg / l -- -- 2.08 1.24 2.41 2.86
6. Iron (as Fe) mg / l 0.3 No relaxation 0.34 0.42 0.39 0.27
7. Total dissolved solids (TDS) mg / l 500 2000 235 209 302 260
8. Total suspended solid (TSS) mg / l -- -- 28 37 42 37
9. Fluoride (as F) mg / l 1.0 1.5 0.19 0.24 0.27 0.21
10. Sodium (as Na) mg / l -- -- 9.6 6.2 149 9.4
11. Potassium mg / l -- -- 5.2 1.4 53.82 2.8
12. Total Phosphate (as PO4) mg / l -- -- 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.12
13. Chlorides (as Cl) mg / l 250 1000 7.29 6.82 5.91 21.28
14. Total alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 162.81 154.91 162.84 154.07
15. Total hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 129.64 117.27 131.29 148.64
16. Calcium hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l -- -- 76.4 94.8 82.4 91.6
17. Dissolved Oxygen mg / l -- -- 6.4 6.7 6.4 6.7
18. Sulphate (as SO4) mg / l 200 400 7.1 7.4 11.7 21.4
19. Copper (as Cu) mg / l 0.05 1.5 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
20. Manganese (as Mn) mg / l 0.1 0.3 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05
21. Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon (PAH) mg / l 0.1 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
22. Cobalt (as CO) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
23. Cadmium (as Cd) mg / l 0.003 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
24. Arsenic (as As) mg / l 0.01 0.05 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
25. Lead (as Pb) mg / l 0.01 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
26. Zinc (as Zn) mg / l 5 15 1.7 2.4 2.4 3.1
27. Nickel (as Ni) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01

Sr. Test Parameter Measurement As per IS 10500 : 2012 Borgaon Vadgaon Devlipeth Turakinari
No. Unit (Drinking Water - Specification) (SW1) (SW2) (SW3) (SW4)
Acceptable *Permissible Limit Shashimar Nala Vena River
Limit
28. Total Chromium (as Cr) mg / l 0.05 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
29. Oil and Grease mg / l -- -- <1 <1 <1 <1
30. Chemical oxygen demand (COD) mg / l --- --- 21.7 16.3 <5 <5
31. Biochemical oxygen demand mg / l --- --- 6.4 5.2 <3 <3
(BOD at 270C for 3 days)
32. Faecal Coliform MPN/100 ml -- -- Present Present Present Present
33. Total coliform MPN/100 ml Absent Absent 14 17 14 12
TABLE 3.13 Contd...

SURFACE WATER QUALITY
As per IS 10500 : 2012 Pipaldhra Takalghat Kanholi
Sr. Measurement (Drinking Water - Specification) (SW5) (SW6) (SW7)
Test Parameter
No. Unit Acceptable *Permissible Kanholi bara
Krishna Nala
Limit Limit lake
1. pH value - 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation 6.82 at 250C 8.24 at 250C 8.27 at 210C
2. Electrical Conductivity at 250C µS/cm - - 526 586 315
3. Turbidity NTU 1 5 3.1 7.1 3.4
4. Nitrate mg / l 45 No relaxation 9.18 14.27 5.2
5. Total Nitrogen mg / l -- -- 2.19 2.16 1.26
6. Iron (as Fe) mg / l 0.3 No relaxation 0.18 0.26 0.51
7. Total dissolved solids (TDS) mg / l 500 2000 294 340 182
8. Total suspended solid (TSS) mg / l -- -- 43 51 24
9. Fluoride (as F) mg / l 1.0 1.5 0.24 0.32 < 0.1
10. Sodium (as Na) mg / l -- -- 12.4 12.2 8.2
11. Potassium mg / l -- -- 5.2 5.1 4.8
12. Total Phosphate (as PO4) mg / l -- -- 0.10 0.08 0.14
13. Chlorides (as Cl) mg / l 250 1000 52.81 61.29 8.55
14. Total alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 117 104 147
15. Total hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 129 164 114

As per IS 10500 : 2012 Pipaldhra Takalghat Kanholi

Sr. Measurement (Drinking Water - Specification) (SW5) (SW6) (SW7)
Test Parameter
No. Unit Acceptable *Permissible Kanholi bara
Krishna Nala
Limit Limit lake
16. Calcium hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l -- -- 88 96 75
17. Dissolved Oxygen mg / l -- -- 6.2 6.4 6.6
18. Sulphate (as SO4) mg / l 200 400 34.81 26.29 6.3
19. Copper (as Cu) mg / l 0.05 1.5 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
20. Manganese (as Mn) mg / l 0.1 0.3 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05
21. Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon (PAH) mg / l 0.1 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
22. Cobalt (as CO) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
23. Cadmium (as Cd) mg / l 0.003 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
24. Arsenic (as As) mg / l 0.01 0.05 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
25. Lead (as Pb) mg / l 0.01 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
26. Zinc (as Zn) mg / l 5 15 2.4 1.7 2.4
27. Nickel (as Ni) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
28. Total Chromium (as Cr) mg / l 0.05 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
29. Oil and Grease mg / l -- -- <1 <1 <1
30. Chemical oxygen demand (COD) mg / l --- --- <5 <5 <5
Biochemical oxygen demand
31. mg / l --- --- <3 <3 <3
32. Faecal Coliform MPN/100 ml -- -- Present Absent Present
33. Total coliform MPN/100 ml Absent Absent Present Present Present
ND: Not detectable.

TABLE 3.14
GROUNDWATER QUALITY
Sr. Test Parameter Measurement As per IS 10500 : 2012 Nagajhari Pipaldhra Katandhara Dongargaon
No. Unit (Drinking Water - Specification) (GW1) (GW2) (GW3) (GW4)
Acceptable *Permissible Tubewell Borewell Dugwell Borewell
Limit Limit
1. pH value - 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation 7.19 at 250C 7.64 at 250C 8.07 at 250C 7.83 at 250C
2. Electrical Conductivity at 250C µS/cm - - 668 534 648 668
3. Turbidity NTU 1 5 1.4 0.8 1.7 1.4
4. Nitrate mg / l 45 No relaxation 3.4 3.42 4.11 2.57
5. Total Nitrogen mg / l -- -- 5.39 4.82 5.16 4.96
6. Iron (as Fe) mg / l 0.3 No relaxation 0.19 0.21 0.26 0.24
7. Total dissolved solids (TDS) mg / l 500 2000 372 298 362 388
8. Total suspended solid (TSS) mg / l -- -- 17 24 18 21
9. Fluoride (as F) mg / l 1.0 1.5 0.21 0.11 0.16 0.19
10. Sodium (as Na) mg / l -- -- 64 53.19 47.29 53.84
11. Potassium mg / l -- -- 4.2 8.4 8.2 8.52
12. Total Phosphate (as PO4) mg / l -- -- 8.12 3.1 9.27 8.16
13. Chlorides (as Cl) mg / l 250 1000 61.28 57.29 101.87 117.29
14. Total alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 347.16 182.64 162.34 182.34
15. Total hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 167.57 143.91 142.91 157.21
16. Calcium hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l -- -- 62.29 67.82 78.87 98.87
17. Dissolved Oxygen mg / l -- -- 6.1 6.3 6.1 6.2
18. Sulphate (as SO4) mg / l 200 400 26.7 21.54 18.57 16.54
19. Copper (as Cu) mg / l 0.05 1.5 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
20. Manganese (as Mn) mg / l 0.1 0.3 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05
21. Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon (PAH) mg / l 0.1 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
22. Cobalt (as CO) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
23. Cadmium (as Cd) mg / l 0.003 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
24. Arsenic (as As) mg / l 0.01 0.05 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
25. Lead (as Pb) mg / l 0.01 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
26. Zinc (as Zn) mg / l 5 15 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1
27. Nickel (as Ni) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
28. Total Chromium (as Cr) mg / l 0.05 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03

Sr. Test Parameter Measurement As per IS 10500 : 2012 Nagajhari Pipaldhra Katandhara Dongargaon
No. Unit (Drinking Water - Specification) (GW1) (GW2) (GW3) (GW4)
Acceptable *Permissible Tubewell Borewell Dugwell Borewell
Limit Limit
29. Faecal Coliform MPN/100 ml -- -- Absent Absent Absent Absent
30. Total coliform MPN/100 ml Absent Absent Absent Absent 14 Absent
ND: Not detectable.
TABLE 3.14 Contd...
GROUNDWATER QUALITY
Sr. Test Parameter Measurement As per IS 10500 : 2012 Khadki (GW5) Sukli (GW6) Kanholi (GW7)
No. Unit (Drinking Water - Specification)
Acceptable Limit *Permissible Limit Tubewell Borewell Dugwell
1. pH value - 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation 8.16 at 250C 7.84 at 250C 7.87 at 210C
2. Electrical Conductivity at 250C µS/cm - - 692 603 776
3. Turbidity NTU 1 5 6.2 1.1 6.8
4. Nitrate mg / l 45 No relaxation 3.52 3.59 2.86
5. Total Nitrogen mg / l -- -- 6.19 5.82 5.82
6. Iron (as Fe) mg / l 0.3 No relaxation 0.21 0.14 0.36
7. Total dissolved solids (TDS) mg / l 500 2000 394 342 442
8. Total suspended solid (TSS) mg / l -- -- 24 10 21
9. Fluoride (as F) mg / l 1.0 1.5 0.32 0.24 0.23
10. Sodium (as Na) mg / l -- -- 61.89 43.86 42.2
11. Potassium mg / l -- -- 2 2 2
12. Total Phosphate (as PO4) mg / l -- -- 9.27 8.19 5.7
13. Chlorides (as Cl) mg / l 250 1000 134 112 57
14. Total alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 217.54 162.81 363.0
15. Total hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 164.91 114.63 278
16. Calcium hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l -- -- 86.29 68.29 219
17. Dissolved Oxygen mg / l -- -- 6.3 6.4 6.2
18. Sulphate (as SO4) mg / l 200 400 14.82 11.57 31.2
19. Copper (as Cu) mg / l 0.05 1.5 < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
20. Manganese (as Mn) mg / l 0.1 0.3 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05

Sr. Test Parameter Measurement As per IS 10500 : 2012 Khadki (GW5) Sukli (GW6) Kanholi (GW7)
No. Unit (Drinking Water - Specification)
Acceptable Limit *Permissible Limit Tubewell Borewell Dugwell
21. Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon mg / l 0.1 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
(PAH)
22. Cobalt (as CO) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
23. Cadmium (as Cd) mg / l 0.003 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
24. Arsenic (as As) mg / l 0.01 0.05 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
25. Lead (as Pb) mg / l 0.01 No relaxation < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001
26. Zinc (as Zn) mg / l 5 15 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1
27. Nickel (as Ni) mg / l -- -- < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
28. Total Chromium (as Cr) mg / l 0.05 No relaxation < 0.03 < 0.03 < 0.03
29. Faecal Coliform MPN/100 ml -- -- Absent Absent Absent
30. Total coliform MPN/100 ml Absent Absent 16 12 12
ND: Not detectable.

Water Requirement
Total water requirement for the proposed expansion of Butuibori MIDC industrial area is estimated to be
7 MLD during operation phase which will be sourced from Vadgaon Rama Dam. The water works is
existing on Rama Dam. Total capacity of Rama dam is 1300 MLD. The existing water works capacity is
61 MLD (intake well). The existing requirement is 45 MLD and remaining 16 MLD will be used for phase
II. No groundwater will be used for proposed expansion.
The physico-chemical characteristics of the Rama dam which will be the main source for the proposed
expansion MIDC industrial area are presented in Table 3.15 and compared with the IS-10500 standards.
The analysis results indicated pH 7.3, which was well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. The
TDS was observed to be 251 mg/l which was within the permissible limit of 2000 mg/l. The total hardness
recorded was 171mg/l as CaCO3 which was also within the permissible limit of 600 mg/l. The nitrate was
found to be 6.8 mg/l. The levels of chloride and sulphate were found to be 18 mg/l and 12.2 mg/l
respectively. Heavy metals content (i.e. As, Cd, Cr, Cu, Pb, Fe, Mn, Zn and Hg) were found to be very
low and within specified standards. The overall water quality was found to be safe for drinking purpose
physico- chemically however bacteriologically found to be contaminated and needs chlorination before
consumption.
Wastewater Generation
The wastewater generation from proposed expansion industrial area is estimated to be 2230 m 3/d and
the domestic generation will be 552 m3/day from proposed development. The treated effluent from the
common effluent treatment plant will be used on site for landscaping and flushing purposes. However, it
is planned to use treated effluent for HRTS. The HRTS that will be developed in 35 ha of land available
with MIDC at in a lower contour in phase wise. Apart from this, rainwater harvesting will be carried out
within the site for artificial recharge of groundwater. The wastewater collection system will be close
condute system (pipeline system) which will be corrosion and chemical resistant pipeline. There will be
intermittent inspection, collection chambers and pumping system if required. The pipeline network for the
collection of wastewater from individual industries to CETP will be designed by competent consultants.
This will be developed by MIDC.
The domestic water requirement is estimated to be 690 m 3/d. The domestic waste generation will be 552
m3/d. For disposal of domestic waste, individual industries will make provision for sending it to septic
tank/ soak pit. There will not be any disposal of domestic waste into nearby water body. However
provision will be made by individual industries to use treated domestic waste for plantation. MIDC will
check this and inform to MPCB regarding any ambiguity in the disposal of domestic waste. MIDC will
insist on the zero discharge policy. So there will not be any discharge in any aquatic system.
TABLE 3.15
PHYSICO-CHEMICAL AND BACTERIOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF RAMA DAM
Sr. Test Parameter Measurement Unit As per IS 10500 : 2012 Rama Dam
No. (Drinking Water - Specification) (Vadgaon)
Acceptable *Permissible
Limit Limit
1. pH value - 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation 7.3 at 280C
2. Electrical Conductivity at µS/cm - - 456
250C
3. Turbidity NTU 1 5 11
4. Apparent colour Hazen units 5 15 7

Sr. Test Parameter Measurement Unit As per IS 10500 : 2012 Rama Dam
No. (Drinking Water - Specification) (Vadgaon)
Acceptable *Permissible
Limit Limit
5. Odour - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable
6. Taste - Agreeable Agreeable -
7. Nitrates (as NO3) mg / l 45 No relaxation 6.8
8. Iron (as Fe) mg / l 0.3 No relaxation 0.19
9. Total dissolved solids mg / l 500 2000 251
(TDS)
10. Total suspended solid mg / l -- -- 37
(TSS)
11. Fluoride (as F) mg / l 1.0 1.5 0.21
12. Cyanide (as CN) mg / l 0.05 No relaxation < 0.005
13. Sodium (as Na) mg / l -- -- 32
14. Potassium mg / l -- -- 2
15. Total Phosphate (as PO4) mg / l -- -- 0.12
16. Chlorides (as Cl) mg / l 250 1000 18
17. Total alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 92
18. Total hardness (as CaCO3) mg / l 200 600 171
19. Calcium (as Ca) mg / l 75 200 48.4
20. Magnesium (as Mg) mg / l 30 100 12
21. Dissolved Oxygen mg / l -- -- 6.2
22. Chemical oxygen demand mg / l --- --- <5
(COD)
23. Biochemical oxygen mg / l --- --- <3
demand
24. Sulphate (as SO4) mg / l 200 400 12.2
25. Copper (as Cu) mg / l 0.05 1.5 < 0.03
26. Manganese (as Mn) mg / l 0.1 0.3 < 0.05
27. Phenolic compounds mg / l 0.001 0.002 < 0.001
(as C6H5OH)
28. Mercury (as Hg) mg / l 0.001 No relaxation ND
29. Cadmium (as Cd) mg / l 0.003 No relaxation ND
30. Arsenic (as As) mg / l 0.01 0.05 ND
31. Lead (as Pb) mg / l 0.01 No relaxation ND
32. Zinc (as Zn) mg / l 5 15 0.08
33. Total Chromium (as Cr) mg / l 0.05 No relaxation ND
34. Oil and Grease mg / l -- -- <1
35. Total Hydrocarbon mg / l -- -- ND
36. Total coliform MPN/100 ml Absent Absent 23
37. Faecal Coliform MPN/100 ml -- -- Absent
38. Escherichia coli per 100 ml Absent Absent Present


3.5.1 Drainage of the Study Area
The distance, direction of River/ Streams/ Nala found in the surrounding areas of 10 km radius from the project
sites are given in Table 3.16 and drainage pattern within 10 km radius of study area is shown in Figure 3.5.
TABLE 3.16
DISTANCE AND DIRECTION OF RIVER/STREAM/NALA PRESENT IN PROJECT SITE
WITHIN 10 KM RADIUS
Name of the River/Stream/Nala Distance from Project Site Direction from Project Site
Krishna Nala 2.9 Km S
Murjhari Nala 1.5 Km S
Wena River 6.8 Km E
Kanholi Talav 5.02 Km W
Bid Borgaon 7.3 Km NNW

FIGURE 3.5: REPRESENTS THE RIVER/STREAMS/NALA (DRAINAGE) OF THE STUDY AREA

WITHIN 10 KM RADIUS FROM THE PROJECT SITE

3.5.2 Land Environment using Remote Sensing and GIS Application

Remote sensing technology has emerged as a powerful tool in providing reliable information on various
natural resources at different levels of spatial details; it has played an important role in effective mapping
and periodic monitoring of natural resources including environment.
With the availability of high resolution remote sensing data, newer areas of remote sensing applications
have been identified, techniques of data processing have been improved and computer based image
processing systems have become more effective.
Based on these application the land use and land cover studies refers to man‟s activities on land, utilitarian in
nature whereas land cover denotes the vegetation cover, water body cover and artificial constructions, etc.
The Land use/land cover classification system standardized by Department of Space, for mapping different
agro-climatic zones has been adopted. The classification systems are as follows.
* Build up land:- it is defined as an of human habitation developed due to non-agricultural use and that
which has a cover of building, transport, communication utilities in association with water, vegetation
and vacant lands.
* Land with or without scrub: - They occupy (relatively) higher topography like uplands or high ground
with or without scrub. These lands are generally prone to degradation or erosion. These exclude hilly
and mountainous terrain.
* Fallow land: - It is described as agricultural lands which is taken up for cultivation but is temporarily
allowed to rest un-cropped for one or more seasons, but not less than one year. These lands are
particularly those which are seen devoid of crops at the time when the imagery is taken of both
seasons.
* Dense Evergreen forest:-It is described as forest, which comprises of thick and dense canopy of all
trees, which predominantly remain green throughout the year. It includes both coniferous and tropical
broad-lived evergreen trees. Semi- evergreen forest is a mixture of both deciduous and evergreen
trees but the latter predominate.
* Water bodies: - Area persistently covered by water such as river and reservoir, lakes.
3.5.3 Land use of Study Area

The land-use & land cover map of the 10 km radial study area from the periphery of project site has
been prepared using Resource SAT-2 , sensor-LISS-3 having 23.5m spatial resolution and date of pass
29 May 2014 satellite image with reference to Google Earth data. In order to strengthen the baseline
information on existing land use pattern, the following data covering approx. 20°50‟53.82” N- 21°01‟41.50” N
latitude and 78°49‟16.57” E-79°00‟47.03” E longitude and elevation 272-292 meter are used.
Land use pattern of the study area as well as the catchment area was carried out by standard methods
of analysis of remotely sensed data and followed by ground truth collection and interpretation of satellite
data. The outcome of land use study is presented below in subsequent tables and figures.
DATA SPECIFICATION USED FOR PRESENTS STUDY
Satellite/ Image Sensor Scene-Spec Spatial resolution Date of Acquisition
Resource SAT-2 LISS-3 99-57 23.5 m 29 May 2014

Objective
The objectives of Land use studies are:
 To determine the present land use pattern as per EIA/EMP norms by MoEF.
 To determine the drainage pattern present in the study area.
Data Used
A. Remote sensing data
 IRS P6 LISS-3 Scene
B. Collateral Data
 Survey of India toposheet (OSM) bearing 55 L/13and 55 K/16(1:50,000 Scale)
Methodology
The land use pattern of the study area was studied by analysing the available secondary data published in the
District Primary Census abstract of the year 2001 & 2011.
Salient features of the adopted methodology are given below:
• Acquisition of satellite data
• Preparation of base map from Survey of India topo sheets
• Data analysis using visual interpretation techniques
• Ground truth studies or field checks using GPS
• Finalization of the map
• Digitization using head up vectorisation method
• Topology construction in GIS
• Area calculation for statistics generation
• Masking
The spatial resolution and the spectral bands in which the sensor collects the remotely sensed data are two
important parameters for any land use survey. IRS P6 LISS III data offers spatial resolution of 23.5 m with the
swath width of 141 x 141 km. the data is collected in four visible bands namely green (Band 2) (0.52-0.59µ),
red (Band 3) (0.62-0.69µ), near infrared (NIR) (Band 4) (0.77-0.89µ), short wave infrared band (Band 5) (1.55-
1.75µ) with orbit repeat period of 24 days (three days revisit). The shapes, sizes, colours, tone and texture of
several geomorphic features are visible in IRS data.
Four spectral bands provide high degree of measurability through band combination including FCC
generation, bands rationing, classification etc. These features of the IRS data are particularity important for
better comprehension and delineation of the land use classes. Hence, IRS P6 LISS-III data has been used for
land use mapping.
The digital image processing was performed on Erdas Imagine 2014 and QGIS 2.2 software system on high-
configured computer. This software package is a collection of image processing functions necessary for pre-
processing, rectification, band combination, filtering, statistics, classification etc. Apart from contrast stretching,
there are large numbers of image processing functions that can be performed on this station. Arc map 9.3 is
used for final layout presentation.
The satellite data from the compact disc is loaded on the hard disk and by studying quick look (the sampled
image of the appropriate area) the sub-scene of the study area is extracted.
Supervised classification using all the spectral bands can separate fairly accurately, the different land use
classes at level II on the basis of the spectral responses, which involve the following three steps:
1. Acquisition of ground truth
2. Calculation of the statistics of training area
3. Classification using maximum likelihood algorithm
The training areas for classification were homogeneous, well spread throughout the scene with bordering

pixels excluded in processing. Several training sets have been used through the scene for similar land use
classes. After evaluating the statistical parameters of training sets, the training areas were rectified by deleting
no congruous training sets and creating new ones.
3.5.3.1 Pre-field Interpretation of Satellite Data

The False Colour Composite (FCC) of LISS-3 satellite imagery having 23.5 m spatial resolution satellite
data at 1:50,000 scale was used for pre-field interpretation work. Taking the help of topo sheets, geology,
geo-morphology and by using the image elements, the features were identified and delineated the
boundaries roughly. Each feature was identified on image by their image elements like tone, texture,
colour, shape, size, pattern and association. A tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use was
formulated. The sample area for field check is selected covering all the physiographic, land use/land
cover feature cum image characteristics. Figure 3.6 shows the FCC of LISS-3 Imagery.
FIGURE 3.6: FCC OF 00-10 KM RADIUS WITH PROJECT LOCATION

3.5.3.2 Ground Truth Collection

Both topo sheets and imagery were carried for field verification and a transverse plan using existing road
network was made to cover as many representative sample areas as possible to observe the broad land
use features and to adjust the sample areas according to field conditions. Detail field observations and
investigations were carried out and noted the land use features on the imagery.
3.5.3.3 Post Field Work for Land Use/Land Cover Classification

The base maps of the study area were prepared, with the help of Survey of India Toposheets on
1:50,000 scale. Preliminary interpreted land use and the land cover features boundaries from IRS-2,
sensor LISS-3 having 23.5 m spatial resolution,False Colour Composite were modified in light of field
information and the final thematic details were transferred onto the base maps. The final interpreted and
classified thematic map was cartograph. The cartographic map was categorically differentiate with
standard colour coding and described features with standard symbols. All the classes were identified and
marked by the standard legend on the map.The following Land Cover classes were derived and
classified as under:
1. Agricultural land
2. Settlements
3. Dense Forest
4. Open scrub
5. Mines/Quarry
6. Water Bodies
Total area of 10 km radius is about 314 sq. km.
3.5.3.4 Land Use/Land Cover Classification- Interpretation
The Land Cover classes were extracted following a Visual interpretation method or on screen digitization
of the Resource Sat-2 Imagery, sensor LISS-3 having 23.5 m spatial resolutionimage. These were later
verified by using SOI toposheet and Google Earth imagery. Polygon layers for each class were digitized
and the respective areas were calculated. The Land Cover classes and their coverage can be seen in
the following Table 3.17 and its distribution is shown in Figure 3.8. The present Land Cover classes are
represented in Figure 3.7. Total six major land use/ land cover classes were demarcated in the study
area and a thematic map of 1:50,000 scaleswere generated incorporating these classified categories
considering the area of the project. The area as a whole represents a gently slope, drained by a number
of north to south east flowing rivers which debouche into the one Wenna River, in which one reservoir
has been set up for water circulation for MIDC area.It is also observed that the Krishna nala and
Murjharinalawhich is one of the principle stream flows through the project site in southern area and one
of the principal stream for Wenna river meets at East direction also there are various channel which flows
into the 10 km periphery of the project area. It is also observed that the Kanholi Talav which is present in
the west direction flows towards the west to eastern part of the study area.

21.02
21
20.98
20.96
20.94
20.92
20.9
20.88
20.86
78.84 78.86 78.88 78.9 78.92 78.94 78.96 78.98 79
Legend
Industrial Settlement Open Scrub
Agriculture Land Mining Quarry Water Bodies
Settlement 10 KM Radius
Road Railway Line
FIGURE 3.7: LU/LC DETAILS OF 00-10 KM RADIUS WITH PROJECT LOCATION
TABLE 3.17
LU/LC CLASSES AND THEIR COVERAGE IN SQ. KM
Sr. No. LU/LC Class Area (Km²) Percentage (%)
1 Built up Land Rural/Urban)
Settlement 15.86 5.05

Sr. No. LU/LC Class Area (Km²) Percentage (%)

Industry/other industries 22.63 7.21
Road Infrastructure 6.98 2.22
Railway Line/Railway Siding 2.89 0.92
2 Agriculture Land
Cropland/Current Fallow Land 179.95 57.31
3 Water bodies
River/Nala/Stream 10.25 3.26
Pond/Tank 4.24 1.35
4 Scrub/Waste Land
Land with scrub/Open Scrub 46.89 14.93
5 Dense Forest 9.22 2.94
Open Mixed Jungle 10.25 3.26
Forest Plantation 4.28 1.36
6 Mining/Stone Quarry 0.56 0.18
Total 314 100
FIGURE 3.8: PIE CHART REPRESENT THE LU/LC DETAILS OF 00-10 KM RADIUS
From the Table 3.16 it has been depicted that total six major land use/land cover classes were
demarcated in the study area. As seen from the land cover classes that were derived agriculture
appears to be the land use pattern that the villagers are engaged, however there is a large area of open
scrub land which can be later developed into a cultivable land. Agriculture has the highest coverage of
all the land cover classes having 57.31% (179.95 sq.km approx) of the total project area and thereafter
the Open Scrub area covers second highest position having 14.93 % (46.89 sq. km approx). The forest

area having a percentage about 7.56% (23.75 sq. km). The presence of water bodies including the river,
dam, canal and tributaries as seen from the figure 3.7 is about 4.61% (14.49 sq.km). It has been
observed that the Wenna river is being used for the purpose for water supply to additional MIDC-Phase I
project; presently it‟s the main source for supplying of water to M/s VIPL (Reliance Power) also it is
observed that the Kanholi talav is situated near the western parts of the study area approximately 8.16
km. There are certain pockets of area is under the mining of stone quarry in open cast by the various
private players having ancillary units of construction and township projects. The area covers by these
stone quarry/ mining activities, however the portion under this coverage is at a slight minimal level i.e.
0.18% (0.56 sq. km approx). It is also resembles from the satellite data and LU/LC map Settlements
occupy a subsequent area, predominantly their presence in bank of Wenna river and spreads all over
the adjoiningstudy area. Maximum settlements including industrial settlements were seen in East and
South East parts of the study area which is shown in Figure 3.8 i.e.15.40% (48.36 sq. km).The terrain
presumably makes it difficult to visualize some of the other features of the total project area. It is also
observed that the study area is well connected by railway i.e. main railway line connecting from Mumbai-
Howrah route and also the two Highways are present NH-7 & SH-3.
3.5.3.5 Elevation Details of 0 – 10 km radius

The contour-Map has been prepared by considering the elevation information through using Survey of
India Toposheet No. 55L/13 and 55K/16 and also using the help of satellite data SRTM with 90m spatial
resolution with respect to Google Earth imagery information and contour has been generated at 5 m
intervals as depicted in Figure 3.9 and the DEM model has been represented in Figure 3.10. The 10 km
radius of the proposed Industrial area is confined within 213 meter to 390 meter above MSL as derived
from DEM data.

Hingna
FIGURE 3.9: CONTOUR DETAILS OF 00-10 KM RADIUS

FIGURE 3.10: DEM DETAILS OF 00-10 KM RADIUS WITH MIDC-PHASE-II LOCATION
3.5.4 Physiography
The study area forms part of Deccan Plateau having flat topped and terraced features. It is a plain area
with the general topography some areas and its vicinity have higher elevation. Lineaments are also
observed in the study area. Dendrtic to sub dendritic of drainage pattern is observed in study area.
Lithologically, the area comprises formations of Deccan Basalt of Cretaceous age.
Drainage pattern
Dendritic to sub dendritic of drainage pattern is observed in study area. Bashimar Nala flows from NNW
to ENE and joins to Wenna River. Krishna Nala flows from NW to SE region. Kanholi Nala flows in
Southern Region of the study area.
Soil types
There are three types of soils found in Nagpur district. The details are as follows:
1) Kali soils: These are black cotton soils which are fine grained clayey in texture and varies in depth
from 1 m to 6 m or more and retain moisture.
2) Morand soils: These are predominant in the district. They are black cotton soils with higher
percentage of lime than the Kali soils. They are black, grey or light to dark brown in colour, clayey in
texture and have a depth of about 1 to 3 m.
3) Bardi soils: They are red gravel covered with boulders found on summits and slopes of trap hills and
are less fertile in nature.

Regional Stratigraphy
Recent.
Deccan Trap And Intertrappeans.
Lameta.
Gondwanas
Kamthi Group
Talchir Group
Archaeans
(Metamorphic And Crystalline Series).
Geology of Butibori area
Geologically Butibori area is composed of basaltic rocks. The basalts are extrusive naturally mined
igneous rock. They are dense fine-grained rocks that are of very dark color- green or black and form
when molten lava from deep in the earth's crust rises up and solidifies. Slightly coarser old sheets of
basalt, now partially altered but still dark in color, are extensively quarried, crushed, and sold as
"traprock". Basalt is a hard, dense, dark volcanic rock composed chiefly of plagioclase, pyroxene, and
olivine, and often having a glassy appearance. Archeans and the Deccan trap basalts are the two
consolidated formations, which form the Hard rock aquifers occurring in the district. The basaltic rocks in
the study area are differentiated as undifferentiated basalt and 6 flows of basalt of which 3 are complex
and 3 compound and alluvium of Wenna River is observed. The flows are part of Sahyadri group having
age from Cretaceous to Paleogene. Geological map of study area is shown in Figure 3.11.
FIGURE 3.11: GEOLOGICAL MAP OF STUDY AREA

A) ARCHAEAN- The crystalline rocks comprising of gneiss, schist, pegmatite and quartzite are the main
formations occurring in north-eastern and south eastern parts of the district. In these rocks, weathered
zone which is down to a depth of 25 m.bgl, forms the important shallow aquifer for dugwells. In
unweathered crystalline rocks, the occurrence of ground water is mainly controlled by joints and
fractures. Higher yields are generally associated with lineaments. Ground 6 water at places occurs in
fractured zones at depth in semi-confined to confined conditions.
B) DECCAN TRAPS- Basalt is the main formation of the district and occupies an area of about 4300 sq.
km. Ground water occurs under phreatic conditions in the exposed lava flows and in semi-confined to
confined state in the subsurface flows. Ground water is present in pore spaces in the vesicular unit of
each flow and in the jointed and fractured portions of massive unit. However, secondary porosity and
permeability developed on account of weathering, fracturing and joints play a very important role in the
storage and movement of ground water. This has given rise to good aquifers. Weathering not only
produces granular materials but also widens the fractures, joint and shear zones.
Hydrogeology
Hydrogeologically, the aquifer is unconfined to semi-confined type. In the Deccan Traps and Archeans,
the rocks do not have primary porosity. Secondary porosity has been developed due to vesicles,
weathering, jointing and fracturing. The water bearing capacity depends on the degree and depth of
weathering, intensity of jointing and fracturing and thickness of sheared zones. The groundwater is used
through open dug wells, primarily used for domestic use by the inhabitants whereas the deep bore wells
are used for irrigation purpose. Depth of groundwater level has been varied from 1 – 27m during pre-
monsoon and up to >20 m in overexploited areas. It has come up to less than 10 m (bgl) during post
monsoon. The aquifer yield in the study area varies from 60 liters/min to 300 liters/min. The study area of
MIDC Butibori is under 41.52 % of groundwater development. It is considered as safe category for
groundwater withdrawal (CGWB, 2009).
3.5.5 Soil Characteristics

Soil may be defined as a thin layer of earth‟s crust which serves as a natural medium for the growth of
plants. It is the unconsolidated mineral matter that has been subjected to, and influenced by genetic and
environmental factors parent material, climate, organisms and topography all acting over a period of
time. Soil differs from the parent material in the morphological, physical, chemical and biological
properties. Also, soils differ among themselves in some or all the properties, depending on the
differences in the genetic and environmental factors. Thus some soils are red, some are black; some are
deep and some are shallow; some are coarse-textured and some are fine-textured. It serves in varying
degree as a reservoir of nutrients and water for crops, provides mechanical anchorage and favorable
tilth. The components of soils are mineral materials, organic matter, water and air, the proportions of
which vary and which together form a system for plant growth; hence there is a need to study the soils in
perspective manner.
3.5.5.1 Data Generation
For studying soil profile of the region, sampling locations were selected to assess the existing soil
conditions in and around the project site representing various landuse conditions. The physical, chemical
and heavy metal concentrations were determined. The samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter
into the soil up to a depth of 20 cm. Total 10 samples were collected from different locations within the

study area and analyzed. The details of the soil sample locations are given in Table 3.18 and shown in
Figure 3.12. The monitoring was carried out once in the study period during pre monsoon season. The
international pipette method (Black, 1964) was adopted for determination of particle size analysis. The
physical parameters such as bulk density, porosity and water holdinig capacity were determined by
following KR box method (Keen and racekowski) 1921.
TABLE 3.18
DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Sr. Location Locations Distance Direction Latitude Longitude
No. Code (km)
w.r.t. project site
1. S1 Project site -- -- 20°56'18.60"N 78°55'1.24"E
2. S2 Khadki 4.3 W 20°56'15.86"N 78°54'26.80"E
3. S3 Dongargao 6.6 WSW 20°54'55.55"N 78°55'16.95"E
4. S4 Ajangaon 7.4 SSW 20°53'11.39"N 78°52'15.03"E
5. S5 Khapri 4.08 SSE 20°54'6.66"N 78°55'16.95"E
6. S6 Sukli 5.6 NE 20°58'50.10"N 78°56'52.86"E
7. S7 Tarsi 8.4 SSE 20°55'48.57"N 78°55'40.21"E
8. S8 Amgaon 1.42 SE 20°55'48.57"N 78°55'40.21"E
9. S9 Katandhara 5.1 NNW 20°59'00.67"N 78°54'10.50"E
10. S10 Pipaldhara 3.1 NNW 20°57'44.05N 78°53'57.13"E
11. S11 Gangapur 2.53 ESE 20°55'12.67"N 78°55'55.42"E
12. S12 Kanholi 7.2 W 20°56'05.86"N 78°50'50.47"E

FIGURE 3.12: SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
3.5.5.2 Physical Characteristics of Soil

Physical characteristics of soil were determined through specific parameters viz. particle size distribution,
bulk density, porosity, water holding capacity, texture and are presented in Table 3.19.

TABLE 3.19
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL
Sr. Location Bulk Density Porosity Water Particle Size Distribution Texure
No. (g/cc) Holding Sand Silt Clay
Capacity
(%)
1. Project site 1.21 18.72 41.26 54 21 25 Sandy clay
2. Khadki 1.04 17.52 46.58 51 32 17 Sandy clay
3. Dongargao 1.21 16.52 47.27 43 28 29 Sandy loam
4. Ajangaon 1.16 16.29 51.92 46 29 25 Sandy loam
5. Khapri 1.15 25.10 28.92 51 32 16 Sandy
6. Sukli 1.15 17.52 22.39 51 28 11 Sandy
7. Tarsi 1.14 20.10 25.40 55 26 18 Sandy
8. Amgaon 1.21 18.52 47.29 42 27 31 Sandy loam
9. Katandhara 1.24 14.61 47.62 48 29 23 Sandy loam
10. Pipaldhara 1.16 17.92 54.82 43 26 31 Sandy loam
11. Gangapur 1.14 20.10 25.40 55 26 18 Sandy
12. Kanholi 1.16 14.92 54.82 52 31 17 Sandy clay
Range 1.04-1.24 14.61- 22.39-54.82 42-55 21-32 11-31 Sandy-
25.10 sandy clay
loam
Source: Anacon Laboratory Pvt. Ltd.
Regular cultivation practices increase the bulk density of soils thus inducing compaction. This results in
reduction in water percolation rate and penetration of roots through soils. The soils with low bulk density
have favourable physical conditions whereas those with high bulk density exhibit poor physical conditions
for agriculture crops. The bulk density of the soil in the study area ranged between 1.04-1.24 g/cc which
indicates favourable physical condition for plant growth. The porosity was found in the range of 14.61-
25.10 %, water holding capacity was observed between 22.39-54.82 % whereas the texture of soil in the
area was found to be sandy to sandy clay loam. Electrical conductivity, a measure of soluble salts in the
soil was in the range of 67.21-540.20 μS/cm as shown in Table 3.20.
3.5.5.3 Chemical Characteristics of Soil
Data collected for chemical characteristics of soils through selected parameters viz. pH, soluble cations
and anions, organic content and fertility status in the form of NPK values and organic matter are
presented in Tables 3.20 & 3.21 respectively.
pH is an important parameter indicative of alkaline or acidic nature of soil. It greatly affects the microbial
population as well as solubility of metal ions and regulates nutrient availability. Variation in the pH of the
soil in the study area is presented in Table 3.20 and it was found to be neutral to slightly acidic (6.48-
7.97) in reaction.
The important cations in the soil are calcium and magnesium whose concentration levels ranged from
41.64-99.40 mg/Kg and 16.70-31.94 mg/Kg respectively. Chlorides were in the range of 97.02-164.73
mg/Kg.

TABLE 3.20
CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL IN STUDY AREA (SOIL-WATER EXTRACT – 1:2)
+2
Electrical Ca Mg Mn Zn Available Water Water Na Fe
Sr. pH at Conductivity Boron soluble soluble
Location 0
at 25 C Cl
-
SO4
-
No 25ºC
(μS/cm) Exchangable mg/kg mg/kg g/100g
1. Project site 6.71 108.29 54.92 28.16 5.14 0.67 Absent 182.29 56.17 27.23 5.92
2. Khadki 7.06 117.29 43.91 24.52 6.12 0.54 Absent 154.91 63.82 31.52 5.34
3. Dongargao 6.82 83.91 51.29 27.82 5.34 0.64 Absent 138.26 54.91 24.58 4.89
4. Ajangaon 6.57 82.19 37.82 23.59 5.91 0.63 Absent 132.94 57.28 28.57 4.82
5. Khapri 7.73 472.70 99.40 20.00 0.19 2.48 Absent 99.60 328.89 17.6 1.28
6. Sukli 7.47 540.20 75.10 18.31 0.14 2.48 Absent 117.06 315.94 27.58 1.20
7. Tarsi 7.97 426.00 86.10 16.70 0.26 2.48 Absent 97.02 234.60 20.42 2.01
8. Amgaon 7.02 123.8 41.64 21.59 6.16 0.82 Absent 118.59 61.27 31.52 5.13
9. Katandhara 6.73 104.92 51.26 28.59 5.82 0.63 Absent 143.81 52.34 18.72 4.82
10. Pipaldhara 6.48 67.21 47.28 31.94 6.04 0.57 Absent 164.73 62.89 24.52 6.14
11. Gangapur 7.97 426.00 86.10 16.70 1.22 1.39 Absent 97.02 234.60 20.34 2.01
12. Kanholi 7.16 132.81 43.64 31.29 6.14 0.72 Absent 153.84 61.29 21.18 5.16
6.48- 67.21-540.20 41.64- 16.70- 0.14- 0.54- 97.02- 54.91- 17.6- 1.20-
Range Absent
7.97 99.40 31.94 6.16 2.48 164.73 328.89 31.52 5.92
ND: Not Detectable
3.5.5.4 Nutrient Status
Organic matter and organic carbon present in the soil influences its physical and chemical condition and
is responsible for stability of soil aggregates. The organic matter content is presented in Table 3.21.
Organic matter and nitrogen were found in the range of 0.87-4.06 % and 198.10-318.57 kg/ha. This
showed that soil was fertile in organic and nutrient contents.
TABLE 3.21
FERTILITY STATUS
Sr. Location Organic Org. C Nitrogen Phosphorus Potassium CEC
No. Matter (%) (%) (kg/ha) (kg/ha) (mg/kg) (meq/100g)
1. Project site 0.87 0.50 282.91 87.56 34.82 11.2
2. Khadki 1.02 0.59 318.57 95.85 24.91 12.54
3. Dongargao 0.91 0.53 273.16 83.53 28.34 11.57
4. Ajangaon 1.16 0.67 282.64 78.63 23.52 11.54
5. Khapri 4.06 2.36 198.10 119.60 8.48 13.10
6. Sukli 3.35 2.52 267.43 112.34 9.51 9.58
7. Tarsi 2.71 1.57 298.10 120.24 5.48 9.10
8. Amgaon 1.21 0.70 267.19 101.23 21.54 13.19
9. Katandhara 0.91 0.53 282.81 93.15 43.62 11.64
10. Pipaldhara 1.04 0.60 304.81 95.63 37.21 12.34
11. Gangapur 2.71 1.57 298.10 70.00 20.01 9.10
12. Kanholi 1.04 0.60 267.19 97.36 34.27 12.19
Range 0.87-4.06 0.50-2.52 198.10-318.57 70.0-119.60 8.40-43.62 9.10-13.19
Source: Anacon Laboratory Pvt.Ltd.
Organic Carbon N P K
- Level in poor soil 0.5 < 280 < 23 < 133
- Level in moderate soil < 0.5 – 0.75 280-560 23-57 133 –337
- Level in fertile soil > 0.75 > 560 > 57 > 337
The relationship of CEC with productivity and absorptivity are presented in Tables 3.22 & 3.23.

TABLE 3.22
RELATIONSHIP OF CEC WITH PRODUCTIVITY
Sr. No. CEC Range (meq/100g) Productivity Location (Sr. No.)
1 < 10 Very Low 6, 7, 11
2 10 – 20 Low 1-5 & 8, 9 ,10, 12
3 20 – 50 Moderate -
4 > 50 High -
TABLE 3.23
RELATIONSHIP OF CEC WITH ABSORPTIVITY
Sr. No. CEC Range (meq/100g) Absorptivity Location (Sr. No.)
1 <10 Low 6, 7, 11
2 10 – 20 Moderate 1-5 & 8, 9 ,10, 12
3 20 – 30 Moderately high -
4 30 – 40 High -
3.5.5.5 Heavy Metals Content in the Soil

Plant requires some of the heavy metals at microgram levels for their metabolic activities. These heavy
metals are also termed as macronutrients. Their efficiency becomes a limiting factor in the plant growth,
but at the same time their higher concentration in soils may lead to toxicity. Some of the heavy metals
were estimated and their concentration levels are presented in Table 3.24.
TABLE 3.24
HEAVY METALS CONTENT IN THE SOIL
Cd Cr Cu Pb
Sr. No. Location
mg/kg
1. Project site Absent Absent 1.37 Absent
2. Khadki Absent Absent 1.16 Absent
3. Dongargao Absent Absent 1.04 Absent
4. Ajangaon Absent Absent 0.83 Absent
5. Khapri Absent Absent 1.22 Absent
6. Sukli Absent Absent 0.91 Absent
7. Tarsi Absent Absent 1.12 Absent
8. Amgaon Absent Absent 1.04 Absent
9. Katandhara Absent Absent 1.03 Absent
10. Pipaldhara Absent Absent 1.31 Absent
11. Gangapur Absent Absent 1.16 Absent
12. Kanholi Absent Absent 0.87 Absent
Range Absent Absent 0.83-1.37 Absent


3.6.1 Introduction
Biological environment of any area constitute all living beings of that area, it is an integral part of the
environment. Hence, any change in the surrounding environment could cause loss of species or
decrease in biodiversity of the area. Therefore, the present study is proposed to assess the impact of the
proposed expansion project on biological environment of the project site and surrounding area within 10
km radius. Accordingly, mitigation measures are evolved to sustain the biological diversity. In general,
biological environment is represented by flora and fauna. Flora constitutes the herbs, shrubs and trees
and fauna constitutes the mammals, birds, reptiles, arthropods, amphibians, fishes, etc.
Objectives of the study
The ecological study of the area was conducted in order to understand the existing status of the flora and
fauna to generate baseline information and evaluate the possible impacts on biological environment. The
present study highlights the various issues pertaining to floristic diversity and faunal wealth in the
surrounding area up to 10 km radius of the proposed expansion project sites.
Study Area
The proposed expansion of existing Butibori industrial area (BIA), Phase II located in the middle of
Mandva & Bhansoli village in Tehsil Nagpur of District Nagpur, Maharashtra. As per the bio-geographical
classification, the project area comes under Bio-geographic province (6D) Deccan Penninsula-Central
Plateau region. However, as per Champion & Seth, 1968 vegetation types of the area can be grouped as
Tropical Dry Deciduous Forest. The average annual rainfall of the region is 1091 mm. Soil of the area is
black cotton soil and the texture of the soil varies from clay to sandy. Winter is moderately cold and the
summer is very hot.
Study Approach & Methodology adopted
The baseline study for existing ecological environment was carried out during winter – 2014-15 season.
A participatory and consultative approach was followed. Field visits were under taken for survey of the
vegetation and animals in the study area. The study area is divided into two parts as core area consisting
of project site (275.58 Ha.) and the buffer area as the 10 km radius of the project site.
Methodology
Flora: Floral status was assessed in different habitat types and project site of the study area.
Quantitative data was collected using standard methods of quadrate method. Floral enumeration was
done following standard sampling techniques. Random quadrates were laidin order to quantify the
vegetation of the study area. Quadrate size for trees was 10 x 10 m, for shrubs it was 5 x 5 m and for
herbs it was 1 x 1m. Plots of 1 x 1 m were laid within the tree quadrate at each corner to record grasses.
In each of the quadrates, species and their number were recorded.
The data collected in the field was analyzed for secondary parameters such as density, frequency and
abundance following standard phyto-sociological methods.
The study area was devoid of any natural forest, stratified sampling and observation was made in the
study area as per Forest Survey of India 1992. Besides core area, trees available in the study area as
non-forest area were classified into 8 categories for the purpose of data processing and analysis. These
categories are:

Category of Plantations
(i) Farm forestry: Trees along the farm bunds and in small patches
(ii) Roadside plantation: Trees planted along the road side
(iii) Village woodlot: Naturally growing or planted trees on community /private land
(iv) Block plantation: Compact plantations covering an area of more than 0.1 ha.and not falling in any of
the above
(v) Pond side plantation: Trees planted in and around water ponds
(vi) Railway side plantation: Trees planted along the railway lines
(vii) Canal side plantation: Trees planted along the canals
(viii) Others: Trees not falling in any of the above categories.
Fauna:
Fauna Avifauna: Standard methods were followed to survey the avifauna. The point count method was
followed for counting the birds. Opportunistic survey was also carried out with respect to avifaunal
checklist. Identification by calls was also made for species identification which were not directly
encountered or were hidden in the vegetation or canopy (Sridharan 1989, Bhupathy1991, Bibby et al.,
1992 and Hutto et al., 1986).
Herpetofauna: Area searches were done in the circular plots of 10 m radius to inventory all terrestrial
habitats for reptiles and amphibians. Area searches consisted of turning cover objects like logs, boulders
etc (Welsh, 1987). Sampling for these species involved through binoculars and aural surveys.
Mammals: Presence of mammals was documented by using both direct and indirect evidences.
Opportunistic sightings were also included. Transect line were used to search indirect evidence i.e.
animal burrows / holes, scat, pellets, feeding signs, and tracks. Photographic (colored pictorial guide)
field guide were used for interviews with local residents (Burnham et al. 1980, Rodgers 1991, Sale and
Berkmuller, 1988, Daniel, 1992)
Threat Status Assessment/evaluation Criteria
The biodiversity aspects in the form of endemic status, conservation status and life form were
enumerated for all the plant species found in the area during ecological survey. The Red Data Book of
the Botanical survey of India was screened to verify their conservation status. For wild animal species
schedule of the Wildlife Protection Act (1972) was screened.
Ecosystems/ Habitat & Vegetation of the study area:
The terrain was found to be almost plain without much undulation; River Vena is only major river passing
through the study area in (7.0 Km from project site) in E direction, Krishna Nallah which was 3.18 KM in
SSW direction. One major Lake namely Kanoholi Talav/Reservoir is ~8.1 km (W) from the project site.
Land use pattern of this region was dominated by agricultural fields followed by Reserve Forest &
Protected Forest and open scrub.

Details about, Study area & Forest type:

The majority of the important reserve forests in the study area were confined to the hilly region and falling
under the category of “Southern Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests” as per Champion and Seth‟s
classification. Forest in the study area further categorized as under:
Southern Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests
Dry Teak Forest – 5A/C1
Open Mixed Forest – 5A/C3
Dry Teak Bearing Forest: This type of forest is predominantly confined to the hilly & undulated region of
Degma Reserve Forest which is 5.71 Km in (WNW) direction from the project site.Teak in high proportion
which ranged 60-70 % in some patches of the said RF.
Common associates of Teak were Salai (Boswellia serrata), Dhaora (Anogeissus latiflolia), Aola (Emblica
officinalis), Palas (Butia monosperma), Bor (Zizyphus jujube), Ghot (Zizyphus xylophyra), Air (Terminalia
tomentosa), Ahl (Morinda tinctoria), Khair (Acacia catechu), Achar (Buchanania lanzan), Tendu
(Diospyros melanoxylon), Amaltas (Cassia fistula), Kalam (Mitragyna parviflora), Moha (Madhuca
latifolia), Movai (Lannia grandis), and Nehada (Terminalia bellarica). Under growth is not dense, except
in moist valleys or along nala bank where Nirgudi (Vitex negundo), Murag sheng (Helecteres isora), and
Bharat (Gymnosporia montana), Chilati (Mimosa hamate), stunted Khair (Acacia catechu) observed and
at very few places Lantana (Lantana camara), and Parijatak (Nyctanthes arbortristis) were found.
The principal grasses were Sheda (Sehima nervosum), Ghonal (Themada triandra), Kusal (Heteropogan
contortis), Rusa (Cymbopogan martini), and Bhurbhusi (Eragrotis tenella).
Climbers were not very common except along nallahs and streams. The common climbers were Chilati
(Mimosa hamate), Malkangani (Celastrus paniculata), Piwarvel (Combratum ovalifolia), Mahul (Bahinia
vahilii), Eruni (Zizyphus oenoplca).
Open Mixed Forests: These forests observed intermixed with Teak and Anjan types. Along with the
miscellaneous species Teak occurs in strips or patches in area adjoining Teak forests in all large
reserves. Dense patches of better quality of mixed crops were observed within the moist valleys along
the banks and water courses only.
The tree species commonly found in the Mixed type of forests were Dhawda (Anogeissus latifolia), Salai
(Boswellia serrata), Khair (Acacia catechu), Ghot (Zizyphus xylophyra), Palas (Butea monosperma),
Lendia (Lagerstromia parviflora), Amatas (Cassia fistula), Jamrasi (Cassine glauca), Kulu (Serculia
urens), Air (Terminalia tomentosa), Kalam (Mitragyna parviflora), Tendu (Diospyros melanoxylon),
Charoli (Buchanania lanzan), Semal (Bombax ceiba), Apta (Bauhinia recemosa), Aola (Emblica
officinalis), Moha (Madhuka latifolia), Kala-shirish (Albizzia lebbek) Chichwa (Albizzia odoratissima),
Kasai (Bridalia retusa), Pangara (Erythina sp.), Movai (Lannea grandis), Rohan (Soymida febrifuga),
Arjun (Terminalia arjuna)
The undergrowth species like Bharat (Maytenus emarginata), Tarota (Cassia tora), Nirgudi (Vitex
negundo) were observed within the study area.
The climbers were Piwarbel (Combratum ovalifolium), Malkanguni (Celestrus paniculata), Kanch Khuari
(Mukuna pruriens)

Grass species were – Kusal (Heteropogan contortus), Sheda (Sehima nurvosum), Ghonal (Themada
trianora), Paonia (Schima sulcatum), Rusa (Cymbopogan martini) Bhurbhusi (Erogostis tenella), etc.
Details of forest in the study area
There were three Reserve Forest & one protected forest observed in the study area. No National Park,
Wildlife Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserve, Tiger Reserve, within the 10 km radius study area. The nearest
wildlife sanctuary is Bor Wildlife Sanctuary its buffer zone boundary is about ~16.50 km in W direction
from project site (Figure 3.13). Following are the list of forest (as shown in the plate 3.1) along with the
nearest villages w.r.t. distance and direction from the project site.
FIGURE 3.13: BOR WILDLIFE SANCTUARY

(BOR WILDLIFE SANCTUARY MAP SUPERIMPOSED ON GOOGLE IMAGERY)
The distance, direction of RF/PF found in the surrounding areas of 10 km radius from the project site is as
follows:
Sr. No. FOREST NEAREST VILLAGE DISTANCE (KM) DIRECTION
1 BID SUKLI RF PIPALDHARA 2.4 NNW
2 DEGAMA RF NANHI 5.71 WNW
3 DEGAMA RF SINGARDIP 6.51 WNW
4 BID ANJANGAON PF AJANGAON 7.9 SSW
5 PROTECTED FOREST DONGARGAON 7.6 SW
6 JUNAPANI R.F JUNAPANI 6.8 SE
7 PROTECTED FOREST WANADONGRI 5.2 SW

Site Specific Photographs of the project
Core Zone (Proposed Site for Expansion project – Phase II)
View of Degma Reserve Forest in the buffer zone of View of Kanholi Talav in the buffer zone of study
study area area
Butia monosperma (Palash) observed along the Floriculture observed nr. Khairi village of the
fringes of protected forest within study area Study area

Agriculture Crop (Herbacium gossypicum) Cotton Hanuman Langur (Presbytis entellus) observed in
observed in pipaldhara village the Reserve forest
Dried pellets of Nilgai observed in part of Degma RF Pellets of Barking deer observed in Junapani RF
within study area within study area
AVIFAUNA OBSERVED WITHIN STUDY AREA
Green Bee Eater (Merops orientalis) Indian roller (Coracias benghalensis)

plum-headed parakeet ((Psittacula cyanocephala) crow pheasant (Centropus sinensis)
Red-wattled lapwing (Vanellus indicus) Red-vented bulbul (Pycnonotus cafer)
oriental magpie-robin (Copsychus saularis) black-winged kite (Elanus caeruleus)
PLATE 3.1: VEGETATION COVER, CROPS, AGRICULTURE FIELD AVIFAUNA AND ANIMALS
WITHIN THE STUDY AREA

Phytosociological Survey:
Phyto-sociological study of any vegetation, whether tree layer, shrub or herbaceous layer, is an important
aspect of an ecological study, which deals with social interaction of these plant species among themselves.
This study also reflects about the totality of vegetation at any particular site. The interaction of species and its
totality always varies with space and time lapse and alteration in factors such as edaphic, climatic and other
stresses.
The stratified random sampling approach was followed for phytosociological survey in the present study. The
phytosociological data from these forests were quantitatively analysed to work out the species richness,
diversity, evenness, dominance, importance value, stand density and the basal area (Table 3.25 to 3.28).
TABLE 3.25
CORE ZONE (PROJECT SITE)
SPECIES F D/Ha A/Ha IVI SWI
Acacia catechu 80 180 225 47.89 0.33
Zizyphus sp. 60 80 133 26.86 0.24
Casia fistula 20 20 100 11.01 0.08
Azadirachta indica 40 40 100 18.23 0.13
Butea monosperma 40 40 100 17.78 0.13
Acacia nilotica 60 60 100 24.31 0.26
Tactona grandis 40 40 100 19.99 0.18
Eagle marmelos 40 40 100 27.11 0.18
Terminalia tomentosa 40 60 150 38.49 0.21
Madhuca indica 40 40 100 21.65 0.24
Prosopis juliflora 60 80 133 26.38 0.24
Tamarindus indica 40 40 100 20.31 0.18
560 720 1442 300.00 2.39
TABLE 3.26
SUKLI RF
SPECIES F D/ha A/ha IVI SWI
Acacia catechu 80 120 150 70.57 0.354
Zizyphus sp. 60 80 133 44.30 0.310
Casia fistula 20 20 100 21.87 0.141
Acacia leucophloea 60 60 100 43.57 0.272
Acacia nilotica 40 60 150 36.23 0.272
Tamarindus indica 20 20 100 16.32 0.141
360 440 933 300 1.925
TABLE 3.27
JUNAPANI RF
Acacia catechu 80 100 125 71.99 0.351
Tectona grandis 20 20 100 17.02 0.155


Casia fistula 40 40 100 35.52 0.237
Acacia nilotica 40 40 100 33.82 0.237
Annona squamosa 20 20 100 16.67 0.155
Acacia Leucophloea 40 40 100 27.15 0.237
340 380 858 300 1.937
TABLE 3.28
DEGMA RESERVE FOREST
Tectona grandis 100 300 300 47.82 0.35
Terminalia tomentosa 80 120 150 29.08 0.23
Albizzia odoratissima 40 40 100 26.17 0.11
Madhuca indica 40 60 150 13.36 0.15
Bombax ceiba 20 40 200 13.11 0.11
Diospyros melanoxylon 40 40 100 14.34 0.11
Anogeissus latifolia 20 40 200 11.02 0.11
Terminalia arjuna 20 20 100 15.35 0.15
Buchanania lanzan 40 60 150 11.88 0.15
Careya arborea 20 20 100 6.00 0.07
Wrightia tinctoria 40 40 100 9.97 0.11
Acacia Leucophloea 40 40 100 12.90 0.11
Ixora parviflora 20 40 200 7.34 0.11
Lagerstroemia parviflora 20 40 200 12.60 0.11
Bowsellia serrata 40 40 100 11.14 0.11
Acacia catechu 20 20 100 7.54 0.07
Annana squamosa 20 40 200 7.12 0.11
Acacia nilotica 40 60 150 11.28 0.15
760 1200 2967 300.00 2.77
3.6.2 Interpretation of Phytosociological Study of Vegetation

The IVI table of trees for project (site I) indicated that the Acacia catechu (Khair) was the sole dominant
species in the area followed by Zizyphus sp., Prosopis juliflora and Acacia nilotica was the second dominant
species. Trend of occurrence of naturally grown trees in core area was found to be irregular due to different
landcover patterns. Present phytosocio study in core area is mainly based on occurrence of naturally observed
tree species along the NW hilly part (35 ha) of core area.

The IVI table of trees for Sukli RF (site II) indicated that the Acacia catechu (Khair) was the sole dominant
species in the area with Acacia leucophloea as almost the second dominant species.
The IVI table of trees Junapani RF (Site III) indicated that similar trend of first dominant species i.e. Acacia
catechu (Khair) followed by Butea monosperma as second dominant species.
The IVI table of trees Degma RF (Site III) indicated that true teak bearing dry deciduous forest in which Teak is
sole dominant species followed by its companion Terminalia tomentosa as second dominant tree.
From the above table density of species per hector was observed highest in Degma Reserve Forest. The
diversity indices was observed to be low in Junapani RF & Sukli RF as compared to Degma Reserve Forest
may be due to human perturbation and illegal cutting of trees in past.
TABLE 3.29
LIST OF FLORA IN THE STUDY AREA
Trees:
The species enlisted from the study area are given in the Table 3.29 – Total 62 species were enlisted
from the study area
Sr. No. Botanical Name Local Name Family
1. Acacia catechu Khair Mimoseae
2. Acacia leucophloea wild Hiwar Mimoseae
3. Acacia nilotica Babul / Babhool Mimoseae
4. Adina cordifolia Haldu Rubiaceae
5. Aegle marmelos Bel Rutaceae
6. Ailanthus excelsa Maharukh Simaroubaceae
7. Albizzia lebbek Siras (Black) Mimoseae
8. Albizzia odoratissima Chichwa Mimoseae
9. Albizzia procera Siras (White) Mimoseae
10. Annona squamosa Sitaphal Annonaceae
11. Anogeissus latifolia Dhaora /Dhawada Combretaceae
12. Azadirachta indica Neem Meliaceae
13. Bauhinia racemosa Apta / Kachnar Caesalpiniaceae
14. Bombax ceiba Katsawar / Semal Bombaceae
15. Boswellia serrata Salai Burseraceae
16. Bridelia retusa Kateain / Kasai Euphorbiaceae
17. Buchanania Ianzan Char / Chironji Anacardiaceae
18. Butea monosperma Palas Fabaceae
19. Careya arborea Kumbhi Lecythidiaceae
20. Casearia elliptica Kalakarai Fabaceae
21. Casearia tomentosa Tondri Samydaceae
22. Cassia fistula Amaltas / Bahawa Caesalpiniaceae
23. Cassia siamea Kashid Caesalpiniaceae
24. Cassine glauca Aran Calastraceae
25. Dalbergia paniculata Dhoban Fabaceae
26. Dalbergia sissoo Sissoo Fabaceae
27. Diospyros malanoxylon Tendu Ebenaceae
28. Dolichandrone falcata Medsing Bignoniaceae
29. Erythrina variegate Pangara Fabaceae


30. Ficus benghalensis Wad Moraceae
31. Ficus glomerata Umbar Urticaceae
32. Gardeinia latifolia Ghogar Rubiaceae
33. Garuga pinnata Kakad Burseraceae
34. Gmelina arborea Shiwan / Siwan Verbenaceae
35. Grewia tiliaefolia Dhaman Tiliaceae
36. Holarrhena anthidysentrica White kuda / Kuda Apocynaceae
37. Ixora arborea Lokhandi Rubiaceae
38. Kydia calycina Warang / Baranga Malvaceae
39. Lagerstroemia parviflora Lendia / Lenda Lythraceae
40. Lannea coromandelica Moyen / Mowai Anacardiaceae
41. Leucaena leucocephala Subabul Mimoseae
42. Madhuca indica Moha / Mahuwa Sapotaceae
43. Manilkara hexandra Khirni Sapotaceae
44. Mitragyna parviflora Karam/Mundi Rubiaceae
45. Phyllanthus emblica Aonla Euphorbiaceae
46. Pongamia pinnata Karanj Fabaceae
47. Pterocarpus marsupium Bija Fabaceae
48. Salix tetraperma Wandra / Bainsa Salicaceae
49. Schleichera oleosa Kusum Sapotaceae
50. Schrebera swietenioides Mokha Aristolochiaceae
51. Semecarpus anacardium Biba / Bhilawa Anacardiaceae
52. Soymida febrifuga Rohan Meliaceae
53. Sterculia urens Kullu / Kulu Sterculiaceae
54. Stereospermum saveolens Padar Bignoniaceae
55. Tamarindus Indica Chinch Caesalpinaceae
56. Tectona grandis Sag / Sagwan / Teak Verbenaceae
57. Terminalia arjuna Arjun / Kahu Combretaceae
58. Terminalia bellerica Behada Combretaceae
59. Terminalia chebula Hirda / Harra Combretaceae
60. Terminalia tomentosa Saja / Ain Combretaceae
61. Ziziphus mauritiana Bor / Ber Rhamnaceae
62. Ziziphus xylopyra Ghoti / Ghot Rhamnaceae
Core Zone
Trend of occurrence of naturally grown trees in core area was found to be irregular due to different landcover
patterns of core area. Naturally grown tree species abundantly observed along the NW hilly part (35 Ha.) of
core area. Trees like Acacia catechu (Khair), Acacia nilotica (Babool), Ziziphus mauritiana (Bor), Butia
monosperma (Palash) & Prosopis juliflora (vedi babool) were sparsely distributed in core area. Tree
cutting involve during the project execution. The project area is dominated with seasonal herbs & shrubs.
Trees
1. Acacia nilotica Babul / Babhool Mimoseae
2. Aegle marmelos Bel Rutaceae
3. Ailanthus excelsa Maharukh Simaroubaceae
4. Acacia leucophloea Hiwar Mimoseae


5. Albizzia lebbek Siras (Black) Mimoseae
7. Acacia catechu Khair Mimoseae
8. Azadirachta indica Neem Meliaceae
9. Butea monosperma Palas Fabaceae
10. Cassia fistula Amaltas / Bahawa Caesalpiniaceae
11. Dalbergia sissoo Sissoo Fabaceae
12. Ficus glomerata Gular Urticaceae
13. Ficus glomerata Umber Moraceae
14. Pongamia pinnata Karanj Fabaceae
15. Leucaena leucocephala Subabul Mimoseae
16. Madhuca indica Moha / Mahuwa Sapotaceae
17. Prosopis juliflora Vedibabul Fabaceae
18. Tactona grandis Sag Verbinaceae
19. Terminalia tomentosa Saja / Ain Combretaceae
20. Ficus benghalensis Wad Moraceae
21. Phyllanthus emblica Aonla Euphorbiaceae
22. Ziziphus mauritiana Bor / Ber Rhamnaceae
23. Tamarindus Indica Chinch / Imli Caesalpinaceae
24. Ziziphus xylopyra Ghoti / Ghot Rhamnaceae
A. Shrubs/Under Trees
Shrubs encountered during the present survey are given in the Table 3.30. Total 26 species were
enumerated from the study area, Most dominant shrubs in the study area were Abutulon indicum, Cassia
auriculata, Datura metal, Holarrhena antidysentrica,.Cassia pumila, Cassia tora, Calotropis gigantea,
Lantana camera, Zizyphus sp. and Zizyphus mauritiana and Carissa spinarum.
The shrubs species enlisted from the study area are given in the Table 3.30.
TABLE 3.30
LIST OF SPECIES IN THE STUDY AREA
1. Abutulon indicum Petari Malvaceae
2. Agave Americana Ketki Agavaceae
3. Barleria prionites Katekoranti Acanthaceae
4. Cassia auriculata Tarwad Caesalpiniaceae
5. Calotropis procera Rui Asclepiadaceae
6. Datura metal Kaladhotra Solanaceae
7. Dodonaea viscosa Kharata Sapinadaceae
8. Ficus hispida Katumber Moraceae
9. Gardenia gummifera Dikamali Rubiaceae
10. Grewia hirsute Gautri Tiliaceae
11. Holarrhena antidysentrerica Indrajawa/Kuda Apocyanaceae
12. Hamlitonia suaveolens Bhawarmal Rubiaceae
13. Helicteres isora Muradsheng/Marophal Sterculaceae
14. Indigofera tinctoria Neel Fabaceae
15. Lantena Camera Ghaneri / Ulta Verbenaceae


16. Martynia annua Waghnakhi Martyniaceae
17. Maytenus emarginata Bharati Celastraceae
18. Solanum xanthocarpum Kateringani Solanaceae
19. Lantana camera Ghaneri Verbinaceae
20. Cassia auriculata Tarwad Fabaceae
21. Jetropha gossipifolia Ratanjoyti Euphorbiaceae
22. Nyctanthes arbortristis Kharasani/Kharasi Astraceae
23. Phoenix sylvestris Sindhi/Chhindi Areacaceae
24. Vitex negundo Nirgudi Verbanaceae
25. Woodfordia fruticosa Jilbili Lythraceae
26. Wrightia tinctoria Dudhi / Kalakuda Apocyanaceae
Shrubs/Under Trees (Core Zone)

The shrubs species enlisted from the core zone are given in the Table 3.31. 15 species were enlisted
from the study area.
TABLE 3.31
LIST OF SHEUBS SPECIES IN CORE ZONE
1. Abutulon indicum Petari Malvaceae
2. Agave Americana Ketki Agavaceae
3. Barleria prionites Katekolati Acanthaceae
4. Calotropis procera Rui Asclepiadaceae
5. Datura metal Kaladhotra Solanaceae
6. Ficus hispida Katumber Moraceae
7. Helicteres isora Muradsheng/Marophal Sterculaceae
8. Lantena Camera Ghaneri / Ulta Verbenaceae
9. Maytenus emarginata Bharati Celastraceae
10. Solanum xanthocarpum Kateringani Solanaceae
11. Lantana camera Ghaneri Verbinaceae
12. Cassia auriculata Tarwad Fabaceae
13. Jetropha gossipifolia Ratanjoyti Euphorbiaceae
14. Phoenix sylvestris Sindhi/Chhindi Areacaceae
15. Vitex negundo Nirgudi Lamiaceae
B. Herbs:
The herbaceous cover observed in this region is given in the Table 3.32, 15 species were enlisted from
the study area
TABLE 3.32
HERBS & GRASSES IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No. Botanical name Local Name Family
1. Tribulus terristris Gokru Zygophyllaceae
2. Atylosia sp. Rantur Fabaceae
3. Tridax procumbense Kamarmodi Asteraceae
4. Alternanthera sessilis Koypa/bechkusal Amaranthaceae
5. Aerva laneta kapurmadhuri Amaranthaceae


6. Euphorbia jeniculata Dudhkena Euphorbiaceae
7. Xanthium strumarium Gokhru Asteraceae
8. Achyrantes aspera Aghada Amaranthaceae
9. Croton sparsiflorus ---- Euphorbiaceae
10. Tephrosia hamiltonil Divali Fabaceae
11. Parthenium hysterophorus Gajargawat Astraceae
12. Tribulus terrestris Gokru Zygophyllaceae
13. Stylosanthes hamata Hamata Fabaceae
14. Argemone mexicana Pivla dhotra Papaveraceae
15. Cleome viscosa Pivilitilwan Cleomaceae
16. Hyptis suaveolins Rantulasi/Bantulasi Lamiaceae
17. Atylosia scarabaeoides Rantur Fabaceae
18. Euphorbia geniculata Bhurbusi Euphorbiaceae
19. Parthenium hysterophorus Gajargawat Asteraceae
Herbs (Core Zone):

1. Tridax procumbense Kamarmodi Asteraceae
2. Alternanthera sessilis Koypa/bechkusal Amaranthaceae
3. Aerva laneta kapurmadhuri Amaranthaceae
4. Xanthium strumarium Gokhru Asteraceae
5. Achyrantes aspera Aghada Amaranthaceae
6. Croton sparsiflorus ---- Euphorbiaceae
7. Tephrosia hamiltonil Divali Fabaceae
8. Parthenium hysterophorus Gajargawat Astraceae
9. Tribulus terrestris Gokru Zygophyllaceae
10. Argemone mexicana Pivla dhotra Papaveraceae
11. Cleome viscosa Pivilitilwan Cleomaceae
12. Hyptis suaveolins Rantulasi/Bantulasi Lamiaceae
13. Tribulus terristris Gokru Zygophyllaceae
14. Atylosia sp. Rantur Fabaceae
15. Atylosia scarabaeoides Rantur Fabaceae
16. Euphorbia jeniculata Dudhkena Euphorbiaceae
Bamboo & Grasses:

The bamboo & Grasses observed in this region is given in the Table 3.33, 15 species were enlisted from
the study area
C. Bamboo and Grasses
TABLE 3.33
BAMBOO & GRASSES IN THE STUDY AREA
1. Dendrocalamus strictus Bans/Bamboo Poaceae
2. Eragrostic tenella Bhurbhusi Poaceae
3. Andropogan pumilus Diwartan Poaceae
4. Cynodon dactylon Durwa/Hariyalli/Doob Poaceae


5. Chrysopogon fulvus Gadasheda Poaceae
6. Themeda quadrivalvis Ghonad Poaceae
7. Bamboosa arundinacea Katang bamboo Poaceae
8. Vetiveria zizaniodes Khas Poaceae
9. Hetropogon contortus Kusal Dicanthium
10. Dicanthium annulatum Marvel (small) Poaceae
11. Dicanthium aristaum Marvel (Big) Poaceae
12. Schima sulcatum Paonia Poaceae
13. Apluda mutica Phulkia Poaceae
14. Sehima nervosum Sheda Poaceae
15. Cymbopogon martini Tikhadi Poaceae
Bamboo & Grasses (Core Zone):

1. Dendrocalamus strictus Bans/Bamboo Poaceae
2. Eragrostic tenella Bhubhusi Poaceae
3. Cynodon dactylon Durwa/Hariyalli/Doob Poaceae
4. Themeda quadrivalvis Ghonad Poaceae
6. Apluda mutica Phulkia Poaceae
7. Sehima nervosum Sheda Poaceae
Climbers and Twiners

Majority of Climbers were observed in the moist patches. The main species were Bauhinia Vahlii, Milletia
auriculata Butea superba, Acacia pennata, Zizphus oenoplia and Smilax Zeylanica, and a few others.
Details are given in the Table 3.34 species of climbers/ twiners were recorded from the area.
D. Climber
TABLE 3.34
CLIMBERS AND TWINERS IN THE STUDY AREA
1. Olax scandens Aradphari Olacaceae
2. Mimosa hamate Chilati Mimoseae
3. Celastrus paniculata Dhimarwel/Malkagni Celasreaseae
4. Zizyphus oenoplia Eruni Rhamnaceae
5. Abrus precatorius Gunj Fabaceae
6. Tinospora cordifolia Gulvel Menispermaceae
7. Mucuna pruriens kajkuri fabaceae
8. Bauhinia vahlii Mahulbel Caesalpiniaceae
9. Combretum ovalifolium Piwarvel Combretaceae
10. Smilax macrophylla, Ramdaton Smilaceae
11. Cocculus hirsutus Vasanvel Menispermaceae
12. Amarvel Cuscuta reflexa Cuscutaceae
13. Bandha/Bandh Vanda tessellate Orchidaceae

Climbers and Twiners (Core Zone)

1. Mimosa hamate Chilati Mimoseae
2. Celastrus paniculatus Dhimarwel/Malkagni Celasreaseae
3. Zizyphus oenoplia Eruni Rhamnaceae
4. Abrus precatorius Gunj Fabaceae
5. Bauhinia vahlii Mahulbel Caesalpiniaceae
6. Amarvel Cuscuta reflexa Cuscutaceae
Vegetation near Human Habitation

Near the villages, the vegetation pattern was found to be abruptly changed from that what was observed in the
forest areas. The common species are those which are useful to the human beings. The species commonly
found were Mangifera indica, Madhuca longifolia, Syzigium cumini, Tamarindus indica, Terminalia bellerica,
Ficus bengalensis, Ficus religiosa, Psidium guajava, Azadirachta indica, etc.
Agriculture
The details pertaining to agriculture and horticulture crops within the study area are presented in Table
3.35 and Table 3.36 respectively.
TABLE 3.35
AGRICULTURE CROPS GROWN IN THE STUDY AREA
Food Grains
1. Pannisetum americanum Bajri Poaceae
2. Sorghum Vulgare Jawar Poaceae
3. Triticum aestivum Gahu Poaceae
Cereals
1. Cajanus cajan Tur Fabaceae
2. Cicer arietinum Herbara Fabaceae
3. Pisum sativum Watana Fabaceae
Oil Seeds
1. Glycine max Soyabean Fabaceae
Cash Crop
1. Herbaceum gossypium Cotton Malvaceae
Vegetables
1. Abelomoschus esculentus Bhendi (Lady finger) Malvacese
2. Amaranthus tricolor Chavli Amaranthaceae
3. Brassica oleracea Gobi Criciferae
4. Dolichos lablab Val Fabaceae
5. Memordia charantia Bitter Gourd (Karela) Cuccurbitaceae
6. Solanum melongena Wangi (Brinjal) Solanaceae
7. Spinacia oleracea Palak Amaranthaceae
Spices
1. Capsicum sp. Mirchi Solanaceae
2. Coriandrum sativum Kothimbir Umbelliferae
Source: Field Survey and discussion with local villagers

TABLE 3.36
PROMINENT HORTICULTURAL TREES IN THE STUDY AREA
1. Citrus aurantifolia Limbu Rutaceae
3. Carica Papaya Papaya Cariaceae
4. Citrus sp. Orange Rutaceae
5. Psidium guava Peru Myrtaceae
Source: Field Survey and discussion with local villagers
3.6.2.1 Rare and Endangered Flora in the Study Area

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant
and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and
subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific
base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.
Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category, by RED
data book of Indian Plants. (Nayar and Sastry, 1990) and Red list of threatened Vascular plants (IUCN,
2010; BSI, 2003)
3.6.2.2 Endemic Plants of the Study Area
De Candolle (1855) first used the concept of “Endemic”, which is defined as an area of a taxonomic unit,
especially species which has a restricted distribution or habitat, isolated from its surrounding region
through geographical, ecological or temporal barriers. Among recorded plant species none were
assigned the status of endemic plant of this region.
3.6.3 Fauna
The 10 km radius study area was found to be a home to several species of mammals, reptiles, Aves and
other lower invertebrates. As described earlier, the part of study area covered forest. The big animals like
Wild boar, Sabhar, Nilgai, Barking deer, spotted deer as well as small sized fauna like Jackal, Monkey,
Fox, etc. were found abundantly in the Degma Reserve Forest area. Most significant wild fauna Panthera
pardus (Leopard) which was not directly sited during the field survey in the study area after consultative
approach with local people come to know that, leopard (Panthera pardus) visited in search of water and
food especially in forest adjacent to the Kanholi Talav (Reservoir) during summer season which is about
8.1 km in West direction from the project site.
Birds were observed throughout the study area mostly near the forest area and water bodies. Reptiles
and amphibians were also observed in the study area. Fresh water fishes were found in the Wenna river
and water reservoir. The fauna observed through enquiry from local people of the study area are as
follows:
3.6.3.1 Faunal Biodiversity of the Study Area
For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to Mammals, Reptiles,
birds, butterfly and fishes species, a baseline survey was conducted on Winter 2014-15.

3.6.3.2 Mammals
The wild mammals observed other than domesticated ones from the core zone and the study area is
documented in the Table 3.37 and 3.37 (A) respectively.
TABLE 3.37
MAMMALS FROM THE STUDY AREA
S. No. Scientific Name English Name Common Name Schedule as per WPA
Mammals
1. Canis aureus Jackal Kolha II
2. Felis chaus Jungle cat Ranmanjar II
3. Boselaphus Blubull Nilgai III
tragocamelus
4. Cervus unicolor Sambhar Bhekad III
5. Axis axis Cheetal Harin III
6. Muntiacus muntjak Barking deer - III
7. Sus cristatus Wild boar Randukkar III
8. Presbytis entellus Common langur Bandar II
9. Funambulus palmarum Palm squirrel Khar IV
10. Hystrix indica Indian Porcupine Sayal IV
11. Lepus nigricollis Indian hare Sasa IV
12. Vulpes bengalensis Indian fox Kolha II
13. Herpestes edwardsi Common Mongoose Mongoose II
14. Bandicota bengalensis Field rat Undir V
15. Rattus rattus Common house rat Undir V
16. Pteropus vampyrus Fruit bat Watwaghul V
TABLE 3.37 (A)

MAMMALS FROM THE CORE ZONE
S. No. Scientific Name English Name Common Name Schedule as per WPA
Mammals
1. Canis aureus Jackal Kolha II
2. Axis axis Cheetal Harin III
3. Presbytis entellus Common langur Bandar II
4. Funambulus palmarum Palm squirrel Khar IV
5. Lepus nigricollis Indian hare Sasa IV
6. Herpestes edwardsi Common Mongoose Mongoose II
7. Bandicota bengalensis Field rat Undir V
8. Rattus rattus Common house rat Undir V
9. Pteropus vampyrus Fruit bat Watwaghul V
3.6.3.3 Herpetofauna
The Herpetofauna observed in the study area is presented in Table 3.38 & 3.38 (A).

TABLE 3.38
REPTILES IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. Scientific Name English Name Common Name Schedule as per WPA
No.
1. *Bungarus caeruleus Common Indian Krait Karait IV
2. *Ptyas mucosus Common Rat Snake Dhaman II
3. *Naja naja Indian Cobra Nag II
4. Calotes versicolor Garden Lizard --- -
5. Mabuya carinata Keeled Indian Mabuya --- -
6. Bufo parietalis Indian Toad IV
7. *Daboia russelli Russell‟s viper Viper II
Note: * Indicates not sighted but recorded based on consultative approach with villagers and forest
officials
TABLE 3.38 (A)
REPTILES IN THE CORE AREA
Reptiles
Sr. Scientific Name English Name Common Name Schedule as per
No. WPA
1. Bungarus caeruleus Common Indian Krait Karait IV
2. Ptyas mucosus Common Rat Snake Dhaman II
3. Naja naja Indian Cobra Nag II
4. Calotes versicolor Garden Lizard --- -
5. Mabuya carinata Keeled Indian Mabuya --- -
6. Bufo parietalis Indian Toad IV
7. Daboia russelli Russell‟s viper Viper II
Note: * Indicates not sighted but recorded based on consultative approach with villagers and forest
officials
3.6.3.4 Birds of the Study Area

The most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Indian Roller, Green bee eater, Jungle
babbler, Plum-headed parakeet, Cattle Egret, Crow pheasant, Red-wattled Lapwing , Red-vented bulbul,
Orienal magpie-robin, black-winged kite, etc. Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) not sighted but enlisted
based on communication with villagers. Systematic list of the birds in the study area with the status of
occurrence is given in Table 3.39.
TABLE 3.39
LISTS OF BIRDS IN THE STUDY AREA WITH ITS DISTRIBUTION & MIGRATORY STATUS
Sr. Schedule as Distribution
Scientific Name English Name Common Name
No. per WPA
1. Accipiter badius Shikra Shikra IV R
2. Acridothere stristis Common Maina Maina IV R
3. Anastomus oscitans Openbilled Stork Stork IV R
Eurasian Eagle- r
4. Bubo bubo Ghubad IV
owl
5. Bubulcus ibis Cattle egret Gai Bagla IV R
6. Columba livia Blue rock pigeon Kabutar IV R
7. Coracias bengalensis Indian roller Chukar IV R


No. per WPA
8. Corvus splendens Common crow Kavla V R
9. Corvusmacrorhynchos Jungle crow Junglee Kavla -- R
10. Coturnix coturnix Common or gray Bater IV RW
11. Cuculus varius Common Howk Papiha/ Papiya IV R
12. Elanus caeruleus Black winged kite Kapasi -- R
13. Francolinus francolinus Black partridge Kala Titar IV R
14. Gallus gallus Jungle fowl Jangli Kombdi IV R
Common pariah R
15. Milvus migrans Ghar --
kite
16. Passer domesticus House sparrow Chimni -- R
17. Pavo cristatus Indian peafowl Mor I R
Pahari R
18. Pericrocotusflammeus Scarlet minivet --
Bulbul/Chasm
19. Phalacrocorax fuscicollis Indian Cormorant Shag IV R
20. Psittacula krameri Parrot Popat IV R
Plum headed R
21. Psittacula cyanocephala Popat IV
parakeet
22. Pycnonotus cafer Redvented Bulbul Bulbul IV R
Streptopelia R
23. ChotaFakhta Laughing Dove IV
senegalensis
24. Turdoides striatus Jungle babbler Sat Bhai IV R
25. Sterna aurantia River Tern Nadi Surai IV RM
Common W
26. Actitis hypoleucos Deshi tutari IV
Sandpiper
27. Oriolus oriolus Golden oriole Haldya IV R
28. Merops orientalis Green Bee Eater Vedha Raghu IV R
White Breasted
29. Halcyon smyrnensis Khandya IV R
Kingfisher
Crow Pheasant
30. Centropus sinensis Bharadwaj IV R
(Greater Caucal)
31. Dicrurus adsimillis Black drongo Kotwal IV R
32. Sturnus pagodarum Brahminy Myna Bhangpadi Myna IV R
33. Acrido tristis Common Myna Myna/Salunki IV R
Jungle zudupi
34. Perdicula asiatica Jungle Bush Quail IV R
lava
Oriental Magpie
35. Copsychus saularis Dayal IV R
Robin
Nomenclature follow “An Annotated Checklist of the Birds of the Oriental Region” by Tim Inskipp, Nigel
Lindsey and William Duckworth (1996)
Note: R = Widespread Resident, r = very Local Resident, RW = Resident Winter visitor, as per the
distribution given in WCMC &Oriental Bird Club‟s Check list of Indian Birds
Birds within the Core Area

List of birds observed within the core area is given in Table 3.40.

TABLE 3.40
LISTS OF BIRDS IN THE CORE AREA WITH ITS DISTRIBUTION & MIGRATORY STATUS

No. per WPA
1. Acridothere stristis Common Maina Maina IV R
2. Bubulcus ibis Cattle egret Gai Bagla IV R
3. Coracias bengalensis Indian roller Chukar IV R
4. Corvus splendens House crow Kavla V R
5. Passer domesticus House sparrow Chimni -- R
6. Psittacula krameri Parrot Popat IV R
7. Pycnonotus cafer Redvented Bulbul Bulbul IV R
Streptopelia R
8. Laughing Dove Chota Fakhta IV
senegalensis
9. Turdoides striatus Jungle babbler Sat Bhai IV R
Crow Pheasant
10. Centropus sinensis Bharadwaj IV R
(Greater Caucal)
11. Dicrurus adsimillis Black drongo Kotwal IV R
12. Sturnus pagodarum Brahminy Myna Bhangpadi Myna IV R
13. Merops orientalis Green Bee Eater Vedha Raghu IV R
Common pariah R
14. Milvus migrans Ghar --
kite
3.6.3.5 Butterflies from the Study Area

During survey period butterflies were rarely observed in early morning in study area but enlisted below
based on consultative approach with villagers Table 3.41 & 3.41 (A)
TABLE 3.41
BUTTERFLIES IN THE STUDY AREA
List of butterflies observed in the study area

S. No. Scientific Name Local Name
1. Papilio demoleus Lime Butterfly
2. Papilio polytes Common Mormon
3. Catopsila pomona Common Emigrant
4. Eurema hecabe Common Grass yellow
5. Chiladeslaius Lime Blue
6. Danaus genutia Stripped Tiger
TABLE 3.41 (A)

BUTTERFLIES IN THE CORE AREA
List of butterflies observed in the Core area
1. Papilio demoleus Lime Butterfly
2. Papilio polytes Common Mormon
3. Catopsila pomona Common Emigrant


4. Eurema hecabe Common Grass yellow
5. Chiladeslaius Lime Blue
6. Danaus genutia Stripped Tiger
3.6.3.6 Fishes in the Study Area

Species of fishes mainly observed in Wenna river were confirmed through the consultative approach with
villagers and documented in the Table 3.42.
TABLE 3.42
FISHES IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No. Fish Common Name
1. Catla catla Catala
2. Labeo Rohita Rohu
3. Cirrhinus mrigala Mrigala
4. Cyprinus carpio Common carp/Cyprinus Carp
5. Caridina sp. Shrimp
6. Eriocheir sinensis Crab
Source: Communication with local people and primary survey conducted by Anacon Team.
Rare and Endangered fauna of the study area:

 As per IUCN RED (2013) list
The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant
and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and
subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific
base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.
Among the reported animals, all are categorized under least concern except Cervus unicolor (Sambhar)
is protected under vulnerable category as per IUCN.
 As per Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972
Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, as amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection
of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto
with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country.
Some of the sighted fauna were given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 by
including them in different schedules. Among the Avifuana in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus) is
included in schedule I of Wild life protection Act (1972), while many other birds are included in schedule
IV.
Among the reptiles, Indian Cobra (Naja naja), and Common Rat Snake (Ptyas mucosus), Russell‟s Viper
(Vipera russelli) were provided protection as per Schedule-II of Wild life protection act, (1972) and
Common Krait (Bungarus caerulus) were provided as per Schedule – IV of Wildlife protection act.
Among mammals; Fox (Canis aureus), Felis chaus (Jungle cat), Presbytis entellus (Hanuman/Common
Langur), Herpestes edwardsi (Common Mongoose) are protected in schedule –II
Blubull (Boselaphus tragocamelus), Sambhar (Cervus unicolor), Cheetal (Axis axis), Barking deer
(Muntiacus muntjak),Wild Boars (Sus scrofa) are provided protection by incorporating them in schedule–

III whereas Porcupine & Hare and five stripped squirrels are included in schedule IV of Wild Life
Protection act 1972.
3.7 SOCIOECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

3.7.1 Introduction
The initiation, growth and development of industrial activities and infrastructure development associated with it
are intend0ed to create impact on the socio-economic profile of the communities near by to industrial area.
The impact could be positive or negative depends on the development activities adopted and carried out
by the company/industry. An assessment of socio - economic environment forms an integral part of the
EIA/EMP study. In order to improve the quality of life of the people affected by the industrial activities it is
necessary to understand the socio- economic aspects and its trends in the study area.
Socio-demographic features/ survey are very useful for understanding social and economic problems and
identifying potential solutions. To understand the socio demographic status and the trends of the communities
in the 10 km radius map census 2011 & VD 2001 has been contemplated and necessary data collected and
compiled from it.
1. Methodology Adopted for the Study

Desk research is the major methodology adopted for the study which involves researching, compiling and
analysing the data. The 10 km radius study area map was divided into 4 zones 0-1, 1-3, 3-7 and 7-10 km.
Sociological aspect including human settlements, demography, and infrastructure aspect for education, health,
drinking water, power supply, communication and the land use aspect has been collected compiled and
analysed with the help of census data 2011 & village directory 2001 of Maharashtra state.
The details of the study area contain points as follows
 Demographic details
 Employment details
 Infrastructure facilities
 Landuse details
 Survey observations
 Opinion & awareness regarding project
 Quality of life
2. Demographic Highlights of the Study Area

The demographic aspects of the study area comprises of the various features of the population across to the
study area. The population composition is described here in term of basic demographic features like, house
hold status, age, Social composition, education, etc. The distribution of population has been reflected here
based on the geographic boundaries. Dwelling units in the study area is shown in Table 3.43.

TABLE 3.43
DWELLING UNITS IN THE STUDY AREA
Zones No. of villages Taluka District
0-1 km 01 Hingna Nagpur
1-3 km 01 Hingna
3-7 km 25 Hingna
02 Umred
7-10 km 22 Hingna
0-10 km 51 02 01
Source: Primary census abstract 2011, District Nagpur, State Maharashtra
Dwelling units explain the geographical composition of the area. The table depicts the number of villages
within the 10 km radius area from the project site.
In 10 km radial study area, 51 villages were coming under Nagpur district from Maharashtra state. Total
02 talukas Hingana and Umred were existed in the study area. Total 4 zones were identified in 10 km
radial distance from the project site for assessment of socio economic study. In first zone (0-1 km) there
was 01 village, in (1-3) km zone 1 village, in (3-7) km zone total 27 villages and in (7-10) km zone total
22 villages were available. Details are presente in Annexure IV. Population size of the villages is given
in Table 3.44.
TABLE 3.44
POPULATION SIZE VILLAGE WISE
Sr. No Population Size No of villages
1. < 50 8
2. 50-99 1
3. 100-199 5
4. 200-499 15
5. 500-1999 18
6. 2000-4999 2
7. 9000+ 2
Total 51
Above given table shows population size of the village‟s. 16% villages had population size less than 50,
2% village population was in between 50-99, 10% village population was between100-199, 29% village
population was between 200-499, 35% village population was between 500-1999, 4% in 2000-4999 and
in villages population above 9000 was 4% out of total villages.

TABLE 3.45
POPULATION DETAILS IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. Zones No of Total Total Total Population Male 06 Female Population Population
No household Population Male Female 0-6 child Child 06 SC ST
Child
1. 0-1 km 142 603 302 301 71 38 33 4 324
2. 1-3 km 140 614 308 306 62 34 28 2 230
3. 3-7 km 15590 63635 34084 29551 8141 4221 3920 9721 6371
4. 7-10 km 2682 11358 6043 5315 1375 680 695 1355 3668
0-10 km 18554 76210 40737 35473 9649 4973 4676 11082 10593

3.7.2 Population Details

 Total 18554 households were residing in the study area and average family size was 4 persons in
per family
 Total population in the study area was 76210
 Total male population was 40737(53%) of total population
 Total female population was 35473 (47%) of total population
 Total 0-6 child population was 9649 which was (13%) of total population
 Total male 0-6 child population was 4973
 Total female 0-6 child population was 4676
 Total Scheduled Cast population was 11082 (15%) of total population
 Total Scheduled Tribe population was 10593(14%) of total population
Population details are shown in Table 3.45
3.7.3 Details of Sex Ratio in the Study Area

The sex ratio is the ratio of female to male in the population (normalize to 1000). The sex ratio in the
study area showed unevenly distributed trends. Overall sex ratio was 871 female to thousand male. Child
0-6 sex ratio was 940 female to 1000 male, in SC, 949 and in ST 872 female to 1000 male. Details are
presented in Figure 3.14
FIGURE 3.14: SEX RATIO IN THE STUDY AREA
DETAILS OF LITERACY RATE

TABLE 3.46
LITERATE & ILLITERATE POPULATION IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No Zones P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT P_ILL M_ILL F_ILL

1. 0-1 km 449 240 209 154 62 92
2. 1-3 km 431 228 203 183 80 103
3. 3-7 km 48565 27339 21226 15070 6745 8325
4. 7-10 km 8378 4751 3627 2980 1292 1688
0-10 km 57823 32558 25265 18387 8179 10208
Note: P_LIT: Population Literate, M_LIT: Male Literate, F_LIT: Female Literate, P_ILL: Population
Illiterate, M_ILL: Male Illiterate, F_ILL: Female Illiterate

3.7.4 Literacy Details

 Total literate population was 57823(76%)
 Out of total literate population, male literate population was 32558(54%)
 Out of total literate population, female literate population was 25265(46%)
 Total illiterate population was 18387(24%)
From the above given data, it is revealed that literacy rate is improving in the study area. Only (24%)
population was found to be illiterate in the study area (Table 3.46). Literacy rate is given in Figure 3.15.
FIGURE 3.15: LITERACY RATE IN THE STUDY AREA
3.7.5 Details of Employment Pattern

The identification of the current economic characteristics of the study area is also an important part of defining
the employment pattern of the study area.
There are different types of employment pattern, that may be classified as: Those persons who had worked for
at least six months or 183 days are treated as Main Workers, on the other hand if persons categorized as
workers participated in any economic or productive activity for less than six months or 183 days during the last
one year are treated as Marginal Workers and Non Workers are those who have not worked any time at all in
the year. In main worker employment pattern there were classifications of main workers.
Employment pattern in the study area is in Table 3.47 and Figure 3.16
TABLE 3.47
EMPLOYMENT PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. Zones Total Workers Total main Workers Total Marginal Workers Total Non
No Workers
1 0-1 km 402 377 25 201
2 1-3 km 312 308 4 302
3 3-7 km 25397 22544 2853 38238
4 7-10 km 5928 5371 557 5430
0-10 km 32039 28600 3439 44171

 According to census 2011, total worker population was 32039(42%) of total population in the study area
 Main worker population was 28600(38%)
 Total marginal workers were 3439(4%)
 Total non workers were 44171(58%)
Above given statistics indicates that non worker population was more than working population.
TABLE 3.48
MAIN WORKER EMPLOYMENT PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No Zones Cultivators Agricultural workers Household industry Main other
workers workers
1 0-1 km 4 367 0 6
2 1-3 km 7 274 0 27
3 3-7 km 1429 4135 533 16447
4 7-10 km 1564 2298 35 1474
0-10 km 3004 7074 568 17954
 Total cultivators were 3004(10%) of total main workers

 Total agricultural workers were 7074(25%) of total main workers
 Household industry workers were 568(2%) of total main workers
 Main other population were 17954(63%)of total main workers
Above given statistics indicates that most of the workers were engaged in other works eg. Private job, labour
work, business etc.(Table 3.48)
Employment Pattern Main worker employment pattern
FIGURE 3.16: EMPLOYMENT PATTERN AND MAIN WORKER EMPLOYMENT PATTERN
3.7.6 Infrastructure Facilities

The socio-economic wellbeing of the area and its people is represented by the infrastructure and the
social assets available in the area. The study area constituted of various infrastructures related to

education, health care, communication, transportation, drinking water etc. All details of infrastructure
facilities are given in (Annexure V) and Figure 3.17
FIGURE 3.17: INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES IN THE STUDY AREA IN PERCENTAGE

3.7.7 Landuse Pattern
Baseline data on land-use was generated using information available with census data, which is
presented in details in Annexure- VI. Details of land use pattern of the study area are given in Table
3.49. The following prominent land use classes were observed in the study area.
TABLE 3.49
LANDUSE PATTERN (In ha)
Sr. Zones Forest Irrigated Un irrigated Cultivable Area not Total

No. land land land waste land available for land
cultivation
1. 0-1 km 13.98 142 501 9.05 50 716.03
2. 1 -3 km 26.66 101 150 0 113.64 391.3
3. 3-7 km 662.45 1144.72 4221.3 649.96 1946.11 8624.54
4. 7-10 km 1002.5 759.16 5798.43 1056.63 1094.37 9711.09
0-10 km 1705.59 2146.88 10670.73 1715.64 3204.12 19442.96
Source: Village directory 2001, District Nagpur, State Maharashtra
 Forest land
Forest area was found to be occupied about 1705.59 ha, which is 9% of the total study area.
 Land under cultivation
Altogether 12817.61-ha land (irrigated and un-irrigated) was used for cultivation, which was about 66% of
the total land study area.

 Cultivable waste
This category of land mainly consists of the land suitable for cultivation, which however have not been
brought under cultivation at any time. The area under this category works out to be 1715.64-ha, i.e. 9%
of the study area. This indicates the moderate use of available land for cultivation purpose.
 Land not available for cultivation
The area not covered under any of the above categories of land uses as well as land covered under
urban population forms this type. Altogether ha 3204.12 (16%) area in the study area is classified under
this. Landuse pattern is shown in Figure 3.18.
FIGURE 3.18: LAND USE PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA

3.7.8 Socio-Economic Survey Methodology
The study was carried out with a participatory approach by involving the stakeholders, particularly the
project beneficiaries and probable affected persons through a series of consultative process. The
population groups that were consulted include beneficiary group of people in the project influence area,
particularly the shopkeepers, farmers, school teachers, gram panchayat Sarpanch/members and village
leaders etc. This was helped to know the exact situation and views of the people about the project.
Proportionate and purposive sampling methods were used for selecting respondents (male and female)
for household survey. For official information of village, sarpanch/ Gram panchyat member/govt. school
teachers were chosen. Structured questionnaire were used for survey. Total 10 villages were surveyed
which was 20% of total 51 villages in 10 km study map. For group discussion, panchyat bhavan,
Aanganwadi bhavan, community halls were used. Household survey, group discussion & discussion with
sarpanch carried out is shown in Plates 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and list of surveyed villages is given in Table 3.50

TABLE 3.50
SURVEYED VILLAGE LIST
Sr. No Villages
1. Katandhara
2. Pipaldhara
3. Mandwa Mahar
4. Nagajhari
5. Bhansuli
6. Murjhari
7. Mathani
8. Takalghat (CT)
9. Khadki
10. Kanholibara
PLATE 3.2: HOUSEHOLD SURVEY WITH TAILOR PLATE 3.3: GROUP DISCUSSION IN MANDWA
MASTER IN VILLAGE NAGAJHARI IN THE MAHAR VILLAGE IN THE STUDY AREA
STUDY AREA
PLATE 3.4: DISCUSSION WITH WOMEN SARPANCH IN KATANDHARA VILLAGE
3.7.9 Salient Observation of the Survey/ Study Area

 House pattern: Types of housing varied from thatched to pucca houses. 40% houses were in pakka
form, 30% in semi pakka and 30% houses were observed in kaccha form. Kachha house pattern in
Mandwa Mahar village shown in PLATE 3.5

PLATE 3.5: KACCHA HOUSE PATTERN IN MANDWA MAHAR VILLAGE

 Employment: Main occupation in the study area was agriculture and its allied activities eg. Cattle
rearing, dairy farming and labour work. Agricultural activity was mainly depending on monsoon
season. Other income generation sources of the area were labour work, small business; private jobs
etc. The labours were getting daily wages in the range of Rs 100-250, depending on type of work
they set. During discussion, it was found that due to lack of irrigation facilities in summer season
farmers hadn‟t any work for 2-3 months, its indicates unemployment
 Fuel: The primary sources of cooking fuel were firewood, wood chips, cow dung cake, coal etc. Very
few villagers were using LPG facility. It was observed that, most of the households had LPG
connection but they prefer cooking on wood/coal because it costs less money/easily available in
villages
 Main crops: The principle crops grown in agricultural farm were wheat, soyabean, pulse, gram,
cotton etc.
 Language: Official language as well as mother tongue of the study area was Marathi. In addition
Hindi language was also spoken by large population
 Migration from other states: A person is considered as migrant when he/she is enumerated at a
different place than his/her previous place of residence. During survey it was found that local people
not migrate for employment. However people from nearer states eg. Chhatisgarh, Madhya Pradesh
come for employment in Butibori industrial area
 Sanitation: Toilet facility is one of the most basic facilities required in a house. It was observed that
more than 70% of the households were not having toilet facilities in their houses. There was no
proper drainage line in the villages. Open defection was in practice in most of the villages
 Drinking water Facilities: During the survey, it was observed diverse sources of drinking water
supply in villages. Major source of drinking water in the study area was ground water (hand pumps,
tap water and dug wells). Near about (30%) villages availing treated water through Gram panchayat
water supply through tap water. During discussion, it was revealed that in summer season water
shortage faced by most of the villages (Plate 3.6)

PLATE 3.6: GRAM PANCHAYAT WATER SUPPLY IN MANDWA MAHAR VILLAGE IN THE STUDY
AREA
 Education facilities: Most of the villages were available education facilities in the form of
Aanganwadi and primary schools. Higher education facilities were available in the range of 5-10 km.
Colleges and other diploma courses were available at Butibori and Nagpur city. Primary school
buildings were found in good condition with toilet facility. It was observed that ZP schools are
providing better facilities and environment to rural students (Plate 3.7)
PLATE 3.7: PRIMARY SCHOOL BUILDING IN MANDWA MAHAR VILLAGE
 Transportation facility: For transportation purpose auto, jeep, private bus and S.T. bus services
were available in the study area; however villagers reported that transportation facilities were not
frequently available. Private vehicles like bicycles & motor cycles were also used by villagers for
transportation purpose
 Road connectivity: Most of the roads were pucca and connected fair enough to villages. More than
half the respondents reported that roads they frequently used were semi pucca
 Communication facilities: For communication purpose mainly mobile phones, news papers & post
offices were present in the villages

 Medical facilities: There were few health care facilities available in the study area. In some of the
villages primary health sub centres were available. Hospitals and other better health centres were
available in the range of 5-10 km at town/city place
 Electricity: All villages were availing electricity facility for domestic use, 30% villages availing
electricity for agricultural purpose. Solar Street lights were observed in most of the villages. shown in
Plate 3.8
PLATE 3.8: SOLAR STREET LIGHT IN KATANDHARA VILLAGE
 Market facility: Study area was predominantly rural. In villages, small shops were available for daily
need things. Weekly market facility was available in some villages. Wholesale markets were available
at Butibori town, Taklaghat, Kanholibara etc.
 Recreation facilities: Television and radio were the main recreation facilities in the study area.
News paper/magazine facilities were found in small towns
3.7.10 Awareness and Opinion of the Respondents about the Project
Public opinion is the aggregate of individual attitudes or beliefs. It is very important to take opinion of the
villagers about the project. The awareness will not only promote community participation but also enable
them to understand the importance of the project and encourage them to express there view. To know
the awareness and opinion of the villagers about the project, group discussion, meeting with school
teachers/village leaders were carried out in the study area.
 Majority of the respondents were aware about the project site and about the project activity
 Respondents complained that, employment opportunities mostly given to migratory population came
from Chhatisgarh, M.P, Bihar etc. They asked to give employment opportunities to local population
 Major problem in study area was lack of medical facility, drinkable water and employment
opportunity. Village leaders suggested for development in needy fields from various industries will
improve village condition
 Respondents were positive opinion about the proposed expansion of MIDC industrial area, they
strongly believed the it will help to develop quality of life of the study area

3.7.11 Quality of Life

Quality of life (QoL) is a term, which indicates overall status of socio-economic environment in a given
area. Quality of life (QoL) is defined as a function between “objective conditions” and “subjective
attitudes” involving a defined “area” of concern
Quality of life index is based on a unique methodology that links the results of subjective life satisfaction
surveys to the objective determinants of quality of life across countries. The “objective conditions” are
defined as numerically measurable artifacts of a physical, sociological event or economic event.
Objective conditions may be defined as any number, which stands for a given quantity of a variable of
interest so long as it is independent of subjective opinion. Subjective attitude” is primarily concerned with
affective and cognitive dimensions. It is specifically concerned with „how aspects of cognition vary as
objective conditions vary.
Once objective measures are obtained for each factor, they are transformed to a normal scale varying
from 0 to 1 (value function curve) in which 0 corresponds to the lowest or least satisfaction.
Actuary measure and 1 corresponds to the highest satisfaction level. The weights are assigned to each
factor by ranked-pair wise technique (by the expert group) based on the secondary data and general
observations.
For each objective measure, a corresponding subjective measure is developed for each individual of the
sample population by asking him to rate his satisfaction scale (value function curve). In addition, it is
used such that 0 corresponds to the lowest level of attitudinal satisfaction and 1 corresponds to the
highest level of satisfaction. Weights are assigned to each factor using ranked - pair wise comparison
techniques.
The Socio-economic Indicators for QoL Assessment are:
1. Income 2. Employment and Working 3. Housing 4. Food
Conditions
5. Clothing 6. Water Supply 7. Sanitation 8. Health
9. Energy & Fuel 10. Transportation 11. Communication 12. Education
13. Environment and 14. Recreation 15. Social Security 16. Human Rights
Pollution
Subjective QoL calculations are as follows:

QoL(s) = 1/p   QIij X Wi
i =1 j=1
Where,
QoL(s) = Subjective quality of life index
p = No. of respondents, j = 1, ......, p
m = No. of factors, i = 1... m
QIij = Subjective quality index for ith factor assigned by jth respondent
 Qiij= Subjective quality index for ith factor assigned by all respondents in an area

Wi = Relative weightage of the ith factor

Objective QoL calculations are as follows:
i=n
QoL(o) =  QIi X Wi
i=1
Where,
QoL (o) = Objective quality of life index
n = No. of QoL Factors
i = 1... n
QIi = Satisfaction level (assigned by the expert group) for the ith objective
indicator
Wi = Normalized weight for its factor
The cumulative index of QoL calculations is as follows:

QoL(c) = QoL o + QoL s
2
Thus, the average QoL index values are estimated as:
QoL (s) = 0.54
QoL (o) = 0.56
QoL (c) = 0.55
The average QoL index value for the study area is leading to satisfactory level due to satisfactory
economic status like, good educational facilities, communication facilities, fair transportation facilities and
also availability of basic needs viz., food, clothing & housing.

4.0 ANTICIPATED IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

All developmental activities at proposed expansion of ButiboriIndustrial Area (BIA-Phase II),
MIDC,Nagpurgive rise to environmental issues, right from inception, due to use of natural resources upto
the operational phase, use of raw materials, minerals, fossil fuels as well as due to generation of the
wastes (gaseous, liquid or solids) from industrial processes,resulting in depletion of resources whereas the
wastes disposed into different environmental media causes serious threat to environmental health by
turning in unfavourable for living being. The sign of stress on the limited natural resources are evident from
the deteriorating air quality, soil degradation, polluted rivers, streams, reservoirs & ponds and in the general
status of environment in various regions. It is now well recognized that, for sustainable development and
optimal use of natural resources, environmental considerations are required to be integrated well within the
planning & designing stage and with implementation of development project.The envisaged benefits from
developmental projects cannot be fully realized unless they are environmentally and socially sound and
sustainable. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is one of the proven management tools for
incorporating environmental concerns in development process and also improved decision making.
The details are provided by the proponent about the proposed project, (technical data, policy matters,
approach to environmental protection etc.) and the preproject (baseline) environmental status monitored
through field surveys. Baseline environmental conditions of study area of the proposed project site are
described inChapter 3. An attempt was made to identify and predict impacts due to proposed
developmental activities and also the cumulative impacts due to existing and proposed activities.
4.1 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE
4.1.1 Impact on Topography and Landuse
The total land area to be occupied for proposed expansion of Butibori Industrial Area (BIA-Phase II) is
275.58 Hectares. The site is devoid of forest; hence the site clearance from the Forest Department is not
involved. Further, the site is devoid of human habitation and evacuation of the project affected persons is
not involved in this project. Hence, no resettlement and rehabilitation issues are involved in the proposed
project.
Different industrial/residential units will be established alongwith other infrastructural facilities. Due to the
construction of such units, the topography of the land is likely to change.The change in the topography, will
be buildings construction and road network at the site. However, there will be significant improvement in
the aesthetics of the site.
4.1.2 Impact on Soil
The proposed project site is presently not used for cultivation. The topsoil removed from the site will
be stored in dumps separately during construction period and in the post construction phase, the
topsoil will be spread on the un-built areas of the plot and tree plantations and green belt
development will be taken up. As the topsoil removed from the site will be re-used for growth of
plants, no adverse impact is envisaged due to removal of topsoil from the site.
The dripping of oil from construction vehicles might cause soil contamination. In order to prevent soil
contamination likely to result from the oil spill and dripping from vehicles, drip pans will be placed at
the parking places of vehicles and the dripped oil will be collected. The collected dripped oil will be
stored and subsequently sent to the authorized recycling agencies recognized by MPCB.The impact
network on soil environment is presented in Figure 4.1.
Chapter 4- Anticipated Impacts and 4-1

Mitigation Measures
Proposed expansion
project
Construction phase Operational phase
Abstraction of water Disturbance of soil Release of waste water on land
Change in ground water regime: Addition/Removal of

soil moisture/water level/flow Change in structure
substance of heat to/from
pattern/salt water instruction of soil: ground level
the soil
Impact on soil data Impact on landscape

Impact on flora & fauna
Impact on Agricultural Impact on Live Stock

porduction
Impact on Socio-
Impact on Economic Output
Cultural Environment
FIGURE 4.1: IMPACT NETWORK ON SOIL ENVIRONMENT
4.1.3 Impact on Air Quality

Construction activities have the potential to generate a substantial amount of air pollution. During
construction phase, suspended particulate matter will be the main pollutant, which will be generated
during the site development activities such as levelling of land, cutting and filling activities,
transportation of construction materials to the project site from various sources, operation of DG sets
for drilling, rock breaking, crushing etc. the excavation activities, aswell as loading, unloading and
transporation of construction materials, PMconcentrationwill be increased locally for short period.
Also, due to the increased vehicular movements, increase in levels NOx and CO concentrations will
be resulted at the project site. However, the increase in pollution levels in the ambient air, will be
negligible and also it is a temporary phenomenon. As most of the construction equipment will be
mobile, the emissions are likely to be fugitive and not concentrated at a single place or source. As the
impacts will be localized in nature, the areas outside the proposed project boundary are not likely to
face any significant adverse impact with respect to ambient air quality. The overall impact network on
air environment is presented in Figure 4.2.

Mitigation Measures
Proposed expansion project
Construction Phase Operation Phase
Air Pollution Due to Dust Generation Particulate Matter & gaseous
Change in Impact on Particulates Deposition

Air Quality Visibility on Water and land
Aesthetic Impact on
Impact Agriculture
Impact on
Human Health
Impact on Economic Impact on

Output Socio-Cultural Env.
FIGURE 4.2: IMPACT NETWORK ON AIR ENVIRONMENT
4.1.4 Impact on Noise Levels

The major sources of noise during the construction phase will be due to operation of construction
equipment such as loading-unloading, concrete mixers, cranes, generators, pumps, compressors,
vibrators and various equipment may create noise in the area etc. Further the noise would also be
generated from many construction activities like mechanical works. The operation of this equipment
will generate noise ranging between 70-85 dB (A). Due to moderate levels of construction activities,
the anticipated noise generation during construction phase will be mostly confined to the facility itself
and not anticipated to have significant adverse impacts on the surrounding ambient noise levels. In
order to have less impact on noise levels in the area, the major works will be carried out during
daytime as far as possible.
Apart from these, another major source of noise will be the movement of heavy vehicles like trucks
for transporting the materials. This will have almost no impact as the area is free from habitation and
also not much major requirement for transportation of raw materials is required except for few
requirements of construction materials. Any part of plant or equipment found to emit exclusive noise
due to a faulty silencer; broken or ill-fitting engine covers or other reasons shall immediately be taken
out of service and be adequately serviced, repaired or replaced. Also supplementary mitigation
measures such as control of vehicles frequency, construction restriction in a night time, job rotation,
safety equipment etc. will be implemented. However the impacts shall be confined to the construction
area and there are no habitats within 1 km from the site. Hence, it is not expected to cause any
significant problem. The overall impact network on noise environment is presented in Figure 4.3.

Mitigation Measures
Proposed expansion Project
Activity Construction Phase Operation Phase
Primary Impact Noise
Change in Ambient Noise Level
Secondary Impact Health Risk Impact on work Migration of Birds,

outputand Efficiency Reptiles and population
Impact on Impact on socio-Cultural

Tertiary Impact economic output Environment
FIGURE 4.3: IMPACT NETWORK ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT
4.1.5 Impact on Water Quality

During construction phase, water will be required only for construction of structures, sprinkling on
roads for dust suppression, domestic and non-domestic uses of the construction workers, that too
only during daytime.
Impact on water quality during construction phase will be due to non-point discharges of sewage
generated at the project site by the construction workforce. However, due to relatively smaller area
that will be taken-up for construction, the impact of water discharges at the site will be negligible.
At the construction site, adequate number of toilets with hygienic environment will be provided. If
such facilities are not provided, this may lead to environmental pollution at the project site. The toilets
will be connected to the septic tanks which will be lined while ensuring that the bottom levels of the
tank will be adequately above the prevailing groundwater table in the area and accordingly no
contamination of groundwater due to the discharge of sewage into the septic tanks will be resulted.
The overall impact on water quality is presented in Figure 4.4.

Mitigation Measures
Construction phase Operational phase
Abstraction of water Release of waste water
Environmental health and

Impact on water
Impact on hydraulics of water Aesthetic Risk
quality
courses
Impacts on hydraulics of Impact on Cost of water Impact on

water courses Aquatic Life treatment Amenity/Recreation
Impacts on Socio- cultural

Impacts on Economic
environment
output
FIGURE 4.4: IMPACT NETWORK ON WATER ENVIRONMENT
4.1.6 Impact due to Solid Waste Generation

During construction period, considerable quantities of earth materials and boulders will be excavated
for the foundation of various proposed structures. The excavated earth and boulders will be used for
levelling the low-lying terrain. The topsoil excavated from the project site will bestored and kept in
separated site and used for covering the soil surfaceon which tree plantation and green belt
development within the project premises will be undertaken.
During construction phase, solid waste will be generated in terms of canteen wastes, food packets,
wrappers etc. These may cause nuisance due to degradation of these steal materials at the project
site as well as its immediate surroundings, if adequate measures are not taken.
The project site will generate large amount of demolition wastes. Wastes like iron scraps, roofing
tiles, wood, machinery and bricks, all these are value aided materials and will be stored separately for
disposal.
In order to avoid any solid waste disposal problems, an effective solid waste management system by
means of collection of wastes in dust bins and transporting the same to the authorized dumping
grounds by the contractors. Strict adherence to the established solid waste collection and disposal
system will ensure clean environment during construction period.

Mitigation Measures
4.1.7 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology and Aquatic Ecology

The proposed project site is devoid of forest or thick vegetation. Only small bushes which are grown
in the recent past due to non-cultivation of the area will be removed during levelling operations.
Hence, there will not be any major impact on the terrestrial ecology of the project site due to
construction activities.
There are no water bodies in the vicinity of the project site.The construction activities of this
developmental project will be undertaken only during the non-monsoon season; hence no run-off or
discharges from the site will be let out. Further, suitable de-siltation ponds will be provided to arrest
the silt load if any, during monsoon period. Hence, no impact of water and wastewater discharges
and associated environmental pollution are envisaged during construction phase of the project.
Accordingly, no adverse impact on aquatic ecology of nearby tanks is envisaged during construction.
The overall impact network on biological environment is presented in Figure 4.5.
Construction Phase Operation Phase
Activity PhysicalDisturbance
Primary
Disturbance of Plants, Animals & their Habitat (Including
Impacts Removal of plants, Animals Food Suppliers Feeding, Nesting and
& their Habitat Breeding Areas)
Impact on Landscape Impact on

SecondaryImpacts Impact on Soil Change in Productivity (Visual Aspects, Amenity
Stability and Composition of Plant & Landscape, Ecology)
Microflora Animal Communities and
Habitats
Change in Economic Use of Flora

and Fauna (Agriculture, Forestry
Horticulture, Fisheries etc.)
TertiaryImpacts Impact on
socio-cultural
Impact on Environment
Economic Output
FIGURE 4.5: IMPACT NETWORK ON BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Mitigation Measures
4.2 IMPACTS DURING OPERATION PHASE

4.2.1 Air Environment
4.2.1.1 Sources
* Fugitive Emissions
There will be number of sources of dust and gaseous emissions during construction activities.The
proposed project will be landscaped with proper terracing and benching and will be provided with
pucca roads. As the entire proposed project will be covered with good landscaping and tree/grass
cover, generation of fugitive dust within the premises is not anticipated. Even the dust, outside the
project will be minimal due to the proposed compound walls, and plantation which will function as
barriers along the boundary. Further, all fugitive emissions will be controlled to a great extent, through
proper maintenance of tree plantation and the green belt development that will be undertaken within
the project site.
* Gaseous Emissions
The sources of gaseous pollutants within the proposed project are DG sets and vehicular movement
within the premises. The emissions of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) will be
due to operation of DG sets, in case of the failure of the power grid.
The operation of CETP facilities involves handling and use of chemicals such as Lime, Acid, Ferrous
sulphate, Polyelectrolyte, Urea, DAP etc., the safety of workers are primeconsideration. As the
workers will be equipped with necessary personnel protective equipment (PPE) and will be trained for
safety aspects to be followed during working hours, the impact will be insignificant as a whole.
In order to control emission of particulates during operation of the DG sets, adequate control
equipment will be installed and adequate stack height will be provided as per CPCB norms.
These sources of emission are further studied for determination of incremental GLC level with the
estimated quantity using mathematical simulation software ISCST-3. The details of the modelling &
outcomes are described below under respective heading.
It is emphasized that the mitigation measures discussed in this chapter and elaborated in the
Environmental Management Plan given in Chapter 10; will be followed to maintain ambient air quality
within norms. The details of air modelling for ground level concentration (GLC) of various pollutants
are carried out using ISCST3 Model.
4.2.1.2 Modeling Studies
The mathematical Model ISCST-3, 1996 was used for predicting the GLCs, which is entirely in line
with the requirement of central pollution control board, New Delhi.
Details of air dispersion model
The air quality impact of a source or group of sources is evaluated by the use of mathematical
models. The widely accepted interpretation models simulate the relationships between air pollutant
emissions and its impact on air quality. For the present study, this model is used for the prediction of
maximum ground level concentrations (GLCs).
Assessment of air pollution was carried out for stack attached to D.G. sets. The ISCST-3 (industrial
source complex – short term-3) from Lakes and Environment is an hour-by-hour steady state
Gaussian Plume Model. This model is widely recognized as predictive tool in impact assessment for
air environment. The ISCST-3 model was applied with the consideration of elevated + flat terrain,
gradual plume rise and buoyancy induced dispersion options in the present study.

Mitigation Measures
Stack details
The stack details viz, height, diameter, temperature, velocity, volumetric flow and emission rates are
presented in Table 4.1. Total 4 DG sets are considered through which the emissions are likely
expected.
TABLE 4.1
STACK DETAILS
Sr. Stack attached to Height Dia Temp Velocity Volumetric PM10 SO2 NOx
No. (m) (m) (°K) (m/s) Flow Nm3/hr
gm/sec
1 D.G. set 500 kVA 30 0.5 530 15.0 5902.907 0.02 0.057 0.22
2 D.G. set 500 kVA 30 0.5 530 15.0 5902.907 0.02 0.057 0.22
3 D.G. set 150 kVA 14.2 0.5 515 10.0 4088.097 0.009 0.034 0.135
4 D.G. set 150 kVA 14.2 0.5 515 10.0 4088.097 0.009 0.034 0.135
Meteorological data
The meteorological data required for the modelling studies was collected from IMD Nagpur for the
period of winter (dec 2014-feb 2015).The windrose diagram for December 2014 to February 2015.is
shown in Figure 4.6.
FIGURE 4.6: WINDROSE DIAGRAM WINTER (Dec 2014-Feb 2015)

Presentation of results
The simulations were made to evaluate particulate matter, SO2 and NOx incremental rise due to
proposed project. These results are based on considering the emission due to 4 D.G. sets. In the
short-term simulations, the incremental concentrations were observed to obtain an optimum
description of variations in concentrations within study area of 10 km radius.
Resultant Concentrations
The maximum incremental ground level concentrations (GLCs) for PM10, SO2 and NOx due to
proposed developmental activities were carried out. The predicted 24 hourly maximum

Mitigation Measures
concentrations for PM10, SO2 and NOx are found to be 0.29µg/m3, 0.27µg/m3 and 4.2 µg/m3
respectively in proposed scenario and depicted in Table 4.2. The isopleths representing the GLCs of
PM10, SO2 and NOx are shown in Figures 4.7 to 4.9respectively.
The cumulative concentration levels of PM10, SO2 and NOx are presented in Table 4.3. The
cumulative concentration levels (Ambient + predicted incremental rise) revealed that the
concentration levels for PM10, NOx and SO2 likely to be encountered in the operation of the project
are respectively occurring at a distance of about 1.0 km, 1.0 km, 1.0 km in the SW, W direction with a
concentration levels (cumulative) of 65.09 µg/m3, 15.2 µg/m3 and 30.6 µg/m3 respectively which is
well within the NAAQM levels prescribed by CPCB. Hence it is inferred that considering cumulative
concentration levels, the pollution load exerted due to proposed project will be insignificant.
TABLE 4.2
SHORT TERM MODELLING RESULTS
Pollutant Incremental concentration (IC) (g/m3) Distance (km) Direction
PM 10 0.29 1.0 SW&W
SO2 0.27 1.0 SW&W
NOx 4.2 1.0 SW&W
TABLE 4.3
RESULTANT CONCENTRATIONS DUE TO PROPOSED PROJECT
Pollutant Maximum Incremental Resultant Limits (Industrial/
Baseline Concentrations due to Concentration Residential, Rural)
3
Concentration Proposed Project (g/m ) Concentration (g/m3)
(g/m3) (g/m3)
PM 10 64.8 0.29 65.09 100
SO2 14.93 0.27 15.2 80
NOx 26.4 4.2 30.6 80

Mitigation Measures
The incremental rise of PM10 is 0.29 g/m3 at a distance of 1km in SW, W direction.
FIGURE 4.7: INCREMENTAL RISE OF PARTICULAR MATTER
The incremental rise of SO2 is 0.27g/m3 at a distance of 1km in SW, W direction.

FIGURE 4.8: INCREMENTAL RISE OF SO2

Mitigation Measures
The incremental rise of NOx is 4.2g/m3 at a distance of 1km in SW, W direction.

FIGURE 4.9: INCREMENTAL RISE OF OXIDE OF NITROGEN
4.2.1.3 Impact Due to Traffic Density

All the major raw materials will be transported by road ways. A road network will be provided up to
site. All the tippers/ trucks will be covered by tarpaulin. Hence there will not be much fugitive dust
generation during transportation of raw materials for construction. Pucca road exists up to the site.
The existing road is capable of absorbing additional truck movement. Hence there will not be
generation of fugitive dust during transportation of raw materials and products. Hence there will not
be any adverse impact on vehicular traffic.
Vehicular Emission
The national highway (NH-7) and state highway (SH-3 and SH-264) are passing through the study
area. Heavy traffic was observed on the national highway. It was observed that nearly 611 vehicles
wereplying on NH-7 and vehicles on SH-3 and SH-264 were nearly192, 196 respectively.The traffic
details on highways in the study area are given in Table 4.4. The noxious pollutants emitted due to
vehicular activities are PM, SO2 and NOx and CO.
TABLE 4.4
VEHICULAR TRAFIIC DURING PEAK HOURS IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. Traffic Intersection Distance from Direction Traffic Density per peak hours
No. Project Site w.r.t project H M L
site
1. National Highway-7 8.1 ESE 184 179 248
2. State Highway-3 7.24 ESE 71 54 67
3. State Highway264 8.9 ESE 63 52 81
H: Heavy Vehicle, M: Medium Vehicle, L: Light Vehicle

Mitigation Measures
a) Vehicular Emissions
Emission factors as mentioned in the ARAI (Automotive Research Association of India), 2006 for
vehicles are used for calculating emission rate for various pollutants due to vehicular activities within
the project area. The length of roads is considered on the basis of project area.
b) Details of CALINE4Model
The California Line Source Dispersion Model, CALINE4 (1989), uses traffic emissions, site geometry
and meteorology to predict air pollutant concentrations within 500 meters of the roadways.
Predictions can be made for carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide and suspended particles. Options for
modeling near intersections, parking lots, elevated or depressed freeways, and within canyons are
given. CALINE 4 is last in series of line source air quality model developed by California Department
of Transportation (CALTRANS). It is based on Gaussian diffusion equation and employs mixing zone
concept to characterize pollutant dispersion over the roadway. CALINE 4 divides an individual link
into series of elements from which incremental concentrations are computed and summed. Each
element is modeled as an "equivalent" finite line source (FLS) positioned normal to the wind direction
and centered at the element midpoint. Element size increases with distance from the receptor to
improve computational efficiency. Incremental downwind concentrations are computed using the
crosswind Gaussian formulation for a line source of finite length:
2
Q y2−y 1 y
C = πσ . ∫y1−y exp [− 2 (σ ) ] dy.
zu y
Where q is the lineal source strength, u is the wind speed, σy andσz , is the horizontal and vertical
Gaussian dispersion parameters, and y1 and y2 are the FLS endpoint y-coordinates. CALINE 4 treats
the region directly over the highway as a zone of uniform emissions and turbulence. This “mixing
zone” is defined as the region over the traveled way plus 3 m (approximately two vehicle widths) on
either side. The additional width accounts for the initial horizontal dispersion imparted to pollutants by
the vehicle wake. Within the mixing zone, the mechanical turbulence created by moving vehicles and
the thermal turbulence created by hot vehicle exhaust are treated as significant dispersive
mechanisms. The emission factors considered for modeling are given in Table 4.5.
TABLE 4.5
EMISSION FACTORS USED (ARAI 2006 STANDARDS)
Sr. No. Pollutant Concentration (g/mile)

1. CO 6.31
2. NOx 10.51
3. PM 0.483
CALINE 4 Model Results

The net increase in traffic load for transportation is estimated to be 19 trips in one hour.The
predictions are for 1-hour considering a worst case scenario for all 19 trips in one hour. The results
are summarized in Table 4.6.
TABLE 4.6
RESULTANT PREDICTED INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATION OF POLLUTANTS
Sr. No. Pollutant Incremental Concentration

1. CO 0.00 ppm
2. NO2 0.03 ppm
3. PM 1.1 µg/m3

Mitigation Measures
Impact on Ambient Air Quality due to increase in Traffic Volume

The ambient air quality in MIDC Industrial area was observed in the range of PM10: 30.0 to 64.3
µg/m3, PM2.5:8.0-24.3 µg/m3, SO2: 6.1 to 13.7 µg/m3, NOx: 5.3-26.4 µg/m3 and CO: 0.141-0.263
mg/m3. The increase in concentration due to increase in traffic load is estimated to be 1.1 µg/m3 for
PM, 0.03 ppm for NOx. The cumulative load in terms of PM10 will be 65.4 µg/m3 indicating slight
increase in the concentration levels.
Air Pollution Control Measures for Additional Traffic Volume

To minimize the pollution load exerted from the additional traffic during transportation and
construction, following pollution control measures will be adopted:
1. Transport material in trucks covered with tarpaulin.
2. Overloading of trucks will be strictly prohibited.
3. Trucks shall be maintained spillage proof.
4. Periodic maintenance of transport trucks to control emissions.
5. Speed of the transport trucks will be regulated.
6. Transport will be carried out during non-peak hours.
7. Periodic maintenance of internal roads within industrial estate in association with MIDC.
8. Plantation along internal road side within industrial estate in association with MIDC.
c) Prediction
In the present case, prediction of impacts for CO and NOx was carried out on 1 hourly basis. It was
predicted that the maximum ground level concentrations due to vehicular movement will be 1.22
g/m3 for CO and 3.4 g/m3 for NOx. It was beyond 500 m from the road as the vehicular density was
very less and was only due to vehicular activities on highways. On the State highways near to the
proposed project area vehicular density was found to be less. The predicted concentrations of CO
and NOx would be very less. The receptor villages are far from the project boundary so there will not
be any significant impact due to vehicular emission. Within the study area, the NOx and CO
concentration are within the stipulated standards of 80 g/m3 and 2000 μg/m3respectively.
4.2.2 Noise Environment

Impacts on Noise Levels due to Proposed Plant
The noise level at various locations within the study area due to a noise sources can be computed by
using Wave Divergence Model as given below:
L2 = L1 - 20 log (r2/r1) - Ae1,2,3
where,
L2 and L1 are the noise levels at the distances r2 and r1 from the source and Ae1,2,3is the
environmental attenuation factor.
Total noise level Lp due to all sources can be determined as follows:
Lp(Total) = 10 log (10Lp1/10 + 10Lp2/10+ ----------+10Lp10/10 )
where,
Lp1, Lp2 are the noise levels at a sampling point due to sources a, b etc.

Mitigation Measures
Impact due to Transportation

The equivalent noise level due to traffic is estimated using FHWA Noise Model, as follows :
Leq(h)i = Loei+10 log [Ni/(Si*Ti)]+10 log (15/D)(1+a) + So - 13
Where,
Leq(h)i = Leq at hour ‘h’ for ith vehicle type
Loei = Reference mean energy level for ith vehicle type
Ni = No. of i type vehicles passing during the time T
Si = Average speed for the ith vehicle type in km/hr
Ti = Duration for which Leq is desired class responding to Ni
D =Perpendicular distance in meter from the center line of the traffic lane to the
location of the observer
a = Factor relating to absorption characteristics of

ground cover between the roadway and the observer
So = Shielding factor provided by a noise barrier
Noise levels from light, medium and heavy vehicles on the roads are calculated by using the above
model and cumulative effect is computed, using the following model :
Leq(Total) = 10 log [10Leql/10 + 10Leqm/10 + 10Leqh/10]

Where,Leql, Leqm and Leqh are equivalent noise levels for light, medium and heavy vehicles
respectively.
Presently, equivalent noise level due to present traffic near the proposed site is observed to be 60-67
dBA. Around 35-40 heavy vehicles are likely to ply for transporting raw materials and finished
products, after commissioning of the proposed plants. The traffic equivalent noise level near the
proposed site of MIDC phase II is expected to increase by 1-2 dB(A), thus the noise level due to
traffic will be within the Industrial Noise Standards.
Noise sources
The general noise levels due to construction activities may go sometime upto 80 dB(A) at the work
sites in daytime during construction phase. The workers in general are likely to be exposed to an
equivalent noise level of 75-80 dB(A) for which all statutory precautions as per the law will be
implemented. Impacts on the noise levels of the area will be temporary in nature.
During operation phase, noise levels from four DG sets are considered.Two DG sets each of 500
KVA capacity and two DG sets each of 150 KVA capacity will be the major contributors for increase in
the noise levels in proposed additional MIDC, Butibori phase 2 area and are considered as the worst
case scenario.The equivalent noise levels measured in the commercial area varied from 61 dB(A) to
63 dB(A).In the silent zone, equivalent noise levels measured were 51-53 dB(A) and in residential
area was 46.2-52.7dB(A). However since the industrial operation are far away from the habitation,
adverse impacts are not anticipated by the increase in the noise levels due to the proposed activities.

Mitigation Measures
The noise generating from the DG sets will be of the order of 70-75 dB(A).The maximum noise levels
of 75 dB(A) from the four DG-sets is considered for predicting ambient noise levels as the worst case
scenario.The maximum noise level generated will be 54 dB(A) when four DG sets will be in operation.
In order to reduce noise levels, the industry will take necessary steps to reduce/mitigate noise levels
at source by isolating these processes at the work environment to meet necessary standards.
Noise Generating Sources
Sr. No. Sources Noise level in dB(A) (1m away)
1 DG set 75 dB A)
Presentation of Results
The incremental noise levels were observed at proposed project site considering 100m x 100m grid
intervals over an area of 1 km x 1 km study area. As per thepredicted results, noise levels at the plant
boundaries are given below in Table 4.7. The predicted noise levels at the boundary due to various
plant activities will be ranging in between 24dB (A) to 26 dB (A).The isopleths of noise levels
predicted are shown in Figure 4.10.
TABLE 4.7
INCREMENTAL NOISE LEVELS
Sr. No. Direction Incremental noise level in dB(A)
1 N 26
2 NE 24
3 E 26
4 SE 24
5 S 26
6 SW 24
7 W 26
8 NW 24

Mitigation Measures
1000
800 db(A)
52
600
50
48
400
46
44
200 42
40
0 38
36
34
-200
32
30
-400
28
26
-600 24
-800
-1000
-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000
FIGURE 4.10: CUMULATIVE NOISE LEVELS DUE TO DG SETS
Noise Pollution Management

As per the model results, the noise levels due to the proposed plant will be in the range of 24dB (A) to
26dB (A) near the plant boundaries in all directions. The ambient noise levels will be within the
permissible limits after the commissioning of the proposed facilities.
The criteria for the environmental noise control is that the design of the proposed plant will not
change, in any continuous mode of operation, the level stipulated by MoEF and /or Pollution Control
Board at any point on the site boundary.
Noise Control Measures
 Noise levels due to DG-setscouldbe reduced by proper sitting and control measures.
 Proper routine and preventive maintenance procedure will be followed in consultation with the
DG-sets manufacturer.
 Acoustic enclosure at all DG-sets will be provided and also a suitable exhaust muffler will be
provided.
 The construction equipment will be required to use available noise suppression devices and
properly maintained mufflers
 Use of proper personal protective equipment in the form of earmuffs/plugs shall further mitigate
any adverse impact of noise to the workers.

Mitigation Measures
 The green belt development around the plant boundry will act as a barrier and will help in
reducing noise levels in the campus as a result of attenuation of noise generated due to plant
operations and transportation.
4.2.3 Water Environment
The impacts on water environment due to proposed expansion project can be explained in terms of
resources availability, wastewater generation, and its treatment system and reuse pattern. These
influence the natural regime of water, runoff and land areas, if not managed properly.
4.2.3.1 Impact on Water Quality (surface and ground water)
The overall water quality of Rama dam was found to be safe for drinking purpose physico-
chemically. However bacteriologically contaminated and needs chlorination treatment before
consumption.There will not be wastewater discharges in any of the surface water bodies, hence no
impacts are envisaged on surface water quality.
Groundwater will not be utilized / abstracted for plant activity as sufficient surface water from Rama
damwill be available for the proposed project and necessary permission has been sought. There will
not be wastewater discharges on land so no groundwater pollution is envisaged.
Water requirement
Total water requirement for the project is estimated to be 6890 m3/day and will be sourced from
Rama dam. The distribution network will be through pipeline i.e. 12 km from the Rama dam. The
water will be supplied through pipeline network and will be stored in storage tank where it will be
treated inwatertreatment plant and thetreated water will be sent to ESR (Elevated Storage Reservior)
and distributed to the users through pipeline (individual industries through pipeline) network. 24 hours
storage will be made available and it will be obligatory by MIDC. The distribution network will be as
follows:
Rama dam WTP Pipeline Sump ESR distribution
The water requirement breakup is given in Table 4.8.
TABLE 4.8
WATER REQUIREMENT
Sr. No. Particulars Water requirement m3/day
1 Process 2272
3 Green built & application 345
4 Fire fighting 138
5 Domestic 690
Total 6890
4.2.3.2 Wastewater Generation

The wastewater generation is estimated to be 2230 m3/day.
The wastewater generated will be sent to CETP proposed for this project separately. For CETP, role
of MIDC will be as a facilitator and will allot land to industries association to setup CETP and will
contribute financial share as per policies andguidelines.The treated effluent will be used for HRTS.
The estimated quantity that will be required for HRTS in 35 Ha of land will be 7000 m3. The existing
land where the HRTS is in operation is sufficient for the disposal in HRTS. However additional HRTS
will be developed by MIDC in 35 Ha. of land & the treated waste water will also be used in new

Mitigation Measures
HRTS. The breakup of wastewater generation from proposed expansionof MIDC area is shown in
Table 4.9 and water balance is presented in Table 4.10.
4.2.3.3 Domestic Wastewater Generation
The domestic water requirement is estimated to be 690 m3/day. The domestic wastewater generation will
be 552 m3/day. However for disposal of domestic waste individual industries will make provision for
sending it to septic tank or soak pit. There will not be any disposal of domestic waste into nearby water
body, however excess domestic waste generation will be used for plantation. MIDC will check this and
inform to MPCB regarding any ambiguity in the disposal of domestic waste.
TABLE 4.9
Sr. No. Particulars Wastewater Generation m3/day
1 Process 1333
2 Cooling water 345
3 Green belt & application -
4 Fire fighting -
5 Domestic 552
Total 2230
Note: The domestic wastewater and part of industrial wastewater will be used for plantation, fire fighting
and washing
3
Total water consumption 6890 m /day
Process 2272 Cooling water Greenbelt and Fire fighting 138 Domestic
m3/day 3445 m3/day Plantation 345 m3/day m3/day 690 m3/day
Process 1333 Domestic

3
m /day 552 m3/day
Cooling Nil
3
345 m /day Nil
To septic
tank /
(Individual
industry will
make
provision)
3
To CETP 1678 m /day
Treated effluent will be used for HRTS
FIGURE 4.11: WATER BALANCE

Mitigation Measures
TABLE 4.10
WATER BALANCE
Sr. No. Particular Water requirement (m3/day) Wastewater Generation (m3/day)
1. Process 2272 1333
2. Cooling water 3445 345
Green belt &
3. 345 -
application
4. Fire fighting 138 -
5. Domestic 690 552
SubTotal 6890 2230
6 Evaporation losses - 4660
Total 6890 6890
Rain Water Harvesting

Rainwater harvesting can serve as a solution to the water problem in the water crises area by
capturing the runoff. Rainwater harvesting helps in utilizing the primary source of water to prevent the
runoff from going into sewer or storm drains, thereby serving dual purpose making water available for
future use and reducing the load on treatment plants as well as other service lines.
Recharging water into the aquifers help in improving the quality of existing groundwater through
dilution. Rainwater harvesting comprises of two components:
 Storing rainwater in groundwater reservoirs for beneficial use in future
 Rain water harvesting for artificial recharge of ground water.
Amount of water that can be effectively harvested is called the harvesting potential of the site.
Efficiency of rainwater harvesting and recharging groundwater can be increased by following
methods:
 Use vegetated swales and depressions to reduce runoff.
 Reduce and filter surface runoff.
 Catch drainage all along the periphery of plot to prevent surface runoff.
Indivisual industries that will be located in the proposed MIDC,will make provision for rainwater
harvesting and MIDC will make compulsary for these industries to reduce the water intake. The
harvested water will be treated and used it for their domestic, industrial purposes, plantationand
greenbelt development.
Rain water harvesting structures will be provided to recharge the groundwater resources in the
region. The run-off water from the roof structure and paved areas will be collected through storm
water drainage system and led to rain water harvesting structure.The typical rain water harvesting
structure is shown in Figure 4.12.

Mitigation Measures
FIGURE 4.12: RAINWATER HARVESTING SYSTEM
STORM WATER MANAGEMENT (BY INDUSTRIES)

Rainwater runoff comprises of storm water, which flows into both surface water and groundwater.
Proper management of this resource ensures that storm water discharge is free of contamination. A
detailed “Storm Water Management Plan” will bedeveloped.The plan consists of best management
practices, which include consideration of the following:
 Good housekeeping in the above areas.
 Conducting routine inspections to ensure cleanliness
 Secondary containment and dykes in fuel/oil storage facilities
 Preparation of spill response plans, particularly for fuel and oil storage areas.
 Provision of slit traps in storm water drains
 Regular inspection and cleaning of storm drains.
4.2.4 Land Environment
4.2.4.1 Solid/Hazardous Waste Management
Solid Waste & Hazardous Waste Generation
Approximately 15000 populations are expected in expansion of MIDC, project. The total waste
generation estimated to be 7.5 tons/day. The collected solid wastes will be segregated at site for
organics & inorganics. Organic wastes will used is for composting and inorganics will be sent to
authorized vendors.
Common hazardous waste & disposal facility is available at 10 km distance from the additional MIDC area.
The common hazardous waste area is in 29.7 Ha. The collection system will be as per MPCB norms. The

Mitigation Measures
total hazardous waste can not be quantified at this stage; it will be totally depending on the number and
type of industries coming upin the proposed eapansion of MIDC area. However proper NOC will have to be
obtained from Director of Industrial Health and Safety by every industry to submit it to MIDC.
Waste Segregation (By industries)
 Segregation or sorting of wastes at its source will be practiced in order to encourage reuse/
recycling and to minimize the negative effects of the waste and increase its economic value. With
segregation at source, recyclables do not lose their commercial value due to cross contamination.
 At every floor dedicated bins will be placed to collect biodegradable and non-biodegradable wastes
in the residential area.
 At parking areas and other open areas dedicated bins will be placed
Collection bins
 Daily collection of wastes shall take place from all the bins.
 Daily sweeping and collection of wastes from roads and other common facility area would also be
done daily in the morning by the same operators.
 For waste collection, either carts or a dedicated truck could be used. Separate collection for
biodegradable and non-biodegradable wastes will be ensured.
 Large storage bins will be placed in the residential and buildings areas for final storage of waste
before disposal.
Plantation/Greenbelt Development
Proposed project area is 275.58 Ha. Thus, plantation will be carried out on 90.94 Ha. @ of 1500
trees/ha, which will be about 33% of the proposed project area. It is proposed to plan 1000 tree
saplings every year. Some trees shall be planted along road side in proposed industrial project area.
Development of 3 - tier green belt by plantation within the industrial area and there is a plan for more
plantations of different species for the purpose of minimizing air pollution as well as land scaping.
4.2.5 BiologicalEnvironment
Loss of Vegetation during site preparation:
The majority of local vegetation at project site is of seasonal shrubs, herbs and grasses and naturally
grown predominant plant species like Acacia nilotica(Babul), Annonasquamosa(Sitaphal),Acacia
catechu (Khair), Acacia leucociphala (Hiwar), Ziziphusmauritiana(Bor), Butiamonosperma (Palash)
&Prosopisjuliflora (vedibabool),Azadirachtaindica (Neem)etc.will be removed during site preparation.
Efforts will be made in order to minimize the tree cutting during development stage of the project.
Tree cutting will be compensated by the development of green belt around the periphery of the
project site, approach road and also along the periphery of proposed individual industries within the
proposed expansion of Industrial Area. The total area 90.94 ha (33%) will be covered by plantation.
Impact during Operational Phase
Impact related to Migratory route of Birds, Animals due to project activities
The existing ecological conditions in the project area have been established based on review of
secondary information and by conducting detailed primary ecological field surveys during winter
season of 2014-15. The study revealed that, there are no wildlife sanctuaries or wildlife protected
areas within 10 km study area from the project site. There is no identified migratory route/path of
birds or major wildfauna. Birds observed during the study period are locally common in observation.

Mitigation Measures
The major wildlife confined to the RF of the study area. During consultative approach with the
locals/villagers, it has come to know that, Nilgai, Wildboar, Sabhar, deer are often raid to the adjacent
agriculture area of RF and destroyed the crops during harvesting period. The proposed project does
not envisage any significant impact on wildlife in the study area.
Green Belt Development
Tree Plantation at the Proposed Plant Site
Proposed expansion ofof MIDC area is in 275.58 Ha. Thus, plantation will be carried out on 90.94Ha.
@ of 1500 trees/ha, which will be about 33% of the proposed project area. It is proposed to plan 1000
tree saplings every year. Some trees shall be planted along road side in proposed industrial area.
Recommended species for plantation are given in Table 4.11.
TABLE 4.11
RECOMMENDED SPECIES FOR PLANTATION (OUTER PERIPHERY)
Sr.No. Scientific name Common name Height Growth rate Evergreen/ Crown Shape
(m) Deciduous
1. Aeglemarmelos Bel 12 Slow growing Evergreen Oblong
2. Ailanthus excelsa Mahraruk 20 Quick growing Deciduous Round
3. Alstoniascholaris Saptaparni 15 Moderately Evergreen Round
growing
4. Anogeissuslatifolia Dhaura 28 Slow growing Evergreen Round
5. Azadirachtaindica Neem tree 20 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading
6. Bauhinia variegate Kachanar 5 Quick growing Deciduous Oblong
7. Bougainvillea Bougainvillea 8 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong/ Round

spectabilis
8. Buchanialanzan Charoli 13 Quick growing Evergreen Round
9. Buteamonosperma Palas 10 Moderately Deciduous Oblong/Ovoid
growing
10. Callistemon Bottle brush 5 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong
citrinus
11. Cassia fistula Garmal 12 Quick growing Deciduous Round
12. Cassia renigera Pink Cassia 10 Quick growing Deciduous Spreading
13. Cassia siamea Kassod 12 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong
14. Dalbergiasisoo Sisam 10 Moderate Evergreen Round
15. Delonixragia Gulmohar 15 Quick growing Deciduous Spreading/Flat
topped
16. Derris indica Karanj 10 Quick growing Evergreen Round
17. Gardenia AnantGandharaj 5 Quick growing Evergreen oblong
jasminoides
18. Heterophragmarox Waras 18 Quick growing Evergreen Round
burghii
19. Lagerstroemia Taman 10 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong
speciosa
20. Mangiferaindica Amba 8 Moderate Evergreen Oblong
21. Mimusopselengi Borssali 10 Quick growing Evergreen Round / Oblong
22. Peltophorumptero copper pod tree - Quick growing Evergreen Oblong
carpum
23. Pongamiapinnata Karanj 3-5 Quick growing Evergreen Round
24. Roystoniaregia Royal Palm 20 Quick growing Evergreen Round

25. Samaneasaman Rain tree 20 Quick growing Deciduous Spreading/
Round

Mitigation Measures
Sr.No. Scientific name Common name Height Growth rate Evergreen/ Crown Shape
(m) Deciduous
26. Saracaasoka Ashok 5 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading
27. Spathodia Indian Tulip 12 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong
campanulata Tree Round
28. Syzygiumcumini Jamun 20 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong/
Spreading
29. Tecomastans Tecoma 5 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong
4.2.6 Socio-Economic Environment

Need base assessment of the study area
The expansion of MIDC industrial area indicates rapid economic growths strengthen not only
development but also help in improving amenities including road, supply of water or electricity,
medical care, street lighting, drainage, sewerage and such other convenience. This helps to improve
human development index.
During survey it was found that crop production was not satisfactory due to sandy loam soil and lack
of irrigation facility. Most of the working population were belonging to labour work and income was
less. Resources of income were less in the study area. Transportation facilities were not satisfactory.
Overall study area needs developments in employment as well as in infrastructural facilities.
Maharashtra Industrial Development Corporation (MIDC) has proposed for development of existing
Butibori Industrial Area (BIA-II) located in tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, Maharashtra.In future there
will be a lot of scope for industrilal growth and it will develop infrastructure facilities. The development
will generate direct employment 5000(direct+indirect) both indicative on the basis of skilled,
semiskilled and labour. It will help to increase in income.Due to employment genrartion and additional
amentiesquality of life of the study area willimprovein future.
Socio-economic environment
The project would create certain impacts which could be beneficial as well as adverse. It is necessary
to identify the extent of these impacts for further planning of control measures leading to mitigation of
the adverse impact. The impacts due to project on parameters of human interest are assessed and
given below:
Impact on employment
Proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori industrial area will attract various types of industries; this will
generate direct and indirect employment opportunities in the form of skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled
etc. Increased job opportunities will strengthen economic development in the region
Impact on infrastructure facilities
Proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori industrial area will Increase in infrastructure resources for
power, water, road etc. These facilities will have positive impact on the study area.
Impact on places of historical importance
No historical monuments or places of historical importance were present in project area. Hence no
impact is envisaged.
Impact on aesthetic attribute
Taklaghat village is famous for Takalghat's temple of SantYogirajViktu Baba. It is a religious

place for all the religions and casts. A large no of devotees visits the place in the month of March

Mitigation Measures
(ChaitraPornima). Proposed expansion of industrial area will attract large no of population for
employment purpose, which may increase no. of visitors in the temple for worship. It will be a positive
impact, because due to increase in devoteestowards the temple, small business, hotels, restaurant
will grow and thereby the economic growth.
Demand of housing
Expansion of industrial area will attract population from other places for different type of work. It will
increase demand of housing in the study area; this could impact positively as the local population will
earn money from giving their houses on rent basis.
Impact on quality of life
Due to employment opportunities, additional infrastructure facilities, development in ancillary
business, etc. quality of life will improve in the study area (Table 4.13).
Impact on population growth
Nagpur city is main attraction in vidharbha region for employment, small/large scale /industries
business etc. Due to growth in proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori industrial area, will attract
migrant from other regions in search of employment and population of the region may increase.
Impact on education rate
Proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori industrial area will require literate population for
admin/accounts/ technical related works. This may help to increase education rate in the study area.
Mitigation Measures
In order to mitigate the adverse impact likely to arise in social, cultural and economical aspects in the
surrounding region and the proposed project is expected to contribute towards enlistment of local
people and improvement in quality of life. Prediction of likely impacts on socio-economic environment
is given in Table 4.12.
 Ensure that roads are properly directives, vehicles are well maintained and drivers are well
trained and safety conscious
 Supporting community health screenings, especially those addressing potential health impacts
related to the industrial activities
 Establishing vocational training programs for the local workforce to promote development of
skills required by the industries
 Maintenance of road which will use for transportation purpose for industrial purpose
 Cooperative and cohesion approach with villagers through industries/management
TABLE 4.12
PREDICATION OF LIKELY IMPACTS ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
Parameters Local Regional Direct Indirect
Employment +  + +
Income +  + +
Transport + + + +
Education +  + +
Medical facilities +  + 
Communication + + + +
Availability of power +  + 
Sanitation +  + 

Mitigation Measures
Parameters Local Regional Direct Indirect

Housing +  + 
Health +   -
Recreation +  + 
Agriculture    
Business + + + +
Per Capita Income + + + +
Pollution -  - 
Coding: +Positive Impact, - Negative Impact,  Insignificant
Note: The positive and negative impacts are identified and evaluated based on the monitoring
survey, infrastructure, resources, facilities availability and interaction with the people in the study
area. Moreover based on expertise availability of a resource person, impacts are evaluated as cited
in the “Environmental impact analysis “book by Rau and Wotten in the evaluation matrix method.
QUALITY OF LIFE:
Quality of life is a measure to know exact situation of villages/communities.ItIncludes income,
housing, jobs, education, environment, recreation, health, and life satisfaction etc.To know quality of
life in the study area, primary data collection through selected villages performed with a structured
questionnaires.Quality of life existing in the study area is given in Table 4.13.
TABLE 4.13
QUALITY OF LIFE EXISTING (QoL) IN THE VILLAGES SURVEYED
Sr. No. Villages QoL(S) QoL(O) QoL(C)

1. Katandhara 0.5 0.52 0.51
2. Pipaldhara 0.54 0.55 0.54
3. MandwaMahar 0.54 0.55 0.54
4. Nagajhari 0.52 0.54 0.53
5. Bhansuli 0.54 0.56 0.55
6. Murjhari 0.53 0.56 0.54
7. Mathani 0.46 0.48 0.47
8. Takalghat (CT) 0.62 0.64 0.63
9. Khadki 0.58 0.6 0.59
10. Kanholibara 0.6 0.62 0.61
Average 0.54 0.56 0.55
Source: Primary data collection
(s) = Subjective, (O) = Objective, (c) = Cumulative

Mitigation Measures
5.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (SITE AND TECHNOLOGY) GENERAL

This chapter includes the options, details of the alternatives of materials that are to be used in
building construction and the energy conservation methods to be adopted. The various details
regarding the transportation sector, road connectivity, link facilities, parking details etc. are discussed
in this chapter.
5.1 SELECTION OF SITE

Selection of suitable site for a project is as important as selecting a technology and suppliers. Factors
which are taken into consideration for selection of site are proximity to raw materials or market and
availability of manpower, water, infrastructure and ease of transportation. MIDC requires a number of
basic inputs such as land, fuel, water etc. for expansion of existing MIDC area and is primarily
governed by the following basic considerations:
 Availability of land
 Rail/road accessibility
 Availability of required raw materials and proximity
 Availability of water and proximity of source
 Power requirement
 Environmental consideration
These factors are very favorable to establish and operate the project.
As the selected area has all the above facilities and is near to the notified Butibori Industrial Zone, no
other site was considered. The site and adjoining areas are being considered by the state
government for including in the MIDC industrial area, which will make the site most appropriate for
industries to come for increasing their production activities. Further to this, the development of
industrial area is done according to MIDC act. The existing Butibori MIDC area is fully developed and
occupied by various industries and for further development there is no space left for the industries
likely to come. Hence there was a need for additional industrial area to be developed for upcoming
prospective industries for overall economic growth of the state as a whole. The selection of site is
carried out considering the environmental features. Three sites were selected and comparative
environmental features are considered and based on the suitability of the features for project suitable
site is selected.
Criteria for selection of site
There were three sites selected for development and establishment of MIDC industrial area viz. I, II &
III as shown in the drawing (Plate 5.1). The comparative statement w.r.t. different parameters as
below:
Sr. No. Parameter Site I Site II Site III

1 Distance from existing MIDC Adjacent About 3 km About 4 kms
industrial area
2 Distance from National 6 km 7 km 9 kms
highway major road
3 Distance from water works 16 kms 18 km 20 kms
4 Reserved forest area vicinity 4.50 kms In reserved dense forest Forest area
5 Vicinity w.r.t. villages Nearest Near to Bidsukali village Nearest village
village 0.30 kms Degma, 0.50
Chapter 5- Analysis of Alternatives 5-1

Sr. No. Parameter Site I Site II Site III

Mandwa Kms
1.50 km
6 Land use Agriculture Govt. and agriculture land Forest and
and Govt. agriculture
land land
7 Nature of land Pvt. + Govt. Pvt. + Govt. Pvt. + Forest
8 Access Easy On interior major district On interior
access from road MDR major district
existing road MDR
MIDC area.
9 Transportation facility Easy Needs road infrastructure Needs road
access for transportation infrastructure
for
transportation
Considering above features, site I is considered for the development of existing MIDC butibori area
(Phase - II).

PLATE 5.1: SELECTED SITES FOR PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT OF EXISTING

MIDC (PHASE - II)
5.2 LAND, SITE DETAILS & AVAILABILITY OF FACILITIES

The area selected for MIDC is near notified Butibori Industrial Zone, Butibori. MIDC industrial area is
located near Nagpur and is a fast developing growth center. MIDC industrial areas have very good
infrastructure facilities like water, availability of skilled workers, well connected roadways and
transport infrastructure. Since Nagpur has a well-developed market, there is easy availability of
spares & consumables. The nearest railway head is Butibori railway station located approximately
10.0 km from the site.
 Accessibility
The site is adjacent to the road connecting National and State Highway. As such, there is no any
problem in accessibility and transportation of heavy materials to site by road. It will be an easy access
to the other industries to come for their material supply and transportation.
5.3 BUILDING MATERIALS
Usually for construction, sand, clay and brick require in large quantity. Water requirement for building
industry is also very high. Steel which is used in the construction process is manufactured from non-

renewable resources. Normally conventional materials used for construction are non-renewable
sources.
Use of alternative technologies for each component of the buildings of envelope, superstructure,
finishes and the road and surrounding areas are discussed in detail. Some of them are given below:
 Brick and block products with waste and recycled contents such as fly ash (waste from coal
burning plants), blast furnace slag, sewage sludge, waste wood fibre etc.
 Fly ash based lightweight aerated concrete blocks can be used for walls.
 Perforated bricks can be used for wall structures.
 Brick panel with joists, filler slab roofing, brick funicular shell roofing, RCC channel units, micro-
concrete roofing tiles are some of the alternative techniques for roofing.
Some of the alternate materials for openings in construction are:-
 Use of precast thin lintels, use of ferrocement-sunshade cum lintel etc.
 Use of renewable timber for doors and windows
 Use of steel manufactures from recycled content
 Aluminum from verified recycled content
 Saw dust based doors and window frames
 Ferrocement shutters, PVC doors and windows, Rice husk boards, Natural fibre reinforced
polymer composite door panels
 Bamboo based products, bamboo strips boards.
Alternatives for finishes include Fly ash, Ceramic tiles, Terrazzo floors. The use of the alternatives for
building materials will help to reduce the use of non-renewable resources and impact on natural
resources.
5.4 GREEN BUILDINGS
Some of the salient features of a green building are:
 Use of recycled and environmental friendly building materials
 Use of energy efficient and eco-friendly equipment
 Use of renewable energy
 Indoor air quality for human safety and comfort
5.5 ENERGY CONSERVATION

There is a need to adopt energy efficient technologies for conservation of energy. This section
discusses some important recommendations of the energy conservation building code (ECBC) and
the National building code 2005 on energy conservation. The building form can affect the solar
access of the building. The compactness of the building is measured using a ratio of surface area to
volume. Compactness = S/V,
Where, S = Surface area and V = volume.

The orientation of the building is also an important fact with regard to energy conservation in the
building. The building envelope for all air conditioned buildings / spaces are to comply with the ECBC
(www.beeindia@nic.in).
The concept of passive solar design emphasizes architectural design approaches that minimize
building energy consumption by integrating conventional energy-efficient devices, such as
mechanical and electrical pumps, fans, lighting fixtures, and other equipment, with passive design
elements, such as building siting, an efficient envelope, appropriate amounts of fenestration,
increased daylighting design, and thermal mass. The basic idea of passive solar design is to allow
daylight, heat, and airflow into a building only when beneficial.
The general day-lighting principles include:-
 Avoid direct sunlight on critical tasks and excessive brightness.
 Bring the daylight in at a high location.
 Filter the daylight.
 Bounce daylight off of surrounding surfaces.
 Integrate daylight with other building systems and strategies.
Supply of the energy in the form of electricity will also be based on the type of activities to be carried
by individual industry. MIDC will procure the electricity by establishment of grid in MIDC area and will
be evaluated as per the demand of industry for this purpose necessary arrangement and space will
be allocated and distribution system will be firm up.
The charges related to the supply of electricity to individual units to be established in the area will be
according to the norms set up by the individual development corporation.
Solar photovoltaic systems (SPV) can be used as it is direct conversion of sunlight into electricity and
could be a viable option. Street lighting, fixed type solar lighting system are some applications of SPV
systems.
Stress will be given to apply solar system for garden, street light, recreational zones to save electricity
consumption and same will be applicable to individual industry.
5.6 TRANSPORTATION
Some of the factors are important and must be taken into the consideration, while planning, are the
movement of heavy traffic loads and operation of construction machinery. Construction machinery
due to its operation produces smoke, dust and noise and vibration. Internal road design should be
done with due consideration for environment, and safety of the people residing or working near the
roads. Proper sidewalk should be provided for the residence to commute.
 Peripheral roads: Peripheral network of the roads for the scheme area shall be retained as per
development plan/nodal plan/ zonal plan as per MRTP act 1966 for industrial/ commercial and
Residentia zones as shown below:
Length of road Minimum width in metropolitan region as Minimum width, in other areas
notified of state Govt. under MRTP act 1966
Up to 150 m 15 m 12 m
traffic

Provision of road in residential zone

Length of road Minimum width in metropolitan region as Minimum width, in order areas
modified by state Govt. Under MRTP act
1966
Up to 75 m 6m 6m
75 m to 150 m 10 m 10 m
151 m to 300 m 12 m 10 m
5.7 TECHNOLOGY
Application of technology will be based on types of industries likely to come in MIDC area. The industries
will procure the technology based on the types of industry they want to be set up which will be eco-friendly
and will not produce or emit wastewater generation and gases respectively. This will be taken care to
maintain the atmospheric pollution within the specified norms that will specified by SPCB.
The dependency, procurement and application of technology will be based on nature of industry to be
developed in the area.

EIA for Proposed Expansion of Butibori Industrial Area (BIA – Phase II), Tehsil Hingna, District
Nagpur, State Maharashtra.

The environmental monitoring is important to assess performance of pollution control equipment
installed at the project site. The sampling and analysis of environmental attributes including
monitoring locations which will be as per the guidelines of the Central Pollution Control Board.
The attributes, which require regular monitoring, are specified as follows:
 Air quality
 Noise levels
 Water and wastewater quality
 Soil Conservation
 Afforestation; as greenbelt development,
 Socio-economic aspects and community development
6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEM
The monitoring programme is formulated to take care of impact after implementation of the project.
The emission levels from the stack and the ambient air quality around the project will be periodically
monitored. Further, noise levels will also be regularly monitored covering project and nearby area.
The limits for particulate matter emission and minimum stack heights will be maintained for keeping
the oxides of nitrogen and sulphur dioxide levels within the air quality standards.
The characteristics of treated effluent, that will be generated during the operation phase, will be
monitored to meet the requirements of the CPCB/MPCB. The various items to be monitored are stack
emissions, ambient air quality, liquid effluent quality and quantity and noise levels. Post project
monitoring programme which will be undertaken by the project proponent for various environmental
components is detailed below:
A. Meteorology
An automatic continuous recording meteorological station will be installed within the developmental
premises for a proper measurement and record of meteorological parameters on hourly basis.
B. Air Environment
Schemes for monitoring stack and ambient air quality are proposed. The ambient air quality
monitoring systems are recommended for monitoring the ground level concentrations and fugitive
emissions.
Periodical monitoring (monthly) of stack emissions will also be undertaken through stack monitoring
kit to ensure the levels of emissions.
Ambient air quality will be monitored for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, etc. on 24-hourly basis to know the
concentration levels in upwind and downwind direction within and outside of the plant.
C. Noise Environment
Noise will be monitored for day and night time at site to be developed and nearby villages.
D. Water Environment
The wastewater generation from the proposed expansion of industrial area will be recycled after
treatment. Wastewater samples including inlet and outlet of the treatment plant will be analyzed for
the significant parameters to evaluate the treatment system.
Chapter 6- Environmental Monitoring Programme 6-1


Environmental monitoring program is designed for the upcoming additional Butibori Industrial Area,
MIDC. The monitoring plan is presented in Tables 6.1-6.2
TABLE 6.1
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLANS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE
Sr. No. Components Parameter No. of sampling Frequency Period
Air Environment
1 Methodology Wind speed &wind Study area of 10 Data collected 1 hourly
direction, km radius from IMD, and/or observations
Temperature, by installing from
Rainfall, Relative meteorological continuous
humidity and Cloud station for site records
cover specific data.
Ambient Air PM10, PM2.5, SO2, 8-10 locations 24 hourly samples Quarterly
Quality NOx& CO etc. (Study area of twice in a week.
10km radius)
Noise Environment
2 Noise Levels Noise levels in 8-10 locations Day time and Night Quarterly
dB(A) Leq (study area of 10 time
km radius)
Water Environment
3 Surface water Physical, Chemical Locations based One grab sample Quarterly
quality and Bacteriological on stretch of the at each location
parameters water body
(Study area of
10km radius)
Groundwater Physical & chemical 5-6 Locations One grab sample Daily basis
Quality parameters from tube wells or at each location
hand pumps
(Study area of
10km radius)
Wastewater Physico- chemical 3 composite One composite Daily basis
parameters samples sample
Land environment
4 Soil Physical, chemical 4 Locations within One sample at 6 monthly
Characteristics and micro-biological the plant area each location
parameters to
assess agricultural
and aforestation
potential
5 Health Major fires, major Study area of Regular checkups Half yearly
accident, Injuries, 10km radius
etc.
6 Hazardous All relevant Plant site and Process wise or Half yearly
waste parameters adjoining area activity wise for
(Permeability & respective raw
porosity, Moisture, materials
pH, EC, Loss on
ignition, phosphorus,
Total Nitrogen,
Heavy
metals(TCLP)

Sr. No. Components Parameter No. of sampling Frequency Period

Socio-Economic
7 Socio- Demographic, Study area of - Half yearly
Economic infrastructure, 10km radius
economic growth
etc. Health related
parameters.
8  Terrestrial Species diversity, Study area of Through field visit Annually
ecology and index 10km radius during the study
period and
 Aquatic ecology No. of species, Within 10 km substantiated
diversity and Index radius through secondary
sources
TABLE 6.2
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN DURING OPERATION PHASE
Environmental Parameters No. of locations Frequency Period
components
Air Environment
 Ambient air PM10, PM2.5,SO2, NOX, CO 3 Locations in 24 hourly Monthly
quality and around site samples
 DG set PM, NOx, SO2 etc. Based on As per CPCB Monthly
meteorological norms
conditions
Each stack
Noise Environment
 Noise Noise levels in dB(A) Leq 6 Locations Once in day Monthly
Environment (within premises) and once in
night
Water Environment
 Groundwater Physical, chemical and 2 Locations Once Quarterly
quality bacteriological parameters
 Waste water Physical & chemical Inlet and outlet of Once Daily basis
(treated and parameters treatment plant Composite
untreated)
Land Environment
 Soil Physical, chemical and 4 Locations Once Six
Characteristics biological parameters to monthly
assess agricultural and
aforestation potential
 Health Major fires, major accident, Work zone of Regular Half yearly
injuries, etc. factory checkups
 Hazardous All relevant Each type of Once Half yearly
waste parameters(Permeability & waste
porosity, Moisture pH , EC,
Loss on ignition,
Phosphorus, Total
Nitrogen, Particle size
distribution, Heavy metal,
TCLP)
 Terrestrial Flora & fauna Within and Once Quarterly
outside

Environmental Parameters No. of locations Frequency Period

components
 Aquatic Flora & fauna Within and Once Quarterly
outside the
 Green belt Species diversity, survival premises. Once Quarterly
rate, growth rate Within and
outside the
premises.
Socio-Economic Environment
 Socio economic Demography, Within 10 km once yearly
environment infrastructure, facilities radius
creation, quality of life,
Health Status
6.3 MONITORING METHODOLOGY

Environmental monitoring shall be done as per the guidelines provided by CPCB/SPCB. The
methods conducted or applied shall be approved or accepted by the recognized body or authority i.e.
MoEF/CPCB/SPCB. The list of suggested methodologies for environmental monitoring is provided in
attached Annexure-II Environmental monitoring. The monitoring shall be done to ensure that
environmental management practices/technologies are adequate to meet the requirement of the
prescribed norms as prescribed by state pollution control board.
6.3.1 Monitoring Equipment and Analysis
Monitoring equipment will be installed in the developmental area at the designated locations for
collection of samples for air, noise and water, land. The collected samples will be analyzed for project
specific parameters to find out the concentration levels. The equipment will be as follows:
Environment Equipment Parameters
Air Environment RDS PM2.5, PM10, NOx, SOx and VOCs.
Noise Environment Sound level meter Noise level: Day and Night
Water Environment pH meter, conductivity meter, Physico-chemical and
Turbidity meter, flame photometer, bacteriological
spectrophotometer, hot plate, DO
meter, microscope, incubator,
balance, AAS etc.
Land Environment Auger, spade Physico-chemical
Biological Environment Plankton net, sieve, microscope Phytoplankton, zooplankton
(Aquatic)
6.4 REPORTING & DOCUMENTATION

Necessary reports and documents like half yearly compliance status & annual environment
audit/statement etc. shall be prepared to comply with the statutory rules & regulations as timely
amended. In any case, during the operation, proponent shall adhere to the rules and regulation
enacted & amended timely by the government. Regular and periodic record shall be kept in order to
ensure easier, comparable review for assessment of past & present performance and for projection of
the future performance. Also, the management shall ensure to prepare separate records for
environmental management task for water & wastewater, solid and hazardous waste, air emissions,
soil and biological (Specially for green belt and plantation). Management shall also ensure that the
records are prepared on regular basis and periodically in order to enable better and smooth vigilance.

For statutory reports & documents, management shall forward such reports or documents to the
concerned authority well within stipulated time frame with due care of thorough review of the
prepared document/report.
These reports/documents shall be regularly and periodically reviewed and any
changes/discrepancies found in mitigation measures, operation, management & technology shall be
brought into notice of concerned authority & management instantaneously and all possible corrective
actions shall be taken immediately to match the discrepancies witnessed.
6.5 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL

MIDC gives top most priority on pollution control & conservation of environment. The management
firmly believes in maintaining very high environmental standards and ensuring compliance of
applicable legal requirements in totality.
The Organogram of Environment Management Cell functional is shown in the Figure 6.1.
Senior manager
External Environment
Monitoring/ Manager- Environmental
Consultancy Anacon control
Lab Pvt. Ltd. Nagpur
Environment engineer
(for pollution monitoring / control)
Ecologist/forestry specialist, chemist

Supporting staff, field assistants
FIGURE 6.1: ORGANOGRAM OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL
6.6 BUDGETARY PROVISIONS FOR E NVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

maintenance of different pollution control systems. A definite budget allocation will be made available
for environmental monitoring related to the activities under the provision of MIDC act in association
with the State Pollution Control Board and shown in Table 6.3.
TABLE 6.3
BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Sr. No. Activities Capital Cost Recurring Cost
(Rs. lakhs) (Rs. lakhs)
1. Air Environment 10.00 1.00
2. Noise Environment 01.00 0.10
3. Water Environment 20.00 2.00
4. Land Environment 10.00 1.00
(Solid waste & TSDF)
5. Biological Environment 05.00 0.50
6. Social Environment 04.00 0.40
Total 50.00 5.00

7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN
INTRODUCTION
Accidental risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accident consisting of an
event or sequence of events resulting into fire, explosion or toxic hazards to human health and
environment. Risk Assessment (RA) provides a numerical measure of the risk that a particular facility
poses to the public. It begins with the identification of probable potential hazardous events at an
industry and categorization as per the predetermined criteria. The consequences of major credible
events are calculated for different combinations of weather conditions to simulate worst possible
scenario. These consequence predictions are combined to provide numerical measures of the risk for
the entire facility.
MCA stands for Maximum Credible Accident or in other words, an accident with maximum damage
distance, which is believed to be probable. MCA analysis does not include quantification of the
probability of occurrence of an accident. In practice the selection of accident scenarios for MCA
analysis is carried out on the basis of engineering judgement and expertise in the field of risk analysis
especially in accident analysis.
Detailed study helps in plotting the damage contours on the detailed plot plan in order to assess the
magnitude of a particular event. A disastrous situation is the outcome of fire, explosion or toxic
hazards in addition to other natural causes that eventually lead to loss of life, property and ecological
imbalances.
7.1.1 Methodology of MCA Analysis
The MCA analysis involves ordering and ranking of various sections in terms of potential vulnerability.
The data requirements for MCA analysis are:
 Operating manual
 Flow diagram and P&I diagrams
 Detailed design parameters
 Physical and chemical properties of all the chemicals
 Detailed plant layout
 Detailed area layout
 Past accident data
Following steps are involved in the MCA analysis:
 Identification of potential hazardous sections and representative failure cases
 Visualization of release scenarios considering type and the quantity of the hazardous material
 Damage distance computations for the released cases at different wind velocities and
atmospheric stability classes for heat radiations and pressure waves
 Drawing of damage contours on plot plan to show the effect due to the accidental release of
chemicals
Chapter 7- Additional Studies 7-1

7.2 PAST ACCIDENT DATA ANALYSIS

Analysis of events arising out of the unsafe conditions is one of the basic requirements for ensuring
safety in any facility. The data required for such an analysis has either to be generated by monitoring
and/or collected from the records of the past occurrences. This data, when analysed, helps in
formulation of the steps towards mitigation of hazards faced commonly. Trends in safety of various
activities can be evaluated and actions can be planned accordingly, to improve the safety.
Data analysis helps in correlating the causal factors and the corrective steps to be taken for
controlling the accidents. It is, therefore, of vital importance to collect the data methodically, based on
potential incidents, sections involved, causes of failure and the preventive measures taken. This
helps to face future eventualities with more preparedness.
A) August 14, 2003, at the Repsol-YPF Petrochemicals Refinery in Puertollano, Spain
In August 2003, eight workers died and several more were seriously injured in an accident at the
Repsol-YPF petrochemicals refinery in Puertollano, Spain. The company and the trade unions set up
an investigation commission to examine the incident but they disagreed on the final conclusions. On
14 August 2003, several petroleum tanks exploded causing a major fire at the Repsol-YPF refinery in
Puertollano, Castilla-La Mancha. Eight workers died and several more were seriously injured in the
accident. The plant has suffered at least 10 serious accidents in the past 20 years, causing many
deaths and injuries.
B) November 23, 2003, Crude Oil Tank Explosion
About 32 km south of Midland, TX, Perenco LLC, a battery of crude oil tanks exploded on a lease
near the intersection of Highway 349 and County Road 300. According to the field superintendent for
Perenco, an electrical spark caused the fire: “We seemed to have a leak on the ‘lack unit’.” He said
that a lack unit measures how much oil moves through the tanks and checks oil content. He said that
when the pumper checking the lease turned off the lack unit, an electrical spark set the leaking oil on
fire. The workers quickly left the lease to turn off the 18 wells that sent oil to the tank battery. They
were about 400 m away from the battery when it exploded 45 minutes later. He said about 640
barrels of oil; three stock tanks, three water tanks and associated equipment were destroyed
C) March 23, 2005, an explosion at BP's Texas City Refinery in Texas City, Texas
On March 23, 2005, an explosion occurred in an isomerization unit resulting in the deaths and injuries
at BP's Texas City Refinery. The accident killed 15 workers and injured more than 170 others. The
Texas City Refinery is the second-largest oil refinery in the state, and the third-largest in the United
States. It had an input capacity of 437,000 barrels (69,500 m3) per day as of January 1, 2005.
According to a report issued after the accident, actions taken or not taken led to overfilling the
raffinate splitter with liquid, overheating of the liquid, and the subsequent over pressurization and
pressure relief. Hydrocarbon flow to the blow down drum and stack overwhelmed it, resulting in
liquids carrying over out of the top of the stack, flowing down the stack, accumulating on the ground,
and causing a vapour cloud, which was ignited by a contractor's pickup truck as the engine was left
running.
D) 11 December 2005, the Bunce field Incident, Hemel Hempstead
On Sunday 11 December 2005, a series of explosions and subsequent fire destroyed large parts of
the Buncefield oil storage and transfer depot, Hemel Hempstead, and caused widespread damage to
neighbouring properties. The main explosion took place at 06.01:32 hours and was of massive
proportions. It was followed by a large fire that engulfed 23 large fuel storage tanks over a high
proportion of the Buncefield site. The incident injured 43 people. Fortunately, no one was seriously

hurt and there were no fatalities. Nevertheless, there was significant damage to both commercial and
residential properties near the Buncefield site. About 2000 people had to be evacuated from their
homes and sections of the M1 motorway were closed. The fire burned for five days, destroying most
of the site and emitting a large plume of smoke into the atmosphere that dispersed over southern
England.
E) June 28, 2006, Explosion in Lanzhou Petrochemical Company.
On June 28th, 2006 an explosion broke out in CNPC Lanzhou Petrochemical Company Refinery
Plant, which is located in Gansu province, western China. The accident caused 1 death and 10
injuries. The preliminary investigation showed that the accident was caused by the gas leakage on
the 3 million t/a residuum fluid catalytic cracking unit in Lanzhou Refinery Plant.
F) October 29, 2009, Indian Oil Corporation Ltd, Jaipur
A massive fire broke out on 29th October at an oil storage depot in the western state of Rajasthan,
killing at least 11 people and injuring 135 others. Two huge explosions were heard before the fire
ignited and spread. The fire broke out around 19:30 local time at the Jaipur storage depot run by
Indian Oil Corporation (IOC) Ltd and was visible from over 25 kilometres away, according to reports.
Company officials said the depot covers an area of several square kilometres and the oil tanks store
gasoline, diesel and kerosene fuel for several state-owned oil companies. Reports said the depot had
a 100,000-kilolitre capacity. Initial estimates indicate that products valued at 1.5 billion rupees have
been burnt, and the petroleum stocks were insured.
7.3 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION

Identification of hazards is an important step in Risk Assessment as it leads to the generation of
accidental scenarios. The merits of including the hazard for further investigation are subsequently
determined by its significance, normally using a cut-off or threshold quantity.
Once a hazard has been identified, it is necessary to evaluate it in terms of the risk it presents to the
employees and the neighbouring community. In principle, both probability and consequences should
be considered, but there are occasions where it either the probability or the consequence can shown
to be sufficiently low or sufficiently high, decisions can be made on just one factor.
During the hazard identification component, the following considerations are taken into account.
 Chemical identities
 Location of process unit facilities for hazardous materials.
 The types and design of process units
 The quantity of material that could be involved in an airborne release and
 The nature of the hazard (e.g. airborne toxic vapours or mists, fire, explosion, large quantities
stored or processed handling conditions) most likely to accompany hazardous materials spills or
releases
7.3.1 Fire and Explosion Index (FEI)
Fire and Explosion Index (FEI) is useful in identification of areas in which the potential risk reaches a
certain level. It estimates the global risk associated with a process unit and classifies the units
according to their general level of risk. FEI covers aspects related to the intrinsic hazard of materials,
the quantities handled and operating conditions. This factor gives index value for the area which

could be affected by an accident, the damage to property within the area and the working days lost
due to accidents. The method for evaluation of FEI involves following stages.
 Selection of pertinent process unit which can have serious impact on plant safety
 Determination of Material Factor (MF): This factor for a given substance in the process unit
gives intrinsic potential to release energy in case of fire or an explosion. Material Factor can be
directly obtained from Dow’s Fire and Explosion Index Hazard classification Guide of American
Institute of Chemical Engineers, New York. The factor can also be evaluated from NFPA indices
of danger, health, flammability and reactivity.
 Determination of Unit Hazard Factor: The Unit Hazard Factor is obtained by multiplication of
General Process Hazard (GPH) factor and Special Process Hazard (SPH) factor. GPH factor is
computed according to presence of exothermic reactions and loading and unloading operations.
The penalties due to each of these reactions / operations are summed up to compute GPH
factor. Similarly, SPH factor can be evaluated for the operations close to flammable range or
pressures different from atmospheric. Penalties of these operations for both factors can be
obtained from Dow’s EFI index form.
Fire and explosion index is then calculated as the product of Material Factor (MF) and Unit Hazard
Factor. Degree of hazards based on FEI is given in the following Table 7.1.
TABLE 7.1
DEGREE OF HAZARDS BASED ON FEI
FEI Range Degree of Hazard
0 – 60 Light
61-96 Moderate
97 - 127 Intermediate
128 - 158 Heavy
159 and Above Severe
Preventive and protective control measures are recommended based on degree of hazard.
Therefore, FEI indicates the efforts to be taken to reduce risks for a particular unit.
7.3.2 Toxicity Index (TI)
The TI value is computed from Maximum Allowable Concentration (MAC), General Process Hazard
and Special Process Hazard by use of DOW's hazard classification guide. The scale for TI is given
below:
TI Range Degree of Hazard
0–6 Light
6 - 10 Moderate
Above 10 High
Based on the category of hazard and preventive and protective system present in the installation,
recommendations are made. TI of various storage tanks are depicted in Table 7.2.
TABLE 7.2
TOXICITY INDEX
Sr. No. Unit Name TI Category
1 H2S 25.2 High
2 HCl 9.21 Moderate
3 Chlorine 25.2 High

7.4 MCA ANALYSIS

MCA analysis encompasses defined techniques to identify the hazards and compute the consequent
effects in terms of damage distances due to heat radiation, toxic releases, vapour cloud explosion
etc. A list of probable or potential accidents of the major units in the complex arising due to use,
storage and handling of the hazardous materials are examined to establish their credibility.
Depending upon the effective hazardous attributes and their impact on the event, the maximum effect
on the surrounding environment and the respective damage caused can be assessed. Flow chart of
accidental release of hazardous chemicals is presented in Figure 7.1.
Hazardous substance, on release can cause damage on a large scale. The extent of the damage is
dependent upon the nature of the release and the physical state of the material. In the present report
the consequences for flammable hazards are considered and the damages caused due to such
releases are assessed with recourse to MCA analysis.
Flammable substances on release may cause Jet fire and less likely unconfined vapour cloud
explosion causing possible damage to the surrounding area. The extent of damage depends upon
the nature of the release. The release of flammable materials and subsequent ignition result in heat
radiation wave or vapour cloud depending upon the flammability and its physical state. Damage
distances due to release of hazardous materials depend on atmospheric stability and wind speed. It
is important to visualize the consequence of the release of such substances and the damage caused
to the surrounding areas. Computation of damage distances are carried out at various atmospheric
stability conditions for various wind velocities and the result is tabulated. Pasquill-Giffard atmospheric
stability classes with corresponding weather conditions are listed in Table 7.3.
TABLE 7.3
PASQUILL – GIFFARD ATMOSPHERIC STABILITY
Sr. No. Stability Class Weather Conditions
1. A Very unstable – sunny, light wind
2. A/B Unstable - as with A only less sunny or more windy
3. B Unstable - as with A/B only less sunny or more windy
4. B/C Moderately unstable – moderate sunny and moderate wind
5. C Moderately unstable – very windy / sunny or overcast / light wind
6. C/D Moderate unstable – moderate sun and high wind
7. D Neutral – little sun and high wind or overcast / windy night
8. E Moderately stable – less overcast and less windy night thand
9. F Stable – night with moderate clouds and light / moderate wind
10. G Very stable – possibly fog

Release of
Chemical
Continuous
Instantaneous
Bottom Top
Two Phase
Liquid
Outflow
No
Pool
Ignition Vapours
Formation
Yes Yes
Yes Ignition ? Flare
Ignition ? Pool Fire
No No
Detonation Evaporation
Dispersion
Vapour Cloud
Formation
No
Toxicity Ignition ?
Yes
Vapour Cloud
Explosion
Pressure Heat
Wave Radiation
TOXICITY
COMPUTATION CONSEQUENCE MODELLING
FIGURE 7.1: ACCIDENTAL RELEASE OF CHEMICALS: A SCENARIO

7.4.1 Fire and Explosion Scenarios

Combustible materials within their flammable limits may ignite and burn if exposed to an ignition
source of sufficient energy. On process plants, this normally occurs as a result of a leakage or
spillage. Depending on the physical properties of the material and the operating parameters, the
combustion of material in a plant may take on a number of forms like jet fire, flash fire and pool fire.
7.4.1.1 Jet Fire
Jet fire occurs when flammable material of a high exit velocity ignites. In process industries this may
be due to design (flares) or an accidental. Ejection of flammable material from a vessel, pipe or pipe
flange may give rise to a jet fire and in some instances the jet flame could have substantial “reach”.
Depending on wind speed, the flame may tilt and impinge on pipeline, equipment or structures. The
thermal radiation from these fires may cause injury to people or damage equipment some distance
from the source of the flames.
7.4.1.2 Flash Fire
A flash fire is the non-explosive combustion of a vapour cloud resulting from a release of flammable
material into the open air, which after mixing with air, ignites. A flash fire results from the ignition of a
released flammable cloud in which there is essentially no increase in combustion rate. The ignition
source could be electric spark, a hot surface, and friction between moving parts of a machine or an
open fire.
Flash fire may occur due to its less vapour temperature than ambient temperature. Hence, as a
result of a spill, they are dispersed initially by the negative buoyancy of cold vapours and
subsequently by the atmospheric turbulence. After the release and dispersion of the flammable fuel
the resulting vapour cloud is ignited and when the fuel vapour is not mixed with sufficient air prior to
ignition, it results in diffusion fire burning. Therefore the rate at which the fuel vapour and air are
mixed together during combustion determines the rate of burning in the flash fire.
The main dangers of flash fire are radiation and direct flame contact. The size of the flammable cloud
determines the area of possible direct flame contact effects. Radiation effects on a target depend on
several factors including its distance from the flames, flame height, flame emissive power, local
atmospheric transitivity and cloud size. Most of the time, flash combustion lasts for no more than a
few seconds.
7.4.1.3 Pool Fire
Releases of hydrocarbons in the absence of immediate ignition would form an unconfined pool, which
on ignition would result in a pool fire. Radius of pool depends upon mass flow rate, ambient
temperature; heat of vaporization of material released, vapour pressure of material released and
discharge duration. Emissive power generated from the pool surface depends upon pool burning rate,
heat of combustion of release material, atmospheric transitivity and area of pool.
The pool fire being either tank or bund fire consists of large volumes of flammable material at
atmospheric pressure burning in an unconfined space. The flammable material will be consumed at
the burning rate depending on factors including the prevailing winds. During combustion heat will be
released in the form of thermal radiation. Temperatures close to the flame centre will be high but will
reduce rapidly to tolerable temperatures over a relatively short distance. Any plant building or persons
close to the fire or within the intolerable zone will experience burn damage with the severity
depending on the distance from the fire and the time exposed to the heat of the fire.
In the event of a pool fire the flames will tilt according to the wind speed and direction. The flame
length and tilt angle affect the distance of thermal radiation generated.

7.4.1.4 Vapour Cloud Explosion

The Vapour Cloud Explosion (VCE) begins with a release of a large quantity of flammable vaporizing
liquid or gas from a storage tank, transport vessel or pipeline producing a dangerous overpressure.
These explosions follow a well-determined pattern. There are basically four features, which must be
present for an effective vapour cloud explosion to occur with an effective blast. These are:
First, the release material must be flammable and at a suitable condition of temperature and pressure
which depends on the chemical. The materials which come under this category, range from liquefied
gases under pressure (e.g. butane, propane); ordinary flammable liquids (e.g. cyclohexane, naphtha)
to non-liquefied flammable gases (e.g. ethylene, acetylene)
Second, before the ignition, a cloud of sufficient size must have been formed. Normally ignition
delays of few minutes are considered the most probable for generating the vapour cloud explosions
Third, a sufficient amount of the cloud must be within the flammable range of the material to cause
extensive overpressure
Fourth, the flame speed determines the blast effects of the vapour cloud explosions, which can vary
greatly
The flammable content of a gas cloud is calculated by three-dimensional integration of the
concentration profiles, which fall within the flammable limits. If the gas cloud ignites, two situations
can occur, namely non-explosive combustion (flash fire) and explosive combustion (flash fire +
explosion).
7.4.2 Models for the Calculation of Heat load and Shock Waves
If a flammable gas or liquid is released, damage resulting from heat radiation or explosion may occur
on ignition. Models used in this study for the effects in the event of immediate ignition (torch and pool
fire) and the ignition of a gas cloud will be discussed in succession. These models calculate the heat
radiation or peak overpressure as a function of the distance from the torch, the ignited pool or gas
cloud. The physical significance of the various heat loads is depicted in Table 7.4.
TABLE 7.4
LIST OF DAMAGES ENVISAGED AT VARIOUS HEAT LOADS
Sr. Heat loads Type of Damage Intensity
No. (kW/m²) Damage to Equipment Damage to People
1 37.5 Damage to process equipment 100% lethality in 1 min. 1%
lethality in 10 sec
2 25.0 Minimum energy required to ignite 50% Lethality in 1 min. Significant
wood injury in 10 sec
3 19.0 Maximum thermal radiation intensity --
allowed on thermally unprotected
equipment
4 12.5 Minimum energy required to melt 1% lethality in 1 min
plastic tubing
5 4.0 -- First degree burns, causes pain for
exposure longer than 10 sec
6 1.6 -- Causes no discomfort on long
exposures
Source: World Bank (1988). Technical Report No. 55: Techniques for Assessing Industrial
Hazards. , Washington, D.C: The World Bank.

7.4.3 Model for Pressure Wave

A pressure wave can be caused by gas cloud explosion. The following damage criteria are assumed
as a result of the peak overpressure of a pressure wave:
 0.03 bar over pressure wave is taken as the limit for the occurrence of wounds as a result of flying
fragments of glass
 Following assumptions are used to translate an explosion in terms of damage to the surrounding
area:
- Within the contour area of the exploding gas cloud, Casualties are due to burns or
asphyxiation. Houses and buildings in this zone will be severely damaged.
- In houses with serious damage, it is assumed that one out of eight persons present will be
killed as a result of the building collapse. Within the zone of a peak over pressure of 0.3 bar
the risk of death in houses is 0.9 x 1/8 = 0.1125, and in the zone with a peak over pressure of
0.1 bar the probability of death is 0.1 x 1/8 = 0.0125, i.e. one out of eighty people will be killed.
The significance of the peak over pressure 0.3 bar, 0.1 bar, 0.03 bar and 0.01 bar are depicted in
Table 7.5.
TABLE 7.5
DAMAGE CRITERIA FOR PRESSURE WAVES
Human Injury Structural Damage
Peak Over Pressure Type of Damage Peak Over Pressure (bar) Type of Damage
(bar)
5-8 100% lethality 0.3 Heavy (90% damage)
3.5-5 50% lethality 0.1 Repairable (10% damage)
2-3 Threshold lethality 0.03 Damage of Glass
1.33-2 Severe lung 0.01 Crack of windows
damage
1-1.33 50% Eardrum - -
rupture
Source: Marshall, V.C. (1977)’ How lethal is explosives and toxic escapes’.
7.4.4 Vulnerability Models

Vulnerability models are used in order to determine how people are injured by exposure to heat load.
Such models are designed on the basis of animal experiments or on the basis of the analysis of
injuries resulting from accidents, which have occurred. Vulnerability models often make use of a
probit function. In this function, a link is made between the heat load and the percentage of people
exposed to a particular type of injury.
It is assumed that everyone inside the area covered or gas cloud will be burnt to death or will
asphyxiate. Human fatality is a function of heat flux and exposure time. The probit expressions for the
prediction of mortality due to thermal radiation from fire scenarios are proportional to the product of t
and q4/3. The probit equation usually used is that proposed by Eisenberg and coworkers*
Pr = -14.9 + 2.56 In (10-4 q4/3 t)

In which,
Pr = Probit the measure of the percentage of people exposed to a particular injury
t = exposure time in seconds
q = thermal load in W/m²
For 1% lethality in the exposed persons the corresponding probit value is 2.67. Table 7.6 gives time
is seconds for percentage of fatality at various heat radiations.
TABLE 7.6
RANGE OF THERMAL FLUX LEVELS AND THEIR POTENTIAL EFFECTS
Heat Flux (kW/m²) Seconds Exposure For % Fatality
1% 50% 99%
1.6 500 1300 3200
4 150 370 930
12.5 30 80 200
37.5 8 20 50
*Eisenberg, N. A., Lynch C. J. and Breeding, R. J. (1975) Vulnerability Model. A Simulation System
for Assessing Damage Resulting from Marine Spills. National Technology Information Service Report
AD-A015-245, Springfield, MA
7.5 RISK MITIGATION MEASURES

The scope of the risk assessment study covers risk mitigation measures based on Maximum Credible
Accident (MCA) Analysis. The Fire and Explosion Indices were computed for the identification and
screening of vulnerable sections. Consequence analysis was carried out for the accidental release
scenarios of hazardous chemicals at various weather conditions leading to the computation of
damage distances. The following general and specific risk mitigation measures are suggested based
on the study.
7.5.1 General Recommendations

Fire prevention and code enforcement is one of the major areas of responsibility for the fire service.
Hence the facility should be equipped with following measures,
 Water supply
 Fire hydrant and monitor nozzle installation
 Foam system
 Water fog and sprinkler system
 Mobile Firefighting equipment
 First aid appliances
 Surrounding population (includes all strata of society) should be made aware of the safety
precautions to be taken in the event of any mishap within the plant. This can effectively be done
by conducting the safety training programs
 Buildings possibly subjected to external blast waves should be made of reinforced concrete.
The windows should be made of blast resistant glass with strong frame.

 Air intakes should not be placed at grounds level, to prevent combustible dense gas from
entering into building
 Buildings possibly subjected to internal explosion should have a strong frame structure
supporting roof and intermediate floors. The walls should be open. If a solid wall is needed, use
low weight wall panels to facilitate early explosion venting.
 Safety escape routes should be provided at strategic locations and should be easily accessible
 Grating and vent panels should be provided to minimize Domino Effects
 Critical switches and alarm should be always kept in line
 Fire extinguishers should be tested periodically and should be always kept in operational mode
 Fire detectors should be installed near those units which handle large amount of explosive
material and operate under high temperature and pressure
 A wind direction pointer should also be installed at storage site, so that in an emergency the
wind direction can be directly seen and downwind population cautioned
 Shut off and isolation valves should be easily approachable in emergencies
 Hydrocarbon detectors to be installed at strategic locations near the units and pipelines
handling hydrocarbons at higher temperatures and pressures to assess any leak
 Periodical mock drills should be conducted so as to check the alertness and efficiency of the
DMP and EPP and records should be maintained
 Proper training should be given to staff to handle any emergency situation
 Signboard including phone numbers, no smoking signs and type of emergencies should be
installed at various locations
 The chain-driven conveyor system should be installed for the transportation of heavy goods with
an even bearing surface
 Automated storage/retrieval systems (AS/RS) store and retrieve products from an inventory
location. These systems should be used for unloading, sorting, put-away, storage, order-
picking, staging, and loading
7.5.2 Specific Recommendations
7.5.2.1 Hydrogen
 Preventive measures against fires involving hydrogen should include automatic or manual
process shutdown systems, sprinklers, deluge systems, water spray systems, dry-chemical
extinguishing systems, and Halon systems.
 Hydrogen fires normally are not extinguished until the supply of hydrogen is shut off because of
the danger of reignition or explosion. Hence, Large quantities of water should be sprayed on
adjacent equipment to cool the equipment and prevent its involvement in any fire that occurs
 Small hydrogen fires should be extinguished by dry chemical extinguishers or with carbon
dioxide, nitrogen, and steam
 Water spray systems should be provided for hydrogen storage containers, grouped piping, and
pumps where potential fire hazard exists

 Hydrogen gas is colourless and odourless and normally not detectable by human senses.
Hence, a combination of portable and fixed installation hydrogen sensors should be used to
detect hydrogen. Portable hydrogen detectors should be available for personnel entering an
area in which hydrogen is leaking or may have leaked.
7.5.2.2 Chlorine
 Provide PVC gloves, gumboots, rubber overcoat, head mask, self-contained breathing
apparatus.
 Keep in a cool, dry, relatively isolated, well ventilated place, store in cylinders, pressure vessels,
or pipelines.
 To prevent the large release of chlorine to atmosphere, monitoring and feedback facilities for
early detection leaks and emergency shutdown shall be provided.
 There should be facilities for absorption of chlorine released during an emergency
 As the hypochlorate is neither toxic nor flammable, therefore it is recommended that
hypochlorate should be used instead of chlorine if technically feasible.
 If mild steel is to be used for handling chlorine, it is essential that water should be excluded.
Therefore, mild steel equipment used for dry chlorine itself must be dried out before
commissioning
 Eye wash stations and emergency shower stations should be provided at appropriate locations
especially in the vicinity of Chlorine storage and dosing facilities
 As the chlorine is highly soluble in water, there should be water curtain near the chlorine
storages
 Immediate actions needs to be taken for evacuation of all personnel in case of accidental
release of chlorine
7.5.2.3 LNG
Pump and Pipe Leaks under Pressure:
 Provide automatic cut off valves for line leaks.
 In particular, fast - acting double - valve powered emergency release connection (PERC) for
loading arms.
 Provide LNG impoundment basins in safe locations.
 Insulate drainage troughs under transfer lines.
 Drain troughs to an insulated sump to reduce evaporation rates.
 Provide shielding around flanges, valve stems, and pump axles.
Process Leaks:
 Minimize flanged connections.
 Select appropriate materials not affected by brittle fracture.
 Install a flammable gas leak detection system.
 Install sufficient isolation points to avoid large inventory losses.

 Install an ESD system.

 Install an LNG drain and impoundment basin at a safe location.
Storage Tank Leaks:
 Employ a full - or double - containment design.
 Install a flammable gas detection system around the tank.
 Install remote isolation systems to shut valves at a safe location.
 Install an LNG drain and impoundment basin at a safe location.
7.5.2.4 Ammonia
 All Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) must be stored in a safety equipment container
which is easily accessible.
 Should wear gas tight chemical goggles, or full-face respirator to protect eyes and face in
addition to rubber gloves, heavy-duty long-sleeved shirt, long pants and safety shoes
 Should work upwind of applicator knives, hose connections, applicator tank valves, and all other
openings to the application equipment.
 Level C respiratory protection with full face piece or self-contained breathing apparatus should
be available for emergency use. Air purifying respirators must be equipped with suitable
cartridges
 Backup set of all Personnel Protective Equipments should be easily available
 Remove contaminated clothing as rapidly as possible. Flush affected area with copious
quantities of water.
 Hooter system should be installed for leak detection of ammonia in the plant premises
 Use water spray to cool surrounding containers
7.5.2.5 Natural Gas
 Fight fire from maximum distance or use unmanned hose holders or monitor nozzles.
 All welds should be radiographed and hydrostatic testing of the natural gas pipeline should be
performed at a pressure up to 1.4 times the design pressure.
 Pipeline system should be based on the design code requirements.
 The test pressure should be held for a minimum period of 30 minutes.
 Preventative maintenance should involve the routine testing of valves as well as the removal of
surface impediment to pipeline inspection.
 Natural gas detecting equipment should be used periodically on the surface to check for leaks.
This is particularly important in areas where natural gas is not odorized.
 Natural gas pipelines should be routinely inspected for corrosion and defects.
7.5.2.6 Storage Tanks
 Storage areas must be adequately separated from buildings process areas and flammable
materials

 Separate dike area must be provided for the different products. Do not store the different
products in the same dike
 The separation /space in the storage areas such that sufficient to escape from fire, at the same
time it should allow emergency procedures to be mobilized
 Proper dyke area should be provided for the storage of chemicals. In the event of a fire, the fire
in the dyke area should be addressed first so as to minimise the heat input to the tank
 The fire proofing material/coating should be resistant to weather effects such as chalking and
erosion. Top coat, wherever provided, must be resistant to solar ultra violet radiation
 The fire proofing materials should have adequate adhesion, strength and durability
 In case of accidental release, shut-off leaks without risk. Prevent spillage from entering drains or
water sources
 After spills wash area with soap and water preventing runoff from entering drains.
 For small spills, take up with sand or other non combustible material and placed into closed
containers for later disposal
 For large liquid spills, build dyke far ahead of the spill to contain the spilled material for later
reclamation or disposal
 Seal all the waste in vapour tight plastic bags for eventual disposal or incineration.
 Provide proper ventilation
 Use respiratory protection if ventilation is improper
 Use face shield, PVC gloves, safety boots while handling. Contaminated clothing to be
immediately removed
7.5.2.7 Control Rooms

 Control rooms shall be blast proof and shock proof
 The building shall be located upwind of the process storage and handling facilities. The building
shall not be at a lower level than the tank farm. The recommended distances are 30 m for more
than two process units
 Adequate number of doors shall be provided in the control room for safe exit
 Halon / Its proven Equivalent shall be used for control rooms and computer rooms
 Smoke detectors system shall be provided for control rooms at suitable locations
 To resist fire spread through ducts, dampers shall be installed in ducts
 One hydrant (minimum) for every 45 m per wall of the building shall be positioned all around the
building
7.5.3 Mitigation Measures for Natural Disasters
7.5.3.1 Earthquake
 Personal structural mitigation in earthquake prone areas includes seismic retrofits of property
and the securing of items inside a building to enhancehousehold seismic safety. It may include
the mounting of furniture,refrigerators, water heaters and breakables to the walls.

7.5.3.2 Flood
Following mitigation measures are recommended to tackle flood disaster
 Focus resources on minimizing the spread of water into other areas of the plant
 Protect property and records by removing items from floors and /or covering with water resistant
coverings.
 Attempt to move items of value to "higher ground" if possible.
 Evacuate personnel as needed. Utilize the fire alarm system if an immediate evacuation is
required.
 Mitigative measures can be structural or non-structural. Structural measures use technological
solutions, like flood levees. Non-structural measures include legislation, land-use planning (e.g.
the designation of nonessential land like parks to be used as flood zones), and insurance.
 The response phase includes the mobilization of the necessary emergency services and first
responders in the flood area. This is likely to include a first wave of core emergency services,
such asfire fighters,police and ambulance crews. They may be supported by a number of
secondary emergency services, such as specialist rescue teams.
7.5.3.3 Cyclones and Severe Storms
 Landuse management should provide protection from wind and storm surge.
 Engineering of structures should withstand wind forces and water damage (including storm
surge).
 Building should be constructed with higher wind-resistant capacity.
 Securing of elements such as metal sheeting, roofing, and fences should be done to avoid
severe damages.
 Safety shelters are to be arranged to tackle cyclones and storms.
 Cyclone and severe weather warning systems should be installed.
 Community awareness regarding cyclone risk and evacuation plan should be properly
addressed.
7.5.4 Preventive Measures of the Electricity Hazard
 All electrical equipments shall be provided with proper earthing. Earthed electrode shall
periodically tested and maintained
 Emergency lighting shall be available at all critical locations including the operator’s room to
carry out safe shut down of the plant, ready identification of firefighting facilities such as fire
water pumps and fire alarm stations.
 All electrical equipments shall be free from carbon dust, oil deposits, and grease
 Use of approved insulated tools, rubber mats, shockproof gloves and boots, tester, fuse tongs,
discharge rod, safety belt, hand lamp, wooden or insulated ladder and not wearing metal ring
and chain.
 Flame and shock detectors and central fire annunciation system for fire safety should be
provided.

 Temperature sensitive alarm and protective relays to make alert and disconnect equipment
before overheating
 Prevent higher humidity and temperature near electric insulations.
 Danger from excess current due to overload or short circuit should be prevented by providing
fuses, circuit breakers, thermal protection
 Carbon dioxide, halon or dry chemical fire extinguishers are to be used for electrical fires
7.5.5 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Schedule for Pumps
All the following items shall be checked / recorded after the specified period:
After 1000 running hours or 3 months whichever earlier
 Bearing lubricant (for water contamination and sediments)
 Oil ring for performance
 Deflector for looseness
 Constant level oiler for leakage
 Mechanical seal for leakage
 Seal flushing/quenching system (of Mechanical Seal) for clogging and chocking.
 Cooling water flow in both the bearing housings
 Condition of bearing by sound and temperature (in running condition)
 Performance of all measuring instruments (Pressure/Temperature gauges and Flowmeters)
After 4000 running hours or 1 year whichever earlier
 Repeat all checks given above
 Flushing of bearing with lube oil and refilling of oil to required level, whether carried out or not
 Flushing of cooling water lines and strainers to ensure proper flow of cooling water.
 Foundation, foundation bolts and supports
 Replacement of old packing with new ones and condition of gland follower, lantern ring and
sleeves (in case of gland packing)
 Condition of coupling, coupling bolts, nuts, spring washers and their conformity to uniform size.
Change grease in half coupling in case of gear type
After 8000 hours or 2 years whichever earlier
 Repeat all checks given above
 Condition of outboard bearing, lock nut and lock washer (in case lock washer found damaged
and lock nut loose, shaft axial play shall be checked)
Following items of Journal bearings:
 Clearance of I/B and O/B bearings
 High spot (High Spots shall be scrapped)

 Condition of thrust bearing, lock nut and lock washer (in case lock washer found damaged and
lock nut loose, shaft axial play shall be checked)
 Pump float (adjust, if necessary)
 Condition of mechanical seals
 Alignment (Misalignment shall not be more than 0.05 mm)
 Painting of equipment, whether carried out or not
After completing the checks listed above the pump shall be started and the following shall be checked
during the trial run (the trial run duration shall be half to one hour for electric driven and 3 to 4 hours
for diesel driven):
 Discharge pressure
 Suction pressure
 Condition of Mechanical Seal/Gland Packing
 Electric Motor load current at discharge valve shutoff and open condition
 Condition of bearing by sound and temperature
 Any leakage
 Vibration and shock pulse reading.
7.5.6 Fire Protection Systems
The typical firefighting system for the various facilities described under this project is outlined in this
section. The exact details of the firefighting systems and capabilities to be installed and developed
will be finalised after the completion of detailed engineering in consultation with the concerned
process and equipment vendors and fire. It is also to be understood that not all facilities described
below will be applicable for every installation. The outline of the fire system proposed is described
below.
Fire protection system shall be deigned in accordance with the requirements of OISD, Tariff Advisory
Committee (TAC) of India, NFPA standards, design requirements and safe engineering practices and
will have full capability for early detection and suppression of fire. The system will primarily consist of:
 Hydrant system
 Foam protection system
 Deluge sprinkler system
 Portable fire extinguisher
 Fire detection and alarm system
Hydrant System: The system will essentially consists of firewater storage, pumping, system
pressurisation and all inter connected pipe work and auxiliary firefighting appliances. The water
storage and pumping capacity and other features of this system will be finalised considering TAC
recommendations.
Adequate number of engine driven / electric motor driven fire water pumps will be provided. The
pumps will be started automatically in the event of drop in header pressure. The actuation will be
through pressure switches, the setting of which will be staggered to achieve sequential starting of the

pumps to meet the system demand. When power supply is available, the electric motor driven pump
will start first and in case of further pressure drop the engine driven pump will start. However when
electric power is not available, the engine driven pump will cut-in depending on the system demand.
The pumping capacity would meet the simultaneous water demand for foam protection of one oil
tank, and supplementary foam hose stream in the oil dyke area, which is the maximum water demand
in a single occurrence of fire. The pumping capacity should also meet the guidelines of TAC for this
size of plant, considering ordinary hazard occupancy.
The fire water system will be kept pressurised by the hydro-pneumatic tank, which will take care of
small leakages from the fire water system. A jockey pump, sized as per the TAC guidelines will,
automatically replenish the water level in the hydro-pneumatic tank at periodic intervals. Air required
for pressurising the hydro-pneumatic tank will be supplied by an electric motor driven compressor.
The outdoor hydrant system will be provided all over the plant for exterior protection. The hydrant
mains will be laid underground. Hose houses, complete with all accessories, will be provided at
suitable intervals. The overall plant will be divided in several fire zones, where the firefighting action
can be pursued effectively. The pressurised main will also be connected to Sprinkler/ emulsifier
System for protection of transformers and Fuel Oil storage tanks.
Foam protection system: Oil storage tanks and the surrounding dyke areas will be protected with low
expansion foam system, using fluoro-protein. The storage tanks will be provided with sub-surface
foam injection system and the dyke area will be provided with supplementary foam hose stream for
combating spill fires. The foam protection system will be designed as per the requirements of NFPA,
OISD and TAC. A central foam preparation unit consisting of at least foam storage tank,
proportionating devices etc. shall be provided, to supply foam solution to the foam protection system.
Pressurised water for foam system will be tapped from the outdoor main hydrant.
Sprinkler system: Automatic deluge sprinkler system will be provided for the protection of power
transformer. An array of spray nozzles will be provided all around the protected area. The nozzles will
be connected to the automatic deluge valve. A set of heat or smoke detectors, located in the area
will sense the fire. Deluge valve will automatically open once two independent detectors sense fire.
Manually initiated water spray system will be provided for exposure protection of oil storage tanks, so
that when one tank is on fire, the other tank can be cooled to guard against exposure heating.
Pressurized water supply to all sprinkler systems will be tapped from the outdoor hydrant main.
Portable Fire Extinguishers: Besides, fire hydrant arrangement, portable fire extinguishers of suitable
categories will be placed at control rooms, electrical switchgear room and various utility buildings for
immediate use in the event of fire. Three different kinds of extinguishers i.e. foam, CO2 and
multipurpose dry chemical (MPDC) will be provided. Each type of extinguisher has its own
characteristic to fight a particular class of fire. The size and type of extinguishers will be decided as
per recommendations of NFPA and relevant Indian Standard and will be placed in convenient
accessible locations.
7.5.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) provides additional protection to workers exposed to workplace
hazards in conjunction with other facility controls and safety systems.
PPE is considered to be a last resort that is above and beyond the other facility controls and provides
the worker with an extra level of personal protection. Table 7.7 presents general examples of
occupational hazards and types of PPE available for different purposes. Recommended measures for
use of PPE in the workplace include:

 Active use of PPE if alternative technologies, work plans or procedures cannot eliminate, or
sufficiently reduce, a hazard or exposure
 Identification and provision of appropriate PPE that offers adequate protection to the worker, co-
workers, and occasional visitors, without incurring unnecessary inconvenience to the individual
 Proper maintenance of PPE, including cleaning when dirty and replacement when damaged or
worn out. Proper use of PPE should be part of the recurrent training programs for Employees
 Selection of PPE should be based on the hazard and risk ranking described earlier in this
section, and selected according to criteria on performance and testing established
TABLE 7.7
SUMMARY OF RECOMMENDED PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
ACCORDING TO HAZARD
Objective Workplace Hazards Suggested PPE
Eye and face Flying particles, molten metal, Safety glasses with side-shields, protective
protection liquid chemicals, gases or vapours, shades, etc.
light radiation
Head protection Falling objects, inadequate height Plastic helmets with top and side impact
clearance, and overhead power protection
cords
Hearing Noise, ultra-sound Hearing protectors (ear plugs or ear muffs)
protection
Foot protection Failing or rolling objects, points Safety shoes and boots for protection against
objects. Corrosive or hot liquids moving and failing objects, liquids and
chemicals
Hand protection Hazardous materials, cuts or Gloves made of rubber or synthetic material
lacerations, vibrations, extreme (Neoprene), leather, steel, insulation materials,
temperatures etc.
Respiratory Dust, fogs, fumes, mists, gases, Facemasks with appropriate filters for dust
protection smokes, vapours removal and air purification (chemical, mists,
vapours and gases). Single or multi-gas
personal monitors, if available
Oxygen deficiency Portable or supplied air (fixed lines).
Onsite rescue equipment
Body / leg Extreme temperatures, hazardous Insulating clothing, body suits, aprons etc. of
protection materials, biological agents, cutting appropriate materials
and laceration
7.5.8 Measures for Occupational Health Hazards

 Detect the possible onset of an occupational disease
 Monitor personal exposure with the help of biological monitoring
 Check the effectiveness of preventive and control measures on regular basis.
 Identify possible health effects of changes in the working practices, technology or substances
used in the complex

 Where there is potential for exposure to substances poisonous by ingestion, suitable

arrangements are to be made for provision of clean eating areas where workers are not
exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances
 Adequate supplies of potable drinking water should be provided from a fountain with an upward
jet or with a sanitary means of collecting the water for the purposes of drinking
 Water supplied to areas of food preparation or for the purpose of personal hygiene (washing or
bathing) should meet drinking water quality standards
 Periodic medical hearing checks should be performed on workers exposed to high noise levels
 Preventing spread of communicable diseases through food handlers
 Provisions should be made to provide OHS orientation training to all new employees to ensure
they are apprised of the basic site rules of work at / on the site and of personal protection and
preventing injury to fellow employees
 Contractors that have the technical capability to manage the occupational health and safety
issues of their employees should be hired, extending the application of the hazard management
activities through formal procurement agreements
 Four number of PID instruments are available in the complex to measure work place
environment as per the Maharashtra Factory Rules. The findings are recorded and analysed for
corrective actions
 Two ambulances and full fledge First aid treatment facilities should be available in OHC
7.5.9 Precautionary Measures for Falling Objects
 Provide safety helmets to protect workers below against falling objects
 Barriers like a toe boards or mesh guards should be provided to prevent items from slipping or
being knocked off the edge of a structure
 Secure objects to the structure like lashing of scaffold boards
 Ensure that there are no loose objects and all tools are properly secured
 Create an exclusion zone beneath areas where work is taking place.
 Danger areas should be clearly marked with suitable safety signs indicating that access is
restricted to essential personnel wearing hard hats while the work is in progress.
7.6 APPROACH TO DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN
Onsite Emergency or disaster is an unpleasant sudden event of such a magnitude which may cause
extensive damage to life and property, due to in-plant emergencies resulting from deficiencies in
operation, maintenance, design and human error; natural calamities like flood, cyclone and
earthquake; and deliberate and other acts of man like sabotage, riot, war etc.
It is important for every industry to have a well-documented Emergency Plan to meet any major
untoward incident or disaster. In view of this, an approach to Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to
tackle the emergencies in the industries of MIDC has been delineated in the following sections. Roles
and responsibilities of key personnel have also been defined in the plan.

7.6.1 Formulation of DMP and Emergency Services

Industries proposed in proposed MIDC area will formulate a Disaster Management Plan for better and
safe management of their plants. The DMP is related to the final assessment and it is the
responsibility of the plant management document including the following elements.
 Assessment of the size and nature of the events foreseen and the probability of their
occurrence.
 Formulation of the plan and liaison with authorities, including the emergency services.
 Procedures for raising the alarm and communications both within and outside the works.
 Appointment of key personnel and their duties and responsibilities, especially for works incident
controller and works main controller.
 Emergency control centre
 Action on-site
 Action off-site
The plan is prepared to set out the way in which designated people at the site of the incident can
initiate supplementary action both inside and outside the works at an appropriate time. An essential
element of the plan must be the provision for attempting to make safe the affected unit, for example
by shutting it down. On a complex site, the plan includes the full sequence of key personnel to be
called in from other sections or from off site.
7.6.2 Need for Disaster Management Plan
Proposed MIDC is a specifically delineated area planned for the establishment of production facilities
for various industrial sectors. The industries in the area may process lot of toxic, highly reactive,
explosive or inflammable chemicals which are potentially hazardous not only to the human beings,
flora and fauna but also to all forms of property and our environment as a whole. Thus, extreme care
is essential in handling such chemicals in any form and at all stages of manufacture, processing,
treatment, package, storage, transportation, use, collection, destruction, conversion or sale.
Several agencies of the Government, both at the Central and State levels, such as the Directorate of
Explosives, the Inspectorate of Factories and Transport Authorities are entrusted with the
responsibility of ensuring safe handling and management of hazardous chemicals under acts and
rules made for the purpose. In spite of these measures, the possibility of accidents cannot be ruled
out. Human errors and mechanical, electrical, instrumental or system failures have, on occasions, led
to severe disasters. Accidents occurred at Bhopal, Mexico and other parts of the world have made
people concerned with the dangers of chemical accidents. Occurrence of such accidents makes it
essential that the Central and State Governments as well as the local authorities are fully prepared to
mitigate the sufferings and meet the eventualities resulting from any unfortunate occurrence of
chemical accidents in our country.
Following are the general types of Emergency /Disaster which lead to preparation of disaster
management plan:
 Fire in tank farm area
 Large oil spillage which may escape outside the plant boundary.
 Major fire / explosion in unit area
 Toxic gas release

 Major Earthquake above 7 Richter Scale

7.6.3 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan
The purpose of DMP is to give an approach to detail organizational responsibilities, actions, reporting
requirements and support resources available to ensure effective and timely management of
emergencies associated to production and operations in the site. The overall objectives of DMP are
to:
 Ensure safety of people, protect the environment and safeguard commercial considerations
 Immediate response to emergency scene with effective communication network and organized
procedures
 Obtain early warning of emergency conditions so as to prevent impact on personnel, assets and
environment
 Safeguard personnel to prevent injuries or loss of life by protecting personnel from the hazard and
evacuating personnel from an installation when necessary
 Minimize the impact of the event on the installation and the environment, by:
- Minimizing the hazard as far as possible
- Minimizing the potential for escalation
- Containing any release
 To provide guidance to help stack holders take appropriate action to prevent accidents involving
hazardous substances and to mitigate adverse effects of accidents that do nevertheless occur.
Figure 7.2 shows effect of loss of containment from the process.
FIGURE 7.2: FOCUS ON LOSS OF CONTAINMENT FROM THE PROCESS
7.6.4 Different Phases of Disaster
Warning Phase
Emergencies /disasters are generally preceded by warnings during which preventive measures may
be initiated. For example release of light hydrocarbons, uncontrollable build-up of pressure in process
equipment, weather forecast give warning about formation of vapour cloud, cyclones, equipment
failure, cyclones respectively.

Period of Impact Phase

This is the phase when emergency /disaster actually strikes and preventive measures may hardly be
taken. However, control measures to minimise the effects may be taken through a well-planned and
ready-to-act disaster management plan. The duration may be from seconds to days.
Rescue Phase
This is the phase when impact is almost over and efforts are concentrated on rescue and relief
measures.
Relief Phase
In this phase, apart from organization and relief measures internally, depending on severity of the
disaster, external help should also be summoned to provide relief measures (like evacuations to a
safe place and providing medical help, food clothing etc.). This phase will continue till normalcy is
restored.
Rehabilitation Phase
This is the final and longest phase. During which measures required to put the situation back to
normal as far as possible are taken. Checking the systems, estimating the damages, repair of
equipments and putting them again into service are taken up. Help from revenue/insurance
authorities need to be obtained to assess the damage, quantum of compensation to be paid etc.
7.6.5 Key Elements
Following are the key elements of Disaster Management Plan:

 Basis of the plan
 Accident/emergency response planning procedures
 On-site Disaster Management Plan
 Off-site Disaster Management Plan
7.6.5.1 Basis of the Plan
Identification and assessment of hazards is crucial for on-site emergency planning and it is therefore
necessary to identify what emergencies could arise in production of various products and their
storage. Hazard analysis or consequence analysis gives the following results.
 Hazards from spread of fire or release of flammable and toxic chemicals from storage and
production units.
 Hazards due to formation of pressure waves due to vapour cloud explosion of flammable gases
and oil spill hazards.
7.6.5.2 Emergency Planning and Response Procedures

Emergency rarely occurs; therefore activities during emergencies require coordination of higher order
than for planned activities carried out according to fixed time schedule or on a routine day-to-day
basis. To effectively coordinate emergency response activities, an organizational approach to
planning is required. The important areas of emergency planning are Organization and
Responsibilities, Procedures, Communication, Transport, Resource requirements and Control Center.
Offsite emergency requires additional planning over and above those considered under onsite plans,
which should be properly integrated to ensure better coordination.

The emergency planning includes anticipatory action for emergency, maintenance and streamlining
of emergency preparedness and ability for sudden mobilization of all forces to meet any calamity.
7.6.5.3 On-site Disaster Management Plan

Onsite Emergency/disaster is an unpleasant event of such magnitude which may cause extensive
damage to life and property due to plant emergencies resulting from deficiencies in Operation,
Maintenance, Design and Human error, Natural Calamities like Flood, Cyclone and Earthquake; and
deliberate and other acts of man like Sabotage, Riot and War etc. An Onsite Disaster may occur all of
a sudden or proceeded by a Major Fire. Purpose for the on-site disaster management plan is
 To protect persons and property of processing equipments in case of all kinds of accidents,
emergencies and disasters
 To inform people and surroundings about emergency if it is likely to adversely affect them
 To inform authorities including helping agencies (doctors, hospitals, fire, police transport etc.) in
advance, and also at the time of actual happening
 To identify, assess, foresee and work out various kinds of possible hazards, their places,
potential and damaging capacity and area in case of above happenings. Review, revise,
redesign, replace or reconstruct the process, plant, vessels and control measures if so
assessed.
In order to handle disaster / emergency situations, an organizational chart entrusting responsibility to
various personnel of the plant and showing their specific roles should be available as shown in
Figure 7.3.
Following fire protection facilities are available to combat the emergencies and depending upon the
type of emergencies any one or combination of the facilities are applied.
 Fire Water System
 Carbon Dioxide System
 Foam System
 First Aid Fire Fighting Equipment
 Mobile Fire Fighting Equipment
 Gas / Fire Detection and Alarm System.

Plant
Manager
Section Medical
Incharge Co-ordinator
Incident
Controller
Fire & Security Medical

Officer Representative
Site
Controller
Communication Communication
Officer Co-ordinator
Personal /
Administrative Emergency Transport
Manager Co-ordinator
FIGURE 7.3: ONSITE DMP - DISASTER CONTROL / MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Before Crisis
 Prepare a plan of the storage, handling and pumping stations premises and surroundings
showing therein the areas of various hazards like fire, explosion, toxic releases and also
location of assembly points, fire station or equipments room, telephone room, first aid or
ambulance room, emergency control room, main gate, emergency gates, normal wind direction,
outside fire station, hospital and other services. Mention their distances from proposed
activities.
 The fire protection equipment shall be kept in good operating condition at all the time and
firefighting system should be periodically tested for people functioning logged for record and
corrective action.
 The firefighting training shall be provided to all officers, truck drivers and other employees who
are likely to be present in installation
 There should be regular mock fire drills once a month record of such drills shall be maintained
 Every employee or authorized person working in the production shall be familiarized with the fire
alarm signal and shall know the location of fire alarm point nearest to place of work
 Assign key personnel and alternate responsible for site safety
 Describe risk associated with each operation conducted.
During Crisis
 Monitor the behaviour of entrant for any effects that suggests they should be evacuated
 Evacuate the space if any hazard that could danger the entrant is detected
 Perform no other duties that may interfere with their primary responsibilities
 Notify the attendant if they experience any warning signs or symptoms of exposures or detect a
dangerous condition

 Exit the permit space when instructed by attendant

 Reporting Procedure
In the event of fire from accidental release of flammable gas or liquid, a person seeing the incident
will follow the laid down procedure in the plant and report as follows:
 Will dial the nearest telephone
 Will state his name and exact location of emergency
 Will contact affected officers on duty
 People reporting the accident will remain near the location to guide emergency crew arriving at
the scene
In case fire emergency person should activate the nearest available push button type instrument
which will automatically sound an alarm in fire control room indicating the location of fire.
After Crisis
 Report injuries or blood or body fluid exposures to the appropriate supervisor immediately
 Assembly points:
- Assembly points shall be set up farthest from the location of likely hazardous events, where
pre-designed persons from the works, contractors and visitors would assemble in case of
emergency. Up-to-date list of pre-designed employees shift wise must be available at these
points so that roll call could be taken. Pre-designated persons would take charge of these
points and mark presence as the people come into it
 Wash wounds and skin sites that have been affected with soap & water
 Workers should be seen as soon as possible by a health professional
 Provide information to the relevant public authority and community including other closely
located facilities regarding the nature of hazard and emergency procedure in event of major
accident
 Record and discuss the lessons learned and the analysis of major accidents and misses with
employees and employee representative
Emergency Organization Structure
Following are the key personnel and the units in the plant which are responsible to take appropriate
actions during emergencies.
Site Main Controller
President/SSM - (the senior most functionary available at site).
The President/Site Shit Manager (SSM) will be designated as the Site Main Controller at the time of
an emergency and report at the Emergency Control Centre (ECC) which will be the Primary
Command Post. He will be the Chief Co-ordinator and take overall command of the emergency
management. He will be assisted by other co-ordinators as designated for various functions. The
Site Main Controller will provide all decisions support and resources support to the Site Incident
Controller at the incident site for initiating appropriate actions for emergency control. He will also
liaise with mutual aid members and all outside agencies including Local Crisis Management

Committee, District Contingency Plan Committee (District Collector), Police, Civil Defence, Factories
Inspectorate, etc. to seek assistance/help and provide necessary information to them.
Normally, the SSM is available on round the clock duty at the site to co-ordinate overall
manufacturing activities and management of emergency (if any). In the event of an emergency, the
Site Shift Manager (SSM) will assume the charge of the Site Main Controller till the Executive or the
President arrives.
Site Incident Controller
AVP/GM/DGM/Sr. Mgr. / Mgr. - (next lower to the senior most functionary of operation available at
site).
The next lower to senior most functionary of operation available at site will be Site Incident Controller.
On receiving information about the emergency, he will report at the incident site and take over from
the Deputy Incident Controller (shift-in-charge). He will take overall command of the emergency
control operation as the Site Incident Controller and will take decisions in co-ordinations with Site
Main Controller for controlling emergency situation. He will co-ordinate with all the key personnel,
firefighting and rescue team leaders and other support services and provide necessary information
and advice to them for effectively managing control measures / actions.
Deputy Incident Controller
The shift-in-charge is available on round the clock duty in every plant. He is competent for plant
operation and responsible for all activities related to production / maintenance including prevention /
control of incidents and handling emergencies (if any) in the plant. He will be designated as the
Deputy Incident Controller. In the event of an emergency in the plant, he will immediately assume the
charge of the site Incident Controller and take decisions in consultation with the Site Main Controller.
To initiate immediate actions for controlling/mitigating emergency situation at the incident site till the
Site Incident Controller (next senior personnel in production) arrives.
Co- ordinators
(The senior most functionaries available in the respective services)
The senior most functionaries available at site in the respective services will be the co-ordinators at
the time of an emergency. They will report at the Emergency Control Centre (EFF), known as the
Primary Command Post, unless and otherwise instructed by the Chief Co-ordinator (The Site Main
Controller). They will assist and advise the Site Main Controller in all matters for effectively managing
control measures and mitigating operations.
Emergency Control Centre (ECC) (The Primary Command Post)
In the event of an emergency, SSM Office will be designated as the Emergency Control Centre,
which will be known as the Primary command Post. If, the SSM office is likely to be affected due to
unfavourable wind direction or any other reasons, the Emergency Control Centre will be shifted to the
Construction Conference Room which will be having necessary facilities to connect communication
links as provided in the SSM Office.
Field Command Post (Incident Site)
An emergency requires co-ordination of numerous activities beyond spill containment and
countermeasure efforts from a safe location at the incident scene. The Field Command Post will be
established in the "Cold Zone" for staging deployed apparatus, resources and equipment with means
of communications and manning to effectively co-ordinate control efforts.

Assembly Points
 Two alternate locations for safe assembly points have been earmarked at all the operating
plants. These locations are designated for assembling non-essential workers, visitors, and
other persons who ae not required in the plant site at the time of emergency but they are to be
moved to safe places. These locations have been provided with sign boards displaying
"Assembly Points" for easy identification
 The persons required to be assembled at the assembly point should choose safer assembly
point out of the two, considering the wind direction at that time. The plant control room will also
announce the same on the plant PA system, if possible
 The person assembled at the assembly point shall follow the instruction for evacuation of the
plant area and move to safe locations as directed. They should move in the cross wind direction
or up-wind direction, whichever is more safer
Role and Responsibilities
Site Main Controller
The Site Main Controller will be the chief co-ordinator and shall be assisted by other co-ordinators
(senior most functionaries in the respective disciplines). He will take overall command of the
emergency management and his duties and the responsibilities are as below:
 Report at the Emergency Control Centre as soon as he gets information about the emergency
at site and will assume overall responsibility if taking decisions and directing actions as
necessary for mitigating the situation and managing the emergency effectively with due
consideration and priorities for personnel safety, safety to the company's property and the
environment
 Assess the magnitude of the situation in co-ordination with the Incident Controller / Dy. Incident
Controller and decide whether major emergency exists or is likely to develop, requiring external
assistance. Accordingly, he will decide to inform Local/District emergency Chief and other
emergency control groups for help and the nature of help required including assistance from
mutual aid members and declare on-site emergency
 Decide the safe route of entry for external assistance/help to reach at site of the incident
considering wind direction and the place of the incident and also the place of reporting such
assistance. He will also direct the security to guide them properly
 Ensure that the Key Personnel and Co-ordinators are called in
 Ensure that all non-essential workers, visitors, contractors are safely moved to assembly points
and direct for search and rescue operation within the affected areas, if necessary
 Be in constant communication with the Site Incident Controller to continuously review and
assess the situation and possible developments
 Direct actions for safe shut down of plant(s) or section of the plant and evacuation of plant
personnel and other necessary action is in consultation with the other co-ordinators
 Exercise direct operational control over areas in the complex other than those affected in
consultation with other co-ordinators
 To liaise with the local meteorological office to receive early notification of changes in wind
direction and weather conditions

 Liaise with the senior officials of Police, Fire Brigade, Medical and Factories Inspectorate and
pass on information on possible effects to the surrounding areas outside the factory premises
and necessity of evacuating the area and moving the people to safe places
 Liaise with various co-ordinators to ensure that various team are functioning well, casualties are
receiving attention and traffic movement within the works is well regulated
 Arrange for a log of the emergency to be maintained in the Primary Command Post
 Release authorized information to press through the media co-ordinator
 Control rehabilitation of the affected persons and the affected areas after cessation of the
emergency
Site Incident Controller
The Site Incident Controller is the Key Personnel for operations function reporting at the incident site
and will take the overall command of actions for emergency control operation on his arrival at the
incident site. He will be supported by other key personnel representing various emergency services
and initiate emergency control actions under the direction of the Site Main Controller (Primary
Command Post).The duties and the responsibilities of the Site Incident Controller include the
following:
 Report at the incident site immediately after getting information about an emergency. Upon his
arrival at the site, he will assess the scale of emergency in consultation with the Deputy Incident
Controller and evaluate, if a major emergency exists or is likely to develop and inform
Emergency Control Centre (primary Command Post) accordingly asking for assistance and
indicating kind of support needed
 Take overall control of handling the emergency at site and take action for isolation of source of
containment loss to the extent feasible. Simultaneously, in case of fire organize appropriate fire
response in co-ordination with Key personnel (Fire & Safety) to get the situation under control
and to prevent it's escalation
 Set up communication point (Field Command Post) and establish contact with Site Main
Controller (Primary Command Post) and keep him informed about the development
 Keep on assessing the emergency situation at the site and communicate to the Site Main
Controller (Primary Command Post) and keep him informed about the development
 Co-ordinate the activities of other key personnel reporting at the Field Command Post, under his
overall command
 Direct all operation with the affected areas giving due priorities for safety of personnel and to
minimize damage to environment, plant and property
 Provide advice and information to Fire fighting and rescue personnel, external fire services and
other emergency services/teams as and when they arrive at the incident site and co-ordinate
with them for effective control actions
 Ensure that all non-essential workers and staff within the affected area are evacuated to
appropriate assembly points and that areas are searched for casualties
 Organize rescue teams for search of casualties in the affected areas (if any) and send them to
safe areas / medical centre for first aid and medical relief
 Seek additional support and resources as may be needed through Primary Command Post

 Send decision support from the Primary Command Post for decision such as precautionary shut
down of neighbouring facilities, precautionary evacuation of people in the neighbouring facilities,
activating mutual aid plan, etc.
 Be in constant liaison with the Site Main Controller and keep him informed about the situation at
the incident site
 Preserve all evidences so as to facilitate any inquiry into the cause and circumstances, which
caused or escalated the emergency (to arrange photographs, video, etc.)
 Arrange for head count after the emergency is over with respect to the personnel on duty in the
affected areas
Deputy Incident Controller
Normally, the Shift-in-charge of a plant being always available at the plant site and well aware of the
plant operating conditions at all times will be designated as the Deputy Incident Controller and
assume the charge of the Site Incident Controller at the time of an emergency till the Site Incident
Controller arrives at the incident site, he will assist the Site Incident Controller on his arrival and work
under his direction in emergency control operation.
The responsibilities and duties of the Deputy Incident Controller will be as defined for the Site Incident
Controller. In addition he will ensure the following:
 In the event of an emergency, caused due to any incident in the plant, he will immediately
actuate plant level emergency siren (hooter) to warn the field personnel, contractors'
employees, etc. and also arrange for announcement about the emergency and necessary
instruction for them for assembling at the safe assembly point or evacuation, etc.
 Ensure that the SSM and senior plant personnel have been informed about the emergency
Fire Services Personnel
Main role of Fire Services personnel is fire fighting and rescue operations, helping in operations like,
prevention of loss of containment of hydrocarbon, spill/leak containment, etc. Their main
responsibilities and duties are described specifically as below
Chief of Fire (or next senior most fire personnel available)
 He will be the Key Personnel for the Fire and Safety Services at the incident scene and co-
ordinating and commanding all the related operations in consultation with the Site Incident
Controller
 He will report at the Field command Post (Incident Site) immediately after receiving the
information about an emergency at site, contact the Site Incident Controller and the first turn out
leader for necessary information/advice to decide control strategies
 He will take overall command of fire fighting/rescue operations and other measures as
necessary to control and mitigate the situation and lead the fire fighting crew including outside /
mutual aid fire fighting teams
 He will assess the severity/magnitude of the situation and decide the level of the emergency in
consultation with the Site Incident Controller and inform the Site Main Controller (Primary
Command Post) at ECC. He will also advise him for declaring on-site emergency (if necessary)
 He will call for additional resources/help from other Depts. (AFS personnel), mutual aid
members, etc. through Primary Command Post as necessary and deploy them appropriately for

fire fighting and rescue operation at the incident scene. He will also co-ordinate with other key
personnel
 He will ensure that sufficient personnel protective equipment, masks, Breathing Air sets, Spare
Breathing Air, Cylinders etc. are available at the field Command Post for use by the crew
members and ensure that no one access the "Hot Zone" without adequate personnel protection.
He will call for logistic support (mobilising additional supplies through Primary Command Post
(Site Main Controller/HSE&F Co-ordinator)
 He will keep constant contact with Primary Command Post and seek decision support from the
Site Main Controller in critical matters/operations and also inform him, if other plants in the
complex or surrounding population are likely to be affected
 He will co-ordinate with Security Key Personnel for access control and barricading the affected
area in order to prevent vehicular movement
 He will assist in rescue and first aid operations
Shift Fire Officer (Riding Officers)
 Upon receiving emergency call/alarm, he will quickly prepare for the fire turn out and mount the
leading fire tender along with the crew members and rush to the incident site taking a safe route
of entry considering the wind direction
 Report to the Dy. Incident Controller/the Incident Controller and Position the Fire Tender
strategically at a location in consultation with the Dy. Incident Controller/the Incident Controller
 He will decide the line of action for fire fighting and/or other control actions at the scene in
consultation with the Dy. Incident Controller/Incident Controller and take appropriate actions for
fire fighting and control measures
 He will guide and lead the fire fighting crew in fire fighting and rescue operation till the arrival of
F&S Key person (the Chief of Fire or next senior most person)
 He will ensure the safety of the crew members and that crew members are fully equipped with
necessary personnel protection prior to enter "Hot Zone"
 He will assess the severity of the situation and may call for second turnout/additional help
through the Dy. Incident Controller/Incident Controller (Field Command Post)
 He will keep constant contact with the key personnel (F&S) at the Field Command Post and
inform about the situation and probable developments
Firemen on Duty at the Fire Control Room
 The fireman on duty at the Fire Control Room will acknowledge the emergency alarm received
on the panel and promptly note the plant area/where the incident occurred
 He will note down the information, if emergency call is received through telephone, hot line or
messenger
 He will sound the fire bell to inform the fire crew to get ready and take their positions,
simultaneously brief the Shift Fire Officer about the emergency message
 He will intimate the Site Shift Manager and the Security Dept. about the emergency giving short
description about the occurrence (if known)

 He will actuate emergency siren after receiving instruction from Primary Command Post (Site
Main Controller/HSE&F Co-ordinator)
 He will ask telephone operator to pass on to the communication about the emergency to the
Auxiliary Fire Squad of all the plants/selected plants on receiving the instruction from HSE&F
Co-ordinator/Site Main Controller
 He will always be ready and alert for receiving any message / instructions from Primary
Command Post/Field Command Post
Auxiliary Fire Squad Members
AFS Members shall be ready on hearing emergency siren and will report to site incident controller at
site (Field Command Post) on receiving message from ECC
 They will do the fire fighting under the instruction of Shift Officer. Help to bring fire fighting
equipment from nearby plants
 AFS Members of the plant under emergency will immediately go to the emergency site and will
start first aid fire fighting
 As per the emergency situation they will use the fixed fire fighting equipment to protect plant
equipment from heat exposure
 They will guide non-essential personnel in case of evacuation
 They will do monitoring/closing of storm water drains if required
 They will help key personnel for taking action on site. Help to Security Personnel for traffic
Control
Non-essential Personnel
The plant employees, contractors' employees, visitors, etc., (other than emergency response
personnel) present at the incident site are not required to be present at the incident site during the
emergency at the site. In the event of declaration of an emergency in the plant/area, these persons
shall quickly assemble at the safe assembly point of the plant/area and shall respond as instructed by
the Site Incident Controller.
Instruction to the Non-essential Personnel
 Do not panic. Ensure that persons in your immediate vicinity are warned
 Remain alert for announcement from the Control Room, such "Proceed to Safe Assembly Point"
and act accordingly
 Do not rush to the scene to be a spectator
 Await instructions at the Assembly Point, report your presence to the superiors/ or the Site
Incident controller, inform his whereabouts of your colleagues if they have not arrived
 Do not engage telephone/talk back system and other communication channels, unnecessarily
 Do not approach Control Centres without urgent/or important reasons
 If you are not assigned any specific role, move away as directed
 Do not offer non-authentic information/unconfirmed facts/fact/or conjecture

Telephone Operator
At the time of emergency, communications both inwards as well as outward are very essential and
telephone operator's swift action becomes very important. He plays very important part in
communicating information/messages to the concerned personnel/outside agencies/mutual aid
members/staff members etc. and also receiving a large numbers of outside calls. His main
responsibilities and duties are as below:
 He will keep the board free to the extent possible for incoming calls
 He will immediately convey message to the "Key Personnel" and the "Co-ordinator" about the
emergency as per the instruction of the Site main controller.
 The telephone operator will follow instructions from the Site Main Controller/or Media Co-
ordinator only, for passing on any information to outside agency about the emergency or direct
all such queries to the media co-ordinator for appropriate reply
 As far as possible he should not entertain unknown/unimportant outside calls/inquiries during
initial few hours of the emergency
HSE & F Coordinator
 He will report at the Emergency Control Centre (Primary Command Post) immediately after
receiving information about the emergency. He will assist the Site Main Controller for taking
critical decisions and provide necessary advice and information
 He will co-ordinate with Key Person (Fire & Safety) and will assist the Site Main Controller for
providing decision support and resources support to the Key Persons (F&S), as may be
necessary
 He will arrange for mobilizing off-duty fire personnel from their residence; and call other
members of the staff for assistance
 He will ensure that the AFS members have been called for assistance and liaise with mutual
aid members / Surat Fire Brigade for mobilization of additional resources
 He will co-ordinate with the materials/stores co-ordinator and mobilize additional resources, viz.,
spillage containment equipment/fire fighting equipment/material, personal protective equipment,
spare breathing air cylinders, etc., as may be required at the incident site for control measures
 He will liaise with Factory Inspectorate / Pollution Control authorities in consultation with the Site
Main Controller and provide necessary information. He will also ask for the help, if necessary to
evacuate neighbouring area outside the complex as advised by the Site Main Controller
 He will organize relieving groups for fire fighting
 He will also initiate necessary actions to minimise impact on Environment
Medical Coordinator
The Chief Medical Officer (or the next in command available at site) will be the Medical Co-ordinator
and perform the following duties:
 He will contact the Site Main Controller immediately after receiving the information about the
emergency

 He will report immediately at the Emergency Control Centre (Primary Command Post) or OHC
as instructed by the Site Main Controller and contact the Key personnel (Medical) and take
stock of the situation
 He will assist and advise the Site Main Controller in all critical decisions in the area of
health/medical services to the affected persons and keep constant liaisons with him
 Organize rescue and first aid arrangements for the affected persons at the site in the "cold
Zone", as may be necessary with essential staff/equipment and post additional ambulance for
transporting seriously injured persons
 Ensure that adequate paramedical staff, equipment and medicines are available at the OHC.
He will mobilize additional resources from neighbouring industries, if necessary
 To liaise with the Local Medical Authorities and City Hospitals, if the causalities are more and
situation demands treatment at additional medical centres
 To co-ordinate with the Transport Co-ordinator for transporting victims to various hospitals
 To arrange for additional ambulances from other hospitals/ Municipal Corporation
 The Medical Co-ordinator should ensure the upkeep of agreed medical supplies, antidotes and
equipment that should always be kept in stock for treating victims of burns and hazardous
chemicals. The medical authorities should be aware of the type of treatment to be administered
 He will liaise with the media co-ordinator for release of news to the press
Security Co-coordinator
The Chief of Security or the next in command available at site shall be the Security Co-ordinator. He
will have the following duties / responsibilities:
 He will instruct and deploy plant security personnel to ensure that the law and order is
maintained ; and unnecessary gathering of the personnel at the scene of emergency is
prevented and ensure control of traffic movement in and out of the factory areas
 He will instruct the security personnel / Security Gates to direct and guide external emergency
vehicles (Fire tenders/ambulances etc.) called for assistance/help from neighbouring
industries/Local administration, to the scene of incident
 He will instruct security personnel who could be spared to assist Site Incident Controller/Key
Personnel (fire and Safety) in fire fighting and evacuation of personnel, at the Incident Site
 He will take action to regulate traffic movement and prevention of traffic jams inside the works
as well as outside the factory gates for proper and speedy movement of the emergency
vehicles, ambulances, other vehicles carrying outside resources, etc.
 He will mobilize additional security force for help, as necessary
 He will liaise with the police and other local authorities for external help, as necessary for
evacuation of the neighbouring areas outside the factory premises in consultation with the Site
Main Controller
 If necessary, he will arrange for announcement through the mobile P.A. system for alerting and
instructing the population in the surrounding areas as directed by the Site Main Controller

Engineering Co-coordinator
 He will report to the Site Main Controller at the Emergency Control Centre (Primary Command
Post) immediately after receiving information about On-site emergency
 He will take stock of the situation and assist/advise the Site Main Controller in deciding control
strategies
 He will mobilize the team from the Maintenance Dept. to assist the Site Incident Controller in
control operation at the Field Command Post
 Arrange isolation of electrical lines from distribution point/substations as required by the Site
Incident Controller by calling the Electrical Engineer / Electricians
 Provide all other engineering support, as may be required
 Liaise with Key Personnel (Eng./Maintenance) and co-ordinate with other groups
Communication Coordinator
Communication Co-ordinator plays very important part at the time of an emergency particularly when
extensive disruption of services takes place. He has the following duties and responsibilities:
 To ensure all available communications links remain functional
 To quickly establish communication links between the Field command Post and (if this happens
to be in remote off site area) and the Primary Command Post
 To arrange for announcement on the public address system and maintain contacts with
congregation points like canteen, main gate, control rooms etc.
 To ensure that previously agreed inventory of various types of communication equipment is
maintained in working condition and frequent checks are carried out and records maintained
 To maintain voice record of significant communications with timings received/passed from the
Primary Command Post
 To provide additional/alternate communication facilities as required at the site
P&A Coordinator
He will report at the Primary Command Post (ECC) immediately after getting information about an
emergency at the site and assist/advise the Site Main Controller in taking important decisions in the
matters related to welfare/necessities/of emergency personnel at site, care/needs of the affected
persons. His duties and responsibilities include the following:
 He will ensure that a record of affected personnel is prepared with their local/permanent
addresses and telephone numbers
 He will ensure that the relatives of the affected personnel have been informed
 Assign officials at the hospitals to look after the needs of the affected personnel under medical
treatment
 Co-ordinate with the Finance Co-ordinator for necessary funds required to cater the needs of
affected personnel, emergency purchases and for other requirements
 To arrange for refreshments, snacks, food, and other needs as may be required for the
emergency personnel from time to time

 Co-ordinate with the Purchase Co-ordinator for necessary emergency procurement of

necessary items
 Ensure that staff personnel as necessary for assistance and help are informed/called from their
residences
 he will co-ordinate with the instruct Key Personnel transport/welfare & canteen for mobilizing
additional resources, as may be required
 To co-ordinate with the neighbouring industries for additional vehicles/ambulances and other
resources as may be required
 To liaise with the Local Administration for additional assistance/help as may be needed
Transport Coordinator
The Transport Co-ordinator shall perform the following duties
 Mobilize all available company's vehicles for emergency use along with the drivers
 Arrange for transport of victims to hospitals/dispensaries
 Arrange for duty rotation of the drivers to meet the emergency situation
 To direct refueling of the vehicles
 To co-ordinate with the neighbouring industries for additional vehicles / ambulances as may be
required
 To mobilize buses of the RECCS, if necessary
 To co-ordinate with the neighbouring industries for additional vehicles / ambulances as may be
required
 To arrange for vehicles from outside local transport agencies, if required
 To keep in contact with the Site Main Controller for evacuation of personnel and transportation
of victims
The Welfare / Canteen Coordinator
The Welfare Co-ordinator will have the following responsibilities:
 Ensure that casualties receive adequate attention and arrange additional help (ex-gratia
payment etc.), if required with consultation with the Chief Co-ordinator
 Inform the relatives of the victims
 When emergency is prolonged, he will arrange for relieving personnel and organize refreshment
/ catering facilities and arrangements for their rest (bedding, and other necessities)
 He will arrange to procure and keep stocks of necessary food items and other necessary
supplies as may be required for the personnel working round-the-clock
 He will arrange for hot drinks / snacks and food and other necessary items for emergency
response personnel, as required
Media Coordinator
The Media Co-ordinator will co-ordinate the following under the direction of the Site Main Controller
(The Chief Co-ordinator):

 He will liaise with various media and release written statements to the press through prior
concurrence of the Chief Co-ordinate
 He will handle media interview with various media groups make arrangements for televising the
information about the incident, the number of casualties, etc
 He will inform State and Central Government and the statutory bodies of the nature and
magnitude of the incident, the number of casualties, etc.
 He will locate himself such that media persons/third parties do not need to go past the complex
security gates and that adequate communication links exists
 Media personnel often insist on visiting incident scene. He will escort media team(s) If such
visits are approved by the Chief Co-ordinator
 He will be in constant contact with the Medical Co-ordinator, and other co-ordinators to be
aware of latest development and closely liaise with the Chief Co-ordinator
Finance Coordinator
 He will report at the Emergency Control Centre immediately after getting information about the
emergency at site
 He will release finance (cash / cheques, etc) as directed by the Site Main Controller (Chief Co-
ordinator)
 He will assist the Purchase Co-ordiantor for emergency procurement
 He will liaise with Insurance Company personnel as directed by the Site Main Controller
Purchase Coordinator
 The Purchase Co-ordinator will report at the Emergency Control Centre as soon as he is
informed about an emergency at site
 He will assist the Site Main Controller and arrange for emergency purchase of necessary items
as maybe required during the emergency
 He will co-ordinate with the Materials Co-ordinator and other co-ordinator for necessary
emergency items to be procured
 He will mobilize necessary manpower as may be required, etc.
Materials Coordinator
The Materials Co-ordinator will ensure:
 Availability of the materials required by the Site Incident Controller
 Arrange issues of materials from the General Stores round-the-clock during an emergency
 Arrange emergency procurements form local dealers / vendors or from neighbouring industries
 Arrange transportation of materials from General Store to the Incident Site in co-ordination with
the Transport Co-ordinator
7.6.5.4 Off-site Disaster Management Plan
Emergency is a sudden unexpected event, which can cause serious damage to personnel life,
property and environment outside the boundary wall of the refinery as a whole, which necessitate
evolving Off-site Emergency Plan to combat any such eventuality. In Offsite disaster management

plan, many agencies like Revenue, Public Health, Fire Services, Police, Civil Defence, Home Guards,
Medical Services and other Voluntary organization are involved. Thus, handling of such emergencies
requires an organized multidisciplinary approach.
Evacuation of people, if required, can be done in orderly way. The different agencies involved in
evacuation of people are Civil Administration (both state and central), non Govt. organizations,
factory Inspectorate and Police authorities.
Fire
Effects of fire on population will be mainly due to thermal radiation. In such cases, houses situated to
the proximity of disaster need to be evacuated, although a severe smoke hazard due to fire is to be
reviewed periodically.
Explosion
An explosion will give a very little time to warn population and areas affected may be much longer
than that in case of fire. The effects of explosion on population will be mainly due to shock waves,
flying splinters, collapse of structures and exposure to thermal radiation.
Toxic gas/vapour release
A toxic gas release will generally threat much larger area and population, exposed to the drifting
cloud of toxic gases and vapours. The time available for warning population will depend on the point
of release, wind direction and velocity.
LPG release will generally lead to vapour cloud formation accompanied by fire and / or explosion. As
LPG is heavier than air, it will settle to ground and may lead to fire as soon as comes in contact with
any ignition source. In case of LPG, the fire moves away from the source as quickly as possible.
Huge oil spillage may lead to escape of Oil out-side the factory premises and take the route of our
effluent discharge channel. People outside the complex may be warned not to collect oil and provide
any source of ignition to create fire in the effluent discharge channel.
The purpose of the off-site disaster management plan is:
 To save lives and injuries and to prevent or reduce property losses
 To provide for quick resumption of normal situation or operation
 To make explicit the inter related be suggested if necessary
 To make explicit inter related set of actions to be undertaken in the event of an industrial
accident posing hazards to the community
 To inform people and surrounding about emergency and disaster if it is likely to adversely affect
machinery will be established for this purpose to guide the people in proper way
 To plan for rescue and recuperation of casualties and injuries. To plan for relief and
rehabilitation
 To plan for prevention of harms, total loss and recurrence of disaster. It will be ensured that
absolute safety and security is achieved within the shortest time
Before Crisis
This will include the safety procedure to be followed during an emergency through posters, talks and
mass media in different languages including local language. Leaflets containing do’s/ don’ts before
and during emergency should be circulated to educate the people in vicinity

 People in vicinity of hazardous installation, and others who are potentially affected in the event
of an accident, should be aware of the risks of accidents, know where to obtain information
concerning the installation, and understand what to do in the event of an accident
 Non-governmental Organizations (NGO’s) (Such as environmental, humanitarian and consumer
group) should motivate their constituents and others, to be involved in risk reduction and
accident prevention efforts. They should help to identify specific concerns and priorities
regarding risk reduction and prevention, preparedness and response activities
 NGO’s should facilitate efforts to inform the public and should provide technical assistance to
help the public analyze and understand information that is made available
 Public authorities (at all levels) and management of hazardous installation should established
emergency planning activities/ program’s for accidents involving the hazardous substance
 All parties who will be involved in emergency planning process. In this respect public health
authorities, including experts from information centers should be involved in relevant aspects of
offsite emergency planning
 Emergency warning alert system should be in place to warn the potentially affected public, or
there is an imminent threat of an accident
 The system chosen should be effective and provide timely warning. Suitable warning system
could include or a combination of for e.g.: sirens, automatic telephone message, and mobile
public address system
During Crisis
 Central Control Committee: As the off-site plan is to be prepared by the government a central
control committee shall be formed under the chairmanship of area head. Other officers from
police, fire, factory, medical, engineering, social welfare, publicity, railway, transport and
requisite departments shall be incorporated as members. Some experts will also be included for
guidance. The functions of committee should be:
- To work as main co-coordinating body constituted of necessary district heads and other
authorities with overall command, coordination, guidance, supervision, policy and doing all
necessary things to control disaster in shortest times
- To prepare, review, alter or cancel this plan and to keep it a complete document with all
details
- To take advice and assistance from experts in fields to make plan more successful
- To set in motion all machineries to this plan in event of disaster causing or likely to cause
severe damage to public, property or environment
- The incident control committee, traffic control committee and press publicity committee will
first be informed, as they are needed first
 Medical Help, Ambulance and Hospital Committee: This committee consisted of doctors for
medical help to the injured persons because of disaster. Injuries may be of many types. As such
doctors are rarely available we have to mobilize and utilize all available doctors in the area.
Functions and duties of the committee include:
- To give medical help to all injured as early as possible
- Civil surgeon is the secretary who will organize his team

- On receiving information to rush to spot he will immediately inform his team and will proceed
with all necessary equipments
- First aid and possible treatment shall be provided at the spot or at some convenient place and
patients may be requested to shift to hospitals for further treatment
- All efforts shall be made on war basis to save maximum lives and to treat maximum injuries
- Continuity of the treatment shall be maintained till the disaster is controlled
 Traffic Control, Law and Order: The committee is headed by District Superintendent of Police.
Functions and duties of this committee should be:
- To control traffic towards and near disaster , to maintain law and order
- To evacuate the places badly affected or likely to be affected
- To shift the evacuated people to safe assembly points
- To rehabilitate them after disaster is over.
- Necessary vehicles, wireless sets and instruments for quick communications shall be
maintained and used as per need
After Crisis
 At the time of disaster, many people may badly be affected. Injured people shall be treated by
medical help, ambulance and hospital committee, but those not injured but displaced kept at
assembly points, whose relative or property is lost, houses collapsed and in need of any kind of
help shall be treated by this welfare and restoration committee. Functions and duties of this
committee are:
- To find out persons in need of human help owing to disastrous effect. They may give first aid if
medical team is not available
- They will serve the evacuated people kept at assembly points. They will arrange for their food,
water, shelter, clothing, sanitation, and guidelines to reach any needful places
- They will look for removal and disposal of dead bodies, for help of sick, weak, children and
needy persons for their essential requirements
- The team will also work for restoration of detached people, lost articles, essential commodities
etc.
- The team will also look after the restoration of government articles
- The team will also ensure that the original activities, services and systems are resumed again
as they were functioning before the disaster
 Police Department
- The police should assist in controlling of the accident site, organizing evacuation and
removing of any seriously injured people to hospitals.
- Co-ordination with the transport authorities, civil defence and home guards
- Co-ordination with army, navy, air force and state fire services
- Arrange for post mortem of dead bodies
- Establish communication centre

 Fire Brigade
- The fire brigade shall organize to put out fires and provide assistance as required.
 Hospitals and Doctors
- Hospitals and doctors must be ready to treat any injuries.
- Co-ordinate the activities of Primary Health Centres and Municipal Dispensaries to ensure
required quantities of drugs and equipments
- Securing assistance of medical and paramedical personnel from nearby hospitals/institutions
- Temporary mortuary and identification of dead bodies
 Media
- The media should have ready and continuous access to designated officials with relevant
information, as well as to other sources in order to provide essential and accurate information
to public throughout the emergency and to help avoid confusion
- Efforts should be made to check the clarity and reliability of information as it becomes
available, and before it is communicated to public
- Public health authorities should be consulted when issuing statements to the media
concerning health aspects of chemical accidents
- Members of the media should facilitate response efforts by providing means for informing the
public with credible information about accidents involving hazardous substances
 Non-governmental organizations (NGO)
- NGO’s could provide a valuable source of expertise and information to support emergency
response efforts. Members of NGOs could assist response personnel by performing specified
tasks, as planned during the emergency planning process. Such tasks could include providing
humanitarian, psychological & social assistance to members of community and response
personnel.
Duties of NGO are listed below:
 Evacuation of personnel from the affected area
 Arrangements at rallying posts and parking yards
 Rehabilitation of evacuated persons
 Co-ordination with other agencies such as police, medical, animal husbandry, agriculture,
electricity board, fire services, home guards and civil defence.
 Establishing shelters for rescue, medical, fire fighting personnel.
Various organizations involved during emergencies are shown in Figure 7.4.

Environmental Health
and Safety Department
Public
Education Medi
a
Plant Level
District Level
Emergency
Emergency
Committee
Committee
EMERGENCY
Medical Plant
Aid Security
Police Fire
Department Department
Emergency Control Center

Chief Co-Ordinator
FIGURE 7.4: VARIOUS ORGANIZATIONS INVOLVED DURING EMERGENCY

7.6.6 Mock Drills
As per the Industrial Major Accident Hazard Rules,

(a) The occupier shall ensure that a mock drill of the on-site emergency plan is conducted every six
months.
(b) A detail report of the mock drill conducted under sub-rule (4) shall be made immediately available
to the concerned authority.
Accordingly,
Onsite Disaster Mock Drills are conducted once in six months.
Also, Major Fire and Minor Fire mock drills are conducted once in three months and one month
respectively.
Lessons Learned System for Mock Drills
Performances during the mock drills are reviewed by CEC, Co-ordinators and other involved persons
including Observers. Observations / shortcomings are reviewed and recommendations are made for
improvements which are followed by F&S for compliance. The action points from the mock drill
observations should be circulated to all concerned for liquidation. The critical points shall be
presented to management in Apex Loss control meeting bimonthly.
All Clear / Re-entry Procedures
Chief Emergency Controller (CEC) will declare “All Clear” after control of the Incident and arrange
measures required for post Disaster control period and ask Fire Station to Blow 2 minutes straight run
siren.
After incident normalization, CEC would ask Unit in-charge to visit and check the incident site along
with representatives of Inspection and F&S and also Maintenance (Electrical / Mechanical / Civil/
Instrumentation/ Rotary) as needed. Standard Checks particular to a unit will be provided by
respective Area Managers.

Based on feedback of the team, CEC would allow re-entry / resumption of operations at the incident
site.
7.6.7 Evacuation Plan
7.6.7.1 Purpose
To establish method of systematic, safe and orderly evacuation of all the occupants in case of fire or
any emergency, in the least possible time, to a safe assembly point through nearest safe means of
escape. Additionally to use available fire appliances provided for controlling or extinguishing fire and
safeguarding of human life.
7.6.7.2 Fire Escape Drill Procedure

 In the event of fire condition or on hearing the fire alarm all the occupants of the building shall
immediately leave the work area and proceed towards nearest safe escape route. A care should
be taken before leaving the workplace so that the escape route shall not be blocked due to chairs
or other similar object.
 Security In-charge will ensure the access control system is defeated for safe evacuation of all the
occupants from the affected building.
 The occupants will have to leave the affected area / block / building in a speedy and orderly
manner.
 Before leaving the workplace occupants will switch off electrical gadgets such as AC, Computers,
Water heaters, etc. The area owner of the building will ensure electric supply cut off to the
affected building.
 The emergency exit / normal exit if not affected due to fire and / or smoke shall be used for
speedy evacuation.
 All occupants will follow in a row while escaping from the block / building. Unnecessary haste and
crowding shall be avoided on the escape route. Panic actions of the occupants will definitely delay
the evacuation.
 The occupants having visitors shall ensure the safe evacuation of the visitor along with them to
the safe assembly point.
 Efforts shall be made to control or extinguish the fire with the help of available fire extinguishers in
that area.
 Building / block in-charge shall ensure the safe escape and orderly evacuation of all the
occupants.
 All occupants after being evacuated shall assemble at designate safe assembly point. Block /
building in-charge will arrange for head count to ensure that all the occupants have been safely
evacuated.
 Security in-charge shall ensure that all the visitors have been evacuated as per visitor entry
register / gate pass register. The visitors shall evacuate from the building / block along with the
occupants and report to security in-charge.
 The missing / suspected trapped occupants will be searched and rescued by the fire crew.
 Upon All-Clear signal from the incident controller, occupants can go back to their work place.

Do’s
 Leave your workplace immediately and rush through safe escape route.
 Evacuate in a speedy but orderly manner.
 Help elderly and handicapped persons for evacuation.
 Assemble at safe assembly point and report to your floor coordinator.
Don’ts
 Panic.
 Re-enter in the affected building.
7.6.8 Training
On job training to the engineers on various facets of risk analysis would go a long way in improving
their horizon which in turn is expected to reflect in the operation of plant, especially from the safety
stand point. In order to combat with emergency situations arising out of accident release of
hazardous chemicals, it is necessary for industries to prepare an exhaustive offsite and onsite
emergency preparedness plan. The fire crew belonging to the fire fighting department shall be given
intensive training for the use of all equipment and in various fire fighting methods for handling
different types of fires.
7.6.9 Checklist for Capability Assessment
The checklist will help in assessing the preparedness, prevention and response resources
capabilities. The points included in the checklist are only indicative and there is a need to closely
examine the local requirements while preparing the checklist.
For good control and management of an incident, there are three important requisites.
 Defined Organisation
 Effective means
 Trained people
The organisation has to be properly structured for routine as well as emergency purposes with clear
understanding of duties and responsibilities. The structure has to consider an execution and speedy
implementation of the response plans; while at the same time, it should be flexible enough to tune
itself to the fast changing situations. All plans and procedures for emergency handling should be
established. Checklists in the form of Do’s and Don’ts of preventive maintenance, strengthening of
HSE, manufacturing utility staff are listed in the subsequent subsections.
Work permit check list is described below:
Sr. No. Precaution to be taken Yes No
1 Electrically isolated and fuse removed. Lock out-Tag out followed
2 Flow isolated by closing valves
3 De-pressurized – vacuum released
4 Vessel cooled
5 Drained fully and drain kept open
6 Vent kept open

Sr. No. Precaution to be taken Yes No

7 Manhole kept open
8 Vessel purged with steam
9 Vessel purged with water
10 Vessel purged with nitrogen/ air
11 Vessel free from toxic gases/vapors/ flammable substances
12 Gas test shows > 20% oxygen inside vessel
13 Safety tags card placed wherever required
14 Personal PPe’s provided
15 Exhaust / ventilation inside vessel is sufficient
16 Caution boards placed
17 Tools and tackles checked as per specifications
18 Head count of the area known to relevant persons
19 Trained Site supervisor nominated
20 Safety measures such as hydrant, alarms, sensors checked
7.7 PUBLIC CONSULTATION

7.7.1 PUBLIC HEARING
According to EIA Notification 2006 and its subsequent amendments, the proposed project comes
under the project activity of 7 (c) & (a), Industrial estates /parks, complexes/area export processing
zone (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech park, Leather Complexes and building &
Construction projects under category A (Special condition apply) and is located at Butibori Industrial
Area, Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, state Mahahrashtra. MIDC Nagpur has therefore initiated the
process of Environmental Clearance. Accordingly as per MoEF notification, 2006, Public Hearing has
to be conducted to seek the opinion of the people in and around the project area. The Public Hearing
was conducted under the chairmanship of Shri Ravindra Kumbhare Addl. District Magistrate on dated
13/7/2015 at Plot No. D-25, Vidarbha Industries Power Limited near Butibori Industrial area, butibori,
Nagpur.
With the permission of chairman of Public Hearing, Shri Mahindra Pattebahadur, Field Officer,
MPCB, Nagpur welcomed the Chairman and Member of the Public Hearing Panel, local citizen from
the villages and others. He explained the purpose of conducting this public hearing as per MOEF,
GOI, Notification SO 60(E), of 27th January, 1994 and amended on 14th Sept.2006. The notices of the
public hearing were published in two local widely circulated news papers i.e. the ”Hitavada” (English)
and “Tarun Bharat” (Marathi) on 11th June 2015. Copies of the advertisement are enclosed as
Annexure VII. Copies of the executive summary / EIA summery containing salient features of the
projects and EIA both in English and in Marathi and other information / documents were made
available to the public by making these documents available in various Govt. offices as well as local
Gram Panchayat as per MoEF GOI, Notification.
Suggestions, comments and objections of the public were called in writing till before the date of
Public Hearing from the publication of the notice. The public hearing panel was constituted vide MPC
Board’s Office Order No. e-197/2015 vide letter no.BO/JD(WPC/PH/B-3028) dtd. 06/07/2015.
(Annexure-VIII)

The Public Hearing panel constituted was as follows:

Panel constituted for Public Hearing
1. Shri Ravindra Kumbhare Chairman
Additional District Magistrate
2. Mr. Atul Satfale Member
Regional Officer,
MPCB, Nagpur
3. Shri Kiran Hasabnis Conveyer
Sub-Regional Officer
MPCB, Nagpur
There were nearly 100 people who had attended the public hearing meeting to raise their issues. The
list of the public attended is attached as Annexure IX.
Shri Mahendra Pattebahadur, Field Officer, Sub-Regional Office, MPCB, Nagpur-II requested to
project proponent to give detailed presentation about the project.
Thereafter representative of the project proponent, explained in local language regarding proposed
project, purpose of expansion Butibori area, Location details, study area map (10 km radius), details
of proposed project, resource availability , land break-up site details, baseline environmental status,
impact assessment and mitigation measures, air environment, noise environment, water environment,
solid waste generation and disposal, green belt development, environmental monitoring program,
corporate social responsibility (CSR) activity benefits of the project.
Shri Kiran Hasabnis, Sub-regional Officer-2MPCB, Nagpur and convener of the environmental public
hearing panel with permission of chairman requested public citizens to put their views/ opinions in
free manner. The details regarding issues raised and clarifications accordingly by project proponent
(MIDC) and consultant are given in Table 7.8.
TABLE 7.8
ISSUES AND CLARIFICATIONS OF PUBLIC HEARING
Sr. Name of the Issues raised Clarification from
No. person proponent/SPCB/MIDC
1. Shri Atish 1. Related to Employment to MIDC explained that the preference will be
Umare local people, drinking given based on the skillness and incoming
water supply, approach industries will be informed accordingly
roads to affected villages
The demand for water supply problem of
2. Related to water pollution villages will be taken care and solved by
by other incoming MIDC.
industries M/S Indorama
Also MIDC will make arrangement for the
& discharges
people whose land is acquired by the
project.
As special case, MIDC will provide
approach roads to the affected villages and
provide clean water.


MPCB informed that the complaint
regarding discharge of M/S Indorama
synthetics is investigated and show cause
notice is issued against the company. It is
further informed that the proposal for legal
action will be submitted soon to the HQ.
2. Shri Noncompliance of adoption Not coming under the purview of proposed
Sohansingh of village, school of village, expansion project
Karnake water and electricity supply
to the villages as committed
earlier at the establishment
of Butibori Industrial Area
and assurances given
3. Shri Nitin Written presentation with MIDC will look in to that and action will be
Lonkar, respect to the expectation taken accordingly
Secretory regarding development of
Butibori MIDC and expecting positive
action
Manufacturing
Association
4. Vidarbha 1. Planning and Most of the issues are already taken in to
Jankalyan & development of world consideration is the planning stage
Vikas Santha class exhibition cum however regarding issues 2,5,7 MIDC will
convention center with discuss with authority and accordingly
1st Floor,
full amenities in an area action will be taken.
Gokul-Gopal
of 25 Ha. This will help
Enclave, Mate
the local industries and
Square, Gopal
the other Indian
Nagar, Nagpur
industries to showcase
their products. Min 25
Hec. area is must
considering the future
demands.
2. Metro rail up to Butibori
(under the jurisdiction of
metro-rail authority),
Network covering main
points in Butibori MIDC
as a whole.
3. Well-equipped ESIC
hospitals with 24 hourly
emergency
preparedness facilities.
4. Strengthening of city
bus services covering
entire Butibori area, with
separate provision of
Bus station (park).
5. Grant of incentives to
existing industrial
Butibori for solar power
generation, providing


one window clearance
for speedy industrial
growth. State
Government to evolve
special policy for
Butibori MIDC
considering backward
region with
incentives/subsidy, as
the cost of electricity is
higher as compared to
adjoining states.
6. Providing reflective sign
boards with plot nos and
directions at all main
turning points in Butibori
MIDC area for easy
traceability.
7. Planning new approach
road to Butibori via
Airport, Shivangaon,
Mihan, via Gumgaon,
Kirmiti. This will curtail
nearly 12 Km distance
there by saving precious
time and fuel on daily
basis Mihan and PWD
authorities should be
involved.
5. Butibori 1. Planning and Most of the points/ issues are taken care in
Manufacturers development of world class the MIDC policy decision and action plan.
Association exhibition cum convention However for issues 2, 3 (e, g, k, n) and 4,
center with amenities, in an MIDC will discuss with the authority and
“Udyam” P- 5
area of 25 Ha. This will help accordingly action will be take
Midc Industrial
the local industries and the
Area Near Fire
other Indian industries to
Station,
showcase their products and
Butibori,
promote economic activities.
Nagpur
There is no such adequate
center in MIDC at present.
Min 25 Hec area is must
considering the future
demands.
2. Strengthening of
existing electrical supply in
order to regulate power on
24X7 hourly basis. Presently
electrical cost is almost
double than the adjoining
states. Maharashtra
Government should consider
special incentives/subsidy
due to enhanced cost to


Many industries have
migrated to adjoining state
due to lack of attention of
policy makers despite ample
coal and thermal power
availability in the region. This
disparity must be overcome
at the earliest possible time.
3. Strengthening the
utilities of existing and
proposed MIDC covering the
followings
a) DG set back-up for
entire water supply system
as an auxiliary energy
source.
b) For existing and
proposed wastewater
treatment, tertiary treatment
for CETP for better
augmentation and recycling
system to comply zero
discharge norms being a
statutory requirements.
c) Policy for provision
for drinking water outlets for
pedestrian as desired by
industries at selected
locations. Local industry to
take up this activity as their
CSR.
d) Road widening is to
5-6 meters in Butibori food
park area, as the existing
road width is just 3 meters
which is inadequate creating
traffic congestion. Existing
foot paths should be
removed for road widening,
as it is unutilized.
e) Metro rail up to key
covering areas of Butibori
(under the jurisdiction of
metro-rail authority), Network
covering main points in
Butibori MIDC as whole.
f) Well-equipped ESIC
hospitals with 24 hourly
emergency preparedness
facilities with accessibility to
the surrounding local people.
g) Strengthening of city
bus services covering entire


Butibori area, with separate
provision of Bus station
(park).
h) Strengthening of
greenbelt and landscaping
with proper maintenance
throughout the year in road
side, PU land and increase
in aesthetics of the Butibori
MIDC area.
i) Proper maintenance
of storm water drainage lines
and regular maintenance
before rainy season to avoid
water logging in low lying
areas.
j) Strengthening of
streetlights using LED and
stress on solar system on
identified locations (Road
side, traffic signals and
vehicle parks).
k) Grant of incentives to
existing industrial Butibori for
solar power generation,
providing one window
clearance for speedy
industrial growth. State
Government to evolve
special policy for Butibori
MIDC considering backword
region with
incentives/subsidy
l) Providing reflective
sign boards with plot nos
and directions at all main
turning points in Butibori
MIDC area for easy
traceability for commuters.
m) Traffic nuisance due
to movement of heavy
trailers driving in wrong
direction creates fear of
accident, recent repeated
episodes are the evidences
and permanent solution to
provide in consultation with
concerned authorities
n) Planning new
approach road to Butibori via
Airport, Shivangaon, Mihan,
via Gumgaon, Kirmiti. This
will curtail nearly 12 Km


distance there by saving
precious time and fuel on
daily basis.
o) Proper measures as
per the industry specific for
pollution abatement avoiding
odour and smell problems at
few hot spots (MIDC, SPCB
and PP in association)
4. There is heavy traffic
congestion at the point of
entry to Butibori MIDC in
front of Butibori Police
Station. All the heavy
vehicles, Buses, local
vehicles pass through Road
there by creating a traffic
chaos. This location has also
became an accident prone
Zone. Hence we demand
that a Fly-over be
constructed on this spot so
that Heavy vehicles and
other traffic which does not
enter Butibori MIDC can
pass over this Fly over there
by easing the traffic at the
entrance of Butibori MIDC.
At the end, Additional Dist. Magistrate and Chairman of the Public Hearing panel thanks to the all
authorities of MIDC, SPCB authorities, consultant and people present for attending the Public
Hearing meeting and declared that the Public Hearing is over.
Public Hearing photographs are shown in Plate 7.1.

PLATE 7.1: PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING PUBLIC HEARING

PLATE 7.1: PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING PUBLIC HEARING (Contd...)

8.0 PROJECT BENEFIT

This section of report describes the direct and indirect benefits due to proposed additional Butibori
Industrial Area which will be expected to have at the local, neighbourhood, regional and maybe, at
national scale. The benefits from the proposed developmental industrial area will be as follows:
Proposed Project Benefits
The development of proposed expansion of industrial area will benefit accruing to the locality,
neighborhood, region and nation as a whole and will improve living standards of the nearby locality;
some of the benefits are described below:
 Improvement in the physical infrastructure of project, ancillary industries that may come up on
account of the project.
 Improvement in the social infrastructure like roads, railways, townships, housing, water supply,
electrical power, drainage, educational institutions and hospitals etc.
 Employment potential skilled; semi-skilled and unskilled labours both during construction and
operational phases of the industrial area with specific attention to employment potential of local
population as well as necessity for imparting any specialized skills to them to be eligible for such
employment in the project on a long term basis.
The proposed expansion project would bring positive socio-economic impacts which are given below:
 It is expected that additional people will get employment and hence job opportunities for the
local people as well as immigrants from the nearby area would increase.
 Employment in the area is expected to be improved in the region.
 There would be increase in the commercial business and shopping centres due to influx of
population in the region to cater the needs of the existing population as well as the
immigrants.
 There will be a development of infrastructural facilities in the area. It would also result in the
appreciation of land values around there areas.
 Production will increase. It will fulfill the demands for production which are essential for the
progress of the nation.
 Indirect benefit to the local people by providing opportunities for starting small/medium scale
business in trade and commerce.
 More opportunities in the field of eduction
 Augmentation is the areas of medical facilities
 Improvement is banking and postal services
 Overall improvement of the peripheral human habitat
 Most of the environmental pollution problems will be mitigated through implimentation of EMP
recommended and concentric watch by MIDC authority and SPCB
 Increase in infrastructural activities with respect to the development of the area will definitely
increase the livelihood of the people and there by the region.
Chapter 8- Project Benefit 8-1

9.0 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

The developmental area located at Tehsil Hingna, District Nagpur, state Maharashtra, proposed
expansion of MIDC Butibori Industrial Area (BIA - II), acquires and develops industrial plots with all
the basic amenities and make them available to needy entrepreneurs. It will definitely boost the
economic growth of the country; develop region and quality of life of the people in a sustainable
manner without creating any environmental damage.
MIDC Butibori, is well connected to railways, roadways and airways. The proposed expansion of
MIDC Butibori industrial area is planned near to notified Butibori Industrial Area. Therefore, it will not
involves loss of vegetation and biodiversity. The vegetation is similar in the whole area with no
sensitive ecosystem or rare and endangered flora or fauna, hence no environmental loss will be there
in terms of net productivity value.
Total project cost is Rs.7000 lakhs and expenditure on implementation of the Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) is presented in Chapter 10 of this report. Besides tangible benefits, the
proposed expansion of MIDC Butibori Industrial Area has got number of intangible benefits, like
minimum emission of the greenhouse gases, no adverse impact on environment as far as air, noise
and water environmental components are concerned. Individual industry will take care of
environmental management. With the establishment of this proposed developmental area, there will
be socio-economic development in the area and thereby the improvement in the quality of life of the
people. More employment opportunities will be there for the local people, moreover the incoming
industries in the industrial area will help for enhancement of the economy of the country. The
proposed developmental area will provide temporary and permanent job opportunities to the local
people in the neighboring areas. The individual industry management has complete focus on
quantity, quality, promptness, safe delivery and best services through 3 M’s – Man, machine and
material management.
The establishment of proposed expansion of MIDC industrial area when in operation will definitely
provide significant supply of products to the infrastructure and allied industries, not only in the region,
state but also in India and help to increase the economic status of the country.
The developmental activity in the industrial area will increase economy of country. However individual
industry will also help economy of state through the products transportation, taxes, supplying
economy for the nation’s growth.
Chapter 9- Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis 9-1

10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 INTRODUCTION
Environment management is basically resource management and environmental development
planning. The conventional resource management and development planning look at the issues from
narrow micro-economical point of view, while environmental management views, the issues from the
broader perspective of long term sustainable development option, which ensures that the
environment is not desecrated. An environment management plan is prepared for construction phase,
post construction phase (commissioning and operation) and for post project phase. The environment
management plan is prepared to minimize the impact on atmospheric emissions, noise generation,
liquid effluents, and solid wastes on the surrounding environment.
The baseline status of different relevant environmental components in the study area is assessed and
potential impacts on those components due to the proposed development of industrial area are
documented. The impacts on environment are found to be minimal during the study; however
additional measures are documented for both construction and operation stages for further
improvement of environmental quality in the form of an Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
10.2 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
 It is of utmost concern for industries to conduct its smooth work environment in a manner that
will prompt the protection of the occupational health and safety, Welfare of its employees and
involvement in its academics and address the environmental concerns regarding sustainable
development.
 To be a responsive and responsible citizen, we shall strive to achieve an organizational
culture of safety ,Health and Environmental Excellence
 As an integral part of the institutional performance in Health, Safety and Commitment to
achieve high levels of performance in Health, Safety and environment.
 Continual improvements in Safety, Health and environment shall be recognized as essential
for the future success of the industrial area
No HSE plan so far adopted by MIDC. However MIDC will take care while sanctioning the building
plan to be approved by industries. Every industry will have to take building completion certificate as
well as fire NOC from MIDC. The constructing building with all necessary facility related to HSE
norms will be checked by MIDC through its officers along inspection of the building plan & will give
NOC accordingly. However MIDC will insist to have HSE plan for each industry. The HSE plans to be
adopted by the individual industry are as follows.
Operation and Maintenance: The problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance
phase is due to noise hearing losses. Suitable personnel protective equipment will be given to
employees. The working personnel will be given the following appropriate personnel protective
equipment:
 Industrial Safety Helmet;
 Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;
 Zero power plain goggles
 Welders equipment for eye and face protection;
 Ear muffs;
 Self contained breathing apparatus;
Chapter 10- Environmental Management Plan 10-1

 Safety belt
 hand gloves;
 Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves;
 Industrial safety shoes with steel toe;
Occupational Health Center (OHC) equipped with required facilities will be available at the MIDC
area. Qualified doctor (Factory Medical Officer) will visit daily on working days. Full-fledged medical
facilities will be made available round the clock for attending emergency arising out of accidents, if
any.
10.3 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN
Besides delineating an EMP to address the various environmental impacts identified and assessed,
the EMS suggests an overall framework under which the EMP is executed
The EMP presents the project specific guidelines on-
 Environment Management strategies
 Specialized engineering construction procedure in relation to the environmental guidelines of
the country
 Spill prevention and control
 Disposal and management of wastes and hazardous chemicals
 Air, water and soil quality protection
 Noise control
 Soil erosion control and slope stabilization,
 Vegetation, wildlife and habitat protection
 Socio-economic and welfare considerations
Due to its complexity and implications, the implementation of EMP must be executed utilizing a
specific EMS framework. Once an EMP has been approved, it should provide the basis for
environmental considerations of all the activities carried out on the site by the appointed personnel.
With respect to the various environmental impacts identified during the EIA stage, mitigation
measures to prevent or minimize the impacts are suggested for the environmental components.
The Environment Management Plan for the proposed project aims to mitigate the potential
detrimental impacts on the environment, both during construction phase and operation phases of the
project. It also necessary that continued compliance with existing environmental regulations is
ensured. The construction and associated activities have been planned so as to minimize the impacts
on the physical, biological and socio-economic culture environments. Even thought it would be native
to expect that all detrimental impacts can be avoided, it is apparent that most of the impacts will be
localized and temporary in nature.
10.4 ENVIRONMENTAL OBJECTIVES
While developing an EMP within the frame work of an EMS, it is imperative to have clear
environmental objectives and delineate them. The key environmental management objectives for this
project are to avoid significant adverse environmental impacts and to ensure that where impacts do
occur they are mitigated. In addition, the project proponent aims to meet the following specific
objectives.
 To adopt construction and operational methods , which will limits environmental degradation
 To protect physical environmental components such as air , water and soil

 To conserve terrestrial and aquatic flora and fauna

 To protect historic and cultural sites
 To incorporate the views and perceptions of the local inhabitants in the project
 To generate employment opportunities wherever possible and feasible.
 To provide environmental guidelines and stipulations to the construction contractors to
minimize the impact of those activities around the proposed site
 To provide advanced sophisticated safety system to ensure safety of the public at large
 To establish a long term programme to monitor effects of the project on the environment
 To audit for close watch on activities during construction and operation of the compressor
stations and associated facilitates to assess implementation of management measures.
10.5 IMPLEMENTATION
The various players responsible for execution of EMP and associated monitoring and inspection and
their designated levels of responsibilities are delineated below:
 The project proponent will be responsible for providing all the necessary funding and the
administrative support to the EMP, and be ultimately responsible for providing the necessary
funding and administrative support to the EMP and be ultimately responsible for carrying out this
project with total commitment to environmental matters
 The Management Representative (MR), working on behalf of the project proponent ,will be
responsible for coordinating the activities of a technical staff responsible for coordinating the
activities of a technical staff responsible for monitoring and managing the compliances of the
EMP. The responsibilities include technical, community and administrative matter related to the
EMP , including the liaison with the general public in the project area, other parties and regulatory
bodies on environmental issues related to the environmental compliance of the project and
properly address any issues of their concerns.
 The HSE representative with the help of a technical staff will be responsible for monitoring the
compliance of the EMP (for which they will be given adequate training and must report to
Management Representative (MR).
 The construction contractors will be responsible for ensuring full compliance with environmental
matter related to the construction activities, as laid down in the EMP. The construction contractor
will ensure that all his workers are properly briefed in environmental matters in terms of Dos and
Dont’s while they work on the project. The cost toward implementation of EMP is the part of the
bidding document so that the related costs are included in the contract.
The proposed project would create impacts on the environment in two distinct phases:
Phase 1: During the construction phase which may be regarded as temporary or short term.
Phase 2: During the operation phase which will have marginal impact.
10.6 EMP FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE
Environmental impacts during the construction phase can be attributed to the site preparation,
excavation of trenches, erection and mechanical fabrication, construction activities, transportation etc.
and provision of civic amenities to the construction workforce. The potential for environmental impact
during the construction phase on most of the environmental component, is temporary, and the
environment returns back to its previous status on completion of the construction. State of the art
technology will be adopted for control pollution during project execution phase, whenever and
wherever applicable.

All construction activities generally cause disruptions to the pre project environmental quality. The
following environmental protection measures will be incorporated as part of terms and conditions of
contract for implementation by the contractor or the authority as appropriate. Recommendations are
made to minimize impacts during the construction phase as delineated below:
Environmental impacts during construction phase, will be mainly due to civil works such as the site
preparation, RCC foundation, construction etc.; material and machinery transportation, fabrication
and erection etc.; storage and handling of different kinds of flammable/hazardous materials etc. the
construction phase impacts are temporary (approx.1-2 years) and localized phenomena except the
permanent change in local landscape and landuse pattern at the projects site. However, they require
due consideration with importance during project execution and also whenever applicable detailed
protocol/procedures shall be implemented to prevent/mitigate adverse impacts and occupational
hazards.
a) Site Preparation
The site preparation and plant erection activities during construction phases would be carried out with
proper preventive measures for pollution control. At the time of civil works for proposed project units,
it is necessary to control PM levels through dust suppression methods.
Preparation of site will involve excavation and transport of substantial quantities of earthen material.
Site grading operations will also involve stock piling of backfill materials. Due care shall be taken
through slope stabilization to avoid water pollution problems during rainy season.
During dry weather conditions, it is necessary to control the dust emissions arising out of the
excavation, leveling, transportation and stockpiling activities by proper water sprinkling
The top soil removed from construction areas may be preserved to reuse for development of land-
scapes and horticulture in the later part of construction phase
b) Basic Facilities
The work force (Approximate 50 -100 workers) during construction phase would be significant. The
construction work force may temporarily migrate to project site, some may be with families. Sites for
construction and workers camp should be clearly demarcated to prevent occupational hazard. Project
proponents shall ensure provision for necessary basic needs and infrastructure facilities such as
water supply, sanitary facilities, housing, domestic fuel etc. to the families of construction workforce.
c) Occupational Health
Project proponent shall take care to include necessary clauses in respective construction tender/work
awards for maintaining strict compliance of occupational health standards for workers during duty
period including provision and usage of personnel protection equipment (PPE) such as protection, fire
protection gadgets to mitigate occupational health hazards.
Where, gases or fumes are likely to be present in trenches/foundations.Sufficient mechanical/artificial
ventilation shall be provided to protect the health and safety of persons working there. If necessary,
the personnel working in poorly ventilated work places shall be provided with respiratory protective
equipment.
d) Construction Equipment and Waste
 Both diesel and gasoline powered construction machinery, vehicles etc. put in to operation at
project site shall be properly maintained to minimize exhaust emissions as well as noise
generation

 Efforts should be made to prevent accidental spillage of any oil/grease from construction
equipment maintenance activities, and empty containers, rubber & plastic materials etc.
generated during construction is expected to be properly disposed of and MIDC authorities will
take care of these issues.
 Through the effect of noise on the nearby inhabitants due to construction activity will be marginal.
Major noise prone activities will be restricted to only daytime.
 The construction machinery will be maintained to minimize the noise generation.
e) Storage of Hazardous Materials

Hazardous materials such as petrol, diesel, lubricating oil, compressed gases, paint and varnishes
and also explosives for blasting operations required at the construction site shall be stored and
handled and strictly in accordance with the prevailing safety regulations. Thus, MIDC authorities need
to ascertain these aspects.
10.6.1 Management of Air Environment
The Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) has set standards with regard to the ambient air quality
and emission levels. The particulate matter size less than 2.5 μm (PM2.5 μg/m3), particulate matter
size less than 10 μm (PM10 μg/m3) levels in residential and rural area, industrial area should not
exceed 60 μm (PM60 μg/m3), 100 μm (PM100 μg/m3) respectively. The vehicular emission standards
(Mass emission standards effective from 1st April 1996) for diesel driven vehicles are hydrocarbons -
2.4 g/kwhr; Carbon Monoxide-11.2 g/kwhr; and Oxides Nitrogen-14.4 g/kwhr. These standards will
have to be met, and stipulation to that effect will be provided in construction contact agreement
One or more of the following measures may be implemented to minimize impact on air quality during
construction and operation of the project
 Water sprinkling on site for dust suppression
 Use of covering sheets shall be done for trucks carrying construction materials to prevent air
borne dust
 All material storage adequately shall be covered to avoid dust / particulate emission
 Use of ready mix concrete wherever possible instead of using onsite batching plant for concrete
 Use of CPCB approved DG sets
 Proper maintenance of DG sets
 Adequate parking provision and proper traffic arrangement for smooth traffic flow
 Vehicles having valid pollution under control certificate shall be allowed to ply
10.6.2 Management of Noise Environment

The Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) has set standards for ambient noise levels in various
activity zones. For industrial areas, the day time noise levels should not excess 75 dB(A) and the
night time levels of 70 dB(A). In case of residential areas, the day and night standards are 55 dB (A)
and 40 dB(A) respectively. Suitable conditions will be incorporated in the construction contract
agreement, to ensure compliance of these standards.
The following measures may be adopted to minimize the impact of noise during construction phase of
the project:
 Provision of ear plug/muffs for labor in high noise prone areas
 No noise polluting work in night shifts
 Provision of barricades along the periphery of the site
 Acoustic enclosure for DG sets

10.6.3 Management of Water Environment

The sources of water pollution on construction sites includes; diesel and oil paints, solvents, cleaners
and other harmful chemicals; debris and dirt. The surface water run-off also carries other pollutants
from the site, such as diesel and oil toxic chemicals, and building materials like cement. These
substances are harmful for aquatic life and also for animals. These pollutants may contaminate
groundwater which will be more difficult to treat than surface water
Understanding the water quality is essential in identifying critical issues with a view to evaluate the
impacts on habitat conditions, recreational resources, agricultural productivity and aesthetics in the
vicinity and to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for implementation.
 Avoid wastage of curing water
 Use of tanker water for construction activity
 Provision of temporary toilets for labor as a sanitation arrangement
 Wastewater generated will be sent to septic tanks/ soakpits
10.6.4 Management of Soil/Land Environment
Following measures will be taken to reduce, generation of construction hazardous wastes.
 Separate storage of construction materials
 Reusing of the excavated earth partly for backfilling on site before disposing it to authorized sites
 Bituminous materials / any other chemicals shall not be allowed to leach into the soil
 Waste oil generated from DG sets will be handed over to authorized recyclers approved by
CPCB/SPCB
 Hazardous wastes shall be handed over to authorized common hazardous waste disposal site for
further treatment and disposal
 The solid wastes generated due to workers dwelling at the site, will be segregated and will be
disposed off through authorised vendors.
10.6.5 Management of Socio-Economic and Cultural Environment
To minimize adverse impacts arising out due to the propsed developmental project activities, mitigate
measures suggested as follows:
 Provision of adequate drinking water, toilet and bathing facilities at the project site
 Personal protective and safety equipment to the construction workers during construction phase
 Provision of first aid facility at site
 Regular health checkup of workers /labors
 Regular pest control
 Educational awareness programme for fire fighting and safety measures
 Sufficient and appropriate santary facilities will be provided in order to maintain hygienic
conditions in the camps of construction labourers.
10.6.6 Traffic Control
 The authority will make an assessment of the safe, legal load limit of all the bridges, streets that
may be traversed by heavy equipment
 Traffic congestion and road hazards will be prevented
 Deliveries of materials to the project site will be consolidated whenever feasible to minimize the
flow of traffic
 Existing network of roads will be used for transporting equipment and construction materials and
no new road will be constructed.

During Construction Phase

During construction phase, one gate each for entry and exit; will be provided connected to approach
road. Proper parking will be provided for a vehicle which comes on site. Heavy vehicle movement will
be allowed normally at night time.
 Truck traffic will be staggered all through the day and during non- peak hours materials will be
received during non-peak hours
 Water will be sprinkled during transportation
 Proper entry/exit and good parking space will be provided for the smooth traffic movement. There
will be ample space for movement of vehicles and parking.
 Indivigual industries in their layout will make provision for allocation space for parking. No special
provision for allocation space for parking through MIDC.
10.6.7 Safety and Aesthetics Construction in Residential Areas
 All construction equipment and materials shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner.
 Excess excavated materials shall be removed from the project site as soon as possible, after the
completion of excavation operations, these materials will be used for leveling and landscaping
 Temporary sanitary facilities will be provided for onsite workers. These facilities will be maintained
in a clean, odor free condition and care shall be taken to avoid soil and groundwater
contamination
 Tenements are approximately similar in height; hence there is no obstruction of a view. The
project is proposed after consideration of all such components.
10.7 EMP FOR OPERATIONAL PHASE

Several control measures are incorporated to minimize the generation of wastes and subsequent
environmental impacts during the operational phase. Strict adherence to these pollution prevention
and control measures shall moderate the environmental impacts to the minimum possible level during
operational phase. In general, the environmental management plan during operational phase of the
plant shall be directed to the following:
 It shall be ensured that all the pollution control/environment management systems are
commissioned before the commencement of operation of the project.
 Regular performance evaluation of the control systems shall be undertaken to ensure their
optimum performance
 Preventive maintenance schedule of the control systems will be matching with that of the
respective operational unit.
 Regular monitoring of various components of environment shall be undertaken to ensure effective
functioning of pollution control measures as well as to safe guard against any unforeseen
changes in the environment.
 Efforts shall be made to ensure the maximum utilization of wastes generated
 A program of vegetation reinstatement will be undertaken to compensate for loss of vegetation
cover during the construction phase
10.7.1 Management of Air Environment

The proposed developmental project does not impose any impact on the ambient air quality, during
operational phase. Large number of trees will be grown to restrict negative impacts on ambient air
quality if any.
 Regular maintenance of valves, pumps and other equipment to prevent leakage

 Plantation of trees would act as noise and dust buffers

 Greenbelt development shall be implemented to mitigate impacts from fugitive emissions
 The air quality surveillance program may be strengthened properly keeping in view the combined
maximum impacts from the post project activities particularly in critical downwind directions.
10.7.2 Management of Noise Environment
 The sources of intermittent noise generating equipment will be provided with appropriate acoustic
barriers so that the noise levels within 100 m of these facilities when in operation will be less than
70 dB(A)
 If DG set will be provided, it should have acoustic enclosure for effective noise reduction of 25
dB(A). Also, the DG set will be provided with exhaust muffler capable of effective noise reduction
of 25 dB(A).
To minimize the noise levels following noise control measures will be adopted:
 Provision of proper parking arrangement, traffic management plan for smooth flow of vehicles
helps to reduce noise levels due to vehicular traffic
 Green belts and landscaping shall act as a barrier to attenuate noise levels
10.7.3 Management of Water Environment
Surface water quality
 During operation phase, no wastewater will be discharged from the individual industries in MIDC
area to any surface water bodies.
 Wastewater generated from individual industries will be sent to CEPT that will be constructed in
proposed MIDC area (2.0 MLD capacity) and treated wastewater will be sent to HRTS.
Ground water quality
During operation phase no wastewater or solid/hazardous wastes will be discharged on land, so there
will not be any impact on groundwater quality due to leaching.
10.7.3.1 Water Requirement & Wastewater Generation
Total water requirement for the project is estimated to be 6890 m3/day and will be sourced from
Rama dam through water works.
The distribution network will be through pipeline i.e. 12 km from the Ramadam, weirs the water will be
supplied through pipeline and will be stored in storage tank where it will be treated in water treatment
plant (WTP) and the treated water will be sent to ESR (Elevated Storage Reservior) and distributed to
the users through pipeline (individual industries through pipeline) network. The MIDC will be adopting
WHO guideline for dring water.
The water requirement breakup is given in Table 10.1.
TABLE 10.1
WATER REQUIREMENT
Sr. No. Particulars Water requirement (m3/day)
1 Process 2272
3 Green built & application 345
4 Fire fighting 138
5 Domestic 690
Total 6890

10.7.3.2 Wastewater Treatment & Disposal

The wastewater generation estimated to be 2230 m3/day.
The wastewater generated will be sent to CETP proposed for this project separately. The CETP (2.0
MLD) will be constructed in the proposed MIDC area which will receive the wastewater from
individual industries of accepting norms as shown in Table 10.3. The design and the units will be
same as shown in the existing CETP in existing MIDC as shown in Figure 10.1. It will be designed by
competent consultant and developed by MIDC. The treated effluent will be used for HRTS. The
estimated quantity that will be required for HRTS in 35 Ha of land will be 7000 m 3. The existing land
where the HRTS is in operation is sufficient for the disposal in HRTS. However additional HRTS will
be developed by MIDC in 35 Ha of land phasewise & the treated waste water will also be used in new
HRTS. The breakup of wastewater generation from proposed additional MIDC area is shown in Table
10.2.
TABLE 10.2
Sr. No. Particulars Wastewater generation (m3/day)
1 Process 1330
3 Green belt & application -
4 Fire fighting -
5 Domestic 552
Total 2230
TABLE 10.3
CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTING INCOMING EFFLUENT AT CETP
Sr. No. Effluent Qty. Parameter SSI MSI LSI
1. < 25 m3/day COD 2500 mg/l As per consent As per consent
BOD 1000 mg/l As per consent As per consent
3
2. > 25 m /day COD As per consent As per consent As per consent
BOD As per consent As per consent As per consent
Note: All other parameters like TDS, TSS, O&G, Chlorides, Sulphates, Ammonia, N, Heavy Metals
etc. are accepted as per consent to operate norms of member industries issued by Maharashtra
Pollution Control Board.

Process flow diagram of existing CETP is given in Figure 10.1.
FIGURE 10.1: CETP PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
10.7.3.3 Domestic Wastewater Generation and Disposal

The water requirement for domestic purpose will be 690 m3/day & domestic generation will be 552
m3/day. However for disposal of domestic wastes, individual industry will make provision for sending it
to septic tank/soak pit. There will not be any disposal of domestic waste into nearby water body.
However excess domestic waste generation will be treated & in centralized STP for which provision
will be made by MIDC in future and treated domestic waste will be used for plantation & green belt
around the MIDC area or within the premises. MIDC will check this & informed to MPCB for any
ambiguity in the disposal of domestic waste.

10.7.3.4 High Rate Transpiration System (HRTS) for Disposal

The total land available for existing and proposed HRTS in 25 & 35 Ha, so the total quality of treated
waste water used in HRTS is estimated to be 12000 m3. The existing and proposed HRTS will be
sufficient for the disposal. So, no disposal of wastewater envisaged in any aquatic body.
10.7.3.5 Water Conservation and Development
The water conservation plan will consist of a combination of three major steps depicted below:
Water conservation
Recycling of water Using alternative Minimizing water

after treatment water sources consumption
Water Conservation Plan

Water conservation plan shall be practices to the extent possible by use of reclaimed water for all on
potable application like gardening, watering lawns, car washing, flushing toilets etc.
A. Recycling of wastewater
Total domestic wastewater will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and will be used for
flushing and landscaping purpose.
B. Minimizing Water Consumption
A combination of water saving appliances and water management measures will be planned in all the
dwelling unit. The message of water conservation will be given to all resident and other occupier on
site (individual industries) by way of awareness campaigns and circulars. Specific measures that will
be implemented include the following:
C. Management Measures
 Dual flush system
 Dual flush cisterns will developed to reduce the wastage of water by excess use in the low or
high level cistern. It will be achieved by cutting the vacuum seal at the fixed water level in the
flush cisterns
 Dual flush cisterns will have two flush settings, one for normal operation to flush solids 6 lit per
flush and a second reduced amount for liquids as 3 lit per flush, thus saving considerable
amount of water.
 Water efficient landscaping
 Use of water saving practices like low plumbing fixtures and flow control devices
 Treatment of domestic waste into Sewage Treatment Plant
 Recycling of STP treated sewage for flushing, gardening and cooling tower makeup.
 Provision of storm water drainage system with adequate capacity, Proper maintenance of
storm water drainage
10.7.3.6 Storm Water Drainage
Strom water drainage is being constructed along both the side of the road in proposed MIDC area.
Provision has been made to construct 4 lane roads within the MIDC area. Construction of both the
sides storm water drainage is almost in completion stage. These drainages will be treated as natural
drainages through which the rain water will be flowing & collecting in the harvesting pond or
connected to the nearby flowing stream Figure 10.2.

FIGURE 10.2: STORM DRAIN SECTION

10.7.3.7 Rain Water Harvesting
Individual industry will make arrangement for rain water harvesting and MIDC will make it compulsory
/mandatory for these industries to reduce the water intake. MIDC will insist the industry to make
provision for rain water harvesting treat it & audit for their domestic / industrial purposes &
plantation/greenbelt. MIDC will also insist to industries to make provision in the layout of the individual
industry for making the space for rain water harvesting in a collection pond.
Advantages of Rain Water Recharging
There are various advantages of rain water recharging; some of these are listed below:
1. Fresh groundwater uptake is reduced as it allows use of rainwater in case of scarcity.
2. Solution to water scarcity problems.
3. Effective rise in groundwater levels due to artificial recharge.
4. Improves the quality of groundwater sources.
5. It’s economical & energy saving as it prevents extraction of water and depleting groundwater
6. Easy operation & maintenance.
Design of Rain Water Recharging
Quantity of rain water collected depends upon:
1. Average rainfall intensity.
2. Catchment area.
3. Run-off coefficient.

Schematic sketch for recharging well is given in Figure 10.3.
FIGURE 10.3: SCHEMATIC SKETCH FOR RECHARGING WELL

10.7.4 Management of Land/Soil Environment
Every precaution will be taken to avoid spillages of oils and other products or raw materials which will
be produced or taken for the production on soils to protect groundwater and to avoid any danger to
other soil microbial groups which are sensitive to oil pollution.
Solid Waste
Waste is an unavoidable byproduct of human activity. Economic development, rapid urbanization and
improved living standards have led to the increase in quantity and complexity of the waste generated.
Proper disposal of waste is essential for preservation and improvement of public health.
Solid wastes that would be generated due to excavation will be in the form of rubble and soil. This soil
and rubble would be used for development of landscaping. Construction debris will be reused for
backfilling of roads and other construction works.
Waste generation in the Preconstruction and Construction phase:
 Waste generation: top soil, debris
 Quantity of the top soil to be preserved : use for landscaping
 Disposal of the construction way debris : use for leveling
Solid Waste & Hazardous Wastes Generation
Approximately 15000 populations are expected in proposed expansion of additional MIDC. The total
solid wastes generation estimated to be 7.5 tons/day. The collected solid wastes will be segregated
at site for organics & inorganics. Organic wastes will used is composting and inorganics will be sent
to authorize vendors.
Common hazardous waste & disposal facility is available in 3 km distance from the proposed
expansion of MIDC area. The common hazardous waste area is in 29.7 Ha area. The collection

system will be as per MPCB norms. The total hazardous waste can not be quantified at this stage; it
will be totally depending on the number and type of industries in the coming up MIDC area. However
proper NOC will have tobe obtained from Director of Industrial Health and Safety by every industry to
submit it to MIDC.
Benefits of Organic Waste Convertor
 The total MSW arriving on the site is cleared on the same day.
 Provides a scientific method for the production of organic compost.
 Elimination of pathogens and weed seeds
 Problems of rodents and insect pests are avoided
 Aesthetically acceptable
 Treatment time is substantial reduced
 Eco-friendly and economical
 Requires less space for the treatment
 Load on the landfill is reduced , thus requires less land for disposal
10.7.5 Management of Biological Environment
The main purpose of green belt development is to attenuate the adverse impacts, while keeping in
view the availability of vacant /open land, preferably wasteland. Because, conventionally the efficacy
of green belt in the pollution abatement mainly depends upon the simple principle of the width of the
green belt, tree heights to formulate green belt canopy while keeping inview the distance and
direction of source of pollution as well as the focal points of noise emitting sources like permanent
installations. Even, otherwise as per normal practice, the green belt thickness in the context of usual
wind direction, its velocity and intensity in the specific area.
An ideal green belt always imparts scenic beauty besides providing roosting /perching place for birds
and ground surface for naturally available reptiles, other flora and fauna species, to make the area
more natural and hazard free.
Criteria for selection of species of Green Belt:
The plant species suitable for green belt development should be selected based on the following
characteristics:
 It should have thick canopy cover
 They should be perennial and evergreen
 They should have high sink potential for pollutants
 They should be efficient in absorbing pollutants without significantly affecting their growth
 Health sapling 2-3 years old will be planted to ensure better survival rate
 Preference will be given for trees with ecological values followed by aesthetic value.
10.7.6 Management of Socio- Economic Factors

Local people will be employed as far as possible to avoid migration of people from outside the study
area. Amenities will be developed within the study area and generate the aesthetic view in proper
way.
MIDC industrial area development activity will increase economy of city/region/India overall economic
growth due to additional MIDC. Expected changes in QoL in the study area is given in Table 10.4.

TABLE 10.4
EXPECTED CHANGE IN QUALITY OF LIFE
Sr. Villages QoL (s) QoL(s)after QoL QoL (c) After
No. Implementation of EMP (c) Implementation of EMP
1. Katandhara 0.5 0.52 0.51 0.53
2. Pipaldhara 0.54 0.56 0.54 0.56
3. Mandwa 0.54 0.58 0.54 0.57
Mahar
4. Nagajhari 0.52 0.54 0.53 0.55
5. Bhansuli 0.54 0.58 0.55 0.57
6. Murjhari 0.53 0.54 0.54 0.56
7. Mathani 0.46 0.46 0.47 0.48
8. Takalghat (CT) 0.62 0.65 0.63 0.65
9. Khadki 0.58 0.60 0.59 0.60
10. Kanholibara 0.6 0.62 0.61 0.63
Average 0.54 0.56 0.55 0.57
Source: Primary data collection
(s) = Subjective, (O) = Objective, (c) = Cumulative
10.7.7 Management of Traffic

During operation phase, one gate, for entry and exit; at proposed developmental area project will be
provided with approach road. There will be an ample space for movement and parking space for
parking and movement of the vehicles. Proper traffic arrangement plan will make easily and smoothly
monitored without any hindrance to the regular flow of traffic on the main road.
Parking Arrangement
Individual industries in their layout will make provision for allocating space for parking. No special
provision for allocating space for parking through MIDC. There is no provision for parking in the
proposed MIDC area. However there will be provision for space allocation for truck terminals where
the incoming trucks will be parked.
10.8 ADDITIONAL MITIGATION MEASURES
In addition to the above suggested measures for management of air, noise, water, soil, traffic etc.
following additional measures shall be provided.
10.8.1 Human Health and Safety Management Plan
The objective is to ensure that the health and safety of onsite personnel is proactively managed
during the construction stage of the project. Below are given the proposed project related human
health and safety environmental concerns and its management.
 The primary concern on potential health risk for the construction workers and other employees
on site during construction are associated with drinking water quality.
 The project would ensure safe potable water supply to the workers on site.
 Adequate space needs to be provided for construction of temporary sheds for construction
workers to avoid unhygienic conditions.

 Construction a site will be approved with a readily available first aid kit including an adequate
supply of sterilized dressing materials and appliances
 Suitable transport to take injured or sick person to the nearest hospital will be immediately
provided.
 The project will ensure the safe working of all workers. Each construction worker will be
provided with safety gadgets and made to wear during the construction work.
 This will include protective footwear, helmets, and gloves to all workers employed for the work
on mixing, cement, lime mortars, concrete etc.; the wielders protective eye-shields to workers
who are engaged in wielding works; earplugs to workers exposed to loud noise; safety belts to
the labours working at higher platforms, and masks to avoid dust.
 The project will strictly follow the statutory child labor act.
 The project will also ensure that no paint containing lead or lead products is used except in
the form of paste or readymade paint. Facemasks will be provided for use to the workers
when paint is applied in the form of spray. Adequate safety measures will be ensured for
workers during handling of materials at site.
 The project will comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladders, working
platforms, gangway, stairwells, excavations, and safe means of entry and exit
 The project will take adequate precautions to prevent danger form electrical equipments.
 No material will be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person
or the public.
 All necessary fencing and lights will be provided to protect the public.
 All machines to be used in the construction will conform to the relevant Indian Standards
Codes, will be free from patent defect, will be kept in good working order, will be regularly
inspected and properly maintained as per IS provision.
 Work spots will be maintained clean, and provided with optimum lighting.
10.8.2 Energy Conservation
Energy conservation measures are often the easiest, quickest and cheapest way to reduce costs and
be environmentally pro-active.
Energy conservation program will be implemented through measures taken both on energy demand
and supply. Energy Conservation will be one of the focuses during the complex planning and
operation stages. The conservation efforts would consist of the following:
Supply Energy Conservation Demand
 Reduce consumption
 Use energy-efficient equipment’s
 Create awareness
Architectural design
 Public areas will be cooled by natural ventilation as opposed to air conditioning
 Maximize the use of natural lighting through design
 Passive solar cooling utilizing building shading through overhangs
 There will be significant use of energy efficient space conditioning, lighting and mechanical
systems.

 Energy efficient space conditioning, lighting and mechanical systems are planned in conformity
with Energy Conservation Building Code 2007.
Following measures are proposed:
1. Minimum light points and power consuming apparatus have been proposed.
2. Adequate use of internal light and air has been made by planning the blocks of houses in the
sun/wind direction.
3. Energy efficient LED fittings have been proposed in the street lighting against the 2 X 40 Watt
florescent tube lights.
4. Energy saving shall be made by the use of electronic timers in the automatic off/on operation of
the street lighting.
Energy Saving Practices

 Purchase of energy efficient appliances
 Solar lighting is proposed for landscape and street lighting
 Constant monitoring of energy consumption and defining targets for energy conservation
 Adjusting the settings and illumination levels to ensure minimum energy used for desired comfort
levels
 Use of compact fluorescent lamps and low voltage lighting
10.8.3 Vehicular Parking and Safety Management Plan

Individual industrial Authorities will be taking care to provide adequate parking facilities within the
premises. Hence, there will be no shortage of parking space for vehicles. Adequate parking space will
be proposed within the premises at surface level. There will be provision of proper entry-exit point for
vehicle movements and pedestrian users.
Adequately wide roads to cater to two way traffic and to meet the fire regulations are paneled. It is
proposed to provide sufficient amount of car space.
10.9 CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (CSR)
Under the CSR, MIDC authority has proposed action plans for the benefit and welfare of the society
which is given below:
Proposed Action
 At policy level, the MIDC trust needs to allocate a considerable resources on alternative
livelihoods. MIDC guideline shall clearly define industries role and participation in the alternative
livelihoods implementation plan. The industries may contribute to the alternative livelihoods plan
under their CSR networks.
 MIDC trust shall engage an external agency to conduct a market study to identify livelihoods
options. A phased alternative livelihoods plan along with financial feasibility shall be developed for
all the affected villages. If required, an external agency shall be condacted to implement the
livelihood plan. However it is to be mentioned here that no any R & R is involved in this project.
 A monitoring committee shall be formulated to ensure proper implementation and documentation
of the alternative livelihoods plan.
Recommendations
The recommendations are drawn from the strategic framework. The recommendations are arranged
into seven sub-sections:

Policy frame work

1. A policy shall clearly define the aspects such as
a. Target of each industry to appoint PAF members
b. The target of each industry shall depend on their projected turnover.
c. The number of members to be provided regular jobs from each project affected household shall
be in proportion to the size of acquired land lord.
2. MIDC trust guideline shall clearly define
a. Interventions is alternative livelihoods
b. Role and participation of each industry in the alternative livelihoods implementation plan
c. Role and participation of each industry in the capacity building process.
There is no budget allocation for CSR activities. However space is made available for common facility
center for bank, post office, hospital and drinking water pipeline connection on charges bases. For
infrastructure, road development activities related to village connectivity and street lights are carried
out. Last year a total expenditure of Rs. 100 crores was made for road laying or construction water
distribution network, street lights, water pipeline and construction of ESR. Drinking water is also made
available to nearby villages at lower rate.
10.10 INDUSTRIAL ECOLOGICAL CONCEPT
Industrial ecology (IE) is an interdisciplinary frame work for designing and operating systems almost
as living systems (interdependence of different components) it seeks to create a balance between
ecology and economics within local and global constraints. It is an offshoot of the concept of
sustainability.
IE supports coordination of design over the lifecycle of products and processes. It enables creation of
short term innovations with awareness of their long term impacts. It helps design local solutions that
contribute to global sustainance.
It helps companies become more competitive by improving their environmental performance and
strategic planning. IE helps communities develop and maintain a should industrial based and
infrastructure without sacrificing the quality of their environments and it helps government agencies
like MIDC to design policies and regulations that improve environment protection while building
business competitiveness in the MIDC region.
IE - principles and methods can be used by service as well as manufacturing companies. Application
of IE will improve the planning and performance of government operations, including local, regional
and national levels of infrastructure. While much of the initial work in IE has focused on
manufacturing, a full definition of industrial systems includes service, agricultural, manufacturing,
military, public operations such as infrastructure of landfills, water and sewage systems and
transportation systems proper environmental management through implementation of the measures
to be taken while in operation.
In other words, IE is a dynamic system-based framework that enables management of human activity
on a sustainable basis by:
 Minimizing energy and materials usage through application of solar and wind resources.
 Ensuring acceptable quality of life for people through infrastructural development and
employment
 Minimizing the ecological impact of human activity to levels natural systems can sustain.
 Conserving and restoring ecosystem health and maintaining biodiversity

 Maintaining the economic viability of systems for industry, trade and commerce.
The industrial ecology approach involves
1. Application of systems science to industrial systems
2. Defining the systems boundary to incorporate the natural world and
3. Seeking to optimize that systems
In this context, “Industrial systems” applies not just to private sector manufacturing and service but
also government operation including provision of infrastructure.
Need for industrial ecology
We are is an era of exponential change in world systems, availability of development, construction of
natural capital, release of an increasing variety of toxic materials, climate change, and the impacts of
all of these forces on human and natural systems.
For instance, plastics from ocean dumping of garbages are entering in to food chain. The ocean
waters in northern seas are becoming less saline due to ice melting as a result of a warming
atmosphere.
Decision-makers and citizen need guidance from a system-based interdisciplinary frame work to deal
with complex interactions among such complex systems.
Industrial ecology may be able to help us perceive the whole system required to feed the planets
preserve and restore its farm lands, preserve ecosystems and biodiversity, and still provide water and
land for a growing population.
10.11 BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
maintenance of different pollution control systems. The total cost of the proposed expansion of
Butibori Industrial Area (BIA-Phase-II) is estimated to be Rs. 7000/- lakhs. The budgetary planning for
environmental protection, pollution prevention and environmental management activities is shown in
Table 10.5.
TABLE 10.5
BUDGETARY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
Sr. No. Activities Capital Cost (Rs. lakhs)

1. CETP 500
2. Water treatment plant 500
3. CSTP 500
4. Environmental monitoring 50
5. Solid waste and hazardous management (TSDF site) 500
6. Green belt and landscaping 50
7. Solar system 200
8. HRTS -
Total 2300

11.0 SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

Maharashtra industrial development corporation (MIDC) incorporated under section 3 of the
Maharshtra Industrial Development (MIDC) act 1961, appointed as special planning authority (SPA)
for the notified areas as defined under subsection IA of section 40 of the Maharashtra regional and
town planning (MRTP) act, 1966, in exercise of the powers conferred under clause (d) of subsection
3 of section 40 of the said act, makes the following developmental control regulations (DCR) for the
notified areas under MIDC. Accordingly MIDC decided for the expansion of existing Butibori MIDC
area in 275.58 hacters of land to create the facilities for domestic and export led production by
various industries likely to come in the proposed MIDC area.
Keeping in mind, MIDC under its jurisdiction proposed to expand its existing Butibori MIDC in an area
of 275.58 ha incorporating adjoining areas of village Mandva and Bhansoli, Tehsil Hingna, district
Nagpur in Maharashtra state to invite the industries of variable sectors to come up as the existing
Buttibori area is full cluster of industries and no space is available for the additional industries to
come up. In the close vicinity of proposed MIDC, existing MIDC is located named as Buttibori MIDC.
The MIDC already has acqiuired an area of 275.58 ha on which the proposed developmental
activities will be undertaken. The proposed expansion will be located 10.0 and 8.0 km from the NH-7
and SH respectively, 13 km from Buttibori railway station. The availability of water resources, power
and infrastructure make it convenient to setup the industries within the MIDC area. The additional
Buttibori industrial estate will offer plots of large, medium and small industrial units. So, to meet the
demand of industrial estates and more industries to come, MIDC Nagpur has proposed to enhance
the additional Butibori industrial area.
The EIA by M/s Buildnig Environment (India) Pvt. Ltd, Belapur, Navi Mumbai in association with
Anacon Laboratories at Nagpur, evaluated the environmental parameters to detect the
environmental trend in the study area. The study area is already having several existing units and the
data reflects some background concentrations. The reflection of background concentration is
associated with the present development activities. In addition, ANACON has generated the baseline
data (air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-economic) against the known standards and criteria
and have not been indentified any parameters that increased the concentration level beyond the
environmental standards mandated by MoEF. The EIA report is being submitted for the purpose of
requirement of obtaining environmental clearance from statutory authorities. The EIA report covers
the identified impacts with elaborate EMP so as to prevent any damage to environment and
ecological balance of the area. The prediction for the future quality with the addition of existing
activities to make it cumulative with respect to air, noise, water,land, biological and socio- economic
impacts. The incremental loads associated with the proposed activities will be relatively small and will
not result in significant impacts due to the implementation of the environemental management plan
besides the following supportive reasons:
1. The area of 10 km. radius around proposed additional MIDC was studied and assess the impacts
for all environmental components, including existing activities with the result of marginal impact on
the surrounding areas with the benefits of economic growth for the region and thereby the
country.
2. The impact of air quality and noise levels are not expected to occur as a result of proposed
activities due to the provision made for plantation and greenbelt development.
3. The EMP list all the requirements to ensure effective mitigation of every potential biophysical and
socio- economic impact identified in the EIA viz. the following.
 A comprehensive listing of the mitigation measures
Chapter 11- Summary and Conclusion 11-1

 Parameters that will be monitored to ensure effective implementation of the action.

 Timing for implementation of the action to ensure that the objectivies of mitigation are fully
met.
The EMP comprises a series of components covering direct mitigation and environmental monitoring
and a project site restoration plan. The EMP has been prepared for the proposed developmental
activities during construction and operational phases.
4. Project proponent (MIDC) shall take due care to include necessary clauses in respective
construction tender/work awards for maintaiing strict compliance of occupational health standards
for workers during duty period including provision and usage of personal gadgets to mitigate
occupational health hazards as per MIDC development control regulations 2009 approved by the
Govt. urban development department notification.
 Where, gases or fumes are likely to be present in trenches/foundations, sufficient
mechanical/artificial ventilation shall be provided to protect the health and safety of persons
working there. If necessary, the personnel working in poorly ventilated work places shall be
provided with respiratory protective equipment.
5. Hazardous materials such as petrol, diesel, lubricating oil, compressed gases, paint and
varnishes and also explosives for blasting operations required at the construction site shall be
stored and handled strictly in accordance with the prevailing safety regulations. Thus, MIDC
authorities need to ascertain these aspects.
6. The region being marginally water scarce, however, the project developer will not extract fresh
water from any waterbodies (surface or groundwater) for the construction phase of the project. No
existing resources/fresh water sources (surface/groundwater,) which are currently being used by
the villagers for the purpose of obtaining drinking water and/or water for irrigation or other
purposes should be tapped into. The water shall be supplied from the existing water resources of
the MIDC.
7. The solid wastes such as paints, lubricants, oil, diesel containers or any other non- biodegradable
wastes that have leaching characteristics should be disposed off as per te “Authorization”
received from MPCB and hazardous management rule 2008. A waste management plan will be
prepared before the commissioning of activity, implemented and monitored for all land-based
construction operations.
8. Wastewater treatment plants will have good cushion to meet the hydraulic and pollution load
during operating the plants. MIDC authorities shall ascertain at planning stage and further
evaluate at commissioning stage so that the treated effluent would have charateristics of
prescribed limits of MPCB/CPCB. The performance of ETP shall be continuously monitoried and
any deviation in performance will be corrected on priority basis
9. Reuse of treated effluent will be attempted to the maximum possible extent, e.g. cooling tower
blow down & treated effluent for horticulture use, fire water makeup, etc. However, it is planned to
use treated wastewater for HRTS system developed in 25.Ha land and also proposed to develop
in 35 ha. of land.
10. Water flow measurement facilities (metering) shall be provided at inlet and outlets of major
process unit, which shall help in minimizing wastage, conserving the water as well as maximizing
the recycle/resue of treated effluent

11. Regular monitoring of effluent from different treatment units and also combined final discharge of
treated wastewater is recommended. Performance evaluation of effluent treatment plant as well
as sewage parameters covered under this study
12. There will be constant watch by the MIDC authorities to look into emissions and wastewater
generation and discharges. Any outlier will be informed accordingly by the MIDC through SPCB
for relevant actions as per SPCB rules and regulations.
13. Top priority will be given to rainwater harvesting in the industrial buildings besides, exploring the
feasibility of rainwater harvest
14. MIDC has acquired 275.58 ha land for the proposed expansion of Butibori MIDC. Most of it from
private agricultural land and Govt land. There is no R & R involved for this project. There is no any
dispute regarding land possession.
15. In view of the possible exposure of the operators to toxic gases at different work places, a
properly scheduled periodical diagnostic and health chackups shall be undertaken for the
employees, especially for operators and lower level workers engaged at critical work places. if
required, based on helath records,suitable rotation of duties for workers may be implemented at
critical work zones. Potencial hazards, safety procedures, emergency measures etc. shall be
deployed at suitable locations at all workplaces to mitigate occupational hazards.
16. The Environmental Cell of individual industry headed by a senior executive who report to the head
of HSEF dept. The environment cell consists of environment professionals with experience in
various aspects of environment management ranging from 7 years to 20 years. This cell tobe set
up during the construction of the indivisual plant under MIDC and has adequate expertise and
competency in handling and implementing the environment management systems and practices.
The Environment Cell will monitor and measure the environmental performance of the company.
17. The Environmental Cell that will be established by individual industry will be responsible for
implementing and maintaining environment management systems in the whole MIDC area under
the supervision of SPCB which includes air quality monitoring meterological observation, stack
emission, noise level measurement, treated effluent characterization, controlling ground water
pollution from leachates, green belt development, 3rd party environmental audit etc.
18. Risk assessment was carried out for proposed developmental activities in MIDC in operations
under abnormal conditions. MCA (Maximum creditable Accident) analysis has been worked our at
various wind velocities and atmospheric stability classes to estimate the maximum effective
distances in case of heat radiation, toxic releases, vapour cloud explosion, etc. A list of proble or
potential accidents of the major units under MIDC arising due to use, storage of handling of the
hazardous materials are examined to establish their credibility. Mitigation measures have been
recommended to tackle the emergencies. Disaster Management Plan (DMP) has been delineated
including the rules and responsibility of key persons. The project does not have much pollution
involved under routine operations. There may be risk only under extreme conditions which the
project authority will be capable of handling through its emergency response procedures and
disaster management plan as per the guidelienes imposed upon to safe guard the project.

Conclusion:-
 The developments in proposed expansion of Butibori MIDC is environmentally, technically and
economically feasible
 All the activities will be confined to non-forest area of the acquired land, and management with
a minimum possible emissions area allowed to enter the environment. Thus, the environment
will not be adversely affected in any way.
 The development of plantation and greenbelt will help to increase the biodiversity of plants
and birds in the area.
 Apart from this, the environmental management plan has delineated many measures to
reduce pollution by industrial developments under MIDC.
 The enterprise social commitment policy (Previously CSR) would further bring out the
development of the surrounding villages and the area and quality of life of local people will be
improved
 The cost environmental control and monitoring measures are computed Rs. 2300 lakh
(Capital and Recurring).

CHAPTER-12: DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS
12.1 BUILDING ENVIRONMENT INDIA PVT LTD
This report is released for the purpose of obtaining Environment clearance for project, under the
provision of EIA notification dated 14th September 2006, of Maharashtra Industrial
Developmental Corporation (MIDC), Nagpur. Information provided (unless attributed to
reference third parties) is otherwise copyrighted and shall not be used for any other purpose
without the written consent of Building Environment India Pvt Ltd.
Report Environmental Impact Assessment and Environmental Management Plan Report

Project Details
Name of the EIA / EMP report for proposed Expansion of existing Butibori Industrial Area ((BIA) (BIA
Report Phase – II), Nagpur, Maharashtra
Client Maharashtra Industrial Developmental Corporation (MIDC), Nagpur
Prepared by Building Environment India Pvt Ltd.
Project Number Report Version 00 Released March 2015
No Date
Contact Details
Building Environment India Pvt Ltd,
SaiSangam, Office No. 603,
Plot No. 85, Sector 15,
CBD Belapur, Maharashtra - 400614, India
Tel. No. : 91-22-41237073
hkolatkar@beipl.co.in
NABET Accreditation NO. – 69th MOM, 7 February 2012
EC Application File No.: F. No. 21-22/2014-I.A.III
Reference Appraisal by EAC on Dated: 27th – 29th October, 2014
Document TOR Issued Vide Letter Dated: 24th December 2014
Issue Order
Date Building Environment India Pvt Ltd. Maharashtra Industrial
Developmental Corporation
(MIDC), Nagpur
Originated by Approved by Checked by Approved by
Name Signature Name Signature Name Signature
H Kolatkar H Kolatkar Mr. Hokam D. B. Jambhulkar
Disclaimer
Building Environment India Pvt Ltd. has taken all reasonable precaution in the preparation of this report as per
its auditable quality plan. Building Environment India Pvt Ltd. also believes that the facts presented in the
report are accurate as on the date it was written. However, it is impossible to dismiss absolutely, the possibility of
errors or omissions. Building Environment India Pvt Ltd. Therefore specifically disclaims any liability resulting
from the use or application of the information contained in this report. The information is not intended to serve as
legal advice related to the individual situation.
Project Team
Nature of Work Person Responsible Name of the person(s) responsible

Issue of List of Project manager Dr. Prajakta Kulkarni
requirements, draft of
covering letter &
undertaking to Client
Site Visit EIA Coordinator Mr. Hrushikesh Kolatkar
Project Manager and Dr. Prajakta Kulkarni
FAEs Ms. SuvidhaPatil
Mr. Rishabh Sharma
Dr. Ajay Ojha
Mr. Shrivallabh kothe
Dr. RavindraKode
Mr. Pravash Mishra
Dr. Manoj Kumar Mishra
As per terms of reference All FAEs (In-house& Empanelled ) each for the below given respective FAE
given in MoEF EIA AREA FAE AFAE Team Member
manual, the baseline data Land Use Mr. Hrushikesh Ms. Prachi -----
generation for different Kolatkar Mumbaikar
environmental parameters Air Dr. Ajay Ojha Ms. Suvidha Dr. Prajakta
Patil Kulkarni
Noise Dr. Manoj Kumar Mr. Rishabh ---
Mishra Sharma
Water Dr. Prajakta Ms. ----
Kulkarni Mahalaxami
Nilange
Geology & Mr. Shrivallabh ---- ----
Hydrogeology Kothe
Soil Conservation Mr. Shrivallabh ---- ----
Kothe
Risk & Hazard Dr. Ravindra Kode ---- Ms.
Assessment Mahalaxami
Nilange
Solid Waste Dr. Prajakta Ms. Suvidha ---
Management Kulkarni Patil
Ecology & Dr. Prajakta ---- Dr. Sandhya

Biodiversity Kulkarni Clemente
Socio-economic Mr. Hrushikesh ----- Ms. Suvidha

Kolatkar & Patil
Mr. Pravash Dr. Prajakta
Mishra Kulkarni
Preparation of EIA report
Originator Mr. Hrushikesh Kolatkar Checker Dr. Prajakta Kulkarni
Approval of Report Client D. B. Jambhulkar
12.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

12.1 INTRODUCTION
Anacon established in 1993 as an analytical testing laboratory and now a leading Environmental
Consultancy firm backed by testing lab for environment and food in Central India region. The lab is
well equipped with basic infrastructural facilities and manpower. We are rendering our services in this
field to various industries since last 20 years. We are a group of experienced former Scientists from
the Government Institutions and recognized by Ministry of Environment & Forests, New Delhi for
carrying out environmental Studies & accredited by Quality Council of India (QCI) for conducting
Environmental studies vide letter No. NABET/EIA/SA015/1112 dt.09.11.2012 for 6 Sectors Category
A, viz. Mining, Thermal Power Plants, Coal Washeries, Metallurgical Industries, Cement Plants &
Synthetic Organic Chemical Industries.
Our organization is also certified by ISO9001:2008, 14001:2004, 18001:2007& our Lab division is
accredited by National Accreditation Board for Testing & Calibration Laboratories(NABL, Govt.
of India) for Chemical, Biological & Mechanical Testing vide certificate No. T-1550, T-1826 &
T-2344 respectively for 900 parameters for Water, Food & Agricultural products, Cereals,
Pulses, Bakery products, Spices & Condiments, Milk & Dairy products & Chemical Testing of
Ores & Minerals, Coal/Coke & Cosmetic products. We are also approved by 'Bureau of Indian
Standards (BIS)’. We are recognized by Indian Bureau of Mines (IBM) as a RQP for preparation of
Mine Plan / Scheme. We are pleased to inform you that we have received “MSME National Award
2010” for “Outstanding Entrepreneurship Performance” on 2nd Sept. 2011 at Vigyan Bhawan,
New Delhi.
We are also working for various industries in the sectors of Steel, Cement, Power, Distilleries, Textile
and Pharmaceuticals. Our activities are spread in the states of Assam, Chhattisgarh, Madhya
Pradesh & Maharashtra. Our esteemed client groups includes many large scale industries from
private as well as the Public Sector Units. National Productivity Council, BALCO, MECON, TATA
STEEL, LAFARGE, GRASIM, Ultra Tech Cement Ltd., RAYMONDS, LUPIN, Ranbaxy, GAIL,
Seagram & Sagar Distilleries and Sponge Iron are our major clients. To know more about our Group
and the assignments completed please visit us at www.anaconlaboratories.com.
We have expanded and commissioned laboratory at Butibori Food Park, Nagpur at Plot Nos. FP 34,
35 equipped with highly sophisticated imported equipments, like GC MSMS, LC MSMS (both triple
quad), HPLC, ICP, AAS, UV–Vis, FTIR etc for chemical analysis for the samples viz. Water, Air,
Chemical, Fertilizer, Mineral, Metal, Coal, Food, Agricultural Products, Pesticides, Insecticides, Ores,
etc.,
We have successfully carried out studies related to Air, Noise, Water, Waste Water, Hazardous
Waste, Land Environment, Ecology, Socio-economic as a part of EIA studies of various industries.
We have also carried land use and land cover studies based on the satellite imageries.
Our operations are spread over in six different states in Central India region with branches at
Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand, Madhya Pradesh, Odisha, Maharashtra and Delhi.
12.2 CREDENTIALS OF TESTING LAB
Our laboratory is registered with following Govt. departments for providing technical services in the
field of environment. The registration numbers are as follows;
1. Recognized by Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF) vide Notification No. D.L-33004/99 dt.
03.01.2014
Chapter 12- Disclosure of Consultants 12-1

2. National Accreditation Board for Testing & Calibration Laboratories (NABL) has granted us
Accreditation vide Certificate No.T-01550 w.e.f. 04.10.2012 valid upto 03.10.2016 vide their letter
No. NABL/T/0929 dt.29.11.2012.
No. NABL/T/0929 dt.29.11.2012.
No. NABL/T/0929 dt.29.11.2012.
5. Approved by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) for ISI mark certification vide No. CL/CQAPD/OSL
(7124116) dt.16.12.2011 for package drinking water, milk and its products.
6. Authorised by Food Safety & Standards Authority of India under FSS Act.
7. ISO 9001:2008 vide Registration No. 44 100 124446-E3, ISO14001:2004 vide registration No.44
104 124446-E3 and ISO18001:2007 vide registration No. 44 116 124446-E3.
8. Accredited as EIA Consultant Organization under NABET-QCI, vide letter No.
NABET/EIA/SA015/1112 dt.09.11.2012 for 6 Sectors Category A,
9. Mah.Govt.WQM2003/PK26(2)PP12 Dt.1.9.2004 – Drinking water quality monitoring
10. Mah.Govt.JSP 2004/PK3715 PP11Dt.28.04.2004 – Hydrogeological survey
11. RQP/NGP/328/2005/B dt.01.02.2005 – Indian Bureau of mines for preparation of mine plan, mine
closure plan.
12. SPCB, Odisha No.3091 dt.13.02.2008
13. RSPCB, empanelment of environment consultant & analytical laboratory in continuation to
Board’s circular no. F.14 (3) Corres/RPCB/Plg/3491-3514 dt.14.12.2009 & Dt.25.3.2010 as
testing lab under EPA & Env. Consultant.
14. RSPCB recognition of laboratory for Air pollution studies vide notification dated May 20, 2009 and
published in Rajasthan Gazette Extraordinary dated June 22, 2009
For the organizational statutory requirement the registration numbers are as follows;
1. Company Law Board Registered
2. Provident Fund Registered
3. Professional tax Registered
4. ESIC Registered
5. Service Tax Registered
6. Income Tax - Registered
7. MSMED Registered

12.3 SERVICES OFFERED

Air Yes - Stack and Ambient Air Quality Monitoring,
(Monitoring / Survey / Modeling etc., Survey / Modeling as per MoEF requirements.
Specific gas monitoring like PM 10, PM 2.5,HC, CO,
Pl. specify)
O2, CO2 & VoCs using state of art Microprocessor
based portable kits.
Water : Surface, sea, inland & Yes - Monitoring of Water Environment in EIA
projects, hydrogeological survey and water
Ground water
(Monitoring / Survey / Modeling etc., Pl. Shed development.
specify) Geohydrological Survey
Soil Yes – Monitoring of land environment in EIA
(Analysis, Remediation, Salt water intrusions, Projects.
Water Harvesting etc.)
Plant Yes - The effect of pollutant from various industrial
(Effect of pollution, Treatment Technologies, sectors has been evaluated in terrestrial ecology of
Pollution Indicators etc.) EIA project.
Assessment & impact studies on Yes – Studies on biodiversity has been reported in
Biodiversity (Flora and Fauna) EIA projects.
Municipal Solid Wastes Yes National Productivity Council is utilizing our

(Analysis, Management – Handling, Storage, services for monitoring and analysis of solid waste
Transportation, Treatment and Disposal, Site samples, which includes sampling and analysis of
Identification, remediation, Development/ solid waste samples. Anacon lab can undertake the
Evaluation of Technology etc.) consultancy project on solid waste management for
municipal corporation, resorts and newly developed
cities. Preparation of detailed feasibility report is an
expertise of Anacon lab.
Hazardous Wastes (Quantification, Site Yes – The project on development of landfill site
Assessment, Designing / Monitoring of including Engineering design, Hydrogeological
Treatment Facilities, Technology studies and Environmental quality in respect of the
Assessment etc., Pl. specify) Air, Water and Soil have been successfully
completed for Force Motors (Bajaj Tempo), Kinetic
Motors and Pratibha Syntex, Pithampur, Indore
(MP)
Noise Yes – The monitoring of the Noise Environment in
the Impact zone of the industries and in plant have
(Monitoring/Survey, Modeling etc)
been carried out by Anacon Lab. For 65 EIA study.
Bio-Medical Wastes (Quantification, Site Yes – The survey of Hospital waste management
Assessment, Designing / Monitoring of have been carried out in few cases.
Treatment Facilities
Tech. Assessment etc., Pl. Specify)

Hazardous Chemicals (Site assessment, Yes – The storage of the hazardous chemicals
Inspection of Storages, Major Accident have been assessed in respect of fugitive emissions
Hazards, Preparation / assessment of Safety and risk assessment for Pharmaceutical Industries
Report, risk assessment /Onsite / offsite at Lupin, Mandideep, Bhopal (M.P.). Four dumping
sites developed maxi cap 8000 Tons for
Emergency Plan preparation etc.)
BALCO, Korba, Chhattisgarh.
Plastic Wastes Yes – On the similar line of solid waste
(Management, recycling/reuse Technology management, studies on the plastic waste
evaluation etc.) management could be undertaken by Anacon
Laboratories Pvt. Ltd.
Electronic Waste (Management, No
recycling/reuse, technology evaluation etc.)
Environmental Education/Awareness Yes - Conducted Workshop at Raipur on 14.2.04
(Projects approved/ grants received Theme –Latest Trends in Mining Technical and
/campaigns carried out etc.)
Legislative requirements, 67 participants attended.
Conducted several Environment Awareness
programs for PCB on different topics and also at
Educational institutions/P.G. Departments. College
students along with HOD have visited Anacon
Laboratories Pvt. Ltd., for Educational tour.
Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd., has participated as a
Key participant at CII seminar in the field of mining
industries at Raipur Dt.22.03.06.
Environmental Impact Yes - Successfully completed 105 EIA studies and
48 EIA presented before MoEF & env clearance is
Assessment
granted; remaining 57 presented at State level &
(EIAs carried out/ sector wise expertise in EIA/
the env clearance is granted, till end of 2013.
clearances obtained from MoEF / State
Government etc. )
Environmental Audit/s (Details of the Yes for various types of Industries. Conducted
audits conducted along with client list and water audits for 17 Reserve banks in India
Purposes of such audits)
Energy Audits / Water Yes - Energy Audit for L & T Hirmi, Raipur on STP
to conserve energy. In this exercise saving of the
Audits
40 % energy is suggested.
(Expertise available, list of the clients and
details on such audits)
Environmental Planning & Yes - The special efforts have been put up by
Anacon for Seagram Distilleries Pvt. Ltd., and
Management
Sagar Industries & Distilleries Pvt. Ltd., Nashik for
(Projects undertaken/ expertise for actual field
planning and implementation of EMP. Other
implementation of the EMP)
projects also have been executed on Environmental
Planning and Management.

Others (R&D Projects) Yes – 1.Conducted feasibility studies for pyrite

(State briefly the other activities of your recovery plant for 1000 TPD Cap for GHCL Lignite
organization and the success Stories, if any) mine to reduce Sulphur from 7 % to 2 %
2. Identification of route cause for river bed
drying (300 m width) for Lafarge, Raipur
12.4 FACILITIES
Anacon offer vide range of services in indoor and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization
in the field of Environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team of
professionals in the fields of Science, Engineering, Ecology, Meteorology, Social Planning, Geo &
Hydro-geology, and Environmental Planning.
Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as Respirable Dust Samplers, PM 2.5 Automatic
Weather Monitoring Stations, Stack Monitoring Kits, Personal Samplers, Noise Meters, Portable
Water Kits etc, the other major specialized equipment include:
Anacon Laboratories has well equipped with sophisticated instrument such as Thermo ICAP 6300
ICP UK make – OES Radial View Spectrometer with Standard Gas System for analysis of heavy
metals, required for the analysis of water (130 parameters as per various categories of IS stds. for
water ), waste water & Hazardous waste. + Gas Chromatograph.
We have expanded and commissioned biggest state of art Environment and Food testing laboratory
in Central India region at Butibori Food Park, Nagpur at Plot Nos. FP 34, 35 equipped with highly
sophisticated imported equipments, like GC MSMS, LC MSMS (both triple quad), HPLC, ICP, AAS,
UV–Vis, FTIR etc for chemical analysis for the samples viz. Water, Air, Chemical, Fertilizer, Mineral,
Metal, Coal, Food, Agricultural Products, Pesticides, Insecticides, Ores, etc., kindly visit us at
www.anaconlaboratories.com
Anacon Laboratories has established the facilities for Ambient Air Quality by using US Make
Meteorological Station and High Volume Sampler. Stack Monitoring is also undertaken. The
methodology for estimation of SO2, NOx, SPM, PM10, P.M.2.5 has been established along with project
specific pollutant e.g. HM, CO, O3, CO2 VOC, HC etc.
12.5 QUALITY SYSTEMS
12.5.1 National Accreditation Board for Testing & Calibration Laboratories (NABL) has granted us
Accreditation vide Certificate No.T-01550 w.e.f. 04.10.2012 valid up to 03.10.2016
(NABL for 900 parameters)
12.6 ACHIEVEMENTS
1. Anacon laboratory recognized under Environment Protection (EP) Act by GOI in 2007,
Environment Division with its best mind power and industrial knowledge competency that
allows it to compare with the standards set by GOI as a Competent Organization.

2. Anacon has organized 10 days training program for the FDA officials, Government of
Maharashtra from 16.08.2010 to 27.08.2010 on newly announced “Food Safety & Standards
Act, 2011”
3. Anacon has received “MSME National Award 2010” for “Outstanding Entrepreneurship
Performance in service sector” on 2nd Sept. 2011 at Vigyan Bhawan, New Delhi.
4. Anacon has signed MOU with Nagpur University, Nagpur to Promote Academic and Research
Cooperation in Feb’2012. Under this program Post Graduate i.e. post M.Sc., M.Tech.
students professional training programs and R&D projects are undertaken on regular basis to
meet Industry – Academia requirements for human resource development.
5. Dr. (Mrs.) Sugandha Garway, Director, ANACON Laboratories Pvt. Ltd. has been selected on
the panel of the National food standards harmonization / development process for our country
by Food Safety Authority of India.
6. Anacon has signed the MOU dtd.26th Dec. 2012 for soil testing for a period of two years from
Agriculture Department, Government of Chhattisgarh, season wise soil samples are collected
for each farm and analyzed, fertilizer dosing is advised on appropriate time in order to
increase crop yield and Soil health cards are issued to every farmer of different districts of
Chhattisgarh.
7. Anacon has executed the work of water Quality monitoring to maintain overall residual
chlorine in the entire city of Nagpur for period from 16.06.2007 to 31.01.2012 and in the
period Anacon team has worked sincerely to the best of our ability by utilizing all Technical
expertise to the entire satisfaction of the Municipal authorities concerned. Anacon has
delivered consistent results from last 5 years as a result which water borne deceases i.e.
jaundice & gastro have been reduced to the extent of 70 %. Nagpur Municipal Corporation is
leading in India for successful implementation of 24 x 7 water supply scheme under JNURM
scheme, GOI and Anacon contributed for improving water quality in the entire city of Nagpur.
Anacon has also designed & developed dedicated website for tracking the Water quality of
the city.
8. Anacon has executed the work of "Source apportionment studies "of National Environmental
Engineering Research Institute (NEERI), Nagpur vide Order No. Outsource/S.A (APC)/2007
GL dt.22.01.2008 & Order No. Outsource/S.A (APC)/2007-GL dt.02.05.2008 for 236 Air Dust
Samples for 33 elements using ICPA instrument, all results submitted as per Internationally
approved procedures and standards, and also Quality Assurance & Quality Control (QAQC)
procedures were followed strictly during analysis.
9. Anacon Lab is executing the project of Rajiv Gandhi Science and Technology commission,
Government of Maharashtra, for" Evaluation studies of water purification systems in 16
schools of the rural areas nearby Nagpur.
10. Anacon has completed the TRANSIT SURVEY of SEONATH RIVER, M/s Lafarge India Pvt.
Ltd., Sonadih Cement Plant, Raipur (C.G.) Sonadih river width 300 M, bed was drying, route
cause analysis was identified and corrective measures suggested were implemented by
Lafarge and the solution was provided successfully.
11. Training has been imparted on "Pesticide residue analysis" to scientists of National Test
House, Mumbai & "Coal analysis" to scientists of NALCO, Orissa.

12. ANACON has signed MOU with Nagpur University & Kada College Ahmednagar to undertake
joint collaborative projects, imparting training to students & staff & to provide incubation
centre for research projects undertaken by academicians.
13. ANACON has also completed mapping of water quality of 2 districts of Madhya Pradesh.



Annexure-I ToR Letter AN-I-1




LIST OF INSTRUMENTS USED FOR SAMPLING & ANALYSIS
Sr. Instrument Name Make Model Parameters

No.
1 Respirable particulate Aero Vironment RDS- 9000 RPM, SPM, SO2, NOX
sampler Engineers Inc.
2. Weather Technologies data Weather WDL – 1002 Wind speed, direction,
acquisition system technologies temperature, relative
microprocessor system for (India Pvt. Ltd., humidity, rain gauge &
automatic monitoring of Pune) solar radiation.
weather parameters.
3. Spectrophotometer Systronics 166 Spectrophotometric
Methods.
4. Inductive Coupled Plasma Thermo Electronics 6300 Metal elements in air,
analyser (ICPA- AE 5) UK water, soil samples.
5. Gas Chromatograph Ashco Neon Pro PAH, organic
compounds.
6. Sound level meter Lutron, Taiwan SL – 4001 Noise Monitoring
7. pH Meter Systronics 361 pH values in water and

soil samples.
8. Conductivity meter Systronics 308 Conductivity
measurement in water
samples.
9. Turbidity Meter Systronics 132 Turbidity Measurement
in water samples
10. Flame Photometer Systronics 128 Sodium Potassium in
Water and Soil analysis.
11. Ion-selective electrode meter Thermo Electronics Orion star Specific Ions
UK measurement in Water
and Soil analysis.
Annexure-II Environmental Standards AN-II-1

AIR ENVIRONMENT

MONITORED PARAMETERS AND FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING
Parameters Sampling frequency

Suspended Particulate Matter 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months
Respirable Particulate Matter 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months
PM2.5 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months
Ozone 8 hourly samples for 24 hour twice a week for three months
Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 hourly samples for 24 hour twice a week for three months
TECHNIQUES USED FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING
Sr. Parameter Techniques Technical Minimum

No. Protocol Reportable Value
(µg/m3)
1 Total Suspended Respirable Dust Sampler IS - 5182 5.0
Particulate Matter (Gravimetric Method) (Part – IV)
2 Respirable Respirable Dust Sampler IS - 5182 5.0
Particulate Matter (Gravimetric Method) (Part – IV)
3 PM 2.5 Fine particulate sampler using IS - 5182 5.0
WINS Impactor with low flow rate (Part – IV)
16.7 lpm (Envirotech)
4 Sulphur Dioxide Modified West and Gaeke IS - 5182 4.0
Method (Part – II)
5 Oxide of Nitrogen Jacob &Hochheiser Method IS - 5182 4.0
(Part –VI)
6 Ozone Spectrophotometer ASTM – 1.0
D5011-92
7 Carbon Monoxide Gas Chromatography Method IS - 5182 12.5
(Part – X)
8 Mercury ICP-AAS IS - 5182 1.0
(Part - X)

Sr. Parameter Techniques Technical Minimum

No. Protocol Reportable Value
(µg/m3)
9 VOC Absorption / Adsorption over - -
Char Coal By GCMS
10 Hydro Carbon Flame Ionization Detection - 0.05 ppm
(Methane, Non
Methane & THC)
SENSITIVITY OF METEOROLOGY MONITORING EQUIPMENT
Sr. No. Sensor Sensitivity
1 Wind Speed Sensor + 0.02 m/s
2 Wind Direction Sensor + 3 degrees
3 Temperature Sensor ± 0.2 ° C

4 Relative Humidity ± 3%
5 Rain gauge 0.5mm
6 Solar radiation 4mV/KW/m2

WATER ENVIRONMENT
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)

FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
Sr. Parameter Sample Collection Sample Storage / Preservation

No. Size
1 pH Grab sampling Polyurithane 50 ml On site analysis
Plastic / glass container
2 Electrical Grab sampling Polyurithane 50 ml On site analysis
Conductivity Plastic / glass container
3 Total Suspended Grab sampling Polyurithane 100 ml Refrigeration, can be
Solids (TSS) Plastic / glass container stored for 7 days
4 Total Dissolved Grab sampling Polyurithane 100 ml Refrigeration, can be
Solids (TDS) Plastic / glass container stored for 7 days
5 COD Grab sampling Polyurithane 100 ml Add H2SO4 to pH <2,
Plastic / glass container refrigeration; 28 days
6 Residual Chlorine Grab sampling Polyurithane 50 ml On site analysis
7 Hardness Grab sampling Polyurithane 100 ml Add HNO3 to pH<2,
Plastic / glass container refrigeration; 6 months
8 Chlorides Grab sampling Polyurithane 50 ml Not required; 28 days
9 Sulphates Grab sampling Polyurithane 100 ml Refrigeration; 28 days
10 Sodium, Potassium Polyurithane Plastic / glass 100 ml Not required; 6 months
container
11 Nitrates Polyurithane Plastic / glass 100 ml Refrigeration; 48 hrs
container
12 Fluorides Polyurithane Plastic / glass 100 ml Not required; 28 days
container
13 Alkalinity Polyurithane Plastic / glass 100 ml Refrigeration; 14 days
container
14 Ammonia Polyurithane Plastic / glass 100 ml Add HNO3 to pH<2,
container refrigeration; 28 days
15 Hexavalent Polyurithane Plastic / glass 100 ml Grab sample;
Chromium, Cr+6 container rinse with 1 : 1 refrigeration; 24 hrs
HNO3
16 Heavy Metals ( Hg, Polyurithane Plastic / glass
500 ml Filter, Add HNO3 to pH<2;
Cd, Cr, Cu, Fe, Zn, container 1 : 1 HNO3 Grab sample; 6 months
Pb, etc.)
Source : Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, Published by APHA,
AWWA, WEF 19th Edition, 1995.
ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR WATER AND

WASTEWATER SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
Sr. No. Parameter Method

1 pH APHA – 4500 – H+
2 Colour APHA – 2120 C
3 Odour IS : 3025, Part- 4
4 Temperature APHA – 2550 B
5 Dissolved Oxygen APHA – 4500 O

6 BOD, 3 day @ 27° C APHA – 5210 B

7 COD APHA – 5220 C
8 Electrical Conductivity APHA – 2510 B
9 Turbidity APHA – 2130 B
10 Chlorides APHA – 4500 CI
11 Fluorides APHA – 4500 F
12 Phosphates APHA – 4500 P
13 Cyanides APHA – 4500 CN
14 NH3 -N APHA – 4500 NH3
15 Nitrate NO3-N APHA – 4500 NO3
16 NO2-N APHA – 4500 NO2
17 Phenolic Compounds APHA – 5530 D
18 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) APHA – 2540 C
19 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) APHA – 2540 D
20 Total Hardness APHA – 2340 C
21 Sulphates as SO4 APHA – 4500 SO4 -2
22 Arsenic APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3114 B/ APHA –3500 AS
23 Calcium APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 CA
24 Magnesium APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Mg
25 Sodium APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Na
26 Potassium APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 K
27 Manganese APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Mn
28 Barium APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Ba
29 Mercury APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Hg
30 Silver APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Ag
31 Selenium APHA – 3120 B/ APHA – 3114 B/ APHA –3500 Se
32 Lead APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Pb
33 Copper APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Cu
34 Cadmium APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Cd
35 Iron APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Fe
36 Zinc APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Zn
37 Nickel APHA – 3120 B/ APHA –3500 Ni
38 Boron APHA – 4500 B
39 Coliform Organisms APHA – 9215 D
40 Total Organic Carbon APHA – 5310 B
41 Oil and Grease APHA – 5220 B
42 Pesticides APHA – 6630 D
43 PAH APHA – 6440 C
44 Alkalinity as CaCO3 APHA – 2320 B
GROUND WATER QUALITY STANDARDS

Sr. No. Parameter Units Limits of IS : 10500 : 1993
1 pH - 6.5 to 8.5 (NR)
2 Color Hazen 5 (25)
3 Taste - Agreeable
4 Odor - UO
5 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 4 minimum
6 Electrical Conductivity μS/cm #
7 Turbidity NTU 5 (10)
8 Chlorides mg/l 250 (1000)

Sr. No. Parameter Units Limits of IS : 10500 : 1993

9 Fluorides mg/l 1.0(1.5)
10 Cyanides mg/l 0.05 (NR)
11 Nitrate NO3-N mg/l 45(NR)
12 Phenolic Compounds mg/l 0.005
13 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l 500 (2000)
14 Total Hardness mg/l 300(600)
15 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 200(400)
16 Arsenic mg/l 0.01(NR)
17 Calcium mg/l 75(200)
18 Magnesium mg/l 30(100)
19 Sodium mg/l #
20 Potassium mg/l #
21 Manganese mg/l 0.1(0.3)
22 Mercury mg/l 0.001(NR)
23 Selenium mg/l 0.01(NR)
24 Lead mg/l 0.05(NR)
25 Copper mg/l 0.05(1.5)
26 Cadmium mg/l 0.01(NR)
27 Iron mg/l 0.3(1.0)
28 Zinc mg/l 5(15)
29 Boron mg/l 1
30 E.coli - Absent
31 Coliform Organisms MPN/100ml 10
32 Oil and Grease mg/l 0.1
33 Pesticides mg/l absent
34 Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 200(600)
35 Chromium mg/l 0.05(NR)
36 Aluminium mg/l 0.03 (0.2)
37 Phenolic Compounds mg/l 0.001(0.002)
38 Anioionic Detergents mg/l 0.2(1.0)
39 Mineral Oil mg/l 0.01(0.03)
Note : #: Limits not specified, Ag : agreeable, UO : Un- objectionable.
(): Permissible limit in absence of alternative source.
WASTE WATER DISCHARGE STANDARDS

Sr. No. List of Parameter Units Standard
(On Land Irrigation)
1 Color and Odor -- All efforts should be made to remove
colour and upleasunt odor as far as
pracativable.
2 Suspended Solids mg/l 200
3 Particle size of Suspended -- Shall pass 850 micron IS sieve.
Solids
4 pH value -- 5.5 to 9.0
5 Temperature °C #
6 Oil and grease, Max. mg/l 10.0
7 Total residual chlorine, Max. mg/l #

Sr. No. List of Parameter Units Standard

(On Land Irrigation)
8 Ammonical nitrogen (as N), mg/l #
Max.
9 Total Kjeldhal nitrogen (as N), mg/l #
Max.
10 Freeammonia (as NH3), Max. mg/l #
11 Biochemical Oxygen Demand mg/l 100.0
(3 days at 27°C)
12 Chemical Oxygen Demand, mg/l #
Max.
13 Arsenic (as As), Max. mg/l 0.2
14 Mercury (as Hg), Max. mg/l #
15 Lead (as Pb), Max. mg/l #
16 Cadmium (as Cd), Max. mg/l #
17 Hexavalent chromium (as Cr mg/l #
+6), Max.
18 Total chromium (as Cr), Max. mg/l #
19 Copper (as Cu), Max. mg/l #
20 Zinc (as Zn), Max. mg/l #
21 Selenium (as Se), Max. mg/l #
22 Nickel (as Ni), Max. mg/l #
23 Cyanide (as CN), Max. mg/l 0.2
24 Fluorides as F mg/l #
25 Dissolved phosphates (as P), mg/l #
Max.
26 Sulphides (as S), Max. mg/l #
27 Phenolic compounds (as mg/l #
C2,H5,OH), Max.
28 Radioactive Materials mg/1 #
Alpha Emitters, Max. mC/ml 10-7
Beta Emitters, Max. mC/ml 10-7
29 Bio-assay test -- 90% survival of fish after 96 hours in
100% effluent.
30 Manganese (as Mn) mg/l #
31 Iron (as Fe) mg/l #
32 Vanadium (as V) mg/l #
33 Nitrate nitrogen mg/l #
Note: 1. # Limits not specified

2. These standards shall be applicable for industries, operations or processes other than
those industries, operations or process for which standards have been specified in Schedule
of the Environment Protection Rules, 1989.

SOIL ENVIRONMENT
ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR SOIL ANALYSIS
Sr. No. Parameter Method

1 Grain size distribution Sieve analysis (D 422 – 63)
2 Textural classification Chart developed by Public Roads Administration
3 Bulk density Sand replacement, core cutter
4 Sodium absorption ratio Flame colourimetric (D 1428-82)
5 pH pH meter (D 1293-84)
6 Electrical conductivity Conductivity meter (D 1125-82)
7 Nitrogen Kjeldahl distillation ( D 3590-84)
8 Phosphorus Molybdenum blue, colourimetric (D 515-82)
9 Potassium Flame photometric ( D 1428-82)
10 Copper AAS ( D 1688-84)
11 Iron AAS ( D 1068-84)
12 Zinc AAS ( D 1691-84)
13 Boron Surcumin, colourimetric (D 3082-79)
14 Chlorides Argentometric (D 512-81 Rev 85)
SOIL ANALYSIS PARAMETER AND UNIT
Sr. No. Parameter Units

1 pH (1 : 5 Aq. Extract) ---
2 Conductivity (1 : 5 Aq. Extract) µS/cm
3 Texture ---
4 Sand %
5 Silt %
6 Clay %
7 Bulk Density mg/cc
8 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca mg/kg
9 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg mg/kg
10 Exchangeable Sodium as Na mg/kg
11 Available Pottassium as K Kg/ ha
12 Available Phosphorous as P Kg/ ha
13 Available Nitrogen as N Kg/ ha
14 Organic Matter %
15 Organic Carbon %
16 Water Soluble Chloride as Cl+ mg/kg
17 Water Soluble Sulphate as SO4 mg/kg
18 Sodium Absorption Ratio ---
19 Aluminium %
20 Total Iron %
21 Manganese mg/kg
22 Zinc mg/kg
23 Boron mg/kg

STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION

Sr. No. Soil Test Classification
1 pH < 4.5 Extremely acidic
4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic
5.51- 6.00 moderately acidic
6.01- 6.50 slightly acidic
6.51- 7.30 Neutral
7.31- 7.80 slightly alkaline
7.81- 8.50 moderately alkaline
8.51- 9.0 strongly alkaline
9.01 very strongly alkaline
2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity ( µmhos/cm) Upto 1.00 Average
(1ppm = 640 µmhos/cm) 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination
2.01-3.00 harmful to crops
(sensitive to salts)
3 Organic Carbon (%) Upto 0.2 : very less
0.21-0.4 : less
0.41-0.5 medium,
0.51- 0.8: on an average sufficient
>1.0 more than sufficient
4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Upto 50 very less
51-100 less
101-150 good
151-300 Better
>300 sufficient
5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Upto 0.2 : very less
16-30 less
31-50 medium,
51-65 on an average sufficient
66-80 sufficient
>80 more than sufficient
6 Potash (Kg/ha) 0-120 very less
120-180 less
181-240 medium,
241-300 average
301-360 Better
>360 more than sufficient

NOISE ENVIRONMENT
AMBIENT NOISE STANDARDS

Area Code Category of Area Noise Level dB (A) eg
Day time * Night Time
A Industrial Area 75 70
B Commercial Area 65 55
C Residential Area 55 45
D Silence Zone ** 50 40
Note :*Day time is from 6 am to 10 pm.
** Silence zone is defined as area up to 100-m around premises of hospitals, educational institutions
and courts. Use of vehicle horns, loud speakers and bursting of crackers are banned in these zones.
STANDARD FOR OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE

Total Time of Exposure per Day in Hours Sound Pressure Level in dB (A)
(Continuous or Short term Exposure)
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
3/2 102
1 105
¾ 107
½ 110
¼ 115
Never >115
Note:
1. No exposure in excess of 115 dB (A) is to be permitted.
For any period of exposure falling in between any figure and the next higher or lower figure as
indicated in column (1), the permissible level is to be determined by extrapolation on a proportionate
scale.

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-1) Project site

Date PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOX CO Ozone NH3
3 3 3 3 3
µg/m µg/m µg/m µg/m mg/m μg/m3 μg/m3
01/12/2014 51.3 16.9 9.4 10.3 0.181 17.3 12.7
02/12/2014 50.6 16.7 9.9 11.8 0.186 17.6 13.1
08/12/2014 41.1 13.7 9.2 10.9 0.194 17.2 14.6
09/12/2014 52.3 17.4 10.6 13.2 0.225 18.1 13.2
15/12/2014 45.6 14.7 12.6 12.4 0.189 15.3 13.5
16/12/2014 47.2 14.9 9.1 15.6 0.191 17.1 15.6
22/12/2014 57.2 18.4 9.5 24.9 0.197 17.6 19.5
23/12/2014 50.4 14.2 8.6 17.5 0.202 16.3 17.3
29/12/2014 52.3 15.7 10.2 15.3 0.211 15.5 12.9
30/12/2014 51.6 15.6 9.4 16.1 0.199 15.2 14.6
05/01/2015 45.9 16.8 9.7 15.8 0.207 11.4 14.2
06/01/2015 46.2 13.6 8.1 15.1 0.209 13.2 13.2
12/01/2015 42.6 11.5 7.3 16.2 0.189 14.6 15.6
13/01/2015 51.2 16.9 10.2 16.8 0.183 15.5 15.9
19/01/2015 50.6 14.2 9.6 16.1 0.192 15.1 15.2
20/01/2015 54.3 17.1 9.2 16.5 0.187 15.9 16.2
26/01/2015 52.1 15.8 8.2 16.4 0.195 15.2 16.1
27/01/2015 51.8 15.7 8.4 17.1 0.206 15.4 15.4
02/02/2015 53.4 16.4 10.6 16.1 0.193 14.6 15.2
03/02/2015 49.6 14.8 11.2 15.5 0.197 16.6 15.9
09/02/2015 47.2 14.2 9.5 15.9 0.182 15.2 15.8
10/02/2015 45.6 15.1 9.1 15.2 0.193 15.4 15.2
16/02/2015 51.2 15.2 8.6 16.6 0.203 17.2 16.5
17/02/2015 51.9 15.6 8.2 16.6 0.199 16.5 16.1
23/02/2015 53.6 16.2 10.1 15.3 0.182 15.5 17.2
24/02/2015 50.9 15.3 11.5 16.2 0.197 16.3 15.3
Min 41.1 11.5 7.3 10.3 0.181 11.4 12.7
Max 57.2 18.4 12.6 24.9 0.225 18.1 19.5
Avg 49.9 15.5 9.5 15.6 0.2 15.8 15.2
98th 55.75 17.90 12.05 21.20 0.22 17.85 18.40
Annexure-III AAQ Results AN-III-1

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-2) Khadki village

3 3 3 3 3
01/12/2014 57.7 22.7 8.1 11.8 0.237 12.7 8.2
02/12/2014 61.4 19.5 10.2 13.3 0.242 13 8.6
08/12/2014 59.2 17.4 10.5 12.4 0.25 12.6 10.1
09/12/2014 58.9 22.8 8.9 14.7 0.281 13.5 8.7
15/12/2014 60.5 20.1 9.9 13.9 0.245 10.7 9
16/12/2014 56.7 23 9.4 17.1 0.247 12.5 11.1
22/12/2014 54.3 21.7 9 26.4 0.253 13 15
23/12/2014 52.7 21.6 10.9 19 0.258 11.7 12.8
29/12/2014 58.3 22.8 12.3 16.8 0.267 10.9 8.4
30/12/2014 59 22.6 10.2 17.6 0.255 10.6 10.1
05/01/2015 53 19.6 10.7 17.3 0.263 6.8 9.7
06/01/2015 53.3 23.3 10 16.6 0.265 8.6 8.7
12/01/2015 49.7 20.6 13.4 17.7 0.245 10 11.1
13/01/2015 58.3 20.8 11 18.3 0.239 10.9 11.4
19/01/2015 58.4 24.3 10.4 17.6 0.248 10.5 10.7
20/01/2015 57.7 20.1 10 18 0.243 11.3 11.7
26/01/2015 48.2 21.6 9 17.9 0.251 10.6 11.6
27/01/2015 59.4 21.5 9.2 18.6 0.262 10.8 10.9
02/02/2015 52.7 22.3 11.4 17.6 0.249 10 10.7
03/02/2015 54.3 20.7 12 17 0.253 12 11.4
09/02/2015 64.3 20.1 10.3 17.4 0.238 10.6 11.3
10/02/2015 57.5 21 9.9 16.7 0.249 10.8 10.7
16/02/2015 59.4 21.1 10.3 18.1 0.259 12.6 12
17/02/2015 58.7 21.5 9.4 18.1 0.255 11.9 11.6
23/02/2015 60.7 22.1 11 16.8 0.238 10.9 12.7
24/02/2015 58 21.2 11.4 17.7 0.253 11.7 10.8
Min 48.2 17.4 8.1 11.8 0.237 6.8 8.2
Max 64.3 24.3 13.4 26.4 0.281 13.5 15
Avg 57.0 21.4 10.3 17.1 0.3 11.2 10.7
98th 62.85 23.80 12.85 22.70 0.27 13.25 13.90

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-3)Dongargaon

3 3 3 3 3
01/12/2014 40.2 15.2 9.4 10.1 0.179 11.8 10.6
02/12/2014 39.5 15 9.7 6.1 0.158 12.1 9.5
08/12/2014 30 12 8.1 6.5 0.166 11.7 11
09/12/2014 41.2 15.7 7.3 7.5 0.197 12.6 9.6
15/12/2014 34.5 13 10.2 6.7 0.161 5.9 9.9
16/12/2014 36.1 13.2 9.6 9.9 0.163 11.6 12
22/12/2014 46.1 16.7 9.2 19.2 0.169 12.1 15.9
23/12/2014 39.3 12.5 8.2 11.8 0.174 10.8 13.7
29/12/2014 41.2 14 8.4 9.6 0.183 10 9.3
30/12/2014 40.5 13.9 9.4 10.4 0.171 9.7 11
05/01/2015 34.8 15.1 9.9 11.3 0.153 9.8 9.1
06/01/2015 35.1 11.9 9.2 9.4 0.181 7.7 9.6
12/01/2015 31.5 9.8 10.6 10.5 0.161 9.1 12
13/01/2015 40.1 15.2 12.6 11.1 0.155 10 12.3
19/01/2015 39.5 12.5 9.1 10.4 0.164 9.6 11.6
20/01/2015 43.2 15.4 9.5 10.8 0.159 10.4 12.6
26/01/2015 41 14.1 8.6 10.7 0.167 9.7 12.5
27/01/2015 40.7 14 10.2 11.4 0.178 9.9 11.8
02/02/2015 42.3 14.7 10.6 10.4 0.165 9.1 11.6
03/02/2015 38.5 13.1 11.2 9.8 0.169 11.1 12.3
09/02/2015 36.1 12.5 9.5 10.2 0.154 9.7 12.2
10/02/2015 34.5 13.4 9.1 9.5 0.165 9.9 11.6
16/02/2015 40.1 13.5 8.6 10.9 0.175 11.7 12.9
17/02/2015 40.8 13.9 8.2 10.9 0.171 11 12.5
23/02/2015 42.5 14.5 10.1 9.6 0.154 10 13.6
24/02/2015 39.8 13.6 11.5 10.5 0.169 10.8 11.7
Min 30.0 9.8 7.3 6.1 0.153 5.9 9.1
Max 46.1 16.7 12.6 19.2 0.197 12.6 15.9
Avg 38.8 13.8 9.5 10.2 0.2 10.3 11.6
98th 44.65 16.20 12.05 15.50 0.19 12.35 14.80

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-4) Ajangaon

3 3 3 3 3
01/12/2014 49.5 17.5 7.4 7.1 0.194 14.3 11.3
02/12/2014 53.2 14.3 9.5 8.6 0.199 14.6 11.7
08/12/2014 51 12.2 9.8 7.7 0.207 14.2 13.2
09/12/2014 50.7 17.6 8.2 10 0.238 15.1 11.8
15/12/2014 52.3 14.9 9.2 9.2 0.202 12.3 12.1
16/12/2014 48.5 17.8 8.7 12.4 0.204 14.1 14.2
22/12/2014 46.1 16.5 8.3 21.7 0.21 14.6 18.1
23/12/2014 44.5 16.4 10.2 14.3 0.215 13.3 15.9
29/12/2014 50.1 17.6 11.6 12.1 0.224 12.5 11.5
30/12/2014 50.8 17.4 9.5 12.9 0.212 12.2 13.2
05/01/2015 44.8 14.4 10 12.6 0.22 8.4 12.8
06/01/2015 45.1 18.1 9.3 11.9 0.222 10.2 11.8
12/01/2015 41.5 15.4 12.7 13 0.202 11.6 14.2
13/01/2015 50.1 15.6 10.3 13.6 0.196 12.5 14.5
19/01/2015 50.2 19.1 9.7 12.9 0.205 12.1 13.8
20/01/2015 49.5 14.9 9.3 13.3 0.2 12.9 14.8
26/01/2015 40 16.4 8.3 13.2 0.208 12.2 14.7
27/01/2015 51.2 16.3 8.5 13.9 0.219 12.4 14
02/02/2015 44.5 17.1 10.7 12.9 0.206 11.6 13.8
03/02/2015 46.1 15.5 11.3 12.3 0.21 13.6 14.5
09/02/2015 56.1 14.9 9.6 12.7 0.195 12.2 14.4
10/02/2015 49.3 15.8 9.2 12 0.206 12.4 13.8
16/02/2015 51.2 15.9 9.6 13.4 0.216 14.2 15.1
17/02/2015 50.5 16.3 8.7 13.4 0.212 13.5 14.7
23/02/2015 52.5 16.9 10.3 12.1 0.195 12.5 15.8
24/02/2015 49.8 16 10.7 13 0.21 13.3 13.9
Min 40 12.2 7.4 7.1 0.194 8.4 11.3
Max 56.1 19.1 12.7 21.7 0.238 15.1 18.1
Avg 48.8 16.2 9.6 12.4 0.2 12.8 13.8
98th 54.65 18.60 12.15 18.00 0.23 14.85 17.00

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-5) Khapri Village

3 3 3 3 3 3
µg/m µg/m µg/m µg/m mg/m μg/m3 μg/m
03/12/2014 44.9 13.45 12.29 12.33 0.19 12.9 22.0
04/12/2014 51.8 16.2 12.31 11.98 0.19 13.1 21.6
10/12/2014 58.3 16.8 13.56 11.46 0.21 14.6 25.0
11/12/2014 51.2 14.6 13.49 11.78 0.19 16.2 26.0
17/12/2014 58.6 14.3 13.78 11.06 0.18 16.9 28.0
18/12/2014 53.4 15.9 13.46 11.49 0.19 17.2 27.0
24/12/2014 60.8 16.3 13.78 11.46 0.18 18.1 30.0
25/12/2014 59.7 15.7 14.01 11.08 0.2 17.3 31.0
31/12/2014 64.8 17.2 14.09 10.79 0.21 16.2 30.0
01/01/2015 59.7 16.4 14.43 10.49 0.22 16.9 36.0
07/01/2015 54.8 15.2 12.97 10.46 0.21 18.5 35.0
08/01/2015 50.3 15.5 12.45 10.29 0.19 17.4 33.0
14/01/2015 57.9 14.6 13.45 11.00 0.19 16.3 25.0
15/01/2015 52.2 14.1 13.98 11.23 0.21 17.8 27.0
21/01/2015 57.3 15.2 13.49 11.56 0.21 18.3 27.0
22/01/2015 54.7 15.3 13.03 11.45 0.21 19.2 28.0
28/01/2015 61.8 17.23 13.49 11.49 0.19 19.9 32.0
29/01/2015 59.7 15.5 14.16 11.46 0.21 20.1 32.0
04/02/2015 53.0 14.8 14.19 11.00 0.21 21.6 30.0
05/02/2015 54.0 15.6 14.93 11.46 0.21 20.5 33.0
11/02/2015 52.0 14.7 14.09 11.09 0.22 19.7 34.0
12/02/2015 55.0 14.9 13.85 12.09 0.19 21.6 36.0
18/02/2015 44.9 14.1 13.49 12.04 0.21 20.5 33.0
19/02/2015 64.8 14.5 14.09 12.08 0.21 19.7 36.0
25/02/2015 51.2 15.2 13.5 12.12 0.18 18.1 30.5
26/02/2015 60.2 15.5 14.5 11.2 0.19 17.6 29.2
Min 44.9 13.45 12.29 10.29 0.18 12.9 21.60
Max 64.8 17.23 14.93 12.33 0.22 21.6 36.00
Avg 55.7 15.34 13.6 11.4 0.200 17.9 29.90
98th 64.8 17.2 14.7 12.2 0.220 21.6 36.00

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-6) Sukali

3 3 3 3 3
03/12/2014 39.0 9.9 4.9 9.2 0.044 18.2 22.9
04/12/2014 44.4 11.0 4.8 12.7 0.041 20.9 32.1
10/12/2014 39.3 9.5 8.1 11.0 0.059 22.1 35.9
11/12/2014 47.8 17.2 6.6 13.2 0.071 19.3 29.7
17/12/2014 40.1 15.5 7.3 13.1 0.042 19.0 26.0
18/12/2014 44.1 11.6 7.0 9.2 0.049 20.1 37.7
24/12/2014 46.7 9.6 6.9 13.6 0.052 18.6 42.0
25/12/2014 51.0 12.2 8.0 15.9 0.056 18.2 22.4
31/12/2014 53.5 17.1 4.9 14.1 0.064 19.5 27.5
01/01/2015 54.0 17.8 5.5 16.2 0.057 22.3 32.1
07/01/2015 51.2 13.3 5.1 16.5 0.072 18.5 33.9
08/01/2015 39.6 9.5 6.5 15.6 0.070 21.5 40.0
14/01/2015 52.3 11.1 6.2 13.1 0.044 20.9 42.0
15/01/2015 53.9 15.6 6.9 16.8 0.057 19.9 30.6
21/01/2015 50.2 11.9 7.1 15.6 0.055 21.6 29.3
22/01/2015 48.8 17.6 4.8 13.7 0.087 22.3 35.7
28/01/2015 50.0 13.1 8.4 16.2 0.046 20.6 40.3
29/01/2015 53.4 15.5 6.7 15.1 0.064 21.0 41.9
04/02/2015 52.0 18.2 6.5 14.1 0.070 20.0 25.0
05/02/2015 50.1 15.8 4.9 14.7 0.042 21.9 42.1
11/02/2015 48.0 16.0 6.7 15.6 0.053 22.4 29.5
12/02/2015 49.0 17.5 8.1 16.5 0.067 21.7 27.3
18/02/2015 50.0 18.2 6.8 16.5 0.055 19.2 30.1
19/02/2015 50.0 16.7 6.5 14.3 0.079 20.1 27.0
25/02/2015 45.1 16.2 6.5 15.3 0.060 18.7 29.0
26/02/2015 49.0 15.7 7.7 14.4 0.061 19.1 27.8
Min 39.0 9.5 4.8 9.2 0.041 18.2 22.4
Max 54.0 18.2 8.4 16.8 0.087 22.4 42.1
Avg 48.2 14.4 6.5 14.3 0.058 20.3 32.3
98th 54.0 18.2 8.3 16.7 0.083 22.4 42.1

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-7) Tarsi

3 3 3 3 3
03/12/2014 53 14.9 5.7 18.2 0.087 22.0 23.0
04/12/2014 57 16.2 6.8 21.6 0.103 22.0 24.0
10/12/2014 55 18.3 6.5 18.5 0.089 23.0 26.0
11/12/2014 54 18.0 6.6 18.6 0.089 24.0 24.0
17/12/2014 55 18.3 7.2 18.9 0.090 24.0 25.0
18/12/2014 53 17.6 7.5 19.1 0.097 24.0 23.0
24/12/2014 54 18.0 10.2 19.5 0.088 25.0 25.0
25/12/2014 56 18.6 9.7 19.5 0.090 39.0 30.0
31/12/2014 56 18.6 10.2 18.6 0.091 30.0 30.0
01/01/2015 54 18.0 10.6 18.9 0.091 32.0 24.0
07/01/2015 57 19.0 6.6 18.9 0.095 36.0 25.0
08/01/2015 57 19.0 6.9 20.3 0.097 34.0 25.0
14/01/2015 58 19.3 7.2 20.5 0.089 30.0 25.0
15/01/2015 55 18.3 7.5 21.2 0.090 30.0 27.0
21/01/2015 56 18.6 7.3 20.2 0.102 32.0 27.0
22/01/2015 55 18.3 7.4 20.8 0.100 31.0 28.0
28/01/2015 54 18.0 8.5 18.6 0.098 33.0 32.0
29/01/2015 57 19.0 8.6 18.9 0.091 31.0 32.0
04/02/2015 56 18.6 8.9 19.3 0.090 25.0 30.0
05/02/2015 53 17.6 7.1 19.9 0.096 28.0 30.0
11/02/2015 57 19.0 7.5 20.5 0.092 29.0 32.0
12/02/2015 56 18.6 7.5 21.3 0.090 43.0 39.0
18/02/2015 55 18.3 7.5 20.6 0.089 41.0 40.0
19/02/2015 57 19.0 8.5 18.2 0.088 40.0 35.0
25/02/2015 57 19.0 8.8 19.3 0.087 31.0 30.0
26/02/2015 56 18.6 8.9 20.2 0.092 33.0 24.0
Min 53.0 14.9 5.7 18.2 0.087 22.0 23.0
Max 58.0 19.3 10.6 21.6 0.103 43.0 40.0
Avg 55.5 18.3 7.9 19.6 0.092 30.5 28.3
98th 57.5 19.2 10.4 21.5 0.103 42.0 39.5

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-8) Amgaon Village

3 3 3 3 3
03/12/2014 40.1 14.7 6.3 6 0.194 14.3 11.3
04/12/2014 43.8 11.5 8.4 7.5 0.199 14.6 11.7
10/12/2014 41.6 9.4 8.7 6.6 0.207 14.2 13.2
11/12/2014 41.3 14.8 7.1 8.9 0.238 15.1 11.8
17/12/2014 42.9 12.1 8.1 8.1 0.202 12.3 12.1
18/12/2014 39.1 15 7.6 11.3 0.204 14.1 14.2
24/12/2014 36.7 13.7 7.2 20.6 0.21 14.6 18.1
25/12/2014 35.1 13.6 9.1 13.2 0.215 13.3 15.9
31/12/2014 40.7 14.8 10.5 11 0.224 12.5 11.5
01/01/2015 41.4 14.6 8.4 11.8 0.212 12.2 13.2
07/01/2015 35.4 11.6 8.9 11.5 0.22 8.4 12.8
08/01/2015 35.7 15.3 8.2 10.8 0.222 10.2 11.8
14/01/2015 32.1 12.6 11.6 11.9 0.202 11.6 14.2
15/01/2015 40.7 12.8 9.2 12.5 0.196 12.5 14.5
21/01/2015 40.8 16.3 8.6 11.8 0.205 12.1 13.8
22/01/2015 40.1 12.1 8.2 12.2 0.2 12.9 14.8
28/01/2015 30.6 13.6 7.2 12.1 0.208 12.2 14.7
29/01/2015 41.8 13.5 7.4 12.8 0.219 12.4 14
04/02/2015 35.1 14.3 9.6 11.8 0.206 11.6 13.8
05/02/2015 36.7 12.7 10.2 11.2 0.21 13.6 14.5
11/02/2015 46.7 12.1 8.5 11.6 0.195 12.2 14.4
12/02/2015 39.9 13 8.1 10.9 0.206 12.4 13.8
18/02/2015 41.8 13.1 8.5 12.3 0.216 14.2 15.1
19/02/2015 41.1 13.5 7.6 12.3 0.212 13.5 14.7
25/02/2015 43.1 14.1 9.2 11 0.195 12.5 15.8
26/02/2015 40.4 13.2 9.6 11.9 0.21 13.3 13.9
Min 30.6 9.4 6.3 6 0.194 8.4 11.3
Max 46.7 16.3 11.6 20.6 0.238 15.1 18.1
Avg 39.4 13.4 8.5 11.3 0.2 12.8 13.8
98th 45.25 15.80 11.05 16.90 0.23 14.85 17.00

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-9) Katandhara

3 3 3 3 3
05/12/2014 48.8 14.7 9.2 7.1 0.164 12.3 8.7
06/12/2014 48.1 14.5 9.7 8.6 0.169 12.6 9.1
12/12/2014 38.6 11.5 9 7.7 0.177 12.2 10.6
13/12/2014 49.8 15.2 10.4 10 0.208 13.1 9.2
19/12/2014 43.1 12.5 12.4 9.2 0.172 10.3 9.5
20/12/2014 44.7 12.7 8.9 12.4 0.174 12.1 11.6
26/12/2014 54.7 16.2 9.3 21.7 0.18 12.6 15.5
27/12/2014 47.9 12 8.4 14.3 0.185 11.3 13.3
02/01/2015 49.8 13.5 10 12.1 0.194 10.5 8.9
03/01/2015 49.1 13.4 9.2 12.9 0.182 10.2 10.6
09/01/2015 43.4 14.6 9.5 12.6 0.19 6.4 10.2
10/01/2015 43.7 11.4 7.9 11.9 0.192 8.2 9.2
16/01/2015 40.1 9.3 7.1 13 0.172 9.6 11.6
17/01/2015 48.7 14.7 10 13.6 0.166 10.5 11.9
23/01/2015 48.1 12 9.4 12.9 0.175 10.1 11.2
24/01/2015 51.8 14.9 9 13.3 0.17 10.9 12.2
30/01/2015 49.6 13.6 8 13.2 0.178 10.2 12.1
31/01/2015 49.3 13.5 8.2 13.9 0.189 10.4 11.4
06/02/2015 50.9 14.2 10.4 12.9 0.176 9.6 11.2
07/02/2015 47.1 12.6 11 12.3 0.18 11.6 11.9
13/02/2015 44.7 12 9.3 12.7 0.165 10.2 11.8
14/02/2015 43.1 12.9 8.9 12 0.176 10.4 11.2
20/02/2015 48.7 13 8.4 13.4 0.186 12.2 12.5
21/02/2015 49.4 13.4 8 13.4 0.182 11.5 12.1
27/02/2015 51.1 14 9.9 12.1 0.165 10.5 13.2
28/02/2015 48.4 13.1 11.3 13 0.18 11.3 11.3
Min 38.6 9.3 7.1 7.1 0.164 6.4 8.7
Max 54.7 16.2 12.4 21.7 0.208 13.1 15.5
Avg 47.4 13.3 9.3 12.4 0.2 10.8 11.2
98th 53.25 15.70 11.85 18.00 0.20 12.85 14.40

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-10) Pipaldhara Village

3 3 3 3 3
05/12/2014 42.4 13.4 8.9 9.1 0.157 15 8.3
06/12/2014 41.7 13.2 9.4 6.2 0.162 15.3 8.7
12/12/2014 32.2 10.2 8.7 5.3 0.17 14.9 10.2
13/12/2014 43.4 13.9 10.1 7.6 0.201 15.8 8.8
19/12/2014 36.7 11.2 12.1 6.8 0.165 5.7 9.1
20/12/2014 38.3 11.4 8.6 10 0.167 14.8 11.2
26/12/2014 48.3 14.9 9 19.3 0.173 15.3 15.1
27/12/2014 41.5 10.7 8.1 11.9 0.178 14 12.9
02/01/2015 43.4 12.2 9.7 9.7 0.187 13.2 8.5
03/01/2015 42.7 12.1 8.9 10.5 0.175 12.9 10.2
09/01/2015 37 13.3 9.2 10.2 0.183 9.1 9.8
10/01/2015 37.3 10.1 7.6 9.5 0.185 10.9 8.8
16/01/2015 33.7 8 6.8 10.6 0.165 12.3 11.2
17/01/2015 42.3 13.4 9.7 11.2 0.159 13.2 11.5
23/01/2015 41.7 10.7 9.1 10.5 0.168 12.8 10.8
24/01/2015 45.4 13.6 8.7 10.9 0.163 13.6 11.8
30/01/2015 43.2 12.3 7.7 10.8 0.171 12.9 11.7
31/01/2015 42.9 12.2 7.9 11.5 0.182 13.1 8.2
06/02/2015 44.5 12.9 10.1 10.5 0.169 12.3 10.8
07/02/2015 40.7 11.3 10.7 9.9 0.173 14.3 11.5
13/02/2015 38.3 10.7 9 10.3 0.158 12.9 11.4
14/02/2015 36.7 11.6 8.6 9.6 0.169 13.1 10.8
20/02/2015 42.3 11.7 8.1 11 0.179 14.9 12.1
21/02/2015 43 12.1 7.7 11 0.175 14.2 11.7
27/02/2015 44.7 12.7 9.6 9.7 0.158 13.2 12.8
28/02/2015 42 11.8 11 10.6 0.173 14 10.9
Min 32.2 8 6.8 5.3 0.157 5.7 8.2
Max 48.3 14.9 12.1 19.3 0.201 15.8 15.1
Avg 41.0 12.0 9.0 10.2 0.2 13.2 10.7
98th 46.85 14.40 11.55 15.60 0.19 15.55 14.00

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-11) Gangapur Village

3 3 3 3 3 3
µg/m µg/m µg/m µg/m mg/m μg/m3 μg/m
05/12/2014 54 12.9 16.2 10.9 0.119 11 22.0
06/12/2014 51 11.8 15.9 11.8 0.122 13.9 23.0
12/12/2014 53 12.7 16.3 11.4 0.106 15.2 25.0
13/12/2014 54 13.9 16.9 8.7 0.118 14.6 23.0
19/12/2014 49 14.8 17.2 9.1 0.98 15.9 28.0
20/12/2014 51 15.7 16.8 10.9 0.108 15.9 29.0
26/12/2014 57 16.3 17.3 11.8 0.97 15.3 29.0
27/12/2014 56 16.9 17.8 10.4 0.95 16.5 31.0
02/01/2015 53 17.6 18.5 9.3 0.95 15.6 33.0
03/01/2015 51 18.2 19.1 10.4 0.84 16.9 33.0
09/01/2015 53 18.8 19.4 8.9 0.74 17.5 35.0
10/01/2015 49 17.9 18.9 9.3 0.85 17.4 33.0
16/01/2015 52 19.1 19.5 10.4 0.76 16.3 25.0
17/01/2015 49 18.3 19.3 11.2 0.81 21.3 27.0
23/01/2015 45 18.8 18.8 10.9 0.75 21.6 27.0
24/01/2015 53 19.1 19.1 13.4 0.78 21.2 28.0
30/01/2015 49 18.5 18.7 15.3 0.76 22.6 32.0
31/01/2015 51 19.2 18.3 13.9 0.58 21.9 32.0
06/02/2015 56 18.7 18.9 14.4 0.64 21.6 30.0
07/02/2015 49 17.9 19.4 15.9 0.59 20.5 33.0
13/02/2015 47 18.4 18.6 15.2 0.62 21.6 34.0
14/02/2015 51 19.2 18.3 15.8 0.63 20.3 35.0
20/02/2015 55 18.6 18.81 15.4 0.72 14.7 33.0
21/02/2015 47 18.4 18.6 15.2 0.62 21.6 36.0
27/02/2015 51 19.2 18.3 15.8 0.63 20.3 22.0
28/02/2015 55 18.6 18.8 15.4 0.72 19.7 36.0
Min 45 11.8 15.9 8.7 0.106 11 22.0
Max 57 19.2 19.5 15.9 0.98 22.6 36.0
Avg 51.6 17.3 18.2 12.4 0.63 18.1 29.8
98th 56.5 19.2 19.5 15.9 0.98 22.3 36.00

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ-12) Kanholi Village

3 3 3 3 3
05/12/2014 42.5 12.4 10.4 12.6 0.167 7.1 12.7
06/12/2014 42.8 16.4 9.3 11.9 0.169 8.9 11.7
12/12/2014 39.2 13.7 12.7 13.0 0.149 10.3 14.1
13/12/2014 47.8 13.9 10.3 13.6 0.143 11.2 14.4
19/12/2014 47.9 17.4 9.7 12.9 0.152 10.8 13.7
20/12/2014 47.2 13.2 9.3 13.3 0.147 11.6 14.7
26/12/2014 37.7 14.7 8.3 13.2 0.155 10.9 14.6
27/12/2014 48.9 14.6 8.5 13.9 0.166 11.1 13.9
02/01/2015 42.2 15.4 10.7 12.9 0.153 10.3 13.7
03/01/2015 43.8 13.8 11.3 12.3 0.157 12.3 14.4
09/01/2015 47.2 15.8 7.4 11.5 0.141 13 11.2
10/01/2015 50.9 12.6 9.5 10.3 0.146 13.3 11.6
16/01/2015 48.7 10.5 9.8 10.9 0.154 12.9 13.1
17/01/2015 48.4 15.9 8.2 10.0 0.185 13.8 11.7
23/01/2015 50 13.2 9.2 9.2 0.149 11 12
24/01/2015 46.2 16.1 8.7 12.4 0.151 12.8 14.1
30/01/2015 43.8 14.8 8.3 21.7 0.157 13.3 18
31/01/2015 42.2 14.7 10.2 14.3 0.162 12 15.8
06/02/2015 47.8 15.9 11.6 12.1 0.171 11.2 11.4
07/02/2015 48.5 15.7 9.5 12.9 0.159 10.9 13.1
13/02/2015 53.8 13.2 9.6 12.7 0.142 10.9 14.3
14/02/2015 47 14.1 9.2 12.0 0.153 11.1 13.7
20/02/2015 48.9 14.2 9.6 13.4 0.163 12.9 15
21/02/2015 48.2 14.6 8.7 13.4 0.159 12.2 14.6
27/02/2015 50.2 15.2 10.3 12.1 0.142 11.2 15.7
28/02/2015 47.5 14.3 10.7 13.0 0.157 12 13.8
Min 37.7 10.5 7.4 9.2 0.141 7.1 11.2
Max 53.8 17.4 12.7 21.7 0.185 13.8 18
Avg 46.51 14.47 9.65 12.8 0.156 11.50 13.73
98th 52.35 16.9 12.15 18.0 0.178 13.55 16.9

DEMOGRAPHIC DETAILS
Sr. No Name Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Non
Household Population Male Female SC ST Literate Illiterate Workers Workers
0-1 km
Hingna tehsil
1 Pipardhara 142 603 302 301 4 324 449 154 402 201
1-3km
Hingna tehsil
2 Katangdhara 140 614 308 306 2 230 431 183 312 302
3-7 km
Hingna tehsil
3 Wayfal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 Menkhat 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 Sukali 117 513 242 271 180 82 381 132 225 288
6 Datala 50 208 109 99 2 0 153 55 108 100
7 Pohi 87 343 186 157 15 85 234 109 198 145
8 Gangapur 26 104 50 54 19 8 73 31 37 67
9 Amgaon 378 1687 846 841 512 126 1220 467 761 926
10 Takalghat (CT) 2947 11363 6210 5153 2506 644 8913 2450 5089 6274
11 Pipri 190 761 409 352 93 385 552 209 418 343
12 Bhansuli 104 398 226 172 2 133 271 127 157 241
13 Devali 243 1181 618 563 165 572 857 324 651 530
14 Bid-borgaon 76 338 178 160 5 246 228 110 211 127
15 Wanadongri (CT) 9169 37667 20171 17496 5423 1897 29296 8371 13099 24568
16 Khadki 157 690 359 331 10 155 458 232 407 283
17 Lakhamapur 57 223 118 105 1 219 147 76 135 88
18 Singardip 23 59 29 30 6 13 28 31 41 18
19 Mathani 40 155 65 90 25 96 101 54 109 46
20 Wateghat 206 695 433 262 51 240 482 213 421 274
Annexure-IV Demographic Details AN-IV-1

21 Salaidabha 370 1566 828 738 46 296 1159 407 701 865
22 Sawangi (Devali) 468 2138 1106 1032 121 873 1477 661 1067 1071
23 Mandawa 92 400 217 183 4 142 283 117 243 157
24 Murzari 65 267 154 113 23 6 136 131 127 140
25 Kinhi 133 540 314 226 55 57 383 157 261 279
26 Sirul 531 2078 1083 995 457 20 1564 514 779 1299
27 Nanhi 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sub total 15529 63374 33951 29423 9721 6295 48396 14978 25245 38129
Umred tehsil
28 Khapri 58 245 125 120 0 76 165 80 140 105
29 Masalkund 3 16 8 8 0 0 4 12 12 4
Sub total 61 261 133 128 0 76 169 92 152 109
Sub total 15590 63635 34084 29551 9721 6371 48565 15070 25397 38238
7-10 km
Hingna tehsil
30 Umari 181 846 441 405 219 62 600 246 514 332
31 Tembhari 423 1556 850 706 279 76 1190 366 593 963
32 Wadgaon 97 357 181 176 58 214 259 98 219 138
33 Kirmati 31 145 71 74 12 0 86 59 77 68
34 Mondha 366 1482 818 664 374 303 1158 324 722 760
35 Khairi kh 81 348 182 166 76 170 241 107 219 129
36 Junewani 232 1017 515 502 115 151 807 210 578 439
37 Ukhali 139 990 536 454 30 757 826 164 331 659
38 Mandavghorad 262 1143 587 556 73 495 804 339 626 517
39 Degma bk 127 458 234 224 0 251 319 139 289 169
40 Kanholi 43 209 117 92 5 145 139 70 129 80
41 Dongargaon 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
42 Dhokarda 180 752 361 391 0 203 534 218 411 341

43 Kohala 52 165 103 62 6 113 58 107 69 96
44 Devalipeth 11 35 19 16 9 17 22 13 22 13
45 Wadgaon 179 748 388 360 30 47 572 176 420 328
46 Kanholi (Rithi) 4 14 9 5 0 9 6 8 10 4
47 Panjari 106 408 225 183 40 172 288 120 244 164
48 Khairy kh 48 204 149 55 29 37 152 52 148 56
49 Salaimendha 84 346 185 161 0 334 249 97 224 122
50 Itewahi 29 107 57 50 0 85 48 59 70 37
51 Waranga 6 27 14 13 0 27 19 8 13 14
Sub total 2682 11358 6043 5315 1355 3668 8378 2980 5928 5430
Grand Total 18554 76210 40737 35473 11082 10593 57823 18387 32039 44171

INFRASTRUCTURE DETAILS
Sr. No Village Education Medical Drinking Water Post/Phone Communication Bank/Society Road Power
1 Pipardhara P NA T,W,TK,HP NA BS CRS(2) MR EA
2 Katangdhara P NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) PR ED,EAG
3 Wayfal NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
4 Menkhat NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
5 Sukali P NA W,HP,R NA BS CRS(2) PR EA
6 Datala P NA W,HP NA NA CRS,AC MR EA
7 Pohi P NA W,TW,HP PH NA CRS(2) PR EA
8 Gangapur NA NA W NA NA CRS(2) PR EAG
9 Amgaon NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
10 Pipri P,M NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) MR EA
11 Bhansuli P,M NA T,HP NA NA CRS,AC MR EA
12 Devali P,M,SS TB T,W,HP NA BS CRS(2) PR EA
13 Bid-borgaon P NA W,TK,HP NA NA CRS(2) PR ED,EAG
14 Khadki P,M,AC(3) NA T,W,HP, NA BS CRS,AC PR EA
15 Lakhamapur P NA W,HP PH BS CRS(2) PR EA
16 Singardip NA NA W NA NA CRS(2) MR NA
17 Mathani P NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) MR EA
18 Wateghat NA NA W,HP PH BS CRS(2) PR ED,EAG
19 Salaidabha P NA W,HP NA BS CRS(2) PR ED,EAG
20 Sawangi (Devali) P,M,AC NA T,W,TK,TW,HP PH(4) BS CRS(2) PR EA
21 Mandawa P NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) MR EA
22 Murzari NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
23 Kinhi NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
24 Sirul P,M NA T,W,HP PH(2) NA CRS,AC PR EA
25 Nanhi NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
26 Khapri (Moreshwar) P,M NA T,W,C PH BS CRS,AC PR EA
27 Masalkund NA NA TK,HP NA BS CRS(2) PR ED,EAG
Annexure-V Infrastructure Details AN-V-1

Sr. No Village Education Medical Drinking Water Post/Phone Communication Bank/Society Road Power
28 Umari P,M,SS NA T,HP PO BS CRS(2) PR EA
29 Tembhari P,M NA W,TK,HP NA BS CRS(2) PR ED
30 Wadgaon P NA T,W,HP NA BS CRS(2) PR EA
31 Kirmati NA NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) MR ED,EAG
32 Mondha P,M NA T,W,HP,R NA BS CRS(2) PR EA
33 Khairi kh P NA T,W,HP NA NA CRS(2) MR ED,EAG
34 Ukhali P NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) PR EA
35 Mandavghorad P,M,AC NA T,W,HP NA BS CRS,AC PR EA
36 Degma bk P NA T,W NA BS CRS(2) PR EA
37 Kanholi P NA W,HP,R PH NA CRS(2) MR ED,EAG
38 Dongargaon NA NA W,R,C NA NA CRS(2) MR EAD
39 Dhokarda P,M NA T,W,HP,C NA NA CRS(2) PR EA
40 Kohala NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
41 Devalipeth NA NA W,HP PH NA CRS(2) MR EA
42 Kanholi (Rithi) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
43 Panjari P NA W,TK,HP PH(2) NA CRS(2) PR EA
44 Khairy kh NA NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) PR EA
45 Salaimendha P NA W,HP NA NA CRS(2) PR ED,EAG
46 Itewahi NA NA W NA NA CRS,AC MR EA
47 Waranga AC NA W NA NA CRS(2) MR ED,EAG
48 Wadgaon P, M NA T, W, TK, HP PH(22) BS CRS, ACS PR EA
49 Junewani P NA T, W, HP NA NA CRS, ACS PR EA
Note: P: Primary School, M, Middle School, SS: Senior secondary school, AC: Adult literacy center, TB: TB center, T: Tap Water, W: Well, TK: Tank Water, HP: Hand
pump, TW, Tube Well, C: Canal, R: River, PO: Post Office, PH: Phone, BS: Bus, CRS: Credit Society, ACS: Agricultural credit society, MR: Mud Road, PR: Paved
Road, ED: Electricity for domestic purpose, EAG: Electricity for agricultural purpose
Annexure-V Infrastructure Details AN-V-2

LANDUSE DETAILS
Sr. No Village Forest land Total irrigated Unirrigate Cultivable waste Land not for cultivation Total Area
0-1km
1 Pipardhara 13.98 142 501 9.05 50 716.03
1-3km
2 Katangdhara 26.66 101 150 0 113.64 391.3
3-7 km
3 Wayfal 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 Menkhat 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 Sukali 0 15.08 235.12 34 50 334.2
6 Datala 0 7.5 133.01 28.04 20.62 189.17
7 Pohi 46.36 5.02 209.22 189.06 270.55 720.21
8 Gangapur 0 0 0 0 139.12 139.12
9 Amgaon 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 Pipri 0 59.24 77.01 0 45.57 181.82
11 Bhansuli 0 14.7 322.2 13.17 10.46 360.53
12 Devali 56.48 10 600.21 45.41 50.8 762.9
13 Bid-borgaon 42.74 178 205 0 236.6 662.34
14 Khadki 0 88.49 72.37 0 211.85 372.71
15 Lakhamapur 20.03 30.36 180 80.92 30 341.31
16 Singardip 0 380.78 68.73 0 117.22 566.73
17 Mathani 204.58 3 200.11 9 14.38 431.07
18 Wateghat 0 6.9 0 0 242.67 249.57
19 Salaidabha 40.07 42.55 499.5 46.21 13.23 641.56
20 Sawangi (Devali) 4.91 215 516.6 25.94 100 862.45
21 Mandawa 126.55 27.2 236.01 25.69 84.38 499.83
22 Murzari 0 0 0 0 0 0
23 Kinhi 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 Sirul 0 42 331.05 104.79 42.21 520.05
25 Nanhi 0 0 0 0 0 0
26 Khapri (Moreshwar) 0 16.9 301.44 2.43 78.57 399.34
27 Masalkund 120.73 2 33.72 45.3 187.88 389.63
Annexure-VI Landuse Details AN-VI-1

Sr. No Village Forest land Total irrigated Unirrigate Cultivable waste Land not for cultivation Total Area
Sub Total 662.45 1144.72 4221.3 649.96 1946.11 8624.54
7-10 km
28 Umari 182.81 31 619 90.53 109.99 1033.33
29 Tembhari 0 0 0 28.18 221.68 249.86
30 Wadgaon 0 15.2 219.97 150 14.7 399.87
31 Kirmati 0 22.45 320 0 67.68 410.13
32 Mondha 0 30 215.89 62 18 325.89
33 Khairi kh 90.64 10.4 460.2 35.58 30.95 627.77
34 Ukhali 0 35.8 264.15 24.18 15.29 339.42
35 Mandavghorad 0 161 387 85 37.22 670.22
36 Degma bk 257.82 1 532.3 0 7.56 798.68
37 Kanholi 0 22.6 209.2 148.22 60.84 440.86
38 Dongargaon 19.72 54 164 7.28 52.7 297.7
39 Dhokarda 139.21 41.28 201.6 0 6.37 388.46
40 Kohala 0 0 0 0 0 0
41 Devalipeth 0 18.8 221.12 38.2 31.79 309.91
42 Kanholi (Rithi) 0 0 0 0 0 0
43 Panjari 7.07 131 301.75 0 172.89 612.71
44 Khairy kh 0 36.9 245 150 84.19 516.09
45 Salaimendha 177.51 16.23 298.35 1.47 32.81 526.37
46 Itewahi 56.16 1 286 128.54 17.94 489.64
47 Waranga 4.98 38.4 188 26.18 27.1 284.66
48 Wadgaon 0 31 430 40 47 549
49 Junewani 67 61 235 41 38 441
Sub Total 1002.5 759.16 5798.43 1056.63 1094.37 9711.09
Total 1705.59 2146.88 10670.73 1715.64 3204.12 19442.96
Annexure-VI Landuse Details AN-VI-2

Annexure-VII Public Hearing Advertisement AN-VII-1

Annexure-VII Public Hearing Advertisement AN-VII-2

Annexure-VIII Public Hearing Panel AN-VIII-1

Annexure-IX PH Attendance Sheet AN-IX-1






290920150QGEI0QAAnnexure documentofEIA PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

290920150QGEI0QAAnnexure documentofEIA PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

FINAL REPORT AFTER PUBLIC HEARING

ENVIRONMENTAL IMAPCT ASSESSMENT

Building Environment (India) Pvt. Ltd

Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd.

Executive Summary ES-1

1.2.3 Cost of the Project

Executive Summary ES-2

(A) Preliminary Treatment

Provision of road in Residential Zone

Executive Summary ES-3

modified by state Govt. Under MRTP act 1966 areas

Executive Summary ES-4

Raw material availability

Executive Summary ES-5

Wind Speed/ Directions

Executive Summary ES-6

Executive Summary ES-7

3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Executive Summary ES-8

Executive Summary ES-9

Executive Summary ES-10

4.2 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Executive Summary ES-11

4.5 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Impact during Operational Phase

4.6 SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACTS

Executive Summary ES-12

Executive Summary ES-13

Environmental Parameters No. of Frequency Period

BUDGETRY PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING

Sr. No. Activities Capital Cost Recurring Cost

7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

Risk assessment and disaster management plan

Executive Summary ES-14

1. Shri Ravindra Kumbhare Chairman

8.0 PROJECT BENEFIT

Executive Summary ES-15

10.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Executive Summary ES-16

XXVII. The status of accreditation of the EIA Furnished in EIA report

specifically mentioned. The consultant shall

Education and Training (QCI/NABET) would

CHAPTER/ TITLE PAGE

TABLE TITLE PAGE NO.

PLATE TITLE PAGE NO.

ANNEXURE NO. ANNEXURE NAME

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-1

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-2

1.4.2 Size of the Project

1.4.3 Cost of the Project

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-3

FIGURE 1.1: INDEX MAP OF THE PROJECT SITE

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-4

FIGURE 1.2: PROPOSED EXPANSION OF BUTIBORI INDUSTRIAL AREA BOUNDARY

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-5

FIGURE 1.3: GOOGLE MAP

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-6

FIGURE 1.4: STUDY AREA (10 KM RADIAL DISTANCE)

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-7

PLATE 1.1: PROJECT SITE VIEW

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDIES (SCOPE AND METHODOLOGY)

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-8

Chapter 1- Introduction 1-9